Introduction

Article Type
Changed
Mon, 01/02/2017 - 19:34
Display Headline
Introduction: Overview of efforts and lessons learned

The articles on these pages represent the culmination of 3 years of effort by the Society of Hospital Medicine (SHM) Glycemic Control Task Force. In this brief introduction, we share a few insights and comments about this multidisciplinary collaborative effort to address the care of inpatients with hyperglycemia.

The SHM Glycemic Control Task Force was assembled in 2005, with the intent of improving the care of inpatients with diabetes. We wished to provide hospitalists and quality improvement teams with an understanding of the best practices to achieve safe glycemic control in the hospital. Additionally, this task force sought to identify tools and strategies to obtain improved communication, medication safety, education, and other aspects of care. A distinguished panel of experts attended their inaugural meeting in Chicago, Illinois, in October 2005, including hospitalists, endocrinologists, nurses, case managers, diabetes educators, and pharmacists. A roster of the individuals and organizations is given in the Appendix.

Many members of the SHM Glycemic Control Task Force also participated in the Call to Action consensus conference1 hosted by the American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists (AACE) and the American Diabetes Association (ADA) in January 2006. Both groups identified several barriers to improvement, and methods to overcome these barriers were summarized in this quote from the Consensus Conference,

Successful implementation of a program to improve glycemic control in the inpatient setting should include the following components:

  • An appropriate level of administrative support.

  • Formation of a multidisciplinary steering committee to drive the development of initiatives.

  • Assessment of current processes, quality of care, and barriers to practice change.

  • Development and implementation of interventions including standardized order sets, protocols, policies, and algorithms with associated educational programs.

  • Metrics for evaluation.

Both groups also called for a web‐based compendium of tested tools and strategies to assist local improvement teams.

After countless hours of development and revision by the SHM Glycemic Task Force and the Resource Room team, such a compendium addressing all of these components was launched on the SHM web site in the form of the SHM Glycemic Control Resource Room.2 A comprehensive implementation guide3 is available for downloading free of charge, and serves as the centerpiece of the Resource Room. Subsequently, this comprehensive but somewhat sprawling implementation guide evolved into these more sophisticated and concise articles.410 The topics include a review of the rationale for improving inpatient glycemic control,4 an important call for standardizing the metrics of glycemic control,9 subcutaneous insulin regimens and order sets,5, 6 insulin infusion protocols,7 transitions of care,8 and the business case for glycemic control.10 It has been a long but rewarding and educational journey, drawing on the collective experience from dozens of institutions in all kinds of inpatient care settings. A few key points and insights seem worth sharing.

THE IMPROVEMENT EFFORT IS NOT JUST ABOUT REACHING A GLYCEMIC TARGET

The term glycemic control team and the label for the SHM Glycemic Control Task Force itself are somewhat misnomers. Task Force members agree that desirable institutional glycemic target ranges should be established, but many among us believe the glycemic targets endorsed by national guidelines (ref ADA and AACE guidelines)11, 12 are too stringent. Furthermore, we believe that achieving glycemic control is just one small part of the needed improvement efforts. Uncontrolled hyperglycemia is common, potentially dangerous, and largely preventable with safe and proven methodsbut so are the iatrogenic hypoglycemia episodes, substandard education, poor communication, lack of care coordination, and inadequate monitoring that typify care of the hyperglycemic inpatient. We address all of these issues and urge the adoption of this broader perspective.

THE EVIDENCE IS INCOMPLETEBUT ACTION IS REQUIRED

We acknowledge gaps and inconsistencies in the literature surrounding inpatient diabetes management and the controversy around tight glycemic control. In many cases, high level evidence is not available to guide the formulation of protocols, order sets, or other improvement tools. We are all struck by how pervasive the lack of evidence is. What is the best metric for inpatient glycemic control or hypoglycemia? What is the best regimen for a patient on continuous tube feedings? Which insulin infusion protocol is superior in reaching and maintaining a glycemic target range?

Rather than make no recommendations or accept negative inertia on the basis of less than perfect evidence, we make recommendations based on the best evidence available. When we make recommendations based on consensus opinion or the collective experience from dozens of medical centers, rather than randomized trials, we have made every effort to make this clear in the text of the articles. In our view, incomplete evidence is not an adequate excuse to persist in the unacceptable status quo, clinging on to methods (such as sliding scale insulin regimens) that have been shown to be ineffective and potentially dangerous.1315

COLLABORATION PAYS DIVIDENDS

It takes a multidisciplinary approach to make substantial improvement in glycemic control of hospitalized patients. By the same token, it is unlikely that any one group can advance the national agenda for improved care as well as a multidisciplinary coordinated effort. Team members, especially the endocrinologists and hospitalists, collaborated skillfully throughout this effort. The hospitalists learned a tremendous amount from the expertise, insight, and mastery of the literature, offered by the endocrinology members, whereas the endocrinologists appreciated the front line expertise and practical quality improvement approach of the hospitalist members. This collaboration serves as a model for making guidelines and best practices become more of a practical reality for a variety of important clinical problems. Hospitalists can partner with and learn from a variety of other disciplines, while they assist these disciplines on effective improvement and implementation efforts. On a more personal note, this work has fostered mutual respect, friendship, and career long collaborative opportunities. The potential for these same opportunities with nursing, pharmacy, and all medical and surgical fields seems compelling and exciting.

THERE'S MORE!

By the time this is published, these articles will be integrated into the third iteration of the SHM Glycemic Control Resource Room. This online resource has already undergone 2 major revisions since its inception just a few years ago, reflecting SHM's dedication to the continuous improvement of the products and services that it offers. The Glycemic Control Implementation Guide and Resource Room will continue to be a work in progress. We highly encourage and welcome constructive criticism and feedback via E‐mail to [email protected]. The resource room contains a wealth of tools, slide shows, literature reviews, and links, in addition to the core articles published in this Supplement.

NEXT STEPS

More research and demonstration projects are obviously needed in this field. Local collaborative activities have sprung up in several cities and regions, as well as Glycemic Control Champions courses. A longitudinal mentoring program (similar to the SHM Venous Thromboembolism Prevention collaborative) would undoubtedly be beneficial, and may become available within the next year or so. These items and more will be promoted and posted in the resource room whenever possible.

Finally, the next step is up to you and the institutions in which you workyou have to decide, as individuals and institutions, if you believe the status quo is good enough. We believe that if you look, you'll find the care of our inpatients with diabetes and hyperglycemia disturbingly suboptimal, and hope that the work of the SHM Glycemic Control Task Force can help you rapidly improve on this state of affairs.

APPENDIX: GLYCEMIC CONTROL TASK FORCE

The Society of Hospital Medicine thanks all the members of the Glycemic Control Task Force, who encompass a distinguished panel of experts with representation from the AACE, ADA, ACP, and other organizations whose expertise was essential to the construction of the Glycemic Control Resource Room and the Implementation Guide for Glycemic Control and Prevention of Hypoglycemia.

Hospitalists

Representing the Society of Hospital Medicine

  • Gregory Maynard, MD. Lead Author and Editor of Glycemic Control Implementation Guide (web product); Glycemic Control Initiative Project Director; Clinical Professor of Medicine and Chief, Division of Hospital Medicine. University of California, San Diego (UCSD) Medical Center, San Diego, California.

  • David H. Wesorick, MD. Co‐editor of Glycemic Control Implementation Guide (web product); Clinical Assistant Professor of Internal Medicine, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan.

  • Cheryl O'Malley, MD. Associate Program Director, Internal Medicine Faculty, Medicine/Pediatrics Banner, Good Samaritan Medical Center; Clinical Assistant Professor of Medicine, University of Arizona College of Medicine, Phoenix, Arizona.

  • Kevin Larsen, MD. Assistant Professor of Internal Medicine, University of Minnesota; Associate Program Director, Internal Medicine Residency, Hennepin County Medical Center, Minneapolis, Minnesota.

  • Jeffrey L. Schnipper, MD, MPH. Associate Physician, Brigham and Women's Hospital, Boston, Massachusetts

  • Alpesh Amin, MD, MBA, FACP. Executive Director and Vice Chair, University of California (UC) Irvine Hospitalist Program, Irvine, California.

  • Lakshmi Halasyamani, MD. Associate Chair, Department of Medicine, St. Joseph Mercy Medical Center, Ann Arbor, Michigan.

  • Mitchell J. Wilson, MD. Associate Professor of Medicine, University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill, North Carolina.

Representing the American College of Physicians

  • Doren Schneider, MD. Associate Program Director, Internal Medicine Residency Director, Ambulatory Service Unit, Abington Adult Medical Associates; Assistant Professor of Medicine, Temple University School of Medicine, Abington, Pennsylvania.

Endocrinologists

Representing the American Diabetes Association

  • Andrew J. Ahmann, MD. Associate Professor of Medicine, Director, Diabetes Center, Oregon Health & Science University, Portland, Oregon.

  • Michelle F. Magee, MD. Associate Professor of Medicine, Georgetown University School of Medicine Medstar Diabetes and Research Institutes, Washington Hospital Center, Washington, DC.

Representing the American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists

  • Richard Hellman, MD, FACP, FACE. Clinical Professor of Medicine, University of MissouriKansas City, North Kansas City, Missouri.

Endocringology Expert Panel

  • Susan Shapiro Braithwaite, MD, FACP, FACE. Clinical Professor of Medicine, University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill, North Carolina.

  • Mary Ann Emanuele, MD, FACP. Professor of Medicine, Endocrinology, Cell Biology, Neurobiology, and Anatomy Biochemistry, Loyola University Medical Center, Maywood, Illinois.

  • Irl B. Hirsch, MD. Professor of Medicine, University of Washington, Seattle, Washington.

  • Robert Rushakoff, MD. Clinical Professor of Medicine, Director, Diabetes Program, University of California, San Francisco (UCSF)/Mt. Zion, San Francisco, California.

  • Silvio E. Inzucchi, MD. Professor of Medicine, Clinical Director, Section of Endocrinology, Yale University School of Medicine, New Haven, Connecticut.

Education

  • Marcia D. Draheim, RN, CDE. Program Supervisor, Diabetes Center, St Luke's Hospital, Cedar Rapids, Iowa.

  • Sharon Mahowald, RN, CDE. Inpatient Diabetes Coordinator, Hennepin County Medical Center, Minneapolis, Minnesota.

Financial

  • Adam Beck, MHS, FABC. MedStar Research Institute, Washington, DC.

Pharmacists

  • Stuart T. Haines, PharmD, FASHP, FCCP, BCPS. Associate Professor/Vice Chair for Education, University of Maryland School of Pharmacy Baltimore, Maryland.

Representing the American Society of Consultant Pharmacists

  • Donald K. Zettervall, RPh, CDE, CDM. Owner/Director, The Diabetes Education Center, Old Saybrook, Connecticut.

Case Management

Representing the Case Management Society of America

  • Cheri Lattimer, RN, BSN. Executive Director, Case Management Society of America, Little Rock, Arkansas.

  • Nancy Skinner, RN, CCM. Director, Case Management Society of America Principle Consultant, Riverside HealthCare Consulting, Whitwell, Tennessee.

Dietetics

  • Carrie Swift, MS, RD, BC‐ADM. Dietetics Coordinator, Veterans Affairs Medical Center, Walla Walla, Washington.

SHM Staff Members

  • Geri Barnes and Joy Wittnebert.

Glycemic Control Resource Room Project Team

  • Greg Maynard, Jason Stein, David Wesorick, Mary Ann Emanuele, Kevin Larsen, Geri Barnes, Joy Wittnebert, and Bruce Hansen.

References
  1. Inpatient Diabetes and Glycemic Control: A Call to Action Conference. Position statement. AACE, February 2006. Available at: http://www.aace.com/meetings/consensus/IIDC/IDGC0207.pdf. Accessed October 2006. Garber et al. Endocr Pract.2006;12(suppl 3):3–13.
  2. Society of Hospital Medicine. Glycemic Control Resource Room. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/ResourceRoomRedesign/GlycemicControl.cfm. Accessed May2008.
  3. Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force. Implementation guide: improving glycemic control, preventing hypoglycemia, and optimizing care of the inpatient with hyperglycemia and diabetes. Published January 2007 on the Society of Hospital Medicine Website. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org. Accessed May2008.
  4. Braithwaite SS,Magee MF,Sharretts JM,Schnipper JL,Amin A,Maynard G.The case for supporting inpatient glycemic control programs now: the evidence and beyond.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5 suppl 5)( ):S6S16.
  5. Wesorick DH,O'Malley CW,Rushakoff R,Larsen K,Magee MF.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital: a practical guide to subcutaneous insulin use in the non‐critically ill adult patient.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5 suppl 5)( ):S17S28.
  6. Maynard G,Wesorick D,O'Malley CW,Inzucchi S.Subcutaneous insulin order sets and protocols: effective design and implementation strategies.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5 suppl 5)( ):S29S41.
  7. Ahmann A,Maynard G.Designing and implementing insulin infusion protocols and order sets.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5 suppl 5)( ):S42S54.
  8. O'Malley CW,Emanuele MA,Halasyamani L,Amin A.Bridge over troubled waters: safe and effective transitions of the inpatient with hyperglycemia.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5 suppl 5)( ):S55S65.
  9. Schnipper JL,Magee MF,Inzucchi SE,Magee MF,Larsen K,Maynard G.Society of Hospital Medicine glycemic control task force summary: practical recommendations for assessing the impact of glycemic control efforts.J Hosp Med.2008;3(suppl 5):S66S75.
  10. Magee MF,Beck A.Practical strategies for developing the business case for hospital glycemic control teams.J Hosp Med.2008;3(suppl 5):S76S83.
  11. Garber AJ,Moghissi ES,Bransome ED, et al.American College of Endocrinology position statement on inpatient diabetes and metabolic control.Endocr Pract.2004;10(1):7782.
  12. Standards of medical care in diabetes‐‐2008.Diabetes Care.2008;31(suppl 1):S12S54.
  13. Queale WS,Seidler AJ,Brancati FL.Glycemic control and sliding scale insulin use in medical inpatients with diabetes mellitus.Arch Intern Med.1997;157(5):545552.
  14. Umpierrez GE,Smiley D,Zisman A, et al.Randomized study of basal‐bolus insulin therapy in the inpatient management of patients with type 2 diabetes (RABBIT 2 trial).Diabetes Care.2007;30(9):21812186.
  15. Umpierrez G,Maynard G.Glycemic chaos (not glycemic control) still the rule for inpatient care: how do we stop the insanity?J Hosp Med.2006;1(3):141144.
Article PDF
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Page Number
1-5
Sections
Article PDF
Article PDF

The articles on these pages represent the culmination of 3 years of effort by the Society of Hospital Medicine (SHM) Glycemic Control Task Force. In this brief introduction, we share a few insights and comments about this multidisciplinary collaborative effort to address the care of inpatients with hyperglycemia.

The SHM Glycemic Control Task Force was assembled in 2005, with the intent of improving the care of inpatients with diabetes. We wished to provide hospitalists and quality improvement teams with an understanding of the best practices to achieve safe glycemic control in the hospital. Additionally, this task force sought to identify tools and strategies to obtain improved communication, medication safety, education, and other aspects of care. A distinguished panel of experts attended their inaugural meeting in Chicago, Illinois, in October 2005, including hospitalists, endocrinologists, nurses, case managers, diabetes educators, and pharmacists. A roster of the individuals and organizations is given in the Appendix.

Many members of the SHM Glycemic Control Task Force also participated in the Call to Action consensus conference1 hosted by the American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists (AACE) and the American Diabetes Association (ADA) in January 2006. Both groups identified several barriers to improvement, and methods to overcome these barriers were summarized in this quote from the Consensus Conference,

Successful implementation of a program to improve glycemic control in the inpatient setting should include the following components:

  • An appropriate level of administrative support.

  • Formation of a multidisciplinary steering committee to drive the development of initiatives.

  • Assessment of current processes, quality of care, and barriers to practice change.

  • Development and implementation of interventions including standardized order sets, protocols, policies, and algorithms with associated educational programs.

  • Metrics for evaluation.

Both groups also called for a web‐based compendium of tested tools and strategies to assist local improvement teams.

After countless hours of development and revision by the SHM Glycemic Task Force and the Resource Room team, such a compendium addressing all of these components was launched on the SHM web site in the form of the SHM Glycemic Control Resource Room.2 A comprehensive implementation guide3 is available for downloading free of charge, and serves as the centerpiece of the Resource Room. Subsequently, this comprehensive but somewhat sprawling implementation guide evolved into these more sophisticated and concise articles.410 The topics include a review of the rationale for improving inpatient glycemic control,4 an important call for standardizing the metrics of glycemic control,9 subcutaneous insulin regimens and order sets,5, 6 insulin infusion protocols,7 transitions of care,8 and the business case for glycemic control.10 It has been a long but rewarding and educational journey, drawing on the collective experience from dozens of institutions in all kinds of inpatient care settings. A few key points and insights seem worth sharing.

THE IMPROVEMENT EFFORT IS NOT JUST ABOUT REACHING A GLYCEMIC TARGET

The term glycemic control team and the label for the SHM Glycemic Control Task Force itself are somewhat misnomers. Task Force members agree that desirable institutional glycemic target ranges should be established, but many among us believe the glycemic targets endorsed by national guidelines (ref ADA and AACE guidelines)11, 12 are too stringent. Furthermore, we believe that achieving glycemic control is just one small part of the needed improvement efforts. Uncontrolled hyperglycemia is common, potentially dangerous, and largely preventable with safe and proven methodsbut so are the iatrogenic hypoglycemia episodes, substandard education, poor communication, lack of care coordination, and inadequate monitoring that typify care of the hyperglycemic inpatient. We address all of these issues and urge the adoption of this broader perspective.

THE EVIDENCE IS INCOMPLETEBUT ACTION IS REQUIRED

We acknowledge gaps and inconsistencies in the literature surrounding inpatient diabetes management and the controversy around tight glycemic control. In many cases, high level evidence is not available to guide the formulation of protocols, order sets, or other improvement tools. We are all struck by how pervasive the lack of evidence is. What is the best metric for inpatient glycemic control or hypoglycemia? What is the best regimen for a patient on continuous tube feedings? Which insulin infusion protocol is superior in reaching and maintaining a glycemic target range?

Rather than make no recommendations or accept negative inertia on the basis of less than perfect evidence, we make recommendations based on the best evidence available. When we make recommendations based on consensus opinion or the collective experience from dozens of medical centers, rather than randomized trials, we have made every effort to make this clear in the text of the articles. In our view, incomplete evidence is not an adequate excuse to persist in the unacceptable status quo, clinging on to methods (such as sliding scale insulin regimens) that have been shown to be ineffective and potentially dangerous.1315

COLLABORATION PAYS DIVIDENDS

It takes a multidisciplinary approach to make substantial improvement in glycemic control of hospitalized patients. By the same token, it is unlikely that any one group can advance the national agenda for improved care as well as a multidisciplinary coordinated effort. Team members, especially the endocrinologists and hospitalists, collaborated skillfully throughout this effort. The hospitalists learned a tremendous amount from the expertise, insight, and mastery of the literature, offered by the endocrinology members, whereas the endocrinologists appreciated the front line expertise and practical quality improvement approach of the hospitalist members. This collaboration serves as a model for making guidelines and best practices become more of a practical reality for a variety of important clinical problems. Hospitalists can partner with and learn from a variety of other disciplines, while they assist these disciplines on effective improvement and implementation efforts. On a more personal note, this work has fostered mutual respect, friendship, and career long collaborative opportunities. The potential for these same opportunities with nursing, pharmacy, and all medical and surgical fields seems compelling and exciting.

THERE'S MORE!

By the time this is published, these articles will be integrated into the third iteration of the SHM Glycemic Control Resource Room. This online resource has already undergone 2 major revisions since its inception just a few years ago, reflecting SHM's dedication to the continuous improvement of the products and services that it offers. The Glycemic Control Implementation Guide and Resource Room will continue to be a work in progress. We highly encourage and welcome constructive criticism and feedback via E‐mail to [email protected]. The resource room contains a wealth of tools, slide shows, literature reviews, and links, in addition to the core articles published in this Supplement.

NEXT STEPS

More research and demonstration projects are obviously needed in this field. Local collaborative activities have sprung up in several cities and regions, as well as Glycemic Control Champions courses. A longitudinal mentoring program (similar to the SHM Venous Thromboembolism Prevention collaborative) would undoubtedly be beneficial, and may become available within the next year or so. These items and more will be promoted and posted in the resource room whenever possible.

Finally, the next step is up to you and the institutions in which you workyou have to decide, as individuals and institutions, if you believe the status quo is good enough. We believe that if you look, you'll find the care of our inpatients with diabetes and hyperglycemia disturbingly suboptimal, and hope that the work of the SHM Glycemic Control Task Force can help you rapidly improve on this state of affairs.

APPENDIX: GLYCEMIC CONTROL TASK FORCE

The Society of Hospital Medicine thanks all the members of the Glycemic Control Task Force, who encompass a distinguished panel of experts with representation from the AACE, ADA, ACP, and other organizations whose expertise was essential to the construction of the Glycemic Control Resource Room and the Implementation Guide for Glycemic Control and Prevention of Hypoglycemia.

Hospitalists

Representing the Society of Hospital Medicine

  • Gregory Maynard, MD. Lead Author and Editor of Glycemic Control Implementation Guide (web product); Glycemic Control Initiative Project Director; Clinical Professor of Medicine and Chief, Division of Hospital Medicine. University of California, San Diego (UCSD) Medical Center, San Diego, California.

  • David H. Wesorick, MD. Co‐editor of Glycemic Control Implementation Guide (web product); Clinical Assistant Professor of Internal Medicine, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan.

  • Cheryl O'Malley, MD. Associate Program Director, Internal Medicine Faculty, Medicine/Pediatrics Banner, Good Samaritan Medical Center; Clinical Assistant Professor of Medicine, University of Arizona College of Medicine, Phoenix, Arizona.

  • Kevin Larsen, MD. Assistant Professor of Internal Medicine, University of Minnesota; Associate Program Director, Internal Medicine Residency, Hennepin County Medical Center, Minneapolis, Minnesota.

  • Jeffrey L. Schnipper, MD, MPH. Associate Physician, Brigham and Women's Hospital, Boston, Massachusetts

  • Alpesh Amin, MD, MBA, FACP. Executive Director and Vice Chair, University of California (UC) Irvine Hospitalist Program, Irvine, California.

  • Lakshmi Halasyamani, MD. Associate Chair, Department of Medicine, St. Joseph Mercy Medical Center, Ann Arbor, Michigan.

  • Mitchell J. Wilson, MD. Associate Professor of Medicine, University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill, North Carolina.

Representing the American College of Physicians

  • Doren Schneider, MD. Associate Program Director, Internal Medicine Residency Director, Ambulatory Service Unit, Abington Adult Medical Associates; Assistant Professor of Medicine, Temple University School of Medicine, Abington, Pennsylvania.

Endocrinologists

Representing the American Diabetes Association

  • Andrew J. Ahmann, MD. Associate Professor of Medicine, Director, Diabetes Center, Oregon Health & Science University, Portland, Oregon.

  • Michelle F. Magee, MD. Associate Professor of Medicine, Georgetown University School of Medicine Medstar Diabetes and Research Institutes, Washington Hospital Center, Washington, DC.

Representing the American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists

  • Richard Hellman, MD, FACP, FACE. Clinical Professor of Medicine, University of MissouriKansas City, North Kansas City, Missouri.

Endocringology Expert Panel

  • Susan Shapiro Braithwaite, MD, FACP, FACE. Clinical Professor of Medicine, University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill, North Carolina.

  • Mary Ann Emanuele, MD, FACP. Professor of Medicine, Endocrinology, Cell Biology, Neurobiology, and Anatomy Biochemistry, Loyola University Medical Center, Maywood, Illinois.

  • Irl B. Hirsch, MD. Professor of Medicine, University of Washington, Seattle, Washington.

  • Robert Rushakoff, MD. Clinical Professor of Medicine, Director, Diabetes Program, University of California, San Francisco (UCSF)/Mt. Zion, San Francisco, California.

  • Silvio E. Inzucchi, MD. Professor of Medicine, Clinical Director, Section of Endocrinology, Yale University School of Medicine, New Haven, Connecticut.

Education

  • Marcia D. Draheim, RN, CDE. Program Supervisor, Diabetes Center, St Luke's Hospital, Cedar Rapids, Iowa.

  • Sharon Mahowald, RN, CDE. Inpatient Diabetes Coordinator, Hennepin County Medical Center, Minneapolis, Minnesota.

Financial

  • Adam Beck, MHS, FABC. MedStar Research Institute, Washington, DC.

Pharmacists

  • Stuart T. Haines, PharmD, FASHP, FCCP, BCPS. Associate Professor/Vice Chair for Education, University of Maryland School of Pharmacy Baltimore, Maryland.

Representing the American Society of Consultant Pharmacists

  • Donald K. Zettervall, RPh, CDE, CDM. Owner/Director, The Diabetes Education Center, Old Saybrook, Connecticut.

Case Management

Representing the Case Management Society of America

  • Cheri Lattimer, RN, BSN. Executive Director, Case Management Society of America, Little Rock, Arkansas.

  • Nancy Skinner, RN, CCM. Director, Case Management Society of America Principle Consultant, Riverside HealthCare Consulting, Whitwell, Tennessee.

Dietetics

  • Carrie Swift, MS, RD, BC‐ADM. Dietetics Coordinator, Veterans Affairs Medical Center, Walla Walla, Washington.

SHM Staff Members

  • Geri Barnes and Joy Wittnebert.

Glycemic Control Resource Room Project Team

  • Greg Maynard, Jason Stein, David Wesorick, Mary Ann Emanuele, Kevin Larsen, Geri Barnes, Joy Wittnebert, and Bruce Hansen.

The articles on these pages represent the culmination of 3 years of effort by the Society of Hospital Medicine (SHM) Glycemic Control Task Force. In this brief introduction, we share a few insights and comments about this multidisciplinary collaborative effort to address the care of inpatients with hyperglycemia.

The SHM Glycemic Control Task Force was assembled in 2005, with the intent of improving the care of inpatients with diabetes. We wished to provide hospitalists and quality improvement teams with an understanding of the best practices to achieve safe glycemic control in the hospital. Additionally, this task force sought to identify tools and strategies to obtain improved communication, medication safety, education, and other aspects of care. A distinguished panel of experts attended their inaugural meeting in Chicago, Illinois, in October 2005, including hospitalists, endocrinologists, nurses, case managers, diabetes educators, and pharmacists. A roster of the individuals and organizations is given in the Appendix.

Many members of the SHM Glycemic Control Task Force also participated in the Call to Action consensus conference1 hosted by the American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists (AACE) and the American Diabetes Association (ADA) in January 2006. Both groups identified several barriers to improvement, and methods to overcome these barriers were summarized in this quote from the Consensus Conference,

Successful implementation of a program to improve glycemic control in the inpatient setting should include the following components:

  • An appropriate level of administrative support.

  • Formation of a multidisciplinary steering committee to drive the development of initiatives.

  • Assessment of current processes, quality of care, and barriers to practice change.

  • Development and implementation of interventions including standardized order sets, protocols, policies, and algorithms with associated educational programs.

  • Metrics for evaluation.

Both groups also called for a web‐based compendium of tested tools and strategies to assist local improvement teams.

After countless hours of development and revision by the SHM Glycemic Task Force and the Resource Room team, such a compendium addressing all of these components was launched on the SHM web site in the form of the SHM Glycemic Control Resource Room.2 A comprehensive implementation guide3 is available for downloading free of charge, and serves as the centerpiece of the Resource Room. Subsequently, this comprehensive but somewhat sprawling implementation guide evolved into these more sophisticated and concise articles.410 The topics include a review of the rationale for improving inpatient glycemic control,4 an important call for standardizing the metrics of glycemic control,9 subcutaneous insulin regimens and order sets,5, 6 insulin infusion protocols,7 transitions of care,8 and the business case for glycemic control.10 It has been a long but rewarding and educational journey, drawing on the collective experience from dozens of institutions in all kinds of inpatient care settings. A few key points and insights seem worth sharing.

THE IMPROVEMENT EFFORT IS NOT JUST ABOUT REACHING A GLYCEMIC TARGET

The term glycemic control team and the label for the SHM Glycemic Control Task Force itself are somewhat misnomers. Task Force members agree that desirable institutional glycemic target ranges should be established, but many among us believe the glycemic targets endorsed by national guidelines (ref ADA and AACE guidelines)11, 12 are too stringent. Furthermore, we believe that achieving glycemic control is just one small part of the needed improvement efforts. Uncontrolled hyperglycemia is common, potentially dangerous, and largely preventable with safe and proven methodsbut so are the iatrogenic hypoglycemia episodes, substandard education, poor communication, lack of care coordination, and inadequate monitoring that typify care of the hyperglycemic inpatient. We address all of these issues and urge the adoption of this broader perspective.

THE EVIDENCE IS INCOMPLETEBUT ACTION IS REQUIRED

We acknowledge gaps and inconsistencies in the literature surrounding inpatient diabetes management and the controversy around tight glycemic control. In many cases, high level evidence is not available to guide the formulation of protocols, order sets, or other improvement tools. We are all struck by how pervasive the lack of evidence is. What is the best metric for inpatient glycemic control or hypoglycemia? What is the best regimen for a patient on continuous tube feedings? Which insulin infusion protocol is superior in reaching and maintaining a glycemic target range?

Rather than make no recommendations or accept negative inertia on the basis of less than perfect evidence, we make recommendations based on the best evidence available. When we make recommendations based on consensus opinion or the collective experience from dozens of medical centers, rather than randomized trials, we have made every effort to make this clear in the text of the articles. In our view, incomplete evidence is not an adequate excuse to persist in the unacceptable status quo, clinging on to methods (such as sliding scale insulin regimens) that have been shown to be ineffective and potentially dangerous.1315

COLLABORATION PAYS DIVIDENDS

It takes a multidisciplinary approach to make substantial improvement in glycemic control of hospitalized patients. By the same token, it is unlikely that any one group can advance the national agenda for improved care as well as a multidisciplinary coordinated effort. Team members, especially the endocrinologists and hospitalists, collaborated skillfully throughout this effort. The hospitalists learned a tremendous amount from the expertise, insight, and mastery of the literature, offered by the endocrinology members, whereas the endocrinologists appreciated the front line expertise and practical quality improvement approach of the hospitalist members. This collaboration serves as a model for making guidelines and best practices become more of a practical reality for a variety of important clinical problems. Hospitalists can partner with and learn from a variety of other disciplines, while they assist these disciplines on effective improvement and implementation efforts. On a more personal note, this work has fostered mutual respect, friendship, and career long collaborative opportunities. The potential for these same opportunities with nursing, pharmacy, and all medical and surgical fields seems compelling and exciting.

THERE'S MORE!

By the time this is published, these articles will be integrated into the third iteration of the SHM Glycemic Control Resource Room. This online resource has already undergone 2 major revisions since its inception just a few years ago, reflecting SHM's dedication to the continuous improvement of the products and services that it offers. The Glycemic Control Implementation Guide and Resource Room will continue to be a work in progress. We highly encourage and welcome constructive criticism and feedback via E‐mail to [email protected]. The resource room contains a wealth of tools, slide shows, literature reviews, and links, in addition to the core articles published in this Supplement.

NEXT STEPS

More research and demonstration projects are obviously needed in this field. Local collaborative activities have sprung up in several cities and regions, as well as Glycemic Control Champions courses. A longitudinal mentoring program (similar to the SHM Venous Thromboembolism Prevention collaborative) would undoubtedly be beneficial, and may become available within the next year or so. These items and more will be promoted and posted in the resource room whenever possible.

Finally, the next step is up to you and the institutions in which you workyou have to decide, as individuals and institutions, if you believe the status quo is good enough. We believe that if you look, you'll find the care of our inpatients with diabetes and hyperglycemia disturbingly suboptimal, and hope that the work of the SHM Glycemic Control Task Force can help you rapidly improve on this state of affairs.

APPENDIX: GLYCEMIC CONTROL TASK FORCE

The Society of Hospital Medicine thanks all the members of the Glycemic Control Task Force, who encompass a distinguished panel of experts with representation from the AACE, ADA, ACP, and other organizations whose expertise was essential to the construction of the Glycemic Control Resource Room and the Implementation Guide for Glycemic Control and Prevention of Hypoglycemia.

Hospitalists

Representing the Society of Hospital Medicine

  • Gregory Maynard, MD. Lead Author and Editor of Glycemic Control Implementation Guide (web product); Glycemic Control Initiative Project Director; Clinical Professor of Medicine and Chief, Division of Hospital Medicine. University of California, San Diego (UCSD) Medical Center, San Diego, California.

  • David H. Wesorick, MD. Co‐editor of Glycemic Control Implementation Guide (web product); Clinical Assistant Professor of Internal Medicine, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan.

  • Cheryl O'Malley, MD. Associate Program Director, Internal Medicine Faculty, Medicine/Pediatrics Banner, Good Samaritan Medical Center; Clinical Assistant Professor of Medicine, University of Arizona College of Medicine, Phoenix, Arizona.

  • Kevin Larsen, MD. Assistant Professor of Internal Medicine, University of Minnesota; Associate Program Director, Internal Medicine Residency, Hennepin County Medical Center, Minneapolis, Minnesota.

  • Jeffrey L. Schnipper, MD, MPH. Associate Physician, Brigham and Women's Hospital, Boston, Massachusetts

  • Alpesh Amin, MD, MBA, FACP. Executive Director and Vice Chair, University of California (UC) Irvine Hospitalist Program, Irvine, California.

  • Lakshmi Halasyamani, MD. Associate Chair, Department of Medicine, St. Joseph Mercy Medical Center, Ann Arbor, Michigan.

  • Mitchell J. Wilson, MD. Associate Professor of Medicine, University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill, North Carolina.

Representing the American College of Physicians

  • Doren Schneider, MD. Associate Program Director, Internal Medicine Residency Director, Ambulatory Service Unit, Abington Adult Medical Associates; Assistant Professor of Medicine, Temple University School of Medicine, Abington, Pennsylvania.

Endocrinologists

Representing the American Diabetes Association

  • Andrew J. Ahmann, MD. Associate Professor of Medicine, Director, Diabetes Center, Oregon Health & Science University, Portland, Oregon.

  • Michelle F. Magee, MD. Associate Professor of Medicine, Georgetown University School of Medicine Medstar Diabetes and Research Institutes, Washington Hospital Center, Washington, DC.

Representing the American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists

  • Richard Hellman, MD, FACP, FACE. Clinical Professor of Medicine, University of MissouriKansas City, North Kansas City, Missouri.

Endocringology Expert Panel

  • Susan Shapiro Braithwaite, MD, FACP, FACE. Clinical Professor of Medicine, University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill, North Carolina.

  • Mary Ann Emanuele, MD, FACP. Professor of Medicine, Endocrinology, Cell Biology, Neurobiology, and Anatomy Biochemistry, Loyola University Medical Center, Maywood, Illinois.

  • Irl B. Hirsch, MD. Professor of Medicine, University of Washington, Seattle, Washington.

  • Robert Rushakoff, MD. Clinical Professor of Medicine, Director, Diabetes Program, University of California, San Francisco (UCSF)/Mt. Zion, San Francisco, California.

  • Silvio E. Inzucchi, MD. Professor of Medicine, Clinical Director, Section of Endocrinology, Yale University School of Medicine, New Haven, Connecticut.

Education

  • Marcia D. Draheim, RN, CDE. Program Supervisor, Diabetes Center, St Luke's Hospital, Cedar Rapids, Iowa.

  • Sharon Mahowald, RN, CDE. Inpatient Diabetes Coordinator, Hennepin County Medical Center, Minneapolis, Minnesota.

Financial

  • Adam Beck, MHS, FABC. MedStar Research Institute, Washington, DC.

Pharmacists

  • Stuart T. Haines, PharmD, FASHP, FCCP, BCPS. Associate Professor/Vice Chair for Education, University of Maryland School of Pharmacy Baltimore, Maryland.

Representing the American Society of Consultant Pharmacists

  • Donald K. Zettervall, RPh, CDE, CDM. Owner/Director, The Diabetes Education Center, Old Saybrook, Connecticut.

Case Management

Representing the Case Management Society of America

  • Cheri Lattimer, RN, BSN. Executive Director, Case Management Society of America, Little Rock, Arkansas.

  • Nancy Skinner, RN, CCM. Director, Case Management Society of America Principle Consultant, Riverside HealthCare Consulting, Whitwell, Tennessee.

Dietetics

  • Carrie Swift, MS, RD, BC‐ADM. Dietetics Coordinator, Veterans Affairs Medical Center, Walla Walla, Washington.

SHM Staff Members

  • Geri Barnes and Joy Wittnebert.

Glycemic Control Resource Room Project Team

  • Greg Maynard, Jason Stein, David Wesorick, Mary Ann Emanuele, Kevin Larsen, Geri Barnes, Joy Wittnebert, and Bruce Hansen.

References
  1. Inpatient Diabetes and Glycemic Control: A Call to Action Conference. Position statement. AACE, February 2006. Available at: http://www.aace.com/meetings/consensus/IIDC/IDGC0207.pdf. Accessed October 2006. Garber et al. Endocr Pract.2006;12(suppl 3):3–13.
  2. Society of Hospital Medicine. Glycemic Control Resource Room. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/ResourceRoomRedesign/GlycemicControl.cfm. Accessed May2008.
  3. Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force. Implementation guide: improving glycemic control, preventing hypoglycemia, and optimizing care of the inpatient with hyperglycemia and diabetes. Published January 2007 on the Society of Hospital Medicine Website. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org. Accessed May2008.
  4. Braithwaite SS,Magee MF,Sharretts JM,Schnipper JL,Amin A,Maynard G.The case for supporting inpatient glycemic control programs now: the evidence and beyond.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5 suppl 5)( ):S6S16.
  5. Wesorick DH,O'Malley CW,Rushakoff R,Larsen K,Magee MF.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital: a practical guide to subcutaneous insulin use in the non‐critically ill adult patient.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5 suppl 5)( ):S17S28.
  6. Maynard G,Wesorick D,O'Malley CW,Inzucchi S.Subcutaneous insulin order sets and protocols: effective design and implementation strategies.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5 suppl 5)( ):S29S41.
  7. Ahmann A,Maynard G.Designing and implementing insulin infusion protocols and order sets.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5 suppl 5)( ):S42S54.
  8. O'Malley CW,Emanuele MA,Halasyamani L,Amin A.Bridge over troubled waters: safe and effective transitions of the inpatient with hyperglycemia.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5 suppl 5)( ):S55S65.
  9. Schnipper JL,Magee MF,Inzucchi SE,Magee MF,Larsen K,Maynard G.Society of Hospital Medicine glycemic control task force summary: practical recommendations for assessing the impact of glycemic control efforts.J Hosp Med.2008;3(suppl 5):S66S75.
  10. Magee MF,Beck A.Practical strategies for developing the business case for hospital glycemic control teams.J Hosp Med.2008;3(suppl 5):S76S83.
  11. Garber AJ,Moghissi ES,Bransome ED, et al.American College of Endocrinology position statement on inpatient diabetes and metabolic control.Endocr Pract.2004;10(1):7782.
  12. Standards of medical care in diabetes‐‐2008.Diabetes Care.2008;31(suppl 1):S12S54.
  13. Queale WS,Seidler AJ,Brancati FL.Glycemic control and sliding scale insulin use in medical inpatients with diabetes mellitus.Arch Intern Med.1997;157(5):545552.
  14. Umpierrez GE,Smiley D,Zisman A, et al.Randomized study of basal‐bolus insulin therapy in the inpatient management of patients with type 2 diabetes (RABBIT 2 trial).Diabetes Care.2007;30(9):21812186.
  15. Umpierrez G,Maynard G.Glycemic chaos (not glycemic control) still the rule for inpatient care: how do we stop the insanity?J Hosp Med.2006;1(3):141144.
References
  1. Inpatient Diabetes and Glycemic Control: A Call to Action Conference. Position statement. AACE, February 2006. Available at: http://www.aace.com/meetings/consensus/IIDC/IDGC0207.pdf. Accessed October 2006. Garber et al. Endocr Pract.2006;12(suppl 3):3–13.
  2. Society of Hospital Medicine. Glycemic Control Resource Room. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/ResourceRoomRedesign/GlycemicControl.cfm. Accessed May2008.
  3. Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force. Implementation guide: improving glycemic control, preventing hypoglycemia, and optimizing care of the inpatient with hyperglycemia and diabetes. Published January 2007 on the Society of Hospital Medicine Website. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org. Accessed May2008.
  4. Braithwaite SS,Magee MF,Sharretts JM,Schnipper JL,Amin A,Maynard G.The case for supporting inpatient glycemic control programs now: the evidence and beyond.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5 suppl 5)( ):S6S16.
  5. Wesorick DH,O'Malley CW,Rushakoff R,Larsen K,Magee MF.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital: a practical guide to subcutaneous insulin use in the non‐critically ill adult patient.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5 suppl 5)( ):S17S28.
  6. Maynard G,Wesorick D,O'Malley CW,Inzucchi S.Subcutaneous insulin order sets and protocols: effective design and implementation strategies.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5 suppl 5)( ):S29S41.
  7. Ahmann A,Maynard G.Designing and implementing insulin infusion protocols and order sets.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5 suppl 5)( ):S42S54.
  8. O'Malley CW,Emanuele MA,Halasyamani L,Amin A.Bridge over troubled waters: safe and effective transitions of the inpatient with hyperglycemia.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5 suppl 5)( ):S55S65.
  9. Schnipper JL,Magee MF,Inzucchi SE,Magee MF,Larsen K,Maynard G.Society of Hospital Medicine glycemic control task force summary: practical recommendations for assessing the impact of glycemic control efforts.J Hosp Med.2008;3(suppl 5):S66S75.
  10. Magee MF,Beck A.Practical strategies for developing the business case for hospital glycemic control teams.J Hosp Med.2008;3(suppl 5):S76S83.
  11. Garber AJ,Moghissi ES,Bransome ED, et al.American College of Endocrinology position statement on inpatient diabetes and metabolic control.Endocr Pract.2004;10(1):7782.
  12. Standards of medical care in diabetes‐‐2008.Diabetes Care.2008;31(suppl 1):S12S54.
  13. Queale WS,Seidler AJ,Brancati FL.Glycemic control and sliding scale insulin use in medical inpatients with diabetes mellitus.Arch Intern Med.1997;157(5):545552.
  14. Umpierrez GE,Smiley D,Zisman A, et al.Randomized study of basal‐bolus insulin therapy in the inpatient management of patients with type 2 diabetes (RABBIT 2 trial).Diabetes Care.2007;30(9):21812186.
  15. Umpierrez G,Maynard G.Glycemic chaos (not glycemic control) still the rule for inpatient care: how do we stop the insanity?J Hosp Med.2006;1(3):141144.
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Page Number
1-5
Page Number
1-5
Article Type
Display Headline
Introduction: Overview of efforts and lessons learned
Display Headline
Introduction: Overview of efforts and lessons learned
Sections
Article Source
Copyright © 2008 Society of Hospital Medicine
Disallow All Ads
Correspondence Location
Clinical Professor of Medicine and Chief, Division of Hospital Medicine, University of California San Diego, 200 W. Arbor Drive 8485, San Diego, CA92103‐8485
Content Gating
Gated (full article locked unless allowed per User)
Gating Strategy
First Peek Free
Article PDF Media

Management of Diabetes and Hyperglycemia

Article Type
Changed
Mon, 01/02/2017 - 19:34
Display Headline
Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital: A practical guide to subcutaneous insulin use in the non‐critically ill, adult patient

Recently, there has been a heightened interest in improving the quality and safety of the management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital.1 While observational data strongly suggests an association of hyperglycemia with morbidity and mortality in adults on general medicine and surgery units, clinical research has not yet defined the best practices for managing hyperglycemia in the hospital outside the intensive care unit (ICU). As a result, many physicians do not have a well‐formulated approach to managing hyperglycemia in the noncritically ill hospital patient, and the use of insulin therapy to attain targeted blood glucose (BG) control is often subject to practice variability, leading to suboptimal glycemic outcomes.

Practical guidelines for the management of this common clinical problem have been formulated by experts in the field, based on understanding of the physiology of glucose and insulin dynamics, the characteristics of currently available insulin preparations, and clinical experience. In 2004, in Clement et al.,2 the American Diabetes Association published a technical review promoting the use of physiologic (basal‐nutritional‐correction dose) insulin regimens in the hospital to achieve targeted glycemic outcomes. This approach has been disseminated via review articles,3 and more recently, a randomized, controlled trial demonstrated that hospitalized type 2 diabetes patients experienced better glycemic control when treated with a physiologic insulin regimen than when treated with sliding‐scale insulin alone.4 The Society of Hospital Medicine has assembled a Glycemic Control Task Force, which is charged with providing physicians and hospitals with practical tools to improve the safety and efficacy of diabetes management in the hospital. One product of this work is an educational module that serves as a tutorial on the best practice for the management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in the noncritically ill hospital patient.5 This article is based on that module, and provides a practical summary of the key concepts that will allow clinicians to confidently employ physiologic insulin regimens when caring for their hospital patients.

Case: Ms. X is a 56‐year‐old obese woman with type 2 diabetes mellitus who is admitted for treatment of an infected diabetes‐related foot ulcer. The patient will be allowed to eat dinner in a couple of hours, but the surgeons have requested that she be kept nothing by mouth (NPO) after midnight for surgical debridement in the morning. Her current weight is 100 kg, and her recent glycemic control can be summarized as having BG values that are usually in the mid‐200s (mg/dL) and a recent glycosylated hemoglobin (HbA1C) measurement of 10.9%. Her home medical regimen includes glipizide 10 mg daily, metformin 1000 mg twice daily, and 20 units of neutral protamine hagadorn (NPH) insulin at bedtime. Her blood glucose in the Emergency Department is 289 mg/dL. How should this patient's blood glucose be managed in the hospital?

PHARMACOLOGIC CONTROL OF BG IN THE HOSPITAL: INSULIN IS THE ANTIHYPERGLYCEMIC AGENT OF CHOICE

Although oral antihyperglycemic agents are frequently used in the outpatient setting, there are many potential disadvantages to using these medications in acutely ill hospital patients, as shown in Figure 1.2, 3 Oral antihyperglycemic agents, in general, are difficult to quickly titrate to effect, and have side effects that can limit their use in the hospital. Metformin can lead to lactic acidosis when it is used in clinical situations that predispose to lactate production (eg, renal failure, circulatory failure, hypoxemia). Therefore, metformin should be held in patients who have, or are at risk for, these conditions, each of which may be encountered in the hospital. Also, agents that stimulate the release of insulin, such as sulfonylureas, should be held in patients with variable nutritional intake, to prevent hypoglycemia. In contrast, insulin acts rapidly, responds in a timely fashion to dose titrations, and can be used effectively in virtually all patients and clinical situations to control BG levels. This makes insulin the treatment of choice for hyperglycemia in the hospital. Insulin can be administered via subcutaneous doses or as an intravenous infusion for cases in which rapid titration is the goal. Intravenous insulin infusions are the preferred mode of insulin delivery in the ICU setting, and may be appropriate for some noncritically ill patients in hospitals that have developed systems to safely provide them on general wards. Subcutaneous insulin is most commonly used in the noncritically ill patient population and is the focus of this article.

Figure 1
Potential disadvantages associated with specific oral antihyperglycemic agents in the hospital setting. Abbreviations: CHF, congestive heart failure; GLP, glucagon‐like peptide; DPP IV, dipeptidyl peptidase IV.

Although insulin is the drug of choice for managing hyperglycemia in the hospital, there are some situations when it is appropriate to continue oral antihyperglycemic medications in the hospital. These agents may be continued in hospitalized patients who are clinically stable, and who have normal nutritional intake, normal BG levels, and stable renal and cardiac function. They may also be started or resumed in the hospital if they are to be included in the discharge medication regimen once the patient is clinically stable and if it has been assured that contraindications to their use no longer exist.

Ms. X should be treated with a more robust (physiologic) insulin regimen. This statement would be true, even if she were not an inpatient with a foot infection. Her glycemic control is currently poor, as evidenced by her high HbA1C and her elevated admission BG, and is unlikely to be appreciably improved with the addition of any pharmacologic agent other than insulin. The glipizide should be held, as the patient will be NPO after midnight. Most experts would recommend holding the metformin at this time as well, since the patient will be undergoing a surgical procedure in the morning that places her at risk for predisposing factors to lactic acidosis.

INPATIENT GLYCEMIC TARGETS

At present, recommended glycemic targets for noncritically ill hospital patients are based entirely on expert opinion, as there have been no clinical studies directly comparing different glycemic targets in this patient population. However, the American College of Endocrinology, the American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists, and the American Diabetes Association do provide recommendations about glycemic targets for inpatients (Table 1).6, 7 Although controversial, these recommendations make it clear that uncontrolled hyperglycemia is no longer the accepted standard of care for hospitalized patients, and illustrate the consensus of expert opinion on the subject. Of note, many hospitals are adopting glycemic targets that are less stringent than those shown in Table 1, recognizing the challenges of controlling BG levels in hospitalized patients, and the potential risk for hypoglycemia when lower BG targets are used. Each hospital's glycemic control champions must reach consensus on a target BG range for their institution. In practice this range has been 90110 mg/dL for the lower BG limit and 140180 mg/dL for the upper BG limit. It is also important to note that the recommendations from professional organizations emphasize the need to individualize BG targets, based on the clinical circumstances of each patient.

Recommendations for Inpatient Glycemic Targets
Organization ICU(mg/dL) Non‐ICU, Preprandial (mg/dL)* Non‐ICU, Maximum(mg/dL)*
  • Abbreviations: ACCE, American College of Clinical Endocrinologists; ACE, American College of Endocrinology; ADA, American Diabetes Association; ICU, intensive care unit.

  • Specific glycemic targets for noncritically ill hospital patients are based entirely on expert opinion, as there have been no clinical studies directly comparing different glycemic targets in this patient population.

ACCE/ACE 110 110 180
ADA 110 90‐130 180

Ms. X is exhibiting glycemic values far outside of the recommended upper limit of 180 mg/dL, and treatment with insulin monotherapy is the most appropriate strategy in this case.

PHYSIOLOGIC (BASAL‐BOLUS, PLUS CORRECTION DOSE) INSULIN

The management of hyperglycemia and diabetes in the inpatient setting is challenging due to the many changes that patients experience in the hospital. Hospitalized patients often experience changes in their nutritional intake and their medication regimen. In addition, hospitalized patients usually experience the stress of acute illness and are treated with medications that might impact glycemic control. Figure 2 lists some of the barriers to achieving glycemic control in hospitalized patients. The inpatient insulin program needs to be flexible enough to allow for maintenance of glycemic control in the face of tumultuous circumstances. This can best be accomplished by the use of a physiologic insulin program. This means using exogenous insulin to mimic normal physiologic insulin activity by providing the correct types and doses of insulin at the correct times.

Figure 2
Barriers to glycemic control in hospitalized hyperglycemic patients.

A physiologic insulin regimen can be conceptualized as having 3 separate components: basal insulin, nutritional (or prandial/meal) insulin, and correction dose (or supplemental) insulin.2 A patient's total daily dose (TDD) of insulin is the sum of all of these, and represents the amount of insulin that a patient requires over the course of 1 day while receiving adequate nutrition. Basal insulin is the insulin normally released continuously by the pancreas, even when fasting. This serves to suppress glucose and ketone production. When nutrition is ingested, there is a surge in the level of glucose in the blood, and this surge is accompanied by rapid secretion of additional insulin to allow for the appropriate utilization of the glucose. The insulin that is secreted in response to nutritional intake is referred to as nutritional insulin. About one‐half of the total daily insulin secreted by a healthy normal human serves a basal function, and about one‐half is secreted in response to nutritional intake.8 Understanding this bit of physiology (the 50/50 rule) is very helpful for creating flexible regimens using exogenous insulin. Although the 50/50 rule is useful in many circumstances, there are some notable exceptions. In some cases, basal insulin might be expected to be less than one‐half of the TDD (eg, enteral feeds, as discussed below). Additional correction dose insulin is given to correct hyperglycemia that occurs despite scheduled doses of basal and nutritional insulin.

It is an important practical consideration to note that when a person with diabetes is acutely ill or stressed, as is commonly the case in the hospital setting, total daily insulin requirements increase. This is due to the action of insulin counterregulatory hormones such as catecholamines, cortisol, growth hormone, and glucagon. The hospitalized patient is therefore likely to require a TDD that is higher than that required when well. This is particularly true for the basal insulin dose. Conversely, insulin requirements will decrease as a patient recovers from acute illness, and it may be necessary to lower insulin doses as BG levels decrease during convalescence.

Exogenous basal insulin is provided as a long‐acting or intermediate‐acting, low‐peaking or nonpeaking insulin (eg, glargine or detemir), that allows for a consistent level of basal insulin (Figure 3). This insulin is provided even when the person is not receiving any nutrition. Although twice daily NPH insulin can be used to provide basal insulin, the peak (as shown in Figure 3) is likely to exceed the level of insulin that is truly required for basal needs, which can result in hypoglycemia. In theory, NPH insulin would be less physiologic than glargine or detemir, although no studies have compared these insulins in the hospital setting. When using NPH insulin as a basal insulin in a patient who is designated NPO, the dose should be reduced by one‐third to one‐half to avoid hypoglycemia that may occur when it peaks.2

Figure 3
Action profiles of the available insulins. Abbreviation: NPH, neutral protamine hagadorn. Used with permission from Pendergrass M, Boston, Massachusetts. The dark blue shadows in the background represent normal, endogenous insulin section.

Exogenous nutritional insulin must be provided in a way that matches the nutrition that is being provided to the patient. For example, a patient who is receiving nutritional boluses (ie, meals or bolus tube feeds) can be given rapid‐acting insulin (eg, aspart, glulisine, lispro) along with each nutritional bolus to cover the glycemic peak that is caused by the meal. The rapid‐acting analog insulins can also be given at the end of a meal or bolus tube feed for cases in which it is not clear if the nutrition will be well tolerated. A reduction in the insulin dose proportionate to the amount of nutrition actually taken can then be made to decrease the risk of subsequent hypoglycemia. Regular insulin can also be given in anticipation of a meal or tube feed, but its later peak (as shown in Figure 3) requires that it be given 30 minutes before a meal is ingested, the timing of which is a challenge on most nursing units. Patients who are not receiving any nutrition should not receive nutritional insulin. And, patients receiving alternative forms of nutrition will require different nutritional insulin regimens to adequately cover their nutritional glycemic loads, as discussed below.

The separate provision of basal and nutritional insulin results in a highly‐flexible insulin program that can provide basal insulin to patients even when they are not receiving significant nutrition, and can be easily adjusted to provide appropriate nutritional insulin to match actual nutritional delivery.

Correction‐dose insulin is the small amount of insulin that is given to patients, in addition to basal and nutritional insulin, to correct hyperglycemia. Correction‐dose insulin is usually provided as rapid‐acting or regular insulin (usually the same type as the nutritional insulin), and is given in a dose that is specifically designed to reduce the patient's BG back into the target range. It is usually given at the same time as the nutritional insulin in patients who are receiving nutrition (or every 4 to 6 hours in patients who are not). Correction‐dose insulin is often written in a stepped format, to provide the appropriate amount of insulin for a given BG value. It differs from the traditional sliding‐scale in that it is not used alone (but rather as 1 component of a physiologic program), and in that it is customized to match the insulin sensitivity for each patient. Most standardized order sets for subcutaneous insulin provide several different correction‐dose scales to choose from, depending on the patient's weight or total daily insulin requirement.

If correction‐dose insulin is required consistently, or in high doses, it suggests a need to modify the basal and/or nutritional insulin. A proportion of the total number of units of correction‐dose insulin given in the preceding 24 hours can be distributed into basal and nutritional insulin doses for the next day if there is ongoing need for significant correction‐doses of insulin. A well‐designed, physiologic insulin regimen should provide targeted glycemic control, without a need for constantly adding large correctional boluses.

Some insulins do not fit neatly into either basal or nutritional insulin categories. For example, mixed insulins (eg, 70/30, rapid‐analog/NPH mixtures) combine basal and nutritional insulins to form either a double‐peaking insulin or an intermediate‐peaking insulin. The use of this type of insulin makes it impossible to manipulate the basal and nutritional components separately to enable attainment of BG targets. Therefore, the role of this type of insulin is limited in the hospital setting. Mixed insulins may, however, be started once the patient is clinically stable if they will be part of the discharge regimen.

Diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospitalized patient require active management, and there are no autopilot insulin regimens. The use of sliding scale insulin alone to manage hyperglycemia is a common practice in hospitals.9 However, this is an historic practice that is based on the erroneous idea that BG can be managed with a reactive strategy. When sliding‐scale insulin is used as the sole modality of insulin therapy, insulin is provided only after metabolic control has been lost, and usually does not provide an appropriate dose of insulin, considering basal, nutritional, and correctional needs. The end result is poor glycemic control.9, 10 A recent randomized, controlled trial demonstrated that a physiologic insulin regimen is indeed superior to a standardized insulin sliding‐scale for managing inpatient hyperglycemia.4

Ms. X should be given an insulin regimen that includes basal, nutritional, and correctional components. The provision of separate basal and nutritional insulin will allow the clinicians to provide the patient with basal insulin even when her nutritional insulin is held, and to easily modify her nutritional insulin, depending on her nutritional intake.

PHYSIOLOGIC INSULIN: A PRACTICAL APPROACH

The use of physiologic insulin in the hospital can be facilitated by considering a stepwise approach (Figure 4).5 The first step is to estimate the amount of insulin that the patient will require over the course of a day if taking adequate nutrition (this is the TDD). If the patient has been treated with subcutaneous insulin before being admitted to the hospital, the clinician can use the outpatient TDD to gauge the insulin needs. To do this, the clinician simply adds up the total number of units of insulin that a patient takes at home in a day. Using this method to estimate the patient's TDD can be very helpful, even if the clinician plans to use different types of insulin while the patient is hospitalized. When using this approach, one should consider the patient's prior metabolic control on the existing regimen (ie, if the patient's glycemic control was poor on the preexisting regimen, an increase in the TDD would be necessary). In addition, clinicians should recognize that insulin requirements usually increase when patients are acutely ill, as discussed above. Managing diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital is very different than doing so in the outpatient arena, and hospitalists should not feel bound by the outpatient regimen.

Figure 4
A stepwise approach to physiologic insulin dosing in the hospital.

In addition, a weight‐based estimation of the TDD can be very helpful in determining a starting dose of insulin in a hospitalized patient (see Figure 5). An estimate of 0.4 units/kg of body weight provides a conservative starting point for the TDD for most patients. Occasionally, a lower starting dose of 0.3 units/kg of body weight might be safer for those patients who are likely to be very sensitive to insulin, or who are otherwise at increased at risk for hypoglycemia (see Figure 5). Patients who are overweight or obese often require considerably higher TDDs in the range of 0.5‐0.6 (or even more) units/kg of body weight. Some may require over 1 unit/kg of body weight for their TDD. Therefore, the doses provided by these calculations represent conservative estimates in most patients. Hospitalists should be able to confidently make these dose estimates and avoid dependence on nonphysiologic regimens such as sliding‐scale insulin alone.

Figure 5
Three approaches for estimating an appropriate initiation total daily dose (TDD) of insulin.

The presence of risk factors for hypoglycemia or hyperglycemia should temper the dose calculations. Clinical conditions associated with hyperglycemia include obesity, certain medications (eg, glucocorticoids, catecholamines, tacrolimus, cyclosporine), and changes in nutritional intake (Figure 2). Clinical conditions associated with hypoglycemia are summarized in Figure 6. It is important to recognize that these calculations are intended to give the clinician a safe and rational starting point for insulin dosing. More important than the calculations is the careful monitoring of BG levels and timely modifications of the insulin regimen that follow.

Figure 6
Conditions associated with increased risk of hypoglycemia in hospital patients.

The second step in developing a physiologic insulin regimen is to determine the patient's nutritional regimen. The third step, then, is to decide how the TDD will be distributed into basal and nutritional insulins, and which insulin will be used for each. As noted above, for most patients, approximately one‐half of the TDD will be provided as basal insulin, and the other one‐half given as nutritional insulin. When patients are receiving nutrition, the insulin must be given in a way that matches the timing of nutrition delivery (eg, with each meal or bolus tube feeding), and provides appropriate insulin coverage for the nutrition that is being provided.

Nutritional insulin will not be given if the patient is not receiving any nutrition, in which case basal insulin and correction‐dose insulin will usually be continued. Table 2 shows the preferred insulin regimens for a variety of different nutritional circumstances, as put forth by the Society of Hospital Medicine (SHM) Glycemic Control Task Force.5

Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force Recommendations: Preferred Insulin Regimens for Different Nutritional Situations
Nutritional Situation Necessary Insulin Components Preferred Regimen*
  • Abbreviations: HS, at bedtime; IV, intravenous; NPO, nothing by mouth; q 4 hours, every 4 hours; q 6 hours, every 6 hours; q AC, before every meal; RAA, rapid‐acting analog; TDD, total daily dose; TPN, total parenteral nutrition.

  • These are the preferred regimens for most patients in these situations by consensus of the SHM Glycemic Control Task Force. Alternate regimens may appropriately be preferred by institutions or physicians to meet the needs of their own patient population. RAA insulins include lispro, aspart, and glulisine.

NPO (or clear liquids) Basal insulin: 50% of TDD. Nutritional insulin: None. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: None. Correctional insulin: Regular insulin q 6 hours or RAA insulin q 4 hours. Other comments: Dextrose infusion (eg, D5 containing solution at 75‐150 cc/hour) recommended when nutrition is held. An IV insulin infusion is preferred for management of prolonged fasts or fasting type 1 diabetes patients.
Eating meals Basal insulin: 50% of TDD. Nutritional insulin: 50% of TDD, divided equally before each meal. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: RAA insulin with meals. Correctional insulin: RAA insulin q AC and HS (reduced dose at HS).
Bolus tube feeds Basal insulin: 40% of TDD. Nutritional insulin: 60% of the TDD, divided equally before each bolus feed. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: RAA insulin with each bolus. Correctional insulin: RAA insulin with each bolus.
Continuous tube feeds Basal insulin: 40% (conservative) of TDD. Nutritional insulin: 60% of the TDD in divided doses. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: RAA insulin q 4 hours or regular insulin q 6 hours. Correctional insulin: Should match nutritional insulin choice.
Parenteral nutrition Insulin is usually given parenterally, with the nutrition Initially, a separate insulin drip allows for accurate dose‐finding. Then, 80% of amount determined as TDD using drip is added to subsequent TPN bags as regular insulin. Use correctional subcutaneous insulin doses cautiously, in addition

For Ms. X, the first step is to determine a TDD estimate. This patient weighs 100 kg, and is obese. Therefore, a TDD of 0.5 units/kg (50 units) is appropriate. This dose may be an underestimate of her insulin needs, but it is a conservative, reasonable starting point. The patient's basal insulin could be provided by giving one‐half of the TDD as basal insulin, such as glargine, 25 units daily. In this case, the patient will be eating dinner soon, but then will be NPO after midnight for surgery. Appropriate nutritional insulin could be provided by giving one‐third of her total nutritional insulin before this meal as a rapid‐acting insulin analog (25 units nutritional insulin per day divided by 3 meals results in a dose of 8 units per meal). After she eats dinner, additional nutritional insulin will not be given until she resumes her diet postoperatively. While NPO, her basal insulin should be continued, and her blood glucose should be checked every 4‐6 hours. An appropriate correction‐dose insulin scale should be chosen to provide a supplemental insulin dose with each bedside test of the blood glucose level, if and only if, hyperglycemia is present.

Case continued: The patient is given 8 units of lispro insulin before her dinner, and is also given a dose of 25 units of glargine insulin. She is held NPO after midnight and dextrose‐containing fluid is provided intravenously overnight at a maintenance rate. In the morning her blood glucose is 161 mg/dL before surgery. Surgery goes well, and at lunch her blood glucose is 179 mg/dL, and she is given a food tray. However, the patient says that she feels mildly nauseated, and is not sure that she will be able to eat her lunch. How should her nutritional insulin be managed in this situation?

MATCHING NUTRITION AND NUTRITIONAL INSULIN: A DIFFICULT CHALLENGE

It is the provision of the correct type and amount of nutritional insulin at the right time that is most challenging in the hospital. In the hospital, a patient's nutritional intake is often interrupted. Patients might be made NPO as part of the treatment plan, or may not be able to take nutrition by mouth because of specific medical conditions. In some cases, enteral or parenteral feeding is used to replace or enhance oral feeding. Even when alternate routes of nutrition are employed, sudden interruptions in nutrition still remain common (eg, the feeding tube falls out). Ultimately, to provide the best possible care to a diabetes patient, the nutritional insulin that is delivered must match the actual nutritional delivery (Table 2). Ideally, each institution should choose a preferred, standardized approach for each nutritional situation.

Even if institutions standardize their approach to nutritional insulin delivery in general, clinicians must be able to accurately respond to the unplanned variations in nutrition that occur in the hospital. One example of this is the patient who is expected to eat meals, but who becomes suddenly unable to do so, such as in the case above. In cases like this, the best approach is to hold the patient's nutritional insulin and allow the patient to attempt to eat the provided meal. Then, a rapid‐acting insulin analog can be given just after the meal, in proportion to the amount of the meal that was eaten. If the patient really is unable to tolerate any of the meal, then no nutritional insulin is provided. If the patient does tolerate a portion of the meal (eg, 50% of the meal is consumed), then a corresponding amount of insulin is given (eg, 50% of the scheduled nutritional insulin is given). The quick onset of the rapid‐acting insulin analogs allows near‐physiologic effect, even when they are given after the meal.

Ms. X should be allowed to eat as much of the meal as she can tolerate. Afterward, her intake can be assessed, and insulin can be provided in proportion to the amount of the meal that was eaten, as described above.

Bolus Tube Feeds

Patients who are given bolus enteral feeds are typically treated like patients who are eating meals. Like meals, bolus tube feeds are nutritional boluses that should be covered with nutritional insulin boluses. Because the hyperglycemia that sometimes accompanies bolus tube feeds is partly related to the glycemic load of this type of feedings, it is reasonable to provide 60% of the TDD of insulin as nutritional insulin when using this type of nutrition.

Continuous Tube Feeds

Patients who are given continuous enteral nutrition are somewhat different than patients who are eating meals. Continuous tube feed patients receive nutrition on a continuous basis. Therefore, these patients must also receive nutritional insulin in a way that provides continuous coverage. There is no proven superior insulin regimen for the continuously tube fed patient. Because the nutrition is being provided continuously, providing all of the TDD of insulin as a long‐acting, nonpeaking insulin might be considered the most physiologic regimen. However, if such a strategy is used and the tube feeding is interrupted for some reason, the patient will be in danger of hypoglycemia for the duration of action of the basal insulin. For this reason, the SHM Glycemic Control Task Force and many endocrinologists recommend using a long‐acting basal insulin at a dose that would provide a conservative estimate of the basal component (eg, 40% or less of the TDD), and dividing the remainder of the insulin and giving it as scheduled regular (every 6 hours) or rapid‐acting insulin (every 4 hours) for the nutritional coverage.

If tube feeds are interrupted, an infusion of 10% dextrose given intravenously at the same rate as the tube feed had been running (or the equivalent) can be provided to avoid hypoglycemia until the effect of the nutritional insulin has dissipated. It is reasonable to create a standing order to notify the physician, or start an alternate source of dextrose, in the case of tube feed interruption.

Parenteral Nutrition

For patients receiving parenteral nutrition, regular insulin, mixed with the parenteral nutrition, is safe and effective. Subcutaneous correction‐dose insulin is often used, in addition to the insulin that is mixed with the nutrition. When starting parenteral nutrition, the initial use of a separate insulin infusion can help in estimating the TDD of insulin that will be required.

TYPE 1 DIABETES

Because type 2 diabetes is more prevalent than type 1 diabetes, hospitalists will manage this form of diabetes most often. However, it is crucial that hospitalists are also able to manage type 1 diabetes in the hospital. For the most part, the principles presented in this article apply to all types of diabetes patients. This section outlines some special considerations to remember when caring for type 1 diabetes patients in the hospital that will assure prevention of diabetic ketoacidosis in patients with type 1 diabetes.

Type 1 diabetes patients completely lack endogenous insulin production. Therefore, these patients require exogenous insulin to be provided at all times. Type 1 diabetes patients need to be provided continuous, exogenous basal insulin, even when fasting, to suppress gluconeogenesis and ketone production. Failure to provide basal insulin to a type 1 diabetes patient can lead to the rapid development (in hours) of ketoacidosis. When receiving nutrition, the patient with type 1 diabetes must also be provided with nutritional insulin to control postprandial BGs. Whereas many type 2 diabetes patients may produce sufficient endogenous insulin to meet basal requirements when fasting (ie, they produce enough basal insulin to maintain metabolic stability when they are not taking in nutrition), this is never the case for type 1 diabetes patients.

In addition, type 1 diabetes patients typically exhibit less insulin resistance than type 2 diabetes patients, especially if they are not obese. Therefore, type 1 diabetes patients often have TDDs of insulin that are lower than those of type 2 patients. This is reflected in the recommendations in Figure 5, with the TDD of insulin estimate for a lean type 1 diabetes patient of 0.3 units/kg/day.

CONTINUOUS SUBCUTANEOUS INSULIN INFUSIONS (INSULIN PUMPS) IN THE HOSPITAL

Continuous subcutaneous insulin infusion therapy (CSII), often referred to as insulin pump therapy, involves the use of a pump to provide a continuous flow of subcutaneous basal insulin (usually a rapid‐acting analog) through a needle that is left in place. This basal rate is adjustable, and therefore can be customized to meet variable needs over a 24‐hour period. When the patient takes in nutrition, a bolus of the same insulin is given, via the pump, at a dose that is appropriate to cover the nutritional intake. The advantages of CSII therapy are the capacity for precision and flexibility of the basal insulin delivery (compared to the use of a once‐daily or twice‐daily dose of long‐acting insulin analog), and the lack of a need to inject insulin boluses (which are delivered via the pump). This type of therapy is preferred by some diabetes patients, and although it is not highly prevalent in most areas, it is common enough that hospitalists must have a plan for managing it in their practices.

There are many barriers to the use of CSII in the hospital. Most of these barriers are related to the need for constant management of the pump. Most hospitalists and nurses do not have the expertise to manage this therapy in the hospital. Although the patient (or caregiver) might have the expertise to manage the pump, this is an acceptable option only if the patient is competent to manage the pump. Patient competence to use the pump must be formally assessed and documented, and the patient must agree to perform the many components of care related to managing the pump (eg, documenting the basal rate and boluses given, documenting BGs, providing tubing and other supplies).

Many hospitals currently choose a policy of converting insulin pump therapy to standard subcutaneous insulin treatment for most hospitalized patients. Usually the conversion of CSII to a physiologic subcutaneous insulin regimen (as detailed in this article) is fairly straightforwardthe basal insulin will be given as long‐acting, low‐peaking insulin, and nutritional and correction‐dose insulin can then be added as a rapid‐acting analog, in accord with the patient's needs.

Hospitals that admit a large number of insulin pump patients, or those that choose to use pumps routinely in the hospital, should create a formal policy for pump use.11 It has been suggested that the policy should assure that there is formal assessment of the patient's competence to manage the pump, that there is professional oversight of the pump management (usually via endocrinology and diabetes educator consultation), that contraindications for CSII use are clearly stated, and that there is a formal mechanism for engaging the patient and informing him of his roles and responsibilities (eg, a written agreement). The clinician must write insulin orders in the medical record that specify the basal and bolus insulin doses which are being used. Pump use may be limited to floors where nurses receive at least basic education in the principles of CSII pumps.

CARE TRANSITIONS IN THE HOSPITAL

Transitioning from an Intravenous Insulin Infusion to a Subcutaneous Insulin Regimen

In the hospital, it is often necessary to switch a patient from an intravenous (IV) insulin infusion to a subcutaneous (SC) insulin regimen. When doing this, the clinician must decide how much SC insulin the patient will require. As discussed earlier, the TDD may be estimated based on home insulin doses or the patient's weight. However, for a patient who is treated with an IV insulin infusion, current insulin requirements can be estimated based on the recent IV drip rate. This is the preferred method for identifying a TDD in these patients, as the insulin delivery rate at the time of drip discontinuation provides a way of determining current insulin requirements.

Regardless of the dose of SC insulin that is chosen, it is important that SC insulin be delivered well in advance of the discontinuation of the IV insulin. Because the duration of action of IV insulin is on the order of 7 minutes, the patient may become rapidly hyperglycemic or develop ketoacidosis (in type 1 diabetes) in a matter of hours if the IV insulin infusion is discontinued before the SC insulin is active. Insulin infusion should not be stopped for at least 1 hour after the SC delivery of rapid‐acting or regular insulin, and at least 2‐3 hours after the SC delivery of intermediate‐acting or long‐acting insulin.2

Discharge Transition

The hospital discharge is another challenging transition for the patient with diabetes. While hospitalized, a diabetes patient's medication regimen will likely be altered to maintain metabolic control. At the time of discharge, the patient should be provided with an appropriate medication regimen. Moreover, the patient must be educated about any new medication or other changes that will be part of the new outpatient management routine. It is also important to assure that the patient does not have knowledge deficits related to diabetes survival skills. The Joint Commission has recently put forth the expectation that such education will be provided prior to hospital discharge.12 Areas outlined for this core diabetes self‐management education include: the definition of diabetes; finger‐stick BG monitoring; glycemic targets; insulin self‐administration; hypoglycemia prevention, recognition, and treatment; hyperglycemia recognition; sick day guidelines; and when to call a clinician for help. Communication of the discharge diabetes management plan to the patient's primary care provider should also be undertaken.

Please see the article entitled Bridge Over Troubled Waters: Safe and Effective Transitions for the Inpatient with Hyperglycemia in this supplement for additional details about both the IV to SC transition and the discharge transition.

CONCLUSIONS

Understanding the basic principles of the physiologic (basal, nutritional, and correction‐dose) insulin regimen will allow clinicians to formulate safe and effective insulin regimens in virtually any clinical situation. Simple steps can allow safe estimates of initial doses and titration toward glycemic goals. Additional information and case studies can be found in a Society of Hospital Medicine Task Force Educational Module,5 available online.

Additional resources for improving glycemic control in hospital patients are available online at the Glycemic Control Resource Room (http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/ResourceRoomRedesign/ GlycemicControl.cfm).

References
  1. ACE/ADA Task Force on Inpatient Diabetes.American College of Endocrinology and American Diabetes Association Consensus Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Glycemic Control: A call to action.Diabetes Care.2006:29:19551962.
  2. Clement S,Baithwaite SS,Magee MF, et al.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in hospitals.Diabetes Care.2004;27:553591.
  3. Inzucchi SE.Management of hyperglycemia in the hospital setting.N Engl J Med.2006;355:19031911.
  4. Umpierrez GE,Andres P,Smiley D, et al.Randomized study of basal‐bolus insulin therapy in the inpatient management of patients with type 2 diabetes (Rabbit 2 trial).Diabetes Care.2007;30:21812186.
  5. Maynard G,Wesorick DH; for the Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force. Educational module: management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital patient: focus on subcutaneous insulin use in the non‐critically ill, adult patient. Published January 2007 on the Society of Hospital Medicine Website. Available at:http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/ResourceRoomRedesign/html/11Ed_Resources/01_Teaching_Slide.cfm. Accessed August2008.
  6. American College of Endocrinology Task Force on Inpatient Diabetes and Metabolic Control.American College of Endocrinology Position Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Metabolic Control.Endocr Pract.2004;10:7782.
  7. American Diabetes Association.Standards of Medical Care in Diabetes, 2006.Diabetes Care.2006;29(supp 1):s4s42.
  8. Larsen PR,Kronenberg HM,Melmed S,Polonsky KS, editors.Williams Textbook of Endocrinology.10th ed.Philadelphia, PA:Elsevier Science;2003.
  9. Schnipper JL,Barskey EE,Shaykevich S,Fitzmaurice G,Pendergrass ML.Inpatient management of diabetes and hyperglycemia among general medicine patients at a large teaching hospital.J Hosp Med.2006;1:145150.
  10. Queale WS,Seidler AJ,Brancati FL.Glycemic control and sliding scale use in medical inpatients with diabetes mellitus.Arch Intern Med.1997;157:545552.
  11. Cook B,Boyle ME,Cisar NS, et al.Use of continuous subcutaneous insulin infusion therapy in the hospital setting: Proposed guidelines and outcome measures.Diabetes Educ.2005;31:849857.
  12. Inpatient Diabetes Certification. Joint Commission. Available at:http://www.jointcommission.org/CertificationPrograms/Inpatient+Diabetes. Accessed April2008.
Article PDF
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Page Number
17-28
Sections
Article PDF
Article PDF

Recently, there has been a heightened interest in improving the quality and safety of the management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital.1 While observational data strongly suggests an association of hyperglycemia with morbidity and mortality in adults on general medicine and surgery units, clinical research has not yet defined the best practices for managing hyperglycemia in the hospital outside the intensive care unit (ICU). As a result, many physicians do not have a well‐formulated approach to managing hyperglycemia in the noncritically ill hospital patient, and the use of insulin therapy to attain targeted blood glucose (BG) control is often subject to practice variability, leading to suboptimal glycemic outcomes.

Practical guidelines for the management of this common clinical problem have been formulated by experts in the field, based on understanding of the physiology of glucose and insulin dynamics, the characteristics of currently available insulin preparations, and clinical experience. In 2004, in Clement et al.,2 the American Diabetes Association published a technical review promoting the use of physiologic (basal‐nutritional‐correction dose) insulin regimens in the hospital to achieve targeted glycemic outcomes. This approach has been disseminated via review articles,3 and more recently, a randomized, controlled trial demonstrated that hospitalized type 2 diabetes patients experienced better glycemic control when treated with a physiologic insulin regimen than when treated with sliding‐scale insulin alone.4 The Society of Hospital Medicine has assembled a Glycemic Control Task Force, which is charged with providing physicians and hospitals with practical tools to improve the safety and efficacy of diabetes management in the hospital. One product of this work is an educational module that serves as a tutorial on the best practice for the management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in the noncritically ill hospital patient.5 This article is based on that module, and provides a practical summary of the key concepts that will allow clinicians to confidently employ physiologic insulin regimens when caring for their hospital patients.

Case: Ms. X is a 56‐year‐old obese woman with type 2 diabetes mellitus who is admitted for treatment of an infected diabetes‐related foot ulcer. The patient will be allowed to eat dinner in a couple of hours, but the surgeons have requested that she be kept nothing by mouth (NPO) after midnight for surgical debridement in the morning. Her current weight is 100 kg, and her recent glycemic control can be summarized as having BG values that are usually in the mid‐200s (mg/dL) and a recent glycosylated hemoglobin (HbA1C) measurement of 10.9%. Her home medical regimen includes glipizide 10 mg daily, metformin 1000 mg twice daily, and 20 units of neutral protamine hagadorn (NPH) insulin at bedtime. Her blood glucose in the Emergency Department is 289 mg/dL. How should this patient's blood glucose be managed in the hospital?

PHARMACOLOGIC CONTROL OF BG IN THE HOSPITAL: INSULIN IS THE ANTIHYPERGLYCEMIC AGENT OF CHOICE

Although oral antihyperglycemic agents are frequently used in the outpatient setting, there are many potential disadvantages to using these medications in acutely ill hospital patients, as shown in Figure 1.2, 3 Oral antihyperglycemic agents, in general, are difficult to quickly titrate to effect, and have side effects that can limit their use in the hospital. Metformin can lead to lactic acidosis when it is used in clinical situations that predispose to lactate production (eg, renal failure, circulatory failure, hypoxemia). Therefore, metformin should be held in patients who have, or are at risk for, these conditions, each of which may be encountered in the hospital. Also, agents that stimulate the release of insulin, such as sulfonylureas, should be held in patients with variable nutritional intake, to prevent hypoglycemia. In contrast, insulin acts rapidly, responds in a timely fashion to dose titrations, and can be used effectively in virtually all patients and clinical situations to control BG levels. This makes insulin the treatment of choice for hyperglycemia in the hospital. Insulin can be administered via subcutaneous doses or as an intravenous infusion for cases in which rapid titration is the goal. Intravenous insulin infusions are the preferred mode of insulin delivery in the ICU setting, and may be appropriate for some noncritically ill patients in hospitals that have developed systems to safely provide them on general wards. Subcutaneous insulin is most commonly used in the noncritically ill patient population and is the focus of this article.

Figure 1
Potential disadvantages associated with specific oral antihyperglycemic agents in the hospital setting. Abbreviations: CHF, congestive heart failure; GLP, glucagon‐like peptide; DPP IV, dipeptidyl peptidase IV.

Although insulin is the drug of choice for managing hyperglycemia in the hospital, there are some situations when it is appropriate to continue oral antihyperglycemic medications in the hospital. These agents may be continued in hospitalized patients who are clinically stable, and who have normal nutritional intake, normal BG levels, and stable renal and cardiac function. They may also be started or resumed in the hospital if they are to be included in the discharge medication regimen once the patient is clinically stable and if it has been assured that contraindications to their use no longer exist.

Ms. X should be treated with a more robust (physiologic) insulin regimen. This statement would be true, even if she were not an inpatient with a foot infection. Her glycemic control is currently poor, as evidenced by her high HbA1C and her elevated admission BG, and is unlikely to be appreciably improved with the addition of any pharmacologic agent other than insulin. The glipizide should be held, as the patient will be NPO after midnight. Most experts would recommend holding the metformin at this time as well, since the patient will be undergoing a surgical procedure in the morning that places her at risk for predisposing factors to lactic acidosis.

INPATIENT GLYCEMIC TARGETS

At present, recommended glycemic targets for noncritically ill hospital patients are based entirely on expert opinion, as there have been no clinical studies directly comparing different glycemic targets in this patient population. However, the American College of Endocrinology, the American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists, and the American Diabetes Association do provide recommendations about glycemic targets for inpatients (Table 1).6, 7 Although controversial, these recommendations make it clear that uncontrolled hyperglycemia is no longer the accepted standard of care for hospitalized patients, and illustrate the consensus of expert opinion on the subject. Of note, many hospitals are adopting glycemic targets that are less stringent than those shown in Table 1, recognizing the challenges of controlling BG levels in hospitalized patients, and the potential risk for hypoglycemia when lower BG targets are used. Each hospital's glycemic control champions must reach consensus on a target BG range for their institution. In practice this range has been 90110 mg/dL for the lower BG limit and 140180 mg/dL for the upper BG limit. It is also important to note that the recommendations from professional organizations emphasize the need to individualize BG targets, based on the clinical circumstances of each patient.

Recommendations for Inpatient Glycemic Targets
Organization ICU(mg/dL) Non‐ICU, Preprandial (mg/dL)* Non‐ICU, Maximum(mg/dL)*
  • Abbreviations: ACCE, American College of Clinical Endocrinologists; ACE, American College of Endocrinology; ADA, American Diabetes Association; ICU, intensive care unit.

  • Specific glycemic targets for noncritically ill hospital patients are based entirely on expert opinion, as there have been no clinical studies directly comparing different glycemic targets in this patient population.

ACCE/ACE 110 110 180
ADA 110 90‐130 180

Ms. X is exhibiting glycemic values far outside of the recommended upper limit of 180 mg/dL, and treatment with insulin monotherapy is the most appropriate strategy in this case.

PHYSIOLOGIC (BASAL‐BOLUS, PLUS CORRECTION DOSE) INSULIN

The management of hyperglycemia and diabetes in the inpatient setting is challenging due to the many changes that patients experience in the hospital. Hospitalized patients often experience changes in their nutritional intake and their medication regimen. In addition, hospitalized patients usually experience the stress of acute illness and are treated with medications that might impact glycemic control. Figure 2 lists some of the barriers to achieving glycemic control in hospitalized patients. The inpatient insulin program needs to be flexible enough to allow for maintenance of glycemic control in the face of tumultuous circumstances. This can best be accomplished by the use of a physiologic insulin program. This means using exogenous insulin to mimic normal physiologic insulin activity by providing the correct types and doses of insulin at the correct times.

Figure 2
Barriers to glycemic control in hospitalized hyperglycemic patients.

A physiologic insulin regimen can be conceptualized as having 3 separate components: basal insulin, nutritional (or prandial/meal) insulin, and correction dose (or supplemental) insulin.2 A patient's total daily dose (TDD) of insulin is the sum of all of these, and represents the amount of insulin that a patient requires over the course of 1 day while receiving adequate nutrition. Basal insulin is the insulin normally released continuously by the pancreas, even when fasting. This serves to suppress glucose and ketone production. When nutrition is ingested, there is a surge in the level of glucose in the blood, and this surge is accompanied by rapid secretion of additional insulin to allow for the appropriate utilization of the glucose. The insulin that is secreted in response to nutritional intake is referred to as nutritional insulin. About one‐half of the total daily insulin secreted by a healthy normal human serves a basal function, and about one‐half is secreted in response to nutritional intake.8 Understanding this bit of physiology (the 50/50 rule) is very helpful for creating flexible regimens using exogenous insulin. Although the 50/50 rule is useful in many circumstances, there are some notable exceptions. In some cases, basal insulin might be expected to be less than one‐half of the TDD (eg, enteral feeds, as discussed below). Additional correction dose insulin is given to correct hyperglycemia that occurs despite scheduled doses of basal and nutritional insulin.

It is an important practical consideration to note that when a person with diabetes is acutely ill or stressed, as is commonly the case in the hospital setting, total daily insulin requirements increase. This is due to the action of insulin counterregulatory hormones such as catecholamines, cortisol, growth hormone, and glucagon. The hospitalized patient is therefore likely to require a TDD that is higher than that required when well. This is particularly true for the basal insulin dose. Conversely, insulin requirements will decrease as a patient recovers from acute illness, and it may be necessary to lower insulin doses as BG levels decrease during convalescence.

Exogenous basal insulin is provided as a long‐acting or intermediate‐acting, low‐peaking or nonpeaking insulin (eg, glargine or detemir), that allows for a consistent level of basal insulin (Figure 3). This insulin is provided even when the person is not receiving any nutrition. Although twice daily NPH insulin can be used to provide basal insulin, the peak (as shown in Figure 3) is likely to exceed the level of insulin that is truly required for basal needs, which can result in hypoglycemia. In theory, NPH insulin would be less physiologic than glargine or detemir, although no studies have compared these insulins in the hospital setting. When using NPH insulin as a basal insulin in a patient who is designated NPO, the dose should be reduced by one‐third to one‐half to avoid hypoglycemia that may occur when it peaks.2

Figure 3
Action profiles of the available insulins. Abbreviation: NPH, neutral protamine hagadorn. Used with permission from Pendergrass M, Boston, Massachusetts. The dark blue shadows in the background represent normal, endogenous insulin section.

Exogenous nutritional insulin must be provided in a way that matches the nutrition that is being provided to the patient. For example, a patient who is receiving nutritional boluses (ie, meals or bolus tube feeds) can be given rapid‐acting insulin (eg, aspart, glulisine, lispro) along with each nutritional bolus to cover the glycemic peak that is caused by the meal. The rapid‐acting analog insulins can also be given at the end of a meal or bolus tube feed for cases in which it is not clear if the nutrition will be well tolerated. A reduction in the insulin dose proportionate to the amount of nutrition actually taken can then be made to decrease the risk of subsequent hypoglycemia. Regular insulin can also be given in anticipation of a meal or tube feed, but its later peak (as shown in Figure 3) requires that it be given 30 minutes before a meal is ingested, the timing of which is a challenge on most nursing units. Patients who are not receiving any nutrition should not receive nutritional insulin. And, patients receiving alternative forms of nutrition will require different nutritional insulin regimens to adequately cover their nutritional glycemic loads, as discussed below.

The separate provision of basal and nutritional insulin results in a highly‐flexible insulin program that can provide basal insulin to patients even when they are not receiving significant nutrition, and can be easily adjusted to provide appropriate nutritional insulin to match actual nutritional delivery.

Correction‐dose insulin is the small amount of insulin that is given to patients, in addition to basal and nutritional insulin, to correct hyperglycemia. Correction‐dose insulin is usually provided as rapid‐acting or regular insulin (usually the same type as the nutritional insulin), and is given in a dose that is specifically designed to reduce the patient's BG back into the target range. It is usually given at the same time as the nutritional insulin in patients who are receiving nutrition (or every 4 to 6 hours in patients who are not). Correction‐dose insulin is often written in a stepped format, to provide the appropriate amount of insulin for a given BG value. It differs from the traditional sliding‐scale in that it is not used alone (but rather as 1 component of a physiologic program), and in that it is customized to match the insulin sensitivity for each patient. Most standardized order sets for subcutaneous insulin provide several different correction‐dose scales to choose from, depending on the patient's weight or total daily insulin requirement.

If correction‐dose insulin is required consistently, or in high doses, it suggests a need to modify the basal and/or nutritional insulin. A proportion of the total number of units of correction‐dose insulin given in the preceding 24 hours can be distributed into basal and nutritional insulin doses for the next day if there is ongoing need for significant correction‐doses of insulin. A well‐designed, physiologic insulin regimen should provide targeted glycemic control, without a need for constantly adding large correctional boluses.

Some insulins do not fit neatly into either basal or nutritional insulin categories. For example, mixed insulins (eg, 70/30, rapid‐analog/NPH mixtures) combine basal and nutritional insulins to form either a double‐peaking insulin or an intermediate‐peaking insulin. The use of this type of insulin makes it impossible to manipulate the basal and nutritional components separately to enable attainment of BG targets. Therefore, the role of this type of insulin is limited in the hospital setting. Mixed insulins may, however, be started once the patient is clinically stable if they will be part of the discharge regimen.

Diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospitalized patient require active management, and there are no autopilot insulin regimens. The use of sliding scale insulin alone to manage hyperglycemia is a common practice in hospitals.9 However, this is an historic practice that is based on the erroneous idea that BG can be managed with a reactive strategy. When sliding‐scale insulin is used as the sole modality of insulin therapy, insulin is provided only after metabolic control has been lost, and usually does not provide an appropriate dose of insulin, considering basal, nutritional, and correctional needs. The end result is poor glycemic control.9, 10 A recent randomized, controlled trial demonstrated that a physiologic insulin regimen is indeed superior to a standardized insulin sliding‐scale for managing inpatient hyperglycemia.4

Ms. X should be given an insulin regimen that includes basal, nutritional, and correctional components. The provision of separate basal and nutritional insulin will allow the clinicians to provide the patient with basal insulin even when her nutritional insulin is held, and to easily modify her nutritional insulin, depending on her nutritional intake.

PHYSIOLOGIC INSULIN: A PRACTICAL APPROACH

The use of physiologic insulin in the hospital can be facilitated by considering a stepwise approach (Figure 4).5 The first step is to estimate the amount of insulin that the patient will require over the course of a day if taking adequate nutrition (this is the TDD). If the patient has been treated with subcutaneous insulin before being admitted to the hospital, the clinician can use the outpatient TDD to gauge the insulin needs. To do this, the clinician simply adds up the total number of units of insulin that a patient takes at home in a day. Using this method to estimate the patient's TDD can be very helpful, even if the clinician plans to use different types of insulin while the patient is hospitalized. When using this approach, one should consider the patient's prior metabolic control on the existing regimen (ie, if the patient's glycemic control was poor on the preexisting regimen, an increase in the TDD would be necessary). In addition, clinicians should recognize that insulin requirements usually increase when patients are acutely ill, as discussed above. Managing diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital is very different than doing so in the outpatient arena, and hospitalists should not feel bound by the outpatient regimen.

Figure 4
A stepwise approach to physiologic insulin dosing in the hospital.

In addition, a weight‐based estimation of the TDD can be very helpful in determining a starting dose of insulin in a hospitalized patient (see Figure 5). An estimate of 0.4 units/kg of body weight provides a conservative starting point for the TDD for most patients. Occasionally, a lower starting dose of 0.3 units/kg of body weight might be safer for those patients who are likely to be very sensitive to insulin, or who are otherwise at increased at risk for hypoglycemia (see Figure 5). Patients who are overweight or obese often require considerably higher TDDs in the range of 0.5‐0.6 (or even more) units/kg of body weight. Some may require over 1 unit/kg of body weight for their TDD. Therefore, the doses provided by these calculations represent conservative estimates in most patients. Hospitalists should be able to confidently make these dose estimates and avoid dependence on nonphysiologic regimens such as sliding‐scale insulin alone.

Figure 5
Three approaches for estimating an appropriate initiation total daily dose (TDD) of insulin.

The presence of risk factors for hypoglycemia or hyperglycemia should temper the dose calculations. Clinical conditions associated with hyperglycemia include obesity, certain medications (eg, glucocorticoids, catecholamines, tacrolimus, cyclosporine), and changes in nutritional intake (Figure 2). Clinical conditions associated with hypoglycemia are summarized in Figure 6. It is important to recognize that these calculations are intended to give the clinician a safe and rational starting point for insulin dosing. More important than the calculations is the careful monitoring of BG levels and timely modifications of the insulin regimen that follow.

Figure 6
Conditions associated with increased risk of hypoglycemia in hospital patients.

The second step in developing a physiologic insulin regimen is to determine the patient's nutritional regimen. The third step, then, is to decide how the TDD will be distributed into basal and nutritional insulins, and which insulin will be used for each. As noted above, for most patients, approximately one‐half of the TDD will be provided as basal insulin, and the other one‐half given as nutritional insulin. When patients are receiving nutrition, the insulin must be given in a way that matches the timing of nutrition delivery (eg, with each meal or bolus tube feeding), and provides appropriate insulin coverage for the nutrition that is being provided.

Nutritional insulin will not be given if the patient is not receiving any nutrition, in which case basal insulin and correction‐dose insulin will usually be continued. Table 2 shows the preferred insulin regimens for a variety of different nutritional circumstances, as put forth by the Society of Hospital Medicine (SHM) Glycemic Control Task Force.5

Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force Recommendations: Preferred Insulin Regimens for Different Nutritional Situations
Nutritional Situation Necessary Insulin Components Preferred Regimen*
  • Abbreviations: HS, at bedtime; IV, intravenous; NPO, nothing by mouth; q 4 hours, every 4 hours; q 6 hours, every 6 hours; q AC, before every meal; RAA, rapid‐acting analog; TDD, total daily dose; TPN, total parenteral nutrition.

  • These are the preferred regimens for most patients in these situations by consensus of the SHM Glycemic Control Task Force. Alternate regimens may appropriately be preferred by institutions or physicians to meet the needs of their own patient population. RAA insulins include lispro, aspart, and glulisine.

NPO (or clear liquids) Basal insulin: 50% of TDD. Nutritional insulin: None. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: None. Correctional insulin: Regular insulin q 6 hours or RAA insulin q 4 hours. Other comments: Dextrose infusion (eg, D5 containing solution at 75‐150 cc/hour) recommended when nutrition is held. An IV insulin infusion is preferred for management of prolonged fasts or fasting type 1 diabetes patients.
Eating meals Basal insulin: 50% of TDD. Nutritional insulin: 50% of TDD, divided equally before each meal. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: RAA insulin with meals. Correctional insulin: RAA insulin q AC and HS (reduced dose at HS).
Bolus tube feeds Basal insulin: 40% of TDD. Nutritional insulin: 60% of the TDD, divided equally before each bolus feed. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: RAA insulin with each bolus. Correctional insulin: RAA insulin with each bolus.
Continuous tube feeds Basal insulin: 40% (conservative) of TDD. Nutritional insulin: 60% of the TDD in divided doses. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: RAA insulin q 4 hours or regular insulin q 6 hours. Correctional insulin: Should match nutritional insulin choice.
Parenteral nutrition Insulin is usually given parenterally, with the nutrition Initially, a separate insulin drip allows for accurate dose‐finding. Then, 80% of amount determined as TDD using drip is added to subsequent TPN bags as regular insulin. Use correctional subcutaneous insulin doses cautiously, in addition

For Ms. X, the first step is to determine a TDD estimate. This patient weighs 100 kg, and is obese. Therefore, a TDD of 0.5 units/kg (50 units) is appropriate. This dose may be an underestimate of her insulin needs, but it is a conservative, reasonable starting point. The patient's basal insulin could be provided by giving one‐half of the TDD as basal insulin, such as glargine, 25 units daily. In this case, the patient will be eating dinner soon, but then will be NPO after midnight for surgery. Appropriate nutritional insulin could be provided by giving one‐third of her total nutritional insulin before this meal as a rapid‐acting insulin analog (25 units nutritional insulin per day divided by 3 meals results in a dose of 8 units per meal). After she eats dinner, additional nutritional insulin will not be given until she resumes her diet postoperatively. While NPO, her basal insulin should be continued, and her blood glucose should be checked every 4‐6 hours. An appropriate correction‐dose insulin scale should be chosen to provide a supplemental insulin dose with each bedside test of the blood glucose level, if and only if, hyperglycemia is present.

Case continued: The patient is given 8 units of lispro insulin before her dinner, and is also given a dose of 25 units of glargine insulin. She is held NPO after midnight and dextrose‐containing fluid is provided intravenously overnight at a maintenance rate. In the morning her blood glucose is 161 mg/dL before surgery. Surgery goes well, and at lunch her blood glucose is 179 mg/dL, and she is given a food tray. However, the patient says that she feels mildly nauseated, and is not sure that she will be able to eat her lunch. How should her nutritional insulin be managed in this situation?

MATCHING NUTRITION AND NUTRITIONAL INSULIN: A DIFFICULT CHALLENGE

It is the provision of the correct type and amount of nutritional insulin at the right time that is most challenging in the hospital. In the hospital, a patient's nutritional intake is often interrupted. Patients might be made NPO as part of the treatment plan, or may not be able to take nutrition by mouth because of specific medical conditions. In some cases, enteral or parenteral feeding is used to replace or enhance oral feeding. Even when alternate routes of nutrition are employed, sudden interruptions in nutrition still remain common (eg, the feeding tube falls out). Ultimately, to provide the best possible care to a diabetes patient, the nutritional insulin that is delivered must match the actual nutritional delivery (Table 2). Ideally, each institution should choose a preferred, standardized approach for each nutritional situation.

Even if institutions standardize their approach to nutritional insulin delivery in general, clinicians must be able to accurately respond to the unplanned variations in nutrition that occur in the hospital. One example of this is the patient who is expected to eat meals, but who becomes suddenly unable to do so, such as in the case above. In cases like this, the best approach is to hold the patient's nutritional insulin and allow the patient to attempt to eat the provided meal. Then, a rapid‐acting insulin analog can be given just after the meal, in proportion to the amount of the meal that was eaten. If the patient really is unable to tolerate any of the meal, then no nutritional insulin is provided. If the patient does tolerate a portion of the meal (eg, 50% of the meal is consumed), then a corresponding amount of insulin is given (eg, 50% of the scheduled nutritional insulin is given). The quick onset of the rapid‐acting insulin analogs allows near‐physiologic effect, even when they are given after the meal.

Ms. X should be allowed to eat as much of the meal as she can tolerate. Afterward, her intake can be assessed, and insulin can be provided in proportion to the amount of the meal that was eaten, as described above.

Bolus Tube Feeds

Patients who are given bolus enteral feeds are typically treated like patients who are eating meals. Like meals, bolus tube feeds are nutritional boluses that should be covered with nutritional insulin boluses. Because the hyperglycemia that sometimes accompanies bolus tube feeds is partly related to the glycemic load of this type of feedings, it is reasonable to provide 60% of the TDD of insulin as nutritional insulin when using this type of nutrition.

Continuous Tube Feeds

Patients who are given continuous enteral nutrition are somewhat different than patients who are eating meals. Continuous tube feed patients receive nutrition on a continuous basis. Therefore, these patients must also receive nutritional insulin in a way that provides continuous coverage. There is no proven superior insulin regimen for the continuously tube fed patient. Because the nutrition is being provided continuously, providing all of the TDD of insulin as a long‐acting, nonpeaking insulin might be considered the most physiologic regimen. However, if such a strategy is used and the tube feeding is interrupted for some reason, the patient will be in danger of hypoglycemia for the duration of action of the basal insulin. For this reason, the SHM Glycemic Control Task Force and many endocrinologists recommend using a long‐acting basal insulin at a dose that would provide a conservative estimate of the basal component (eg, 40% or less of the TDD), and dividing the remainder of the insulin and giving it as scheduled regular (every 6 hours) or rapid‐acting insulin (every 4 hours) for the nutritional coverage.

If tube feeds are interrupted, an infusion of 10% dextrose given intravenously at the same rate as the tube feed had been running (or the equivalent) can be provided to avoid hypoglycemia until the effect of the nutritional insulin has dissipated. It is reasonable to create a standing order to notify the physician, or start an alternate source of dextrose, in the case of tube feed interruption.

Parenteral Nutrition

For patients receiving parenteral nutrition, regular insulin, mixed with the parenteral nutrition, is safe and effective. Subcutaneous correction‐dose insulin is often used, in addition to the insulin that is mixed with the nutrition. When starting parenteral nutrition, the initial use of a separate insulin infusion can help in estimating the TDD of insulin that will be required.

TYPE 1 DIABETES

Because type 2 diabetes is more prevalent than type 1 diabetes, hospitalists will manage this form of diabetes most often. However, it is crucial that hospitalists are also able to manage type 1 diabetes in the hospital. For the most part, the principles presented in this article apply to all types of diabetes patients. This section outlines some special considerations to remember when caring for type 1 diabetes patients in the hospital that will assure prevention of diabetic ketoacidosis in patients with type 1 diabetes.

Type 1 diabetes patients completely lack endogenous insulin production. Therefore, these patients require exogenous insulin to be provided at all times. Type 1 diabetes patients need to be provided continuous, exogenous basal insulin, even when fasting, to suppress gluconeogenesis and ketone production. Failure to provide basal insulin to a type 1 diabetes patient can lead to the rapid development (in hours) of ketoacidosis. When receiving nutrition, the patient with type 1 diabetes must also be provided with nutritional insulin to control postprandial BGs. Whereas many type 2 diabetes patients may produce sufficient endogenous insulin to meet basal requirements when fasting (ie, they produce enough basal insulin to maintain metabolic stability when they are not taking in nutrition), this is never the case for type 1 diabetes patients.

In addition, type 1 diabetes patients typically exhibit less insulin resistance than type 2 diabetes patients, especially if they are not obese. Therefore, type 1 diabetes patients often have TDDs of insulin that are lower than those of type 2 patients. This is reflected in the recommendations in Figure 5, with the TDD of insulin estimate for a lean type 1 diabetes patient of 0.3 units/kg/day.

CONTINUOUS SUBCUTANEOUS INSULIN INFUSIONS (INSULIN PUMPS) IN THE HOSPITAL

Continuous subcutaneous insulin infusion therapy (CSII), often referred to as insulin pump therapy, involves the use of a pump to provide a continuous flow of subcutaneous basal insulin (usually a rapid‐acting analog) through a needle that is left in place. This basal rate is adjustable, and therefore can be customized to meet variable needs over a 24‐hour period. When the patient takes in nutrition, a bolus of the same insulin is given, via the pump, at a dose that is appropriate to cover the nutritional intake. The advantages of CSII therapy are the capacity for precision and flexibility of the basal insulin delivery (compared to the use of a once‐daily or twice‐daily dose of long‐acting insulin analog), and the lack of a need to inject insulin boluses (which are delivered via the pump). This type of therapy is preferred by some diabetes patients, and although it is not highly prevalent in most areas, it is common enough that hospitalists must have a plan for managing it in their practices.

There are many barriers to the use of CSII in the hospital. Most of these barriers are related to the need for constant management of the pump. Most hospitalists and nurses do not have the expertise to manage this therapy in the hospital. Although the patient (or caregiver) might have the expertise to manage the pump, this is an acceptable option only if the patient is competent to manage the pump. Patient competence to use the pump must be formally assessed and documented, and the patient must agree to perform the many components of care related to managing the pump (eg, documenting the basal rate and boluses given, documenting BGs, providing tubing and other supplies).

Many hospitals currently choose a policy of converting insulin pump therapy to standard subcutaneous insulin treatment for most hospitalized patients. Usually the conversion of CSII to a physiologic subcutaneous insulin regimen (as detailed in this article) is fairly straightforwardthe basal insulin will be given as long‐acting, low‐peaking insulin, and nutritional and correction‐dose insulin can then be added as a rapid‐acting analog, in accord with the patient's needs.

Hospitals that admit a large number of insulin pump patients, or those that choose to use pumps routinely in the hospital, should create a formal policy for pump use.11 It has been suggested that the policy should assure that there is formal assessment of the patient's competence to manage the pump, that there is professional oversight of the pump management (usually via endocrinology and diabetes educator consultation), that contraindications for CSII use are clearly stated, and that there is a formal mechanism for engaging the patient and informing him of his roles and responsibilities (eg, a written agreement). The clinician must write insulin orders in the medical record that specify the basal and bolus insulin doses which are being used. Pump use may be limited to floors where nurses receive at least basic education in the principles of CSII pumps.

CARE TRANSITIONS IN THE HOSPITAL

Transitioning from an Intravenous Insulin Infusion to a Subcutaneous Insulin Regimen

In the hospital, it is often necessary to switch a patient from an intravenous (IV) insulin infusion to a subcutaneous (SC) insulin regimen. When doing this, the clinician must decide how much SC insulin the patient will require. As discussed earlier, the TDD may be estimated based on home insulin doses or the patient's weight. However, for a patient who is treated with an IV insulin infusion, current insulin requirements can be estimated based on the recent IV drip rate. This is the preferred method for identifying a TDD in these patients, as the insulin delivery rate at the time of drip discontinuation provides a way of determining current insulin requirements.

Regardless of the dose of SC insulin that is chosen, it is important that SC insulin be delivered well in advance of the discontinuation of the IV insulin. Because the duration of action of IV insulin is on the order of 7 minutes, the patient may become rapidly hyperglycemic or develop ketoacidosis (in type 1 diabetes) in a matter of hours if the IV insulin infusion is discontinued before the SC insulin is active. Insulin infusion should not be stopped for at least 1 hour after the SC delivery of rapid‐acting or regular insulin, and at least 2‐3 hours after the SC delivery of intermediate‐acting or long‐acting insulin.2

Discharge Transition

The hospital discharge is another challenging transition for the patient with diabetes. While hospitalized, a diabetes patient's medication regimen will likely be altered to maintain metabolic control. At the time of discharge, the patient should be provided with an appropriate medication regimen. Moreover, the patient must be educated about any new medication or other changes that will be part of the new outpatient management routine. It is also important to assure that the patient does not have knowledge deficits related to diabetes survival skills. The Joint Commission has recently put forth the expectation that such education will be provided prior to hospital discharge.12 Areas outlined for this core diabetes self‐management education include: the definition of diabetes; finger‐stick BG monitoring; glycemic targets; insulin self‐administration; hypoglycemia prevention, recognition, and treatment; hyperglycemia recognition; sick day guidelines; and when to call a clinician for help. Communication of the discharge diabetes management plan to the patient's primary care provider should also be undertaken.

Please see the article entitled Bridge Over Troubled Waters: Safe and Effective Transitions for the Inpatient with Hyperglycemia in this supplement for additional details about both the IV to SC transition and the discharge transition.

CONCLUSIONS

Understanding the basic principles of the physiologic (basal, nutritional, and correction‐dose) insulin regimen will allow clinicians to formulate safe and effective insulin regimens in virtually any clinical situation. Simple steps can allow safe estimates of initial doses and titration toward glycemic goals. Additional information and case studies can be found in a Society of Hospital Medicine Task Force Educational Module,5 available online.

Additional resources for improving glycemic control in hospital patients are available online at the Glycemic Control Resource Room (http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/ResourceRoomRedesign/ GlycemicControl.cfm).

Recently, there has been a heightened interest in improving the quality and safety of the management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital.1 While observational data strongly suggests an association of hyperglycemia with morbidity and mortality in adults on general medicine and surgery units, clinical research has not yet defined the best practices for managing hyperglycemia in the hospital outside the intensive care unit (ICU). As a result, many physicians do not have a well‐formulated approach to managing hyperglycemia in the noncritically ill hospital patient, and the use of insulin therapy to attain targeted blood glucose (BG) control is often subject to practice variability, leading to suboptimal glycemic outcomes.

Practical guidelines for the management of this common clinical problem have been formulated by experts in the field, based on understanding of the physiology of glucose and insulin dynamics, the characteristics of currently available insulin preparations, and clinical experience. In 2004, in Clement et al.,2 the American Diabetes Association published a technical review promoting the use of physiologic (basal‐nutritional‐correction dose) insulin regimens in the hospital to achieve targeted glycemic outcomes. This approach has been disseminated via review articles,3 and more recently, a randomized, controlled trial demonstrated that hospitalized type 2 diabetes patients experienced better glycemic control when treated with a physiologic insulin regimen than when treated with sliding‐scale insulin alone.4 The Society of Hospital Medicine has assembled a Glycemic Control Task Force, which is charged with providing physicians and hospitals with practical tools to improve the safety and efficacy of diabetes management in the hospital. One product of this work is an educational module that serves as a tutorial on the best practice for the management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in the noncritically ill hospital patient.5 This article is based on that module, and provides a practical summary of the key concepts that will allow clinicians to confidently employ physiologic insulin regimens when caring for their hospital patients.

Case: Ms. X is a 56‐year‐old obese woman with type 2 diabetes mellitus who is admitted for treatment of an infected diabetes‐related foot ulcer. The patient will be allowed to eat dinner in a couple of hours, but the surgeons have requested that she be kept nothing by mouth (NPO) after midnight for surgical debridement in the morning. Her current weight is 100 kg, and her recent glycemic control can be summarized as having BG values that are usually in the mid‐200s (mg/dL) and a recent glycosylated hemoglobin (HbA1C) measurement of 10.9%. Her home medical regimen includes glipizide 10 mg daily, metformin 1000 mg twice daily, and 20 units of neutral protamine hagadorn (NPH) insulin at bedtime. Her blood glucose in the Emergency Department is 289 mg/dL. How should this patient's blood glucose be managed in the hospital?

PHARMACOLOGIC CONTROL OF BG IN THE HOSPITAL: INSULIN IS THE ANTIHYPERGLYCEMIC AGENT OF CHOICE

Although oral antihyperglycemic agents are frequently used in the outpatient setting, there are many potential disadvantages to using these medications in acutely ill hospital patients, as shown in Figure 1.2, 3 Oral antihyperglycemic agents, in general, are difficult to quickly titrate to effect, and have side effects that can limit their use in the hospital. Metformin can lead to lactic acidosis when it is used in clinical situations that predispose to lactate production (eg, renal failure, circulatory failure, hypoxemia). Therefore, metformin should be held in patients who have, or are at risk for, these conditions, each of which may be encountered in the hospital. Also, agents that stimulate the release of insulin, such as sulfonylureas, should be held in patients with variable nutritional intake, to prevent hypoglycemia. In contrast, insulin acts rapidly, responds in a timely fashion to dose titrations, and can be used effectively in virtually all patients and clinical situations to control BG levels. This makes insulin the treatment of choice for hyperglycemia in the hospital. Insulin can be administered via subcutaneous doses or as an intravenous infusion for cases in which rapid titration is the goal. Intravenous insulin infusions are the preferred mode of insulin delivery in the ICU setting, and may be appropriate for some noncritically ill patients in hospitals that have developed systems to safely provide them on general wards. Subcutaneous insulin is most commonly used in the noncritically ill patient population and is the focus of this article.

Figure 1
Potential disadvantages associated with specific oral antihyperglycemic agents in the hospital setting. Abbreviations: CHF, congestive heart failure; GLP, glucagon‐like peptide; DPP IV, dipeptidyl peptidase IV.

Although insulin is the drug of choice for managing hyperglycemia in the hospital, there are some situations when it is appropriate to continue oral antihyperglycemic medications in the hospital. These agents may be continued in hospitalized patients who are clinically stable, and who have normal nutritional intake, normal BG levels, and stable renal and cardiac function. They may also be started or resumed in the hospital if they are to be included in the discharge medication regimen once the patient is clinically stable and if it has been assured that contraindications to their use no longer exist.

Ms. X should be treated with a more robust (physiologic) insulin regimen. This statement would be true, even if she were not an inpatient with a foot infection. Her glycemic control is currently poor, as evidenced by her high HbA1C and her elevated admission BG, and is unlikely to be appreciably improved with the addition of any pharmacologic agent other than insulin. The glipizide should be held, as the patient will be NPO after midnight. Most experts would recommend holding the metformin at this time as well, since the patient will be undergoing a surgical procedure in the morning that places her at risk for predisposing factors to lactic acidosis.

INPATIENT GLYCEMIC TARGETS

At present, recommended glycemic targets for noncritically ill hospital patients are based entirely on expert opinion, as there have been no clinical studies directly comparing different glycemic targets in this patient population. However, the American College of Endocrinology, the American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists, and the American Diabetes Association do provide recommendations about glycemic targets for inpatients (Table 1).6, 7 Although controversial, these recommendations make it clear that uncontrolled hyperglycemia is no longer the accepted standard of care for hospitalized patients, and illustrate the consensus of expert opinion on the subject. Of note, many hospitals are adopting glycemic targets that are less stringent than those shown in Table 1, recognizing the challenges of controlling BG levels in hospitalized patients, and the potential risk for hypoglycemia when lower BG targets are used. Each hospital's glycemic control champions must reach consensus on a target BG range for their institution. In practice this range has been 90110 mg/dL for the lower BG limit and 140180 mg/dL for the upper BG limit. It is also important to note that the recommendations from professional organizations emphasize the need to individualize BG targets, based on the clinical circumstances of each patient.

Recommendations for Inpatient Glycemic Targets
Organization ICU(mg/dL) Non‐ICU, Preprandial (mg/dL)* Non‐ICU, Maximum(mg/dL)*
  • Abbreviations: ACCE, American College of Clinical Endocrinologists; ACE, American College of Endocrinology; ADA, American Diabetes Association; ICU, intensive care unit.

  • Specific glycemic targets for noncritically ill hospital patients are based entirely on expert opinion, as there have been no clinical studies directly comparing different glycemic targets in this patient population.

ACCE/ACE 110 110 180
ADA 110 90‐130 180

Ms. X is exhibiting glycemic values far outside of the recommended upper limit of 180 mg/dL, and treatment with insulin monotherapy is the most appropriate strategy in this case.

PHYSIOLOGIC (BASAL‐BOLUS, PLUS CORRECTION DOSE) INSULIN

The management of hyperglycemia and diabetes in the inpatient setting is challenging due to the many changes that patients experience in the hospital. Hospitalized patients often experience changes in their nutritional intake and their medication regimen. In addition, hospitalized patients usually experience the stress of acute illness and are treated with medications that might impact glycemic control. Figure 2 lists some of the barriers to achieving glycemic control in hospitalized patients. The inpatient insulin program needs to be flexible enough to allow for maintenance of glycemic control in the face of tumultuous circumstances. This can best be accomplished by the use of a physiologic insulin program. This means using exogenous insulin to mimic normal physiologic insulin activity by providing the correct types and doses of insulin at the correct times.

Figure 2
Barriers to glycemic control in hospitalized hyperglycemic patients.

A physiologic insulin regimen can be conceptualized as having 3 separate components: basal insulin, nutritional (or prandial/meal) insulin, and correction dose (or supplemental) insulin.2 A patient's total daily dose (TDD) of insulin is the sum of all of these, and represents the amount of insulin that a patient requires over the course of 1 day while receiving adequate nutrition. Basal insulin is the insulin normally released continuously by the pancreas, even when fasting. This serves to suppress glucose and ketone production. When nutrition is ingested, there is a surge in the level of glucose in the blood, and this surge is accompanied by rapid secretion of additional insulin to allow for the appropriate utilization of the glucose. The insulin that is secreted in response to nutritional intake is referred to as nutritional insulin. About one‐half of the total daily insulin secreted by a healthy normal human serves a basal function, and about one‐half is secreted in response to nutritional intake.8 Understanding this bit of physiology (the 50/50 rule) is very helpful for creating flexible regimens using exogenous insulin. Although the 50/50 rule is useful in many circumstances, there are some notable exceptions. In some cases, basal insulin might be expected to be less than one‐half of the TDD (eg, enteral feeds, as discussed below). Additional correction dose insulin is given to correct hyperglycemia that occurs despite scheduled doses of basal and nutritional insulin.

It is an important practical consideration to note that when a person with diabetes is acutely ill or stressed, as is commonly the case in the hospital setting, total daily insulin requirements increase. This is due to the action of insulin counterregulatory hormones such as catecholamines, cortisol, growth hormone, and glucagon. The hospitalized patient is therefore likely to require a TDD that is higher than that required when well. This is particularly true for the basal insulin dose. Conversely, insulin requirements will decrease as a patient recovers from acute illness, and it may be necessary to lower insulin doses as BG levels decrease during convalescence.

Exogenous basal insulin is provided as a long‐acting or intermediate‐acting, low‐peaking or nonpeaking insulin (eg, glargine or detemir), that allows for a consistent level of basal insulin (Figure 3). This insulin is provided even when the person is not receiving any nutrition. Although twice daily NPH insulin can be used to provide basal insulin, the peak (as shown in Figure 3) is likely to exceed the level of insulin that is truly required for basal needs, which can result in hypoglycemia. In theory, NPH insulin would be less physiologic than glargine or detemir, although no studies have compared these insulins in the hospital setting. When using NPH insulin as a basal insulin in a patient who is designated NPO, the dose should be reduced by one‐third to one‐half to avoid hypoglycemia that may occur when it peaks.2

Figure 3
Action profiles of the available insulins. Abbreviation: NPH, neutral protamine hagadorn. Used with permission from Pendergrass M, Boston, Massachusetts. The dark blue shadows in the background represent normal, endogenous insulin section.

Exogenous nutritional insulin must be provided in a way that matches the nutrition that is being provided to the patient. For example, a patient who is receiving nutritional boluses (ie, meals or bolus tube feeds) can be given rapid‐acting insulin (eg, aspart, glulisine, lispro) along with each nutritional bolus to cover the glycemic peak that is caused by the meal. The rapid‐acting analog insulins can also be given at the end of a meal or bolus tube feed for cases in which it is not clear if the nutrition will be well tolerated. A reduction in the insulin dose proportionate to the amount of nutrition actually taken can then be made to decrease the risk of subsequent hypoglycemia. Regular insulin can also be given in anticipation of a meal or tube feed, but its later peak (as shown in Figure 3) requires that it be given 30 minutes before a meal is ingested, the timing of which is a challenge on most nursing units. Patients who are not receiving any nutrition should not receive nutritional insulin. And, patients receiving alternative forms of nutrition will require different nutritional insulin regimens to adequately cover their nutritional glycemic loads, as discussed below.

The separate provision of basal and nutritional insulin results in a highly‐flexible insulin program that can provide basal insulin to patients even when they are not receiving significant nutrition, and can be easily adjusted to provide appropriate nutritional insulin to match actual nutritional delivery.

Correction‐dose insulin is the small amount of insulin that is given to patients, in addition to basal and nutritional insulin, to correct hyperglycemia. Correction‐dose insulin is usually provided as rapid‐acting or regular insulin (usually the same type as the nutritional insulin), and is given in a dose that is specifically designed to reduce the patient's BG back into the target range. It is usually given at the same time as the nutritional insulin in patients who are receiving nutrition (or every 4 to 6 hours in patients who are not). Correction‐dose insulin is often written in a stepped format, to provide the appropriate amount of insulin for a given BG value. It differs from the traditional sliding‐scale in that it is not used alone (but rather as 1 component of a physiologic program), and in that it is customized to match the insulin sensitivity for each patient. Most standardized order sets for subcutaneous insulin provide several different correction‐dose scales to choose from, depending on the patient's weight or total daily insulin requirement.

If correction‐dose insulin is required consistently, or in high doses, it suggests a need to modify the basal and/or nutritional insulin. A proportion of the total number of units of correction‐dose insulin given in the preceding 24 hours can be distributed into basal and nutritional insulin doses for the next day if there is ongoing need for significant correction‐doses of insulin. A well‐designed, physiologic insulin regimen should provide targeted glycemic control, without a need for constantly adding large correctional boluses.

Some insulins do not fit neatly into either basal or nutritional insulin categories. For example, mixed insulins (eg, 70/30, rapid‐analog/NPH mixtures) combine basal and nutritional insulins to form either a double‐peaking insulin or an intermediate‐peaking insulin. The use of this type of insulin makes it impossible to manipulate the basal and nutritional components separately to enable attainment of BG targets. Therefore, the role of this type of insulin is limited in the hospital setting. Mixed insulins may, however, be started once the patient is clinically stable if they will be part of the discharge regimen.

Diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospitalized patient require active management, and there are no autopilot insulin regimens. The use of sliding scale insulin alone to manage hyperglycemia is a common practice in hospitals.9 However, this is an historic practice that is based on the erroneous idea that BG can be managed with a reactive strategy. When sliding‐scale insulin is used as the sole modality of insulin therapy, insulin is provided only after metabolic control has been lost, and usually does not provide an appropriate dose of insulin, considering basal, nutritional, and correctional needs. The end result is poor glycemic control.9, 10 A recent randomized, controlled trial demonstrated that a physiologic insulin regimen is indeed superior to a standardized insulin sliding‐scale for managing inpatient hyperglycemia.4

Ms. X should be given an insulin regimen that includes basal, nutritional, and correctional components. The provision of separate basal and nutritional insulin will allow the clinicians to provide the patient with basal insulin even when her nutritional insulin is held, and to easily modify her nutritional insulin, depending on her nutritional intake.

PHYSIOLOGIC INSULIN: A PRACTICAL APPROACH

The use of physiologic insulin in the hospital can be facilitated by considering a stepwise approach (Figure 4).5 The first step is to estimate the amount of insulin that the patient will require over the course of a day if taking adequate nutrition (this is the TDD). If the patient has been treated with subcutaneous insulin before being admitted to the hospital, the clinician can use the outpatient TDD to gauge the insulin needs. To do this, the clinician simply adds up the total number of units of insulin that a patient takes at home in a day. Using this method to estimate the patient's TDD can be very helpful, even if the clinician plans to use different types of insulin while the patient is hospitalized. When using this approach, one should consider the patient's prior metabolic control on the existing regimen (ie, if the patient's glycemic control was poor on the preexisting regimen, an increase in the TDD would be necessary). In addition, clinicians should recognize that insulin requirements usually increase when patients are acutely ill, as discussed above. Managing diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital is very different than doing so in the outpatient arena, and hospitalists should not feel bound by the outpatient regimen.

Figure 4
A stepwise approach to physiologic insulin dosing in the hospital.

In addition, a weight‐based estimation of the TDD can be very helpful in determining a starting dose of insulin in a hospitalized patient (see Figure 5). An estimate of 0.4 units/kg of body weight provides a conservative starting point for the TDD for most patients. Occasionally, a lower starting dose of 0.3 units/kg of body weight might be safer for those patients who are likely to be very sensitive to insulin, or who are otherwise at increased at risk for hypoglycemia (see Figure 5). Patients who are overweight or obese often require considerably higher TDDs in the range of 0.5‐0.6 (or even more) units/kg of body weight. Some may require over 1 unit/kg of body weight for their TDD. Therefore, the doses provided by these calculations represent conservative estimates in most patients. Hospitalists should be able to confidently make these dose estimates and avoid dependence on nonphysiologic regimens such as sliding‐scale insulin alone.

Figure 5
Three approaches for estimating an appropriate initiation total daily dose (TDD) of insulin.

The presence of risk factors for hypoglycemia or hyperglycemia should temper the dose calculations. Clinical conditions associated with hyperglycemia include obesity, certain medications (eg, glucocorticoids, catecholamines, tacrolimus, cyclosporine), and changes in nutritional intake (Figure 2). Clinical conditions associated with hypoglycemia are summarized in Figure 6. It is important to recognize that these calculations are intended to give the clinician a safe and rational starting point for insulin dosing. More important than the calculations is the careful monitoring of BG levels and timely modifications of the insulin regimen that follow.

Figure 6
Conditions associated with increased risk of hypoglycemia in hospital patients.

The second step in developing a physiologic insulin regimen is to determine the patient's nutritional regimen. The third step, then, is to decide how the TDD will be distributed into basal and nutritional insulins, and which insulin will be used for each. As noted above, for most patients, approximately one‐half of the TDD will be provided as basal insulin, and the other one‐half given as nutritional insulin. When patients are receiving nutrition, the insulin must be given in a way that matches the timing of nutrition delivery (eg, with each meal or bolus tube feeding), and provides appropriate insulin coverage for the nutrition that is being provided.

Nutritional insulin will not be given if the patient is not receiving any nutrition, in which case basal insulin and correction‐dose insulin will usually be continued. Table 2 shows the preferred insulin regimens for a variety of different nutritional circumstances, as put forth by the Society of Hospital Medicine (SHM) Glycemic Control Task Force.5

Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force Recommendations: Preferred Insulin Regimens for Different Nutritional Situations
Nutritional Situation Necessary Insulin Components Preferred Regimen*
  • Abbreviations: HS, at bedtime; IV, intravenous; NPO, nothing by mouth; q 4 hours, every 4 hours; q 6 hours, every 6 hours; q AC, before every meal; RAA, rapid‐acting analog; TDD, total daily dose; TPN, total parenteral nutrition.

  • These are the preferred regimens for most patients in these situations by consensus of the SHM Glycemic Control Task Force. Alternate regimens may appropriately be preferred by institutions or physicians to meet the needs of their own patient population. RAA insulins include lispro, aspart, and glulisine.

NPO (or clear liquids) Basal insulin: 50% of TDD. Nutritional insulin: None. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: None. Correctional insulin: Regular insulin q 6 hours or RAA insulin q 4 hours. Other comments: Dextrose infusion (eg, D5 containing solution at 75‐150 cc/hour) recommended when nutrition is held. An IV insulin infusion is preferred for management of prolonged fasts or fasting type 1 diabetes patients.
Eating meals Basal insulin: 50% of TDD. Nutritional insulin: 50% of TDD, divided equally before each meal. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: RAA insulin with meals. Correctional insulin: RAA insulin q AC and HS (reduced dose at HS).
Bolus tube feeds Basal insulin: 40% of TDD. Nutritional insulin: 60% of the TDD, divided equally before each bolus feed. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: RAA insulin with each bolus. Correctional insulin: RAA insulin with each bolus.
Continuous tube feeds Basal insulin: 40% (conservative) of TDD. Nutritional insulin: 60% of the TDD in divided doses. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: RAA insulin q 4 hours or regular insulin q 6 hours. Correctional insulin: Should match nutritional insulin choice.
Parenteral nutrition Insulin is usually given parenterally, with the nutrition Initially, a separate insulin drip allows for accurate dose‐finding. Then, 80% of amount determined as TDD using drip is added to subsequent TPN bags as regular insulin. Use correctional subcutaneous insulin doses cautiously, in addition

For Ms. X, the first step is to determine a TDD estimate. This patient weighs 100 kg, and is obese. Therefore, a TDD of 0.5 units/kg (50 units) is appropriate. This dose may be an underestimate of her insulin needs, but it is a conservative, reasonable starting point. The patient's basal insulin could be provided by giving one‐half of the TDD as basal insulin, such as glargine, 25 units daily. In this case, the patient will be eating dinner soon, but then will be NPO after midnight for surgery. Appropriate nutritional insulin could be provided by giving one‐third of her total nutritional insulin before this meal as a rapid‐acting insulin analog (25 units nutritional insulin per day divided by 3 meals results in a dose of 8 units per meal). After she eats dinner, additional nutritional insulin will not be given until she resumes her diet postoperatively. While NPO, her basal insulin should be continued, and her blood glucose should be checked every 4‐6 hours. An appropriate correction‐dose insulin scale should be chosen to provide a supplemental insulin dose with each bedside test of the blood glucose level, if and only if, hyperglycemia is present.

Case continued: The patient is given 8 units of lispro insulin before her dinner, and is also given a dose of 25 units of glargine insulin. She is held NPO after midnight and dextrose‐containing fluid is provided intravenously overnight at a maintenance rate. In the morning her blood glucose is 161 mg/dL before surgery. Surgery goes well, and at lunch her blood glucose is 179 mg/dL, and she is given a food tray. However, the patient says that she feels mildly nauseated, and is not sure that she will be able to eat her lunch. How should her nutritional insulin be managed in this situation?

MATCHING NUTRITION AND NUTRITIONAL INSULIN: A DIFFICULT CHALLENGE

It is the provision of the correct type and amount of nutritional insulin at the right time that is most challenging in the hospital. In the hospital, a patient's nutritional intake is often interrupted. Patients might be made NPO as part of the treatment plan, or may not be able to take nutrition by mouth because of specific medical conditions. In some cases, enteral or parenteral feeding is used to replace or enhance oral feeding. Even when alternate routes of nutrition are employed, sudden interruptions in nutrition still remain common (eg, the feeding tube falls out). Ultimately, to provide the best possible care to a diabetes patient, the nutritional insulin that is delivered must match the actual nutritional delivery (Table 2). Ideally, each institution should choose a preferred, standardized approach for each nutritional situation.

Even if institutions standardize their approach to nutritional insulin delivery in general, clinicians must be able to accurately respond to the unplanned variations in nutrition that occur in the hospital. One example of this is the patient who is expected to eat meals, but who becomes suddenly unable to do so, such as in the case above. In cases like this, the best approach is to hold the patient's nutritional insulin and allow the patient to attempt to eat the provided meal. Then, a rapid‐acting insulin analog can be given just after the meal, in proportion to the amount of the meal that was eaten. If the patient really is unable to tolerate any of the meal, then no nutritional insulin is provided. If the patient does tolerate a portion of the meal (eg, 50% of the meal is consumed), then a corresponding amount of insulin is given (eg, 50% of the scheduled nutritional insulin is given). The quick onset of the rapid‐acting insulin analogs allows near‐physiologic effect, even when they are given after the meal.

Ms. X should be allowed to eat as much of the meal as she can tolerate. Afterward, her intake can be assessed, and insulin can be provided in proportion to the amount of the meal that was eaten, as described above.

Bolus Tube Feeds

Patients who are given bolus enteral feeds are typically treated like patients who are eating meals. Like meals, bolus tube feeds are nutritional boluses that should be covered with nutritional insulin boluses. Because the hyperglycemia that sometimes accompanies bolus tube feeds is partly related to the glycemic load of this type of feedings, it is reasonable to provide 60% of the TDD of insulin as nutritional insulin when using this type of nutrition.

Continuous Tube Feeds

Patients who are given continuous enteral nutrition are somewhat different than patients who are eating meals. Continuous tube feed patients receive nutrition on a continuous basis. Therefore, these patients must also receive nutritional insulin in a way that provides continuous coverage. There is no proven superior insulin regimen for the continuously tube fed patient. Because the nutrition is being provided continuously, providing all of the TDD of insulin as a long‐acting, nonpeaking insulin might be considered the most physiologic regimen. However, if such a strategy is used and the tube feeding is interrupted for some reason, the patient will be in danger of hypoglycemia for the duration of action of the basal insulin. For this reason, the SHM Glycemic Control Task Force and many endocrinologists recommend using a long‐acting basal insulin at a dose that would provide a conservative estimate of the basal component (eg, 40% or less of the TDD), and dividing the remainder of the insulin and giving it as scheduled regular (every 6 hours) or rapid‐acting insulin (every 4 hours) for the nutritional coverage.

If tube feeds are interrupted, an infusion of 10% dextrose given intravenously at the same rate as the tube feed had been running (or the equivalent) can be provided to avoid hypoglycemia until the effect of the nutritional insulin has dissipated. It is reasonable to create a standing order to notify the physician, or start an alternate source of dextrose, in the case of tube feed interruption.

Parenteral Nutrition

For patients receiving parenteral nutrition, regular insulin, mixed with the parenteral nutrition, is safe and effective. Subcutaneous correction‐dose insulin is often used, in addition to the insulin that is mixed with the nutrition. When starting parenteral nutrition, the initial use of a separate insulin infusion can help in estimating the TDD of insulin that will be required.

TYPE 1 DIABETES

Because type 2 diabetes is more prevalent than type 1 diabetes, hospitalists will manage this form of diabetes most often. However, it is crucial that hospitalists are also able to manage type 1 diabetes in the hospital. For the most part, the principles presented in this article apply to all types of diabetes patients. This section outlines some special considerations to remember when caring for type 1 diabetes patients in the hospital that will assure prevention of diabetic ketoacidosis in patients with type 1 diabetes.

Type 1 diabetes patients completely lack endogenous insulin production. Therefore, these patients require exogenous insulin to be provided at all times. Type 1 diabetes patients need to be provided continuous, exogenous basal insulin, even when fasting, to suppress gluconeogenesis and ketone production. Failure to provide basal insulin to a type 1 diabetes patient can lead to the rapid development (in hours) of ketoacidosis. When receiving nutrition, the patient with type 1 diabetes must also be provided with nutritional insulin to control postprandial BGs. Whereas many type 2 diabetes patients may produce sufficient endogenous insulin to meet basal requirements when fasting (ie, they produce enough basal insulin to maintain metabolic stability when they are not taking in nutrition), this is never the case for type 1 diabetes patients.

In addition, type 1 diabetes patients typically exhibit less insulin resistance than type 2 diabetes patients, especially if they are not obese. Therefore, type 1 diabetes patients often have TDDs of insulin that are lower than those of type 2 patients. This is reflected in the recommendations in Figure 5, with the TDD of insulin estimate for a lean type 1 diabetes patient of 0.3 units/kg/day.

CONTINUOUS SUBCUTANEOUS INSULIN INFUSIONS (INSULIN PUMPS) IN THE HOSPITAL

Continuous subcutaneous insulin infusion therapy (CSII), often referred to as insulin pump therapy, involves the use of a pump to provide a continuous flow of subcutaneous basal insulin (usually a rapid‐acting analog) through a needle that is left in place. This basal rate is adjustable, and therefore can be customized to meet variable needs over a 24‐hour period. When the patient takes in nutrition, a bolus of the same insulin is given, via the pump, at a dose that is appropriate to cover the nutritional intake. The advantages of CSII therapy are the capacity for precision and flexibility of the basal insulin delivery (compared to the use of a once‐daily or twice‐daily dose of long‐acting insulin analog), and the lack of a need to inject insulin boluses (which are delivered via the pump). This type of therapy is preferred by some diabetes patients, and although it is not highly prevalent in most areas, it is common enough that hospitalists must have a plan for managing it in their practices.

There are many barriers to the use of CSII in the hospital. Most of these barriers are related to the need for constant management of the pump. Most hospitalists and nurses do not have the expertise to manage this therapy in the hospital. Although the patient (or caregiver) might have the expertise to manage the pump, this is an acceptable option only if the patient is competent to manage the pump. Patient competence to use the pump must be formally assessed and documented, and the patient must agree to perform the many components of care related to managing the pump (eg, documenting the basal rate and boluses given, documenting BGs, providing tubing and other supplies).

Many hospitals currently choose a policy of converting insulin pump therapy to standard subcutaneous insulin treatment for most hospitalized patients. Usually the conversion of CSII to a physiologic subcutaneous insulin regimen (as detailed in this article) is fairly straightforwardthe basal insulin will be given as long‐acting, low‐peaking insulin, and nutritional and correction‐dose insulin can then be added as a rapid‐acting analog, in accord with the patient's needs.

Hospitals that admit a large number of insulin pump patients, or those that choose to use pumps routinely in the hospital, should create a formal policy for pump use.11 It has been suggested that the policy should assure that there is formal assessment of the patient's competence to manage the pump, that there is professional oversight of the pump management (usually via endocrinology and diabetes educator consultation), that contraindications for CSII use are clearly stated, and that there is a formal mechanism for engaging the patient and informing him of his roles and responsibilities (eg, a written agreement). The clinician must write insulin orders in the medical record that specify the basal and bolus insulin doses which are being used. Pump use may be limited to floors where nurses receive at least basic education in the principles of CSII pumps.

CARE TRANSITIONS IN THE HOSPITAL

Transitioning from an Intravenous Insulin Infusion to a Subcutaneous Insulin Regimen

In the hospital, it is often necessary to switch a patient from an intravenous (IV) insulin infusion to a subcutaneous (SC) insulin regimen. When doing this, the clinician must decide how much SC insulin the patient will require. As discussed earlier, the TDD may be estimated based on home insulin doses or the patient's weight. However, for a patient who is treated with an IV insulin infusion, current insulin requirements can be estimated based on the recent IV drip rate. This is the preferred method for identifying a TDD in these patients, as the insulin delivery rate at the time of drip discontinuation provides a way of determining current insulin requirements.

Regardless of the dose of SC insulin that is chosen, it is important that SC insulin be delivered well in advance of the discontinuation of the IV insulin. Because the duration of action of IV insulin is on the order of 7 minutes, the patient may become rapidly hyperglycemic or develop ketoacidosis (in type 1 diabetes) in a matter of hours if the IV insulin infusion is discontinued before the SC insulin is active. Insulin infusion should not be stopped for at least 1 hour after the SC delivery of rapid‐acting or regular insulin, and at least 2‐3 hours after the SC delivery of intermediate‐acting or long‐acting insulin.2

Discharge Transition

The hospital discharge is another challenging transition for the patient with diabetes. While hospitalized, a diabetes patient's medication regimen will likely be altered to maintain metabolic control. At the time of discharge, the patient should be provided with an appropriate medication regimen. Moreover, the patient must be educated about any new medication or other changes that will be part of the new outpatient management routine. It is also important to assure that the patient does not have knowledge deficits related to diabetes survival skills. The Joint Commission has recently put forth the expectation that such education will be provided prior to hospital discharge.12 Areas outlined for this core diabetes self‐management education include: the definition of diabetes; finger‐stick BG monitoring; glycemic targets; insulin self‐administration; hypoglycemia prevention, recognition, and treatment; hyperglycemia recognition; sick day guidelines; and when to call a clinician for help. Communication of the discharge diabetes management plan to the patient's primary care provider should also be undertaken.

Please see the article entitled Bridge Over Troubled Waters: Safe and Effective Transitions for the Inpatient with Hyperglycemia in this supplement for additional details about both the IV to SC transition and the discharge transition.

CONCLUSIONS

Understanding the basic principles of the physiologic (basal, nutritional, and correction‐dose) insulin regimen will allow clinicians to formulate safe and effective insulin regimens in virtually any clinical situation. Simple steps can allow safe estimates of initial doses and titration toward glycemic goals. Additional information and case studies can be found in a Society of Hospital Medicine Task Force Educational Module,5 available online.

Additional resources for improving glycemic control in hospital patients are available online at the Glycemic Control Resource Room (http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/ResourceRoomRedesign/ GlycemicControl.cfm).

References
  1. ACE/ADA Task Force on Inpatient Diabetes.American College of Endocrinology and American Diabetes Association Consensus Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Glycemic Control: A call to action.Diabetes Care.2006:29:19551962.
  2. Clement S,Baithwaite SS,Magee MF, et al.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in hospitals.Diabetes Care.2004;27:553591.
  3. Inzucchi SE.Management of hyperglycemia in the hospital setting.N Engl J Med.2006;355:19031911.
  4. Umpierrez GE,Andres P,Smiley D, et al.Randomized study of basal‐bolus insulin therapy in the inpatient management of patients with type 2 diabetes (Rabbit 2 trial).Diabetes Care.2007;30:21812186.
  5. Maynard G,Wesorick DH; for the Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force. Educational module: management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital patient: focus on subcutaneous insulin use in the non‐critically ill, adult patient. Published January 2007 on the Society of Hospital Medicine Website. Available at:http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/ResourceRoomRedesign/html/11Ed_Resources/01_Teaching_Slide.cfm. Accessed August2008.
  6. American College of Endocrinology Task Force on Inpatient Diabetes and Metabolic Control.American College of Endocrinology Position Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Metabolic Control.Endocr Pract.2004;10:7782.
  7. American Diabetes Association.Standards of Medical Care in Diabetes, 2006.Diabetes Care.2006;29(supp 1):s4s42.
  8. Larsen PR,Kronenberg HM,Melmed S,Polonsky KS, editors.Williams Textbook of Endocrinology.10th ed.Philadelphia, PA:Elsevier Science;2003.
  9. Schnipper JL,Barskey EE,Shaykevich S,Fitzmaurice G,Pendergrass ML.Inpatient management of diabetes and hyperglycemia among general medicine patients at a large teaching hospital.J Hosp Med.2006;1:145150.
  10. Queale WS,Seidler AJ,Brancati FL.Glycemic control and sliding scale use in medical inpatients with diabetes mellitus.Arch Intern Med.1997;157:545552.
  11. Cook B,Boyle ME,Cisar NS, et al.Use of continuous subcutaneous insulin infusion therapy in the hospital setting: Proposed guidelines and outcome measures.Diabetes Educ.2005;31:849857.
  12. Inpatient Diabetes Certification. Joint Commission. Available at:http://www.jointcommission.org/CertificationPrograms/Inpatient+Diabetes. Accessed April2008.
References
  1. ACE/ADA Task Force on Inpatient Diabetes.American College of Endocrinology and American Diabetes Association Consensus Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Glycemic Control: A call to action.Diabetes Care.2006:29:19551962.
  2. Clement S,Baithwaite SS,Magee MF, et al.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in hospitals.Diabetes Care.2004;27:553591.
  3. Inzucchi SE.Management of hyperglycemia in the hospital setting.N Engl J Med.2006;355:19031911.
  4. Umpierrez GE,Andres P,Smiley D, et al.Randomized study of basal‐bolus insulin therapy in the inpatient management of patients with type 2 diabetes (Rabbit 2 trial).Diabetes Care.2007;30:21812186.
  5. Maynard G,Wesorick DH; for the Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force. Educational module: management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital patient: focus on subcutaneous insulin use in the non‐critically ill, adult patient. Published January 2007 on the Society of Hospital Medicine Website. Available at:http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/ResourceRoomRedesign/html/11Ed_Resources/01_Teaching_Slide.cfm. Accessed August2008.
  6. American College of Endocrinology Task Force on Inpatient Diabetes and Metabolic Control.American College of Endocrinology Position Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Metabolic Control.Endocr Pract.2004;10:7782.
  7. American Diabetes Association.Standards of Medical Care in Diabetes, 2006.Diabetes Care.2006;29(supp 1):s4s42.
  8. Larsen PR,Kronenberg HM,Melmed S,Polonsky KS, editors.Williams Textbook of Endocrinology.10th ed.Philadelphia, PA:Elsevier Science;2003.
  9. Schnipper JL,Barskey EE,Shaykevich S,Fitzmaurice G,Pendergrass ML.Inpatient management of diabetes and hyperglycemia among general medicine patients at a large teaching hospital.J Hosp Med.2006;1:145150.
  10. Queale WS,Seidler AJ,Brancati FL.Glycemic control and sliding scale use in medical inpatients with diabetes mellitus.Arch Intern Med.1997;157:545552.
  11. Cook B,Boyle ME,Cisar NS, et al.Use of continuous subcutaneous insulin infusion therapy in the hospital setting: Proposed guidelines and outcome measures.Diabetes Educ.2005;31:849857.
  12. Inpatient Diabetes Certification. Joint Commission. Available at:http://www.jointcommission.org/CertificationPrograms/Inpatient+Diabetes. Accessed April2008.
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Page Number
17-28
Page Number
17-28
Article Type
Display Headline
Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital: A practical guide to subcutaneous insulin use in the non‐critically ill, adult patient
Display Headline
Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital: A practical guide to subcutaneous insulin use in the non‐critically ill, adult patient
Sections
Article Source
Copyright © 2008 Society of Hospital Medicine
Disallow All Ads
Correspondence Location
3119 Taubman Center, 1500 E. Medical Center Drive, Box 0376, Ann Arbor, MI 48109‐0376
Content Gating
Gated (full article locked unless allowed per User)
Gating Strategy
First Peek Free
Article PDF Media

Implementing Insulin Infusion Protocols

Article Type
Changed
Mon, 01/02/2017 - 19:34
Display Headline
Designing and implementing insulin infusion protocols and order sets

The delayed and variable absorption of subcutaneous (SC) insulin has always provided challenges for the rapid and predictable control of hyperglycemia in the acute care setting. Conversely, intravenous infusion of human regular insulin provides a continuous and essentially immediate delivery mechanism. Once in the circulation, insulin has a very short half‐life of about 5 to 7 minutes and a biological effect of about 20 minutes.1 Intravenous insulin infusions are well‐established in several acute care settings including hyperglycemic emergencies, perioperative glucose management, and glucose control during labor and delivery.2, 3

The beneficial effects seen in early trials of strict glycemic control involving intensive care unit (ICU) patients47 (particularly cardiac surgery patients) and guidelines for inpatient glycemic control8 stimulated widespread interest in adopting insulin infusion protocols (IIPs) focused on achieving strict glycemic targets. The initial enthusiasm has been tempered by uneven results in trials of tight glycemic control, concerns about the effects of excessive hypoglycemia, and the resources needed to implement and maintain an IIP.9 Although considerable controversy about the ideal glycemic target for different patient populations exists, and will likely continue for some time, this article is not a review of the evidence for supporting 1 glycemic target versus another. Regardless of the glycemic target chosen, a standardized algorithm and accompanying program of monitoring are widely endorsed for both safety and quality reasons.1014 Most medical centers are at least attempting to implement nurse‐driven protocols that have demonstrated better perfomance than SC regimens15 and physician‐driven insulin infusions.16, 17 In this article, we outline several variables in IIP design and implementation and endorse several aspects of design and implementation that will likely result in improved staff acceptance and, ultimately, a more safe and effective IIP.

PREPARING TO IMPLEMENT AN IIP

Building The Team

Implementing a medical centerwide standardized insulin infusion order set with supporting policies, protocols, monitoring standards, and the requisite educational programs is a major task for any hospital. This is not a simple maneuver involving only 1 or 2 interested individuals and requires much more than selecting a published protocol and disseminating it to various patient care units. Instead, to manage the full spectrum of diabetes programs and protocols, an institution must convene a multidisciplinary steering committee or task force. This should include representation from nursing, nursing administration, pharmacy, nutrition services, and the quality improvement department. Physicians should include hospitalists, intensivists, and endocrinologists but may also involve anesthesiologists and surgeons, as applicable. At times, additional members may need to be recruited according to project needs.

Identifying the Stakeholders and Current Practices

In developing or improving currently utilized IIPs, the multidisciplinary committee would benefit from careful background work before moving forward. First, administrative and institutional support must be secured to endorse uniform standards for insulin infusions, and to provide the important infrastructure needed to facilitate the work involved. Clinical and administrative stakeholders from the key departments then need to be identified.

All insulin infusion orders and policies/procedures presently used in the institution should be identified and examined. The developers and/or users of these order sets should be engaged in a dialogue and encouraged to share their experiences regarding their current practice and the attendant work flow, glucose monitoring, and data collection and reporting. Immediate concerns should be clearly addressed. Measurement systems for glycemic control, hypoglycemia, and insulin use patterns should assess current practice and the impact of subsequent modifications of the protocol or initiation of new protocols. We recommend using glucometrics consistent with those endorsed by the Society of Hospital Medicine (SHM) Glycemic Control Task Force elsewhere in this supplement.18

Addressing the Burden of Change

Through this process, the committee will uncover barriers, dysfunctional and inconsistent practices, and individuals who will pose challenges. Identifying these issues should not discourage the team, but rather it should guide the interventional strategies, and help build consensus that change may be required. There must be caution not to exclude significant individuals simply because they resist changes. Indeed, if they are included and have the opportunity to contribute to the process, success is much more likely.

It is important for process leaders to understand the implications of what is proposed, particularly for nursing services.19 For example, it has been shown that IIPs require about 5 minutes per patient per hour for glucose monitoring and dose adjustments.20 Acknowledging and attempting to address this burden proactively (often well over 2 hours per day) can gain staff acceptance more effectively than a laissez faire approach. In this regard, some effort should be invested in nursing education of the benefits of tight glycemic management on critical care outcomes. The difficult‐to‐quantify work involved when patients' blood glucose is not well controlled (eg, paging physicians for stat insulin orders) should also be part of this discussion.

Identifying and Addressing Barriers to IIP implementation

There are numerous potential barriers to implementation of IIPs. Table 1 identifies some of the most frequent ones along with potential strategies or solutions. Very common barriers include skepticism surrounding the benefits of tight glycemic control, fear of hypoglycemia, and difficulty agreeing on glycemic targets.

Barriers to Effective Implementation and Utilization of Insulin Infusion Protocols, and Strategies to Address Them
Barrier Strategy/Solution
Insufficient glucose meters to accommodate the increased testing needs Purchase additional glucose meters.
Ask the vendor to provide extra on‐site replacement meters at no charge until they are activated.
Nursing time requirements involved in monitoring and adjustments. Get ancillary help to check glucose values
○eg, nurse assistants
Make extra efforts to make protocols clear with few required calculations
Avoid duplicate recording
Consider meters requiring shorter time and a smaller sample (to avoid need for re‐sampling)
Requirement for uncomfortable frequent sticks Utilize central lines or arterial lines.
○These tend to vary by < 10% from POC readings
○May not be available in noncritical care settings
Staff fear of hypoglycemia Educate on the benefit of glucose control and the true definition of hypoglycemia
○Measure staff fasting glucose levels to demonstrate normal range.
Establish metrics and publicly report hypoglycemia event rates.
Pilot IIP on small scale.
Protocol and education for prevention of hypoglycemia.
Difficulty gaining consensus on glycemic target Compromise if needed on the glucose target
○eg, start with a higher goal such as 90‐140 mg/dL.
○Others will be willing to lower the goal when feasibility is seen.
Allow for different targets in different units if indicated
○maintain consistency in other respects.
Focal points of resistance Identify a local nurse or physician champion within resistant site.
Pilot the protocol in an area with least resistance
○Will gain momentum with initial success and adjustments
Lack of integrated information and reporting systems Incorporate information systems personnel onto team
Advocate for improved reporting capability with administrative leaders
Use sampling methods to collect data until automated systems are available.
Multiple providers, hand offs, and opportunities for error and communication breakdown, diffusion of responsibility for glycemic control Involvement of varied front line providers
Check lists for important items to communicate on transfer/transport
Common protocols/education for similar units

Whereas the national guidelines call for a glycemic target in critical care areas with an upper limit of 110 mg/dL, there is room for debate, and tailoring of the glycemic target to fit individual patient circumstances is often advisable. Starting with a less aggressive glycemic target can be good politics (and perhaps good medicine as well). Once the higher glycemic targets are achieved safely, it can pave the way for a more aggressive approach.

Fear of hypoglycemia is one of the most potent barriers to intensive insulin infusion implementation. Because hyperglycemia is such a common condition in critical care units, nursing and physician staff may have developed a skewed view of the definition of hypoglycemia, at times fearing for their patient when the glucose values reach a level of 100 mg/dL or so. Polling the nurses on what they think their own fasting glucose levels are, and then actually measuring them can be an effective strategy (the nurses may be surprised that the patient's scary 90 mg/dL reading is higher than their own). It should also be emphasized that properly designed and implemented protocols may actually decrease the incidence of hypoglycemia when compared to standard care which may involve individually and sometimes improperly adjusted intravenous (IV) insulin (discussed further below).

CHOOSING AN IIP FOR YOUR HOSPITAL

See Table 2 for a comparison of several features identified in selected published protocols.7, 2127 This is not a comprehensive list of all protocols found in the literature. Rather, the authors consider it representative of the various types of IIPs or best recognized IIPs in the literature. Note that there is variability in study population, the glucose targets, hypoglycemia, the time to reach the target, and the time spent in the target range. Other practical factors to consider in reviewing the literature and selecting an IIP design are the complexity of the protocol, the required process steps or calculations, the evidence for staff acceptance, and the level of resources supporting the published protocol.

Characteristics of Selected Published Insulin Infusion Protocols
Author (reference) IIP Description Patient population Glucose Target (mg/dL) Mean Glucose (mg/dL) Time to Reach Target Hypoglycemia
Van den Berghe7 Initial and subsequent rates based on BG Surgical ICU 80‐110 6 AM glucose 103 19 Not reported 5.1% of patient < 41 mg/dL
Nurses had latitude
Van den Berghe21 TPN standard with IIP Medical ICU 80‐110 6 AM glucose 105 Not reported 19% of patients < 41 mg/dL
Furnary22 (2001‐2003 version) Initial dose determined by BG and type of DM CABG 100‐150 (there is a newer protocol with lower targets) Not mentioned. Appears to be < 150 94% within 3 hours 0.5% < 60 (% of readings?) Not reported with any specificity
Changes based on present BG and last change
Relatively complex
Goldberg23 Dosing based on: MICU 100‐139 Not specified 10.1 hours 0.3% of readings <60 BG <60 in 5.4% of patient days
○Current BG
○Velocity of glucose change
Goldberg24 ○Infusion rate CT Surgery 100‐139 122 17 Once target attained. 5 hours 0.2% of all BGs < 60 mg/Dl BG < 60 in 2.9% of patient days
Uses 3 tables
Relatively complex
DeSantis25 Initial dose based on BG Mostly surgical ICU and CVICU (75% surgical) 80‐110 135 49 (higher in SICU and CVICU alone) 10.6 hours 1.5% of readings
< 60 mg/dL (lower for CVICU & SICU alone)
Changes based on present glucose and rate of change.
IV bolus used with changes.
Braithwaite26 6‐column method Trauma ICU <110 mg/dL 129 25 16.7 hours 2.4% of readings < 70 mg/dL
Davidson27 Computer‐directed algorithm (similar to column method) Full spectrum Varied by year and situation Not reported (approximately 125 mg/dL when stable) 90% < 150 mg/dL in 3 hours 0.6% of readings <50 mg/dL 2.6% of patients

Structural Differences in Protocols

Protocols that vary by level of insulin sensitivity generally use column methods with the individual columns representing different categories of insulin sensitivity, placing the most sensitive category on the left with the highest level of insulin resistance on the far right. These methods use a multiplier to adjust for sensitivity. They are constructed according to the rule of 1500, 1700, or 1800, thereby adjusting for changes in insulin sensitivity that follow surgery or other changes in physiologic stress in the acute setting. Rate of change is addressed by shifting to the right if correction of hyperglycemia is too slow and to the left if the glucose is dropping too rapidly.

Most institutions using the column/emnsulin sensitivity method, implement paper orders as first published by Markovitz.28 The same concepts have been used to develop computer‐assisted insulin infusion protocols. One published method is the Glucommander,27 but a number of institutions are using similar computer‐assisted methods developed locally.

Other methods use the present glucose and change from last glucose to constantly adjust to any situation.7, 2125 They usually involve 2 or 3 steps and often require more calculations by the nurse. These methods are purported to be more agile or flexible but there have been no direct comparisons with the column methods looking at effectiveness, nursing errors, or hypoglycemic risk. The Yale Protocol23, 24 and the Portland Protocol22 are 2 prominent examples of this type of protocol. Adjustments are defined as units, percent change, or a combination of both.

Limitations of the IIP Literature

There had been few published insulin protocols aimed at reaching specific glucose goals when the Leuven surgical ICU experience7 was published in 2001. These early publications featured algorithms that adjusted insulin infusions solely on the basis of glucose level, and did not take the velocity of change, direction of change, proximity to glycemic target, or different insulin sensitivities into account. Also, the targeted glucose goals in those reports were not consistent with the present standards.2931 Other published protocols featured glucose‐insulin‐potassium infusion (GIK) protocols that focused on the amount of insulin administered and failed to attain appropriately defined glucose targets.32, 33 These publications offer no real guidance in crafting a modern glycemic targetoriented protocol.

Whereas more than 20 modern IIPs directed at glycemic targets have been published,7, 1517, 2127, 3450 many of the published protocols represent local modifications of ones previously published elsewhere, and no published, prospective, head‐to‐head comparisons of the best‐known IIPs are available.

Several reviews of previous published reports include comparisons of IIPs with varied areas of emphasis.5154 The reliability of such comparisons is limited by the inconsistency in methodology between studies and the different populations studied. For example, medical populations are generally harder to control and are more prone to hypoglycemia than surgical populations,7, 21, 23, 24, 50 and some studies include only patients with diabetes.4, 5, 38 In addition, definitions of hypoglycemia and methods of analyzing glycemic control are highly variable, making comparisons of IIPs challenging.39 As a result, attempts to compare published IIP results without consideration of the population studied could lead to erroneous conclusions.

In spite of the aforementioned limitations, there are several lessons we can learn from the IIP literature and accumulated clinical experience at a variety of centers.

Glycemic Targets and Other IIP Features Can Evolve over Time

Revisions of protocol details, including glycemic targets, often evolve over time. This deliberate approach can facilitate staff acceptance by demonstrating safe achievement of higher glycemic targets. The Yale team initially selected a conservative glycemic target of 100‐139 mg/dL, as depicted in Table 1.23, 24 They subsequently lowered the target range to 90‐119 mg/dL and increased the initial insulin bolus amount by 40%.50 The modified protocol displayed improved performance and yet retained safety, with only 1 glucose reading < 40 mg/dL in 101 patients over 117 runs of insulin infusion.

The Portland Protocol, used primarily in cardiac surgery patients, has also evolved over time. This group has altered the IIP in a number of ways at least 4 times. These protocols, including the most recent protocol targeting glucose levels of 70‐110 mg/dL, is found at www.portlandprotocol.org.4, 5, 55, 56

Medical and Surgical Patients Are Different

The most convincing evidence for stringent glycemic control evolved from studies of surgical patients.4, 5, 7 Acknowledging this fact, along with the greater degree of difficulty in achieving glycemic targets safely in critically ill medical patients, have led many to endorse higher glycemic targets for certain populations than others.57 Although we generally favor a uniform glycemic target for a unit serving a particular patient population, adopting a less stringent glycemic target in medical ICU settings compared to surgical ICU settings is reasonable and prudent in many institutional settings. However, the accompanying challenges regarding boarding patients and floating nurses between units would also need to be considered.

Local Factors and Implementation Methods Matter

The success or failure of a protocol likely depends on local factors and implementation methods as much as it does on the structure of the protocol itself. IIP development and implementation is a process that must be approached systematically and with attention to detail.19 Errors in approach can delay or abort the implementation, or potentially lead to an ineffective or unsafe protocol for the institution.

The Yale experience again provides us with a salient example.58 Initial efforts to implement an IIP failed due to a number of factors: a complicated protocol, insufficient nursing involvement, and inadequate training and education led to incomplete buy‐in, and nursing concerns over hypoglycemia that actually was within the goal range of the protocol. Successful implementation was not achieved until the leaders learned from their mistakes. Nurses and other clinical allies were involved and educated. Important stakeholders, who were not included earlier, were now involved, and front‐line nursing staff were engaged in proactive troubleshooting.

In another example, multisite studies like VISEP59 and Glucontrol9 have tried to adapt the Leuven protocol, only to struggle with excessive hypoglycemia and an inability to replicate the tight glycemic control enjoyed by van den Berghe and colleagues.7, 21 The Leuven care team augmented the performance of the IIP by their experience with the protocol, physician involvement, and adjustments made by the nursing staff.

Some IIPs Have Lower Hypoglycemia Rates than Others

Recent articles have highlighted the association of intensive insulin treatment, hypoglycemia, and mortality in the medical ICU population.60 Concerns that excessive hypoglycemia could reduce or reverse the overall benefits of intensive insulin therapy has led some to call for moderation of critical care glycemic targets.61 Comparisons of IIPs5254, 61 that include information about the propensity of the IIP to produce hypoglycemia are therefore important.

The Leuven IIP has been reported to yield high rates of hypoglycemia with almost 20% of patients suffering from severe hypoglycemia (glucose < 40 mg/dL) in some studies.9, 21, 59 By way of contrast, several different IIP regimens have frequently achieved identical or very similar glycemic control with less than 5% of the patients experiencing severe hypoglycemia.27, 50, 62 Although implementation factors, severity of illness, and other population factors play some role, some protocols have an inherent structural propensity to produce more hypoglycemia than others. In the case of the Leuven protocol, there is more of a role for clinician adjustment, and the written protocol itself does not call for much active adjustment as the patient enters into the hypoglycemic range.52 In contrast, more sophisticated and complicated regimens adjust more aggressively in this range and consistently induce less hypoglycemia.

Successful Methods to Manage the Complexity of an IIP

Many modern IIPs use bolus insulin to expedite control and adjust the infusion rate based on the velocity and direction of glucose change, not just the glucose value.52 Insulin resistance is taken into account in some models, and multiple calculation steps are required in several reported protocols.52 The improved automation and control refinements come at a cost of increased complexity.

Intensive implementation efforts and strong leadership can overcome some issues, as demonstrated by the Yale experience, but 2 other strategies have commonly demonstrated success. First, focused expert glycemic management teams that directly oversee many aspects of the IIP, or even assume direct management roles, can be quite effective,25 especially during early implementation.

Automation of calculations and computerization is another method to consider, and many recent reports involve applications of web‐based or other computerized models.27, 40, 42, 43, 46, 48, 63 Comparisons of computerized versus manual methods, computerized versus column methods, and a computerized nomogram‐versus‐chart method are now available.42, 45, 46, 48, 62 Computerized protocols show significant promise and would be expected to reduce dosing errors. These instruments generally present the nurse with a specific infusion rate after each monitored glucose and then recommend an interval for the next glucose determination. In direct comparisons, they tend to perform as well or often better than conventional methods. For example, in the most recent randomized trial comparing the Glucommander to a paper‐based column method in an ICU, Newton and colleagues found the computerized method reached the goal more rapidly and reached a lower mean glucose without increasing the rate of severe hypoglycemia (< 40 mg/dL).62 Computerized methods also facilitate data collection for analytical purposes.

Computerized systems (both commercial and home‐grown versions) are becoming more common and appear to hold significant benefits as long as they are backed by a validated algorithm. Whereas many institutions are not yet in a position to integrate such protocols into their standard or electronic record systems, we expect the trend for increased implementation to continue.

ENHANCING THE DESIGN OF YOUR IIP

Once the improvement team has identified and examined current order sets and protocols in the context of the literature, we encourage consolidation of institutional insulin infusion orders into a common basic structure. This basic structure should be enhanced by incorporating a variety of elements designed to enhance the reliability of use and safety of the IIP. These design features are outlined in Table 3. Randomized trial evidence of the effectiveness of these design features are largely lacking, but they are well grounded in reliability principles and common experience, and have also been recommended by others.1013, 58

Ingredients for Insulin Infusion Protocol Orders
□Identifies the glycemic target range
□Includes clear dosing instructions with acceptable calculation requirements for nurses
□Incorporates glucose monitoring expectations
□Easy physician ordering, check box simplicity
□Criteria for calling the physician
□Includes guidance on steps to follow for interruption of nutrition
□States guidelines on when to initiate the infusion and when to stop
□Defines the insulin concentration clearly and consistently
□Considers changing insulin sensitivity as well as the current glucose value and rate of change in attempting to reach goal and avoid hypoglycemia
□Includes or refers to a standardized hypoglycemia treatment protocol and prevention protocol.
□Incorporates guidelines and cautions for transition to subcutaneous insulin
□Ideally adaptable outside of critical care unitclear definition of locations where order set is to be used.

The orders should require a single physician signature and limited physician choices as the vehicle initiating the nurse‐driven protocol. The glycemic target range should be explicitly identified, and guidance for calling the physician and how to handle interruptions in nutrition should be embedded in the order set. Frequent monitoring of glucose levels is necessary for the safe infusion of insulin. Guidance for how often the monitoring is required must be explicit and included in the infusion order set, and standardization of documentation of the infusion rates and glucose values is highly desirable. IIPs that adjust based on the velocity of glucose change and insulin sensitivity are desirable. Certain elements may be more appropriate for some institutions than others, partly based on previous protocols and methods of practice. For example, the hypoglycemia protocol may be embedded or referred to as a separate standard of care with clear presence in the chart. The intended timing of conversion from IV to SC insulin should be included, but the actual method may be the subject of a separate order set. At other times, the conversion formula will be part of the initial intravenous order set.

IMPLEMENTATION: ADDRESSING SAFETY ISSUES

The use of insulin infusions comes with several potential hazards. Many of these potential complications can be proactively addressed, thereby minimizing accidental injuries to the patient on an insulin infusion.

Standardizing Insulin Infusion Preparations and Priming New Tubing

Varied concentrations or types of insulin for insulin infusions can lead to serious errors. Insulin infusions should generally be centrally prepared with a standard concentration of regular insulin in the pharmacy (usually 1 unit/cc), and the infusion concentration should be included in your infusion order set. Insulin binding to IV tubing can lead to false elevation of insulin requirements, potentially followed by serious hypoglycemia. When nurses change IV tubing or initially set up an insulin drip, education/emnstructions on priming new tubing with a small amount of insulin infusion to saturate the binding to the polyvinyl chloride tubing should be incorporated into their routine. Although 50 mL has often been recommended for priming, a recent study64 found that 20 mL of insulin infusion is enough to reach the saturation point.

Avoiding Over‐Reliance on the Insulin Protocol

Nurse‐driven insulin infusion protocols automate frequent insulin adjustment and reduce unnecessary calls to the physician. Although this is generally a decided advantage, the care team can be lulled into a sense of false security by the presence of orders that allow for such adjustment. Increasing the rate of an insulin infusion without thoughtful attention to factors that may be playing a role in this increased requirement (such as developing sepsis, other medical decompensation, steroid boluses, or an increase in carbohydrate intake) can have serious consequences. By the same token, an unanticipated rapid decrease in insulin requirement should lead to a reassessment of the infusion, and an inquiry about cessation of glucocorticoid therapy or nutrition. Rarely, a pharmacy or nursing error may induce a pseudo‐change in insulin requirements. The protocol should lead the nurse to seek advice and alert the physician to review potential causes of dramatic changes in insulin requirements, rather than simply adjusting insulin or nutrition to correct the present abnormal value.

Interruption of the Insulin Infusion

Interruption of insulin infusions may occur for many reasons, either intended or unintended. At times, the doctors or nurses may temporarily stop the protocol to allow for delivery of blood products or medications when IV access is limited. Infusions may mistakenly not be restarted, or deliberate discontinuation may not be adequately communicated, potentially leading to worsening hyperglycemia or even the development of ketoacidosis, and other adverse clinical outcomes. Therefore, the algorithm should have clear orders for the nurses to contact the ordering physician if the infusion is stopped for any reason, other than protocol‐driven cessation due to falling blood glucose concentrations.

Interruption of Nutrition, Field Trips, and Communication

Insulin infusion commonly provides both basal and nutritional insulin requirements. Interruptions in nutritional intake are extremely common in the inpatient setting, with a potential to cause serious hypoglycemia. Feeding tubes are often pulled out without warning; enteral nutrition may also need be halted if high gastric residuals are noted or during certain diagnostic tests. At times, IV carbohydrate sources (dextrose, partial parenteral nutrition, total parenteral nutrition) may be interrupted as well. In some cases, field trips out of the critical care units to the operating room, imaging studies, or other hospital locations add another layer of challenges to managing the IIP. Staff in these various areas may not be familiar with the IIP or monitoring standards and techniques, and potentially may not even be aware that the patient is on an insulin infusion. It is therefore crucial to anticipate these pitfalls and develop effective institutional procedures for addressing them. For example, many institutions use D10 solution to replace the carbohydrate calories that are lost when tube feedings have to be interrupted in a gram‐per‐gram fashion. Patients should be clearly identified as being on an insulin infusion. The requirement for consistent glucose monitoring, hypoglycemia recognition and treatment, and insulin infusion adjustment requires either critical care nurse care of the patient on the field trip, or training in the same skills in areas such as endoscopy, interventional radiology, and operating rooms including the preoperative and postoperative care units. In any case, all services should be involved in crafting solutions that will ensure a consistent approach to glycemic control as the patient travels off‐unit. Monitoring and treatment equipment needs to be readily available in all sites, and hypoglycemia protocols need to be distributed and supported in all areas.

Preventing and Treating Hypoglycemia

Some hypoglycemia will occur with infusion protocols, no matter how carefully a protocol is crafted and how well it is administered. Hypoglycemia protocols should therefore be incorporated directly into an infusion order set. Treatment of hypoglycemic events with a full 50 mL of D50 solution is equivalent to 25 g of carbohydrate, which will raise glucose levels in the average patient by 125 mg/dL. Many institutions discourage the overcorrection of hypoglycemic events by encouraging giving lesser aliquots of D50 based on the degree of hypoglycemia.

Preventing hypoglycemia by recognizing hypoglycemia risk factors, proper monitoring, and anticipating reductions in insulin requirements from decreasing severity of illness, nutritional intake, or steroid dosing can also reduce the frequency of hypoglycemic events.

IMPLEMENTATION: EDUCATING AND ENGAGING NURSING AND PHYSICIAN STAFF

Nursing staff generally bear the brunt of the burden on the front line of implementing intensive IIPs. Educational efforts for nurses should include the rationale for intensive insulin therapy and use of an IIP. Additionally, detailed, case‐based instruction on utilization of the IIP is required. Properly educated, nursing staff often become the strongest advocates of the IIP. In addition, they can frequently provide important input when situations arise that require troubleshooting. Regular feedback sessions early in implementation that address ease of use, clarity of orders, and difficulties encountered by nurses can be invaluable. Improvement teams need to provide frequent in‐service training and updates on the IIP selected after implementation. This is imperative to promote nursing acceptance and adherence to the IIP chosen, particularly with consideration for traveling nurses. The importance of nursing champions to design and carry out this work cannot be overstated. Educational programs focusing on the physician staff can also be very useful, particularly when focused on high‐volume physicians and influential thought leaders.

IMPLEMENTATION: ADDRESSING COMMON CLINICAL SITUATIONS

Steroids

Steroid boluses are commonly an integral part of regimens targeting a variety of conditions, such as transplant rejection, reactive airways disease, certain infections, cancer, and a variety of autoimmune disorders. This can lead to glycemic excursions and rapidly varying insulin requirements. Educational efforts and treatment regimens should address the disproportionate impact that steroids have on postprandial glycemic excursions. To minimize the glycemic impact of glucocorticoid therapy, a team should investigate promoting the use of steroid infusions in situations when a bolus is not absolutely necessary.

Dealing with the Eating Patient and Other Sources of Carbohydrate‐Induced Glycemic Excursions

Glucose levels can be difficult to control in patients who are eating while on insulin infusion, because the infusion chases the glycemic excursions through frequent adjustments, often with a late overshoot and inappropriate reduction in dose. We instead recommend providing bolus nutritional insulin to cover the expected glycemic excursion caused by carbohydrate ingestion. Carbohydrate counting and using a unit of insulin for each 10‐15 g of carbohydrate consumed can smooth out the rapid fluctuations in glucose. Guidance for this should be incorporated into the order set.

Transition Off of Insulin Infusion

Rational strategies for dealing with this transition are covered in detail elsewhere in this supplement.65 Guidance for managing this transition should be integrated into your insulin infusion and SC order sets. The transition to SC insulin may represent a separate order set but is sometimes best integrated into the IV insulin infusion order set itself.

IIPs Outside of the Critical Care Setting

IIPs are most commonly used in the critical care setting. In some institutions, IV insulin protocols are safely and effectively employed outside the ICU. Obviously, the number of nurses and other personnel who must be familiar with such protocols is much higher outside the ICU, and protocol errors are therefore likely to be somewhat higher. In addition the nurse‐per‐patient ratio is usually lower outside of the critical care setting. As a result, suggestions for safe implementation of insulin infusion regimens outside of the critical care setting include:

  • Choose an infusion protocol with a higher glycemic target.

  • Limit the medical and surgical units where this expertise will be developed.

  • Consider simplified infusion protocols but stay consistent with format.

  • Automated or computerized assistance of calculations may reduce human error and nursing burden.

ASSESSING THE IMPACT OF YOUR EFFORTS: FOLLOW‐UP AND FOLLOW‐THROUGH

Monitoring, Recording, and Analyzing Glycemic Control Data

Once the IIP is implemented, it is critical that the impact on glycemic control, hypoglycemia, insulin use, and other factors be analyzed and used for improving the IIP and care delivery. Frequent monitoring of glucose levels is necessary for the safe infusion of insulin. Guidance for how often the monitoring is required must be explicit and included in the infusion order set. Intermittent auditing for compliance with the frequency of glucose testing and appropriate dose selection is good practice. Attention should be paid to how the glucose level is obtained, recorded, and made available to the health care team in your institution. All glucose readings should be recorded electronically for ongoing analyses and retrieval, and ideally, this could be done in an automated or single‐step method. Try to eliminate duplication of effort, such as asking the nurse to record the glucose level and their reaction to it on paper and again in an electronic format. Your team should also provide guidance about the potential problems of using point‐of‐care glucose testing in settings with hypotension, sepsis, pressor use, and other conditions that may impair the accuracy of capillary glucose readings.

Reports on the time to reach the glycemic target, glycemic control while on infusion, and the incidence of hypoglycemia should be reviewed by the multidisciplinary steering committee. The Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force recommends analysis by patient day and by patient stay (or insulin infusion run) as preferred methodologies for analysis of glycemic control and hypoglycemia rates over the method of using each individual glucose reading as the unit of analysis. (The latter tends to under‐value the frequency of hypoglycemia.) Detailed practical recommendations for analyzing and summarizing glycemic control data are available elsewhere in this supplement.18 These data should drive decisions on modification of glycemic targets and the protocol structure. Patients meeting prespecified criteria should be referred to the improvement team for review. For example, patients who experience any glucose readings of 40 mg/dL, or who take more than 12 hours to reach the upper limit glycemic target should be referred to the team for a case review.

Assessing Adherence to the Protocol and Ease‐of‐Use Issues

Focused audits in the pilot and early implementation phases should look for nonadherence to the protocol. Deviations should be evaluated according to the patterns identified. For example, variation in application in some cases is specific for an individual and in others is characteristic of a specific group or the whole. Accordingly, this may point to gaps in education or attitudes about the importance of this endeavor. Front‐line staff may deviate from the protocol because they find it ineffective, unsafe, or impractical for certain situations or specific patients. Many IIPs are the subject of nursing errors related to the knowledge and acceptance of the nurse but also the complexity of the protocol. Appropriate modifications to the protocol based on these cases can frequently improve the ease of use and effectiveness of the protocol. The ongoing review process should identify issues that must be addressed with permanent solutions rather than accepting frequent individual alterations to meet goals. Revisions require supplementary education and rapid and wide dissemination. Although educational efforts and monitoring are often most intense in the early implementation phase, periodic retraining should continue to achieve optimal results and safety. Educational tools must consider nursing time commitments and will often include an interactive web‐based module that gives more flexibility for trainers and clinical nurses alike.

CONCLUSIONS

Insulin infusions are a powerful clinical tool in the inpatient setting to maintain glycemic control. Many IIPs have been developed and used successfully. The institutional challenge is to select, modify, and implement the IIP to reduce hyperglycemia and improve outcomes without excess hypoglycemia. In order to accomplish this goal safely and efficiently, standardized processes and collaboration between physicians, nurses, and pharmacists are needed. The keys to minimizing errors include developing a culture of safety and cooperation, back‐up checks, standardization, automation, and robust training for all those who are involved in the care of a patient on an insulin infusion. Although we encourage standardization and the use of protocols, providers always need to consider the unique clinical circumstances and potential problems presented by each individual patient. It is important to recognize the many barriers to successful implementation of an IIP, but strategies exist to overcome these. Finally, remember that the process does not end with the development phase. Continued review is paramount to success. Note variations in use, analyze them, and learn from them, in order to continually improve the process of care.

References
  1. Home PD,Massi‐Benedetti M,Shepherd GA,Hanning I,Alberti KG,Owens DR.A comparison of the activity and disposal of semi‐synthetic human insulin and porcine insulin in normal man by the glucose clamp technique.Diabetologia.1982;22(1):4145.
  2. Gavin LA.Perioperative management of the diabetic patient.Endocrinol Metab Clin North Am.1992;21(2):457475.
  3. Jovanovic‐Peterson L,Peterson CM.Pregnancy in the diabetic woman. Guidelines for a successful outcome.Endocrinol Metab Clin North Am.1992;21(2):433456.
  4. Furnary AP,Zerr KJ,Grunkemeier GL,Starr A.Continuous intravenous insulin infusion reduces the incidence of deep sternal wound infection in diabetic patients after cardiac surgical procedures.Ann Thorac Surg.1999;67(2):352360; discussion 360–362.
  5. Furnary AP,Gao G,Grunkemeier GL, et al.Continuous insulin infusion reduces mortality in patients with diabetes undergoing coronary artery bypass grafting.J Thorac Cardiovasc Surg.2003;125(5):10071021.
  6. Krinsley JS.Effect of an intensive glucose management protocol on the mortality of critically ill adult patients.Mayo Clin Proc.2004;79(8):9921000.
  7. Van den Berghe GP,Weekers F,Verwaest C, et al.Intensive insulin therapy in the critically ill patients.N Engl J Med.2001;345(19):13591367.
  8. American College of Endocrinology Position Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Metobolic Control.Endocr Pract.2004;10(suppl 2):59.
  9. Devos P,Preiser JC.Current controversies around tight glucose control in critically ill patients.Curr Opin Clin Nutr Metab Care.2007;10(2):206209.
  10. American Society of Health‐System Pharmacists and the Hospital and Health‐System Association of Pennsylvania. Recommendations for Safe Use of Insulin in Hospitals. http://www.ashp.org/s_ashp/docs/files/Safe_Use_of_Insulin.pdf. Accessed September 5,2008.
  11. Clement S,Braithwaite SS,Magee MF, et al.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in hospitals.Diabetes Care.2004;27(2):553591.
  12. Joint Commission. Disease Specific‐Care Certification. http://www.jointcommission.org/CertificationPrograms. Accessed September 5,2008.
  13. American College of Endocrinology and American Diabetes Association consensus statement on inpatient diabetes and glycemic control: a call to action.Diabetes Care2006;29(8):19551962.
  14. Standards of medical care in diabetes–2008.Diabetes Care2008;31(Suppl 1):S12S54.
  15. Li JY,Sun S,Wu SJ.Continuous insulin infusion improves postoperative glucose control in patients with diabetes mellitus undergoing coronary artery bypass surgery.Tex Heart Inst J.2006;33(4):445451.
  16. Quinn JA,Snyder SL,Berghoff JL,Colombo CS,Jacobi J.A practical approach to hyperglycemia management in the intensive care unit: evaluation of an intensive insulin infusion protocol.Pharmacotherapy.2006;26(10):14101420.
  17. Kanji S,Singh A,Tierney M,Meggison H,McIntyre L,Hebert PC.Standardization of intravenous insulin therapy improves the efficiency and safety of blood glucose control in critically ill adults.Intensive Care Med.2004;30(5):804810.
  18. Schnipper JL,Magee MF,Inzucchi SE,Magee MF,Larsen K,Maynard G.SHM Glycemic Control Task Force summary: practical recommendations for assessing the impact of glycemic control efforts.J Hosp Med supplement. In press.
  19. Preston S,Laver SR,Lloyd W,Padkin A.Introducing intensive insulin therapy: the nursing perspective.Nurs Crit Care.2006;11(2):7579.
  20. Aragon D.Evaluation of nursing work effort and perceptions about blood glucose testing in tight glycemic control.Am J Crit Care. Jul2006;15(4):370377.
  21. Van den Berghe G,Wilmer A,Hermans G, et al.Intensive insulin therapy in the medical ICU.N Engl J Med.2006;354(5):449461.
  22. Furnary AP,Wu Y,Bookin SO.Effect of hyperglycemia and continuous intravenous insulin infusions on outcomes of cardiac surgical procedures: the Portland Diabetic Project.Endocr Pract.2004;10(Suppl 2):2133.
  23. Goldberg PA,Siegel MD,Sherwin RS, et al.Implementation of a safe and effective insulin infusion protocol in a medical intensive care unit.Diabetes Care.2004;27(2):461467.
  24. Goldberg PA,Sakharova OV,Barrett PW, et al.Improving glycemic control in the cardiothoracic intensive care unit: clinical experience in two hospital settings.J Cardiothorac Vasc Anesth.2004;18(6):690697.
  25. DeSantis AJ,Schmeltz LR,Schmidt K, et al.Inpatient management of hyperglycemia: the Northwestern experience.Endocr Pract.2006;12(5):491505.
  26. Braithwaite SS,Edkins R,Macgregor KL, et al.Performance of a dose‐defining insulin infusion protocol among trauma service intensive care unit admissions.Diabetes Technol Ther.2006;8(4):476488.
  27. Davidson PC,Steed RD,Bode BW.Glucommander: a computer‐directed intravenous insulin system shown to be safe, simple, and effective in 120,618 h of operation.Diabetes Care.2005;28(10):24182423.
  28. Markovitz LJ,Wiechmann RJ,Harris N, et al.Description and evaluation of a glycemic management protocol for patients with diabetes undergoing heart surgery.Endocr Pract.2002;8(1):1018.
  29. Lazar HL,Chipkin SR,Fitzgerald CA,Bao Y,Cabral H,Apstein CS.Tight glycemic control in diabetic coronary artery bypass graft patients improves perioperative outcomes and decreases recurrent ischemic events.Circulation.2004;109(12):14971502.
  30. Boord JB,Graber AL,Christman JW,Powers AC.Practical management of diabetes in critically ill patients.Am J Respir Crit Care Med.2001;164(10 Pt 1):17631767.
  31. Watts NB,Gebhart SS,Clark RV,Phillips LS.Postoperative management of diabetes mellitus: steady‐state glucose control with bedside algorithm for insulin adjustment.Diabetes Care.1987;10(6):722728.
  32. Lazar HL,Chipkin S,Philippides G,Bao Y,Apstein C.Glucose‐insulin‐potassium solutions improve outcomes in diabetics who have coronary artery operations.Ann Thorac Surg.2000;70(1):145150.
  33. Malmberg K,Ryden L,Efendic S, et al.Randomized trial of insulin‐glucose infusion followed by subcutaneous insulin treatment in diabetic patients with acute myocardial infarction (DIGAMI study): effects on mortality at 1 year.J Am Coll Cardiol.1995;26(1):5765.
  34. Furnary AP,Wu Y.Eliminating the diabetic disadvantage: the Portland Diabetic Project.Semin Thorac Cardiovasc Surg.2006;18(4):302308.
  35. Chant C,Wilson G,Friedrich JO.Validation of an insulin infusion nomogram for intensive glucose control in critically ill patients.Pharmacotherapy.2005;25(3):352359.
  36. Furnary AP,Cheek DB,Holmes SC,Howell WL,Kelly SP.Achieving tight glycemic control in the operating room: lessons learned from 12 years in the trenches of a paradigm shift in anesthetic care.Semin Thorac Cardiovasc Surg.2006;18(4):339345.
  37. Trence DL,Kelly JL,Hirsch IB.The rationale and management of hyperglycemia for in‐patients with cardiovascular disease: time for change.J Clin Endocrinol Metab.2003;88(6):24302437.
  38. Zimmerman CR,Mlynarek ME,Jordan JA,Rajda CA,Horst HM.An insulin infusion protocol in critically ill cardiothoracic surgery patients.Ann Pharmacother.2004;38(7–8):11231129.
  39. Taylor BE,Schallom ME,Sona CS, et al.Efficacy and safety of an insulin infusion protocol in a surgical ICU.J Am Coll Surg.2006;202(1):19.
  40. Thomas AN,Marchant AE,Ogden MC,Collin S.Implementation of a tight glycaemic control protocol using a web‐based insulin dose calculator.Anaesthesia.2005;60(11):10931100.
  41. Toft P,Jorgensen HS,Toennesen E,Christiansen C.Intensive insulin therapy to non‐cardiac ICU patients: a prospective study.Eur J Anaesthesiol.2006;23(8):705709.
  42. Hovorka R,Kremen J,Blaha J, et al.Blood glucose control by a model predictive control algorithm with variable sampling rate versus a routine glucose management protocol in cardiac surgery patients: a randomized controlled trial.J Clin Endocrinol Metab.2007;92(8):29602964.
  43. Hermayer KL,Neal DE,Hushion TV, et al.Outcomes of a cardiothoracic intensive care web‐based online intravenous insulin infusion calculator study at a medical university hospital.Diabetes Technol Ther.2007;9(6):523534.
  44. Donaldson S,Villanuueva G,Rondinelli L,Baldwin D.Rush University guidelines and protocols for the management of hyperglycemia in hospitalized patients: elimination of the sliding scale and improvement of glycemic control throughout the hospital.Diabetes Educ.2006;32(6):954962.
  45. Fraser DD,Robley LR,Ballard NM,Peno‐Green LA.Collaborative development of an insulin nomogram for intensive insulin therapy.Crit Care Nurs Q.2006;29(1):96105.
  46. Boord JB,Sharifi M,Greevy RA, et al.Computer‐based insulin infusion protocol improves glycemia control over manual protocol.J Am Med Inform Assoc.2007;14(3):278287.
  47. Rea RS,Donihi AC,Bobeck M, et al.Implementing an intravenous insulin infusion protocol in the intensive care unit.Am J Health Syst Pharm.2007;64(4):385395.
  48. Rood E,Bosman RJ,van der Spoel JI,Taylor P,Zandstra DF.Use of a computerized guideline for glucose regulation in the intensive care unit improved both guideline adherence and glucose regulation.J Am Med Inform Assoc.2005;12(2):172180.
  49. Osburne RC,Cook CB,Stockton L, et al.Improving hyperglycemia management in the intensive care unit: preliminary report of a nurse‐driven quality improvement project using a redesigned insulin infusion algorithm.Diabetes Educ.2006;32(3):394403.
  50. Goldberg PA,Roussel MG,Inzucchi SE.Clinical results of an updated insulin infusion protocol in critically ill patients.Diabetes Spectrum.2005;18(1):2833.
  51. Pittas AG,Siegel RD,Lau J.Insulin therapy for critically ill hospitalized patients: a meta‐analysis of randomized controlled trials.Arch Intern Med.2004;164(18):20052011.
  52. Wilson M,Weinreb J,Hoo GW.Intensive insulin therapy in critical care: a review of 12 protocols.Diabetes Care.2007;30(4):10051011.
  53. Mechanick JI,Handelsman Y,Bloomgarden ZT.Hypoglycemia in the intensive care unit.Curr Opin Clin Nutr Metab Care.2007;10(2):193196.
  54. Nazer LH,Chow SL,Moghissi ES.Insulin infusion protocols for critically ill patients: a highlight of differences and similarities.Endocr Pract.2007;13(2):137146.
  55. Furnary AP,Wu Y,Bookin SO.Effect of hyperglycemia and continuous intravenous insulin infusions on outcomes of cardiac surgical procedures: the Portland Diabetic Project.Endocr Pract.2004;10(Suppl 2):2133.
  56. Providence Health 10(Suppl 2):7180.
  57. Goldberg PA.Memoirs of a root canal salesman: the successful implementation of a hospital‐wide intravenous insulin infusion protocol.Endocr Pract.2006;12(Suppl 3):7985.
  58. Brunkhorst FM,Engel C,Bloos F, et al.Intensive insulin therapy and pentastarch resuscitation in severe sepsis.N Engl J Med.2008;358(2):125139.
  59. Krinsley JS,Grover A.Severe hypoglycemia in critically ill patients: risk factors and outcomes.Crit Care Med.2007;35(10):22622267.
  60. Kitabchi AE,Freire AX,Umpierrez GE.Evidence for strict inpatient blood glucose control: time to revise glycemic goals in hospitalized patients.Metabolism.2008;57(1):116120.
  61. Newton CA,Smiley D,Davidson P, et al.Comparison of insulin infusion protocols in the ICU: computer‐guided versus standard column‐based insulin regimens [Abstract]. American Diabetes Association abstract,2008.
  62. Vogelzang M,Zijlstra F,Nijsten MW.Design and implementation of GRIP: a computerized glucose control system at a surgical intensive care unit.BMC Med Inform Decis Mak.2005;5:38.
  63. Goldberg PA,Kedves A,Walter K, et al.“Waste not, want not”: determining the optimal priming volume for intravenous infusions.Diabetes Technol Ther.2006;8(5):598601.
  64. O'Malley CW,Emanuele MA,Halasyamani L,Amin A.Bridge over troubled waters: safe and effective transitions of the inpatient with hyperglycemia.J Hosp Med supplement. In press.
Article PDF
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Page Number
42-54
Legacy Keywords
intravenous infusion, insulin, critical care protocols, best practices
Sections
Article PDF
Article PDF

The delayed and variable absorption of subcutaneous (SC) insulin has always provided challenges for the rapid and predictable control of hyperglycemia in the acute care setting. Conversely, intravenous infusion of human regular insulin provides a continuous and essentially immediate delivery mechanism. Once in the circulation, insulin has a very short half‐life of about 5 to 7 minutes and a biological effect of about 20 minutes.1 Intravenous insulin infusions are well‐established in several acute care settings including hyperglycemic emergencies, perioperative glucose management, and glucose control during labor and delivery.2, 3

The beneficial effects seen in early trials of strict glycemic control involving intensive care unit (ICU) patients47 (particularly cardiac surgery patients) and guidelines for inpatient glycemic control8 stimulated widespread interest in adopting insulin infusion protocols (IIPs) focused on achieving strict glycemic targets. The initial enthusiasm has been tempered by uneven results in trials of tight glycemic control, concerns about the effects of excessive hypoglycemia, and the resources needed to implement and maintain an IIP.9 Although considerable controversy about the ideal glycemic target for different patient populations exists, and will likely continue for some time, this article is not a review of the evidence for supporting 1 glycemic target versus another. Regardless of the glycemic target chosen, a standardized algorithm and accompanying program of monitoring are widely endorsed for both safety and quality reasons.1014 Most medical centers are at least attempting to implement nurse‐driven protocols that have demonstrated better perfomance than SC regimens15 and physician‐driven insulin infusions.16, 17 In this article, we outline several variables in IIP design and implementation and endorse several aspects of design and implementation that will likely result in improved staff acceptance and, ultimately, a more safe and effective IIP.

PREPARING TO IMPLEMENT AN IIP

Building The Team

Implementing a medical centerwide standardized insulin infusion order set with supporting policies, protocols, monitoring standards, and the requisite educational programs is a major task for any hospital. This is not a simple maneuver involving only 1 or 2 interested individuals and requires much more than selecting a published protocol and disseminating it to various patient care units. Instead, to manage the full spectrum of diabetes programs and protocols, an institution must convene a multidisciplinary steering committee or task force. This should include representation from nursing, nursing administration, pharmacy, nutrition services, and the quality improvement department. Physicians should include hospitalists, intensivists, and endocrinologists but may also involve anesthesiologists and surgeons, as applicable. At times, additional members may need to be recruited according to project needs.

Identifying the Stakeholders and Current Practices

In developing or improving currently utilized IIPs, the multidisciplinary committee would benefit from careful background work before moving forward. First, administrative and institutional support must be secured to endorse uniform standards for insulin infusions, and to provide the important infrastructure needed to facilitate the work involved. Clinical and administrative stakeholders from the key departments then need to be identified.

All insulin infusion orders and policies/procedures presently used in the institution should be identified and examined. The developers and/or users of these order sets should be engaged in a dialogue and encouraged to share their experiences regarding their current practice and the attendant work flow, glucose monitoring, and data collection and reporting. Immediate concerns should be clearly addressed. Measurement systems for glycemic control, hypoglycemia, and insulin use patterns should assess current practice and the impact of subsequent modifications of the protocol or initiation of new protocols. We recommend using glucometrics consistent with those endorsed by the Society of Hospital Medicine (SHM) Glycemic Control Task Force elsewhere in this supplement.18

Addressing the Burden of Change

Through this process, the committee will uncover barriers, dysfunctional and inconsistent practices, and individuals who will pose challenges. Identifying these issues should not discourage the team, but rather it should guide the interventional strategies, and help build consensus that change may be required. There must be caution not to exclude significant individuals simply because they resist changes. Indeed, if they are included and have the opportunity to contribute to the process, success is much more likely.

It is important for process leaders to understand the implications of what is proposed, particularly for nursing services.19 For example, it has been shown that IIPs require about 5 minutes per patient per hour for glucose monitoring and dose adjustments.20 Acknowledging and attempting to address this burden proactively (often well over 2 hours per day) can gain staff acceptance more effectively than a laissez faire approach. In this regard, some effort should be invested in nursing education of the benefits of tight glycemic management on critical care outcomes. The difficult‐to‐quantify work involved when patients' blood glucose is not well controlled (eg, paging physicians for stat insulin orders) should also be part of this discussion.

Identifying and Addressing Barriers to IIP implementation

There are numerous potential barriers to implementation of IIPs. Table 1 identifies some of the most frequent ones along with potential strategies or solutions. Very common barriers include skepticism surrounding the benefits of tight glycemic control, fear of hypoglycemia, and difficulty agreeing on glycemic targets.

Barriers to Effective Implementation and Utilization of Insulin Infusion Protocols, and Strategies to Address Them
Barrier Strategy/Solution
Insufficient glucose meters to accommodate the increased testing needs Purchase additional glucose meters.
Ask the vendor to provide extra on‐site replacement meters at no charge until they are activated.
Nursing time requirements involved in monitoring and adjustments. Get ancillary help to check glucose values
○eg, nurse assistants
Make extra efforts to make protocols clear with few required calculations
Avoid duplicate recording
Consider meters requiring shorter time and a smaller sample (to avoid need for re‐sampling)
Requirement for uncomfortable frequent sticks Utilize central lines or arterial lines.
○These tend to vary by < 10% from POC readings
○May not be available in noncritical care settings
Staff fear of hypoglycemia Educate on the benefit of glucose control and the true definition of hypoglycemia
○Measure staff fasting glucose levels to demonstrate normal range.
Establish metrics and publicly report hypoglycemia event rates.
Pilot IIP on small scale.
Protocol and education for prevention of hypoglycemia.
Difficulty gaining consensus on glycemic target Compromise if needed on the glucose target
○eg, start with a higher goal such as 90‐140 mg/dL.
○Others will be willing to lower the goal when feasibility is seen.
Allow for different targets in different units if indicated
○maintain consistency in other respects.
Focal points of resistance Identify a local nurse or physician champion within resistant site.
Pilot the protocol in an area with least resistance
○Will gain momentum with initial success and adjustments
Lack of integrated information and reporting systems Incorporate information systems personnel onto team
Advocate for improved reporting capability with administrative leaders
Use sampling methods to collect data until automated systems are available.
Multiple providers, hand offs, and opportunities for error and communication breakdown, diffusion of responsibility for glycemic control Involvement of varied front line providers
Check lists for important items to communicate on transfer/transport
Common protocols/education for similar units

Whereas the national guidelines call for a glycemic target in critical care areas with an upper limit of 110 mg/dL, there is room for debate, and tailoring of the glycemic target to fit individual patient circumstances is often advisable. Starting with a less aggressive glycemic target can be good politics (and perhaps good medicine as well). Once the higher glycemic targets are achieved safely, it can pave the way for a more aggressive approach.

Fear of hypoglycemia is one of the most potent barriers to intensive insulin infusion implementation. Because hyperglycemia is such a common condition in critical care units, nursing and physician staff may have developed a skewed view of the definition of hypoglycemia, at times fearing for their patient when the glucose values reach a level of 100 mg/dL or so. Polling the nurses on what they think their own fasting glucose levels are, and then actually measuring them can be an effective strategy (the nurses may be surprised that the patient's scary 90 mg/dL reading is higher than their own). It should also be emphasized that properly designed and implemented protocols may actually decrease the incidence of hypoglycemia when compared to standard care which may involve individually and sometimes improperly adjusted intravenous (IV) insulin (discussed further below).

CHOOSING AN IIP FOR YOUR HOSPITAL

See Table 2 for a comparison of several features identified in selected published protocols.7, 2127 This is not a comprehensive list of all protocols found in the literature. Rather, the authors consider it representative of the various types of IIPs or best recognized IIPs in the literature. Note that there is variability in study population, the glucose targets, hypoglycemia, the time to reach the target, and the time spent in the target range. Other practical factors to consider in reviewing the literature and selecting an IIP design are the complexity of the protocol, the required process steps or calculations, the evidence for staff acceptance, and the level of resources supporting the published protocol.

Characteristics of Selected Published Insulin Infusion Protocols
Author (reference) IIP Description Patient population Glucose Target (mg/dL) Mean Glucose (mg/dL) Time to Reach Target Hypoglycemia
Van den Berghe7 Initial and subsequent rates based on BG Surgical ICU 80‐110 6 AM glucose 103 19 Not reported 5.1% of patient < 41 mg/dL
Nurses had latitude
Van den Berghe21 TPN standard with IIP Medical ICU 80‐110 6 AM glucose 105 Not reported 19% of patients < 41 mg/dL
Furnary22 (2001‐2003 version) Initial dose determined by BG and type of DM CABG 100‐150 (there is a newer protocol with lower targets) Not mentioned. Appears to be < 150 94% within 3 hours 0.5% < 60 (% of readings?) Not reported with any specificity
Changes based on present BG and last change
Relatively complex
Goldberg23 Dosing based on: MICU 100‐139 Not specified 10.1 hours 0.3% of readings <60 BG <60 in 5.4% of patient days
○Current BG
○Velocity of glucose change
Goldberg24 ○Infusion rate CT Surgery 100‐139 122 17 Once target attained. 5 hours 0.2% of all BGs < 60 mg/Dl BG < 60 in 2.9% of patient days
Uses 3 tables
Relatively complex
DeSantis25 Initial dose based on BG Mostly surgical ICU and CVICU (75% surgical) 80‐110 135 49 (higher in SICU and CVICU alone) 10.6 hours 1.5% of readings
< 60 mg/dL (lower for CVICU & SICU alone)
Changes based on present glucose and rate of change.
IV bolus used with changes.
Braithwaite26 6‐column method Trauma ICU <110 mg/dL 129 25 16.7 hours 2.4% of readings < 70 mg/dL
Davidson27 Computer‐directed algorithm (similar to column method) Full spectrum Varied by year and situation Not reported (approximately 125 mg/dL when stable) 90% < 150 mg/dL in 3 hours 0.6% of readings <50 mg/dL 2.6% of patients

Structural Differences in Protocols

Protocols that vary by level of insulin sensitivity generally use column methods with the individual columns representing different categories of insulin sensitivity, placing the most sensitive category on the left with the highest level of insulin resistance on the far right. These methods use a multiplier to adjust for sensitivity. They are constructed according to the rule of 1500, 1700, or 1800, thereby adjusting for changes in insulin sensitivity that follow surgery or other changes in physiologic stress in the acute setting. Rate of change is addressed by shifting to the right if correction of hyperglycemia is too slow and to the left if the glucose is dropping too rapidly.

Most institutions using the column/emnsulin sensitivity method, implement paper orders as first published by Markovitz.28 The same concepts have been used to develop computer‐assisted insulin infusion protocols. One published method is the Glucommander,27 but a number of institutions are using similar computer‐assisted methods developed locally.

Other methods use the present glucose and change from last glucose to constantly adjust to any situation.7, 2125 They usually involve 2 or 3 steps and often require more calculations by the nurse. These methods are purported to be more agile or flexible but there have been no direct comparisons with the column methods looking at effectiveness, nursing errors, or hypoglycemic risk. The Yale Protocol23, 24 and the Portland Protocol22 are 2 prominent examples of this type of protocol. Adjustments are defined as units, percent change, or a combination of both.

Limitations of the IIP Literature

There had been few published insulin protocols aimed at reaching specific glucose goals when the Leuven surgical ICU experience7 was published in 2001. These early publications featured algorithms that adjusted insulin infusions solely on the basis of glucose level, and did not take the velocity of change, direction of change, proximity to glycemic target, or different insulin sensitivities into account. Also, the targeted glucose goals in those reports were not consistent with the present standards.2931 Other published protocols featured glucose‐insulin‐potassium infusion (GIK) protocols that focused on the amount of insulin administered and failed to attain appropriately defined glucose targets.32, 33 These publications offer no real guidance in crafting a modern glycemic targetoriented protocol.

Whereas more than 20 modern IIPs directed at glycemic targets have been published,7, 1517, 2127, 3450 many of the published protocols represent local modifications of ones previously published elsewhere, and no published, prospective, head‐to‐head comparisons of the best‐known IIPs are available.

Several reviews of previous published reports include comparisons of IIPs with varied areas of emphasis.5154 The reliability of such comparisons is limited by the inconsistency in methodology between studies and the different populations studied. For example, medical populations are generally harder to control and are more prone to hypoglycemia than surgical populations,7, 21, 23, 24, 50 and some studies include only patients with diabetes.4, 5, 38 In addition, definitions of hypoglycemia and methods of analyzing glycemic control are highly variable, making comparisons of IIPs challenging.39 As a result, attempts to compare published IIP results without consideration of the population studied could lead to erroneous conclusions.

In spite of the aforementioned limitations, there are several lessons we can learn from the IIP literature and accumulated clinical experience at a variety of centers.

Glycemic Targets and Other IIP Features Can Evolve over Time

Revisions of protocol details, including glycemic targets, often evolve over time. This deliberate approach can facilitate staff acceptance by demonstrating safe achievement of higher glycemic targets. The Yale team initially selected a conservative glycemic target of 100‐139 mg/dL, as depicted in Table 1.23, 24 They subsequently lowered the target range to 90‐119 mg/dL and increased the initial insulin bolus amount by 40%.50 The modified protocol displayed improved performance and yet retained safety, with only 1 glucose reading < 40 mg/dL in 101 patients over 117 runs of insulin infusion.

The Portland Protocol, used primarily in cardiac surgery patients, has also evolved over time. This group has altered the IIP in a number of ways at least 4 times. These protocols, including the most recent protocol targeting glucose levels of 70‐110 mg/dL, is found at www.portlandprotocol.org.4, 5, 55, 56

Medical and Surgical Patients Are Different

The most convincing evidence for stringent glycemic control evolved from studies of surgical patients.4, 5, 7 Acknowledging this fact, along with the greater degree of difficulty in achieving glycemic targets safely in critically ill medical patients, have led many to endorse higher glycemic targets for certain populations than others.57 Although we generally favor a uniform glycemic target for a unit serving a particular patient population, adopting a less stringent glycemic target in medical ICU settings compared to surgical ICU settings is reasonable and prudent in many institutional settings. However, the accompanying challenges regarding boarding patients and floating nurses between units would also need to be considered.

Local Factors and Implementation Methods Matter

The success or failure of a protocol likely depends on local factors and implementation methods as much as it does on the structure of the protocol itself. IIP development and implementation is a process that must be approached systematically and with attention to detail.19 Errors in approach can delay or abort the implementation, or potentially lead to an ineffective or unsafe protocol for the institution.

The Yale experience again provides us with a salient example.58 Initial efforts to implement an IIP failed due to a number of factors: a complicated protocol, insufficient nursing involvement, and inadequate training and education led to incomplete buy‐in, and nursing concerns over hypoglycemia that actually was within the goal range of the protocol. Successful implementation was not achieved until the leaders learned from their mistakes. Nurses and other clinical allies were involved and educated. Important stakeholders, who were not included earlier, were now involved, and front‐line nursing staff were engaged in proactive troubleshooting.

In another example, multisite studies like VISEP59 and Glucontrol9 have tried to adapt the Leuven protocol, only to struggle with excessive hypoglycemia and an inability to replicate the tight glycemic control enjoyed by van den Berghe and colleagues.7, 21 The Leuven care team augmented the performance of the IIP by their experience with the protocol, physician involvement, and adjustments made by the nursing staff.

Some IIPs Have Lower Hypoglycemia Rates than Others

Recent articles have highlighted the association of intensive insulin treatment, hypoglycemia, and mortality in the medical ICU population.60 Concerns that excessive hypoglycemia could reduce or reverse the overall benefits of intensive insulin therapy has led some to call for moderation of critical care glycemic targets.61 Comparisons of IIPs5254, 61 that include information about the propensity of the IIP to produce hypoglycemia are therefore important.

The Leuven IIP has been reported to yield high rates of hypoglycemia with almost 20% of patients suffering from severe hypoglycemia (glucose < 40 mg/dL) in some studies.9, 21, 59 By way of contrast, several different IIP regimens have frequently achieved identical or very similar glycemic control with less than 5% of the patients experiencing severe hypoglycemia.27, 50, 62 Although implementation factors, severity of illness, and other population factors play some role, some protocols have an inherent structural propensity to produce more hypoglycemia than others. In the case of the Leuven protocol, there is more of a role for clinician adjustment, and the written protocol itself does not call for much active adjustment as the patient enters into the hypoglycemic range.52 In contrast, more sophisticated and complicated regimens adjust more aggressively in this range and consistently induce less hypoglycemia.

Successful Methods to Manage the Complexity of an IIP

Many modern IIPs use bolus insulin to expedite control and adjust the infusion rate based on the velocity and direction of glucose change, not just the glucose value.52 Insulin resistance is taken into account in some models, and multiple calculation steps are required in several reported protocols.52 The improved automation and control refinements come at a cost of increased complexity.

Intensive implementation efforts and strong leadership can overcome some issues, as demonstrated by the Yale experience, but 2 other strategies have commonly demonstrated success. First, focused expert glycemic management teams that directly oversee many aspects of the IIP, or even assume direct management roles, can be quite effective,25 especially during early implementation.

Automation of calculations and computerization is another method to consider, and many recent reports involve applications of web‐based or other computerized models.27, 40, 42, 43, 46, 48, 63 Comparisons of computerized versus manual methods, computerized versus column methods, and a computerized nomogram‐versus‐chart method are now available.42, 45, 46, 48, 62 Computerized protocols show significant promise and would be expected to reduce dosing errors. These instruments generally present the nurse with a specific infusion rate after each monitored glucose and then recommend an interval for the next glucose determination. In direct comparisons, they tend to perform as well or often better than conventional methods. For example, in the most recent randomized trial comparing the Glucommander to a paper‐based column method in an ICU, Newton and colleagues found the computerized method reached the goal more rapidly and reached a lower mean glucose without increasing the rate of severe hypoglycemia (< 40 mg/dL).62 Computerized methods also facilitate data collection for analytical purposes.

Computerized systems (both commercial and home‐grown versions) are becoming more common and appear to hold significant benefits as long as they are backed by a validated algorithm. Whereas many institutions are not yet in a position to integrate such protocols into their standard or electronic record systems, we expect the trend for increased implementation to continue.

ENHANCING THE DESIGN OF YOUR IIP

Once the improvement team has identified and examined current order sets and protocols in the context of the literature, we encourage consolidation of institutional insulin infusion orders into a common basic structure. This basic structure should be enhanced by incorporating a variety of elements designed to enhance the reliability of use and safety of the IIP. These design features are outlined in Table 3. Randomized trial evidence of the effectiveness of these design features are largely lacking, but they are well grounded in reliability principles and common experience, and have also been recommended by others.1013, 58

Ingredients for Insulin Infusion Protocol Orders
□Identifies the glycemic target range
□Includes clear dosing instructions with acceptable calculation requirements for nurses
□Incorporates glucose monitoring expectations
□Easy physician ordering, check box simplicity
□Criteria for calling the physician
□Includes guidance on steps to follow for interruption of nutrition
□States guidelines on when to initiate the infusion and when to stop
□Defines the insulin concentration clearly and consistently
□Considers changing insulin sensitivity as well as the current glucose value and rate of change in attempting to reach goal and avoid hypoglycemia
□Includes or refers to a standardized hypoglycemia treatment protocol and prevention protocol.
□Incorporates guidelines and cautions for transition to subcutaneous insulin
□Ideally adaptable outside of critical care unitclear definition of locations where order set is to be used.

The orders should require a single physician signature and limited physician choices as the vehicle initiating the nurse‐driven protocol. The glycemic target range should be explicitly identified, and guidance for calling the physician and how to handle interruptions in nutrition should be embedded in the order set. Frequent monitoring of glucose levels is necessary for the safe infusion of insulin. Guidance for how often the monitoring is required must be explicit and included in the infusion order set, and standardization of documentation of the infusion rates and glucose values is highly desirable. IIPs that adjust based on the velocity of glucose change and insulin sensitivity are desirable. Certain elements may be more appropriate for some institutions than others, partly based on previous protocols and methods of practice. For example, the hypoglycemia protocol may be embedded or referred to as a separate standard of care with clear presence in the chart. The intended timing of conversion from IV to SC insulin should be included, but the actual method may be the subject of a separate order set. At other times, the conversion formula will be part of the initial intravenous order set.

IMPLEMENTATION: ADDRESSING SAFETY ISSUES

The use of insulin infusions comes with several potential hazards. Many of these potential complications can be proactively addressed, thereby minimizing accidental injuries to the patient on an insulin infusion.

Standardizing Insulin Infusion Preparations and Priming New Tubing

Varied concentrations or types of insulin for insulin infusions can lead to serious errors. Insulin infusions should generally be centrally prepared with a standard concentration of regular insulin in the pharmacy (usually 1 unit/cc), and the infusion concentration should be included in your infusion order set. Insulin binding to IV tubing can lead to false elevation of insulin requirements, potentially followed by serious hypoglycemia. When nurses change IV tubing or initially set up an insulin drip, education/emnstructions on priming new tubing with a small amount of insulin infusion to saturate the binding to the polyvinyl chloride tubing should be incorporated into their routine. Although 50 mL has often been recommended for priming, a recent study64 found that 20 mL of insulin infusion is enough to reach the saturation point.

Avoiding Over‐Reliance on the Insulin Protocol

Nurse‐driven insulin infusion protocols automate frequent insulin adjustment and reduce unnecessary calls to the physician. Although this is generally a decided advantage, the care team can be lulled into a sense of false security by the presence of orders that allow for such adjustment. Increasing the rate of an insulin infusion without thoughtful attention to factors that may be playing a role in this increased requirement (such as developing sepsis, other medical decompensation, steroid boluses, or an increase in carbohydrate intake) can have serious consequences. By the same token, an unanticipated rapid decrease in insulin requirement should lead to a reassessment of the infusion, and an inquiry about cessation of glucocorticoid therapy or nutrition. Rarely, a pharmacy or nursing error may induce a pseudo‐change in insulin requirements. The protocol should lead the nurse to seek advice and alert the physician to review potential causes of dramatic changes in insulin requirements, rather than simply adjusting insulin or nutrition to correct the present abnormal value.

Interruption of the Insulin Infusion

Interruption of insulin infusions may occur for many reasons, either intended or unintended. At times, the doctors or nurses may temporarily stop the protocol to allow for delivery of blood products or medications when IV access is limited. Infusions may mistakenly not be restarted, or deliberate discontinuation may not be adequately communicated, potentially leading to worsening hyperglycemia or even the development of ketoacidosis, and other adverse clinical outcomes. Therefore, the algorithm should have clear orders for the nurses to contact the ordering physician if the infusion is stopped for any reason, other than protocol‐driven cessation due to falling blood glucose concentrations.

Interruption of Nutrition, Field Trips, and Communication

Insulin infusion commonly provides both basal and nutritional insulin requirements. Interruptions in nutritional intake are extremely common in the inpatient setting, with a potential to cause serious hypoglycemia. Feeding tubes are often pulled out without warning; enteral nutrition may also need be halted if high gastric residuals are noted or during certain diagnostic tests. At times, IV carbohydrate sources (dextrose, partial parenteral nutrition, total parenteral nutrition) may be interrupted as well. In some cases, field trips out of the critical care units to the operating room, imaging studies, or other hospital locations add another layer of challenges to managing the IIP. Staff in these various areas may not be familiar with the IIP or monitoring standards and techniques, and potentially may not even be aware that the patient is on an insulin infusion. It is therefore crucial to anticipate these pitfalls and develop effective institutional procedures for addressing them. For example, many institutions use D10 solution to replace the carbohydrate calories that are lost when tube feedings have to be interrupted in a gram‐per‐gram fashion. Patients should be clearly identified as being on an insulin infusion. The requirement for consistent glucose monitoring, hypoglycemia recognition and treatment, and insulin infusion adjustment requires either critical care nurse care of the patient on the field trip, or training in the same skills in areas such as endoscopy, interventional radiology, and operating rooms including the preoperative and postoperative care units. In any case, all services should be involved in crafting solutions that will ensure a consistent approach to glycemic control as the patient travels off‐unit. Monitoring and treatment equipment needs to be readily available in all sites, and hypoglycemia protocols need to be distributed and supported in all areas.

Preventing and Treating Hypoglycemia

Some hypoglycemia will occur with infusion protocols, no matter how carefully a protocol is crafted and how well it is administered. Hypoglycemia protocols should therefore be incorporated directly into an infusion order set. Treatment of hypoglycemic events with a full 50 mL of D50 solution is equivalent to 25 g of carbohydrate, which will raise glucose levels in the average patient by 125 mg/dL. Many institutions discourage the overcorrection of hypoglycemic events by encouraging giving lesser aliquots of D50 based on the degree of hypoglycemia.

Preventing hypoglycemia by recognizing hypoglycemia risk factors, proper monitoring, and anticipating reductions in insulin requirements from decreasing severity of illness, nutritional intake, or steroid dosing can also reduce the frequency of hypoglycemic events.

IMPLEMENTATION: EDUCATING AND ENGAGING NURSING AND PHYSICIAN STAFF

Nursing staff generally bear the brunt of the burden on the front line of implementing intensive IIPs. Educational efforts for nurses should include the rationale for intensive insulin therapy and use of an IIP. Additionally, detailed, case‐based instruction on utilization of the IIP is required. Properly educated, nursing staff often become the strongest advocates of the IIP. In addition, they can frequently provide important input when situations arise that require troubleshooting. Regular feedback sessions early in implementation that address ease of use, clarity of orders, and difficulties encountered by nurses can be invaluable. Improvement teams need to provide frequent in‐service training and updates on the IIP selected after implementation. This is imperative to promote nursing acceptance and adherence to the IIP chosen, particularly with consideration for traveling nurses. The importance of nursing champions to design and carry out this work cannot be overstated. Educational programs focusing on the physician staff can also be very useful, particularly when focused on high‐volume physicians and influential thought leaders.

IMPLEMENTATION: ADDRESSING COMMON CLINICAL SITUATIONS

Steroids

Steroid boluses are commonly an integral part of regimens targeting a variety of conditions, such as transplant rejection, reactive airways disease, certain infections, cancer, and a variety of autoimmune disorders. This can lead to glycemic excursions and rapidly varying insulin requirements. Educational efforts and treatment regimens should address the disproportionate impact that steroids have on postprandial glycemic excursions. To minimize the glycemic impact of glucocorticoid therapy, a team should investigate promoting the use of steroid infusions in situations when a bolus is not absolutely necessary.

Dealing with the Eating Patient and Other Sources of Carbohydrate‐Induced Glycemic Excursions

Glucose levels can be difficult to control in patients who are eating while on insulin infusion, because the infusion chases the glycemic excursions through frequent adjustments, often with a late overshoot and inappropriate reduction in dose. We instead recommend providing bolus nutritional insulin to cover the expected glycemic excursion caused by carbohydrate ingestion. Carbohydrate counting and using a unit of insulin for each 10‐15 g of carbohydrate consumed can smooth out the rapid fluctuations in glucose. Guidance for this should be incorporated into the order set.

Transition Off of Insulin Infusion

Rational strategies for dealing with this transition are covered in detail elsewhere in this supplement.65 Guidance for managing this transition should be integrated into your insulin infusion and SC order sets. The transition to SC insulin may represent a separate order set but is sometimes best integrated into the IV insulin infusion order set itself.

IIPs Outside of the Critical Care Setting

IIPs are most commonly used in the critical care setting. In some institutions, IV insulin protocols are safely and effectively employed outside the ICU. Obviously, the number of nurses and other personnel who must be familiar with such protocols is much higher outside the ICU, and protocol errors are therefore likely to be somewhat higher. In addition the nurse‐per‐patient ratio is usually lower outside of the critical care setting. As a result, suggestions for safe implementation of insulin infusion regimens outside of the critical care setting include:

  • Choose an infusion protocol with a higher glycemic target.

  • Limit the medical and surgical units where this expertise will be developed.

  • Consider simplified infusion protocols but stay consistent with format.

  • Automated or computerized assistance of calculations may reduce human error and nursing burden.

ASSESSING THE IMPACT OF YOUR EFFORTS: FOLLOW‐UP AND FOLLOW‐THROUGH

Monitoring, Recording, and Analyzing Glycemic Control Data

Once the IIP is implemented, it is critical that the impact on glycemic control, hypoglycemia, insulin use, and other factors be analyzed and used for improving the IIP and care delivery. Frequent monitoring of glucose levels is necessary for the safe infusion of insulin. Guidance for how often the monitoring is required must be explicit and included in the infusion order set. Intermittent auditing for compliance with the frequency of glucose testing and appropriate dose selection is good practice. Attention should be paid to how the glucose level is obtained, recorded, and made available to the health care team in your institution. All glucose readings should be recorded electronically for ongoing analyses and retrieval, and ideally, this could be done in an automated or single‐step method. Try to eliminate duplication of effort, such as asking the nurse to record the glucose level and their reaction to it on paper and again in an electronic format. Your team should also provide guidance about the potential problems of using point‐of‐care glucose testing in settings with hypotension, sepsis, pressor use, and other conditions that may impair the accuracy of capillary glucose readings.

Reports on the time to reach the glycemic target, glycemic control while on infusion, and the incidence of hypoglycemia should be reviewed by the multidisciplinary steering committee. The Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force recommends analysis by patient day and by patient stay (or insulin infusion run) as preferred methodologies for analysis of glycemic control and hypoglycemia rates over the method of using each individual glucose reading as the unit of analysis. (The latter tends to under‐value the frequency of hypoglycemia.) Detailed practical recommendations for analyzing and summarizing glycemic control data are available elsewhere in this supplement.18 These data should drive decisions on modification of glycemic targets and the protocol structure. Patients meeting prespecified criteria should be referred to the improvement team for review. For example, patients who experience any glucose readings of 40 mg/dL, or who take more than 12 hours to reach the upper limit glycemic target should be referred to the team for a case review.

Assessing Adherence to the Protocol and Ease‐of‐Use Issues

Focused audits in the pilot and early implementation phases should look for nonadherence to the protocol. Deviations should be evaluated according to the patterns identified. For example, variation in application in some cases is specific for an individual and in others is characteristic of a specific group or the whole. Accordingly, this may point to gaps in education or attitudes about the importance of this endeavor. Front‐line staff may deviate from the protocol because they find it ineffective, unsafe, or impractical for certain situations or specific patients. Many IIPs are the subject of nursing errors related to the knowledge and acceptance of the nurse but also the complexity of the protocol. Appropriate modifications to the protocol based on these cases can frequently improve the ease of use and effectiveness of the protocol. The ongoing review process should identify issues that must be addressed with permanent solutions rather than accepting frequent individual alterations to meet goals. Revisions require supplementary education and rapid and wide dissemination. Although educational efforts and monitoring are often most intense in the early implementation phase, periodic retraining should continue to achieve optimal results and safety. Educational tools must consider nursing time commitments and will often include an interactive web‐based module that gives more flexibility for trainers and clinical nurses alike.

CONCLUSIONS

Insulin infusions are a powerful clinical tool in the inpatient setting to maintain glycemic control. Many IIPs have been developed and used successfully. The institutional challenge is to select, modify, and implement the IIP to reduce hyperglycemia and improve outcomes without excess hypoglycemia. In order to accomplish this goal safely and efficiently, standardized processes and collaboration between physicians, nurses, and pharmacists are needed. The keys to minimizing errors include developing a culture of safety and cooperation, back‐up checks, standardization, automation, and robust training for all those who are involved in the care of a patient on an insulin infusion. Although we encourage standardization and the use of protocols, providers always need to consider the unique clinical circumstances and potential problems presented by each individual patient. It is important to recognize the many barriers to successful implementation of an IIP, but strategies exist to overcome these. Finally, remember that the process does not end with the development phase. Continued review is paramount to success. Note variations in use, analyze them, and learn from them, in order to continually improve the process of care.

The delayed and variable absorption of subcutaneous (SC) insulin has always provided challenges for the rapid and predictable control of hyperglycemia in the acute care setting. Conversely, intravenous infusion of human regular insulin provides a continuous and essentially immediate delivery mechanism. Once in the circulation, insulin has a very short half‐life of about 5 to 7 minutes and a biological effect of about 20 minutes.1 Intravenous insulin infusions are well‐established in several acute care settings including hyperglycemic emergencies, perioperative glucose management, and glucose control during labor and delivery.2, 3

The beneficial effects seen in early trials of strict glycemic control involving intensive care unit (ICU) patients47 (particularly cardiac surgery patients) and guidelines for inpatient glycemic control8 stimulated widespread interest in adopting insulin infusion protocols (IIPs) focused on achieving strict glycemic targets. The initial enthusiasm has been tempered by uneven results in trials of tight glycemic control, concerns about the effects of excessive hypoglycemia, and the resources needed to implement and maintain an IIP.9 Although considerable controversy about the ideal glycemic target for different patient populations exists, and will likely continue for some time, this article is not a review of the evidence for supporting 1 glycemic target versus another. Regardless of the glycemic target chosen, a standardized algorithm and accompanying program of monitoring are widely endorsed for both safety and quality reasons.1014 Most medical centers are at least attempting to implement nurse‐driven protocols that have demonstrated better perfomance than SC regimens15 and physician‐driven insulin infusions.16, 17 In this article, we outline several variables in IIP design and implementation and endorse several aspects of design and implementation that will likely result in improved staff acceptance and, ultimately, a more safe and effective IIP.

PREPARING TO IMPLEMENT AN IIP

Building The Team

Implementing a medical centerwide standardized insulin infusion order set with supporting policies, protocols, monitoring standards, and the requisite educational programs is a major task for any hospital. This is not a simple maneuver involving only 1 or 2 interested individuals and requires much more than selecting a published protocol and disseminating it to various patient care units. Instead, to manage the full spectrum of diabetes programs and protocols, an institution must convene a multidisciplinary steering committee or task force. This should include representation from nursing, nursing administration, pharmacy, nutrition services, and the quality improvement department. Physicians should include hospitalists, intensivists, and endocrinologists but may also involve anesthesiologists and surgeons, as applicable. At times, additional members may need to be recruited according to project needs.

Identifying the Stakeholders and Current Practices

In developing or improving currently utilized IIPs, the multidisciplinary committee would benefit from careful background work before moving forward. First, administrative and institutional support must be secured to endorse uniform standards for insulin infusions, and to provide the important infrastructure needed to facilitate the work involved. Clinical and administrative stakeholders from the key departments then need to be identified.

All insulin infusion orders and policies/procedures presently used in the institution should be identified and examined. The developers and/or users of these order sets should be engaged in a dialogue and encouraged to share their experiences regarding their current practice and the attendant work flow, glucose monitoring, and data collection and reporting. Immediate concerns should be clearly addressed. Measurement systems for glycemic control, hypoglycemia, and insulin use patterns should assess current practice and the impact of subsequent modifications of the protocol or initiation of new protocols. We recommend using glucometrics consistent with those endorsed by the Society of Hospital Medicine (SHM) Glycemic Control Task Force elsewhere in this supplement.18

Addressing the Burden of Change

Through this process, the committee will uncover barriers, dysfunctional and inconsistent practices, and individuals who will pose challenges. Identifying these issues should not discourage the team, but rather it should guide the interventional strategies, and help build consensus that change may be required. There must be caution not to exclude significant individuals simply because they resist changes. Indeed, if they are included and have the opportunity to contribute to the process, success is much more likely.

It is important for process leaders to understand the implications of what is proposed, particularly for nursing services.19 For example, it has been shown that IIPs require about 5 minutes per patient per hour for glucose monitoring and dose adjustments.20 Acknowledging and attempting to address this burden proactively (often well over 2 hours per day) can gain staff acceptance more effectively than a laissez faire approach. In this regard, some effort should be invested in nursing education of the benefits of tight glycemic management on critical care outcomes. The difficult‐to‐quantify work involved when patients' blood glucose is not well controlled (eg, paging physicians for stat insulin orders) should also be part of this discussion.

Identifying and Addressing Barriers to IIP implementation

There are numerous potential barriers to implementation of IIPs. Table 1 identifies some of the most frequent ones along with potential strategies or solutions. Very common barriers include skepticism surrounding the benefits of tight glycemic control, fear of hypoglycemia, and difficulty agreeing on glycemic targets.

Barriers to Effective Implementation and Utilization of Insulin Infusion Protocols, and Strategies to Address Them
Barrier Strategy/Solution
Insufficient glucose meters to accommodate the increased testing needs Purchase additional glucose meters.
Ask the vendor to provide extra on‐site replacement meters at no charge until they are activated.
Nursing time requirements involved in monitoring and adjustments. Get ancillary help to check glucose values
○eg, nurse assistants
Make extra efforts to make protocols clear with few required calculations
Avoid duplicate recording
Consider meters requiring shorter time and a smaller sample (to avoid need for re‐sampling)
Requirement for uncomfortable frequent sticks Utilize central lines or arterial lines.
○These tend to vary by < 10% from POC readings
○May not be available in noncritical care settings
Staff fear of hypoglycemia Educate on the benefit of glucose control and the true definition of hypoglycemia
○Measure staff fasting glucose levels to demonstrate normal range.
Establish metrics and publicly report hypoglycemia event rates.
Pilot IIP on small scale.
Protocol and education for prevention of hypoglycemia.
Difficulty gaining consensus on glycemic target Compromise if needed on the glucose target
○eg, start with a higher goal such as 90‐140 mg/dL.
○Others will be willing to lower the goal when feasibility is seen.
Allow for different targets in different units if indicated
○maintain consistency in other respects.
Focal points of resistance Identify a local nurse or physician champion within resistant site.
Pilot the protocol in an area with least resistance
○Will gain momentum with initial success and adjustments
Lack of integrated information and reporting systems Incorporate information systems personnel onto team
Advocate for improved reporting capability with administrative leaders
Use sampling methods to collect data until automated systems are available.
Multiple providers, hand offs, and opportunities for error and communication breakdown, diffusion of responsibility for glycemic control Involvement of varied front line providers
Check lists for important items to communicate on transfer/transport
Common protocols/education for similar units

Whereas the national guidelines call for a glycemic target in critical care areas with an upper limit of 110 mg/dL, there is room for debate, and tailoring of the glycemic target to fit individual patient circumstances is often advisable. Starting with a less aggressive glycemic target can be good politics (and perhaps good medicine as well). Once the higher glycemic targets are achieved safely, it can pave the way for a more aggressive approach.

Fear of hypoglycemia is one of the most potent barriers to intensive insulin infusion implementation. Because hyperglycemia is such a common condition in critical care units, nursing and physician staff may have developed a skewed view of the definition of hypoglycemia, at times fearing for their patient when the glucose values reach a level of 100 mg/dL or so. Polling the nurses on what they think their own fasting glucose levels are, and then actually measuring them can be an effective strategy (the nurses may be surprised that the patient's scary 90 mg/dL reading is higher than their own). It should also be emphasized that properly designed and implemented protocols may actually decrease the incidence of hypoglycemia when compared to standard care which may involve individually and sometimes improperly adjusted intravenous (IV) insulin (discussed further below).

CHOOSING AN IIP FOR YOUR HOSPITAL

See Table 2 for a comparison of several features identified in selected published protocols.7, 2127 This is not a comprehensive list of all protocols found in the literature. Rather, the authors consider it representative of the various types of IIPs or best recognized IIPs in the literature. Note that there is variability in study population, the glucose targets, hypoglycemia, the time to reach the target, and the time spent in the target range. Other practical factors to consider in reviewing the literature and selecting an IIP design are the complexity of the protocol, the required process steps or calculations, the evidence for staff acceptance, and the level of resources supporting the published protocol.

Characteristics of Selected Published Insulin Infusion Protocols
Author (reference) IIP Description Patient population Glucose Target (mg/dL) Mean Glucose (mg/dL) Time to Reach Target Hypoglycemia
Van den Berghe7 Initial and subsequent rates based on BG Surgical ICU 80‐110 6 AM glucose 103 19 Not reported 5.1% of patient < 41 mg/dL
Nurses had latitude
Van den Berghe21 TPN standard with IIP Medical ICU 80‐110 6 AM glucose 105 Not reported 19% of patients < 41 mg/dL
Furnary22 (2001‐2003 version) Initial dose determined by BG and type of DM CABG 100‐150 (there is a newer protocol with lower targets) Not mentioned. Appears to be < 150 94% within 3 hours 0.5% < 60 (% of readings?) Not reported with any specificity
Changes based on present BG and last change
Relatively complex
Goldberg23 Dosing based on: MICU 100‐139 Not specified 10.1 hours 0.3% of readings <60 BG <60 in 5.4% of patient days
○Current BG
○Velocity of glucose change
Goldberg24 ○Infusion rate CT Surgery 100‐139 122 17 Once target attained. 5 hours 0.2% of all BGs < 60 mg/Dl BG < 60 in 2.9% of patient days
Uses 3 tables
Relatively complex
DeSantis25 Initial dose based on BG Mostly surgical ICU and CVICU (75% surgical) 80‐110 135 49 (higher in SICU and CVICU alone) 10.6 hours 1.5% of readings
< 60 mg/dL (lower for CVICU & SICU alone)
Changes based on present glucose and rate of change.
IV bolus used with changes.
Braithwaite26 6‐column method Trauma ICU <110 mg/dL 129 25 16.7 hours 2.4% of readings < 70 mg/dL
Davidson27 Computer‐directed algorithm (similar to column method) Full spectrum Varied by year and situation Not reported (approximately 125 mg/dL when stable) 90% < 150 mg/dL in 3 hours 0.6% of readings <50 mg/dL 2.6% of patients

Structural Differences in Protocols

Protocols that vary by level of insulin sensitivity generally use column methods with the individual columns representing different categories of insulin sensitivity, placing the most sensitive category on the left with the highest level of insulin resistance on the far right. These methods use a multiplier to adjust for sensitivity. They are constructed according to the rule of 1500, 1700, or 1800, thereby adjusting for changes in insulin sensitivity that follow surgery or other changes in physiologic stress in the acute setting. Rate of change is addressed by shifting to the right if correction of hyperglycemia is too slow and to the left if the glucose is dropping too rapidly.

Most institutions using the column/emnsulin sensitivity method, implement paper orders as first published by Markovitz.28 The same concepts have been used to develop computer‐assisted insulin infusion protocols. One published method is the Glucommander,27 but a number of institutions are using similar computer‐assisted methods developed locally.

Other methods use the present glucose and change from last glucose to constantly adjust to any situation.7, 2125 They usually involve 2 or 3 steps and often require more calculations by the nurse. These methods are purported to be more agile or flexible but there have been no direct comparisons with the column methods looking at effectiveness, nursing errors, or hypoglycemic risk. The Yale Protocol23, 24 and the Portland Protocol22 are 2 prominent examples of this type of protocol. Adjustments are defined as units, percent change, or a combination of both.

Limitations of the IIP Literature

There had been few published insulin protocols aimed at reaching specific glucose goals when the Leuven surgical ICU experience7 was published in 2001. These early publications featured algorithms that adjusted insulin infusions solely on the basis of glucose level, and did not take the velocity of change, direction of change, proximity to glycemic target, or different insulin sensitivities into account. Also, the targeted glucose goals in those reports were not consistent with the present standards.2931 Other published protocols featured glucose‐insulin‐potassium infusion (GIK) protocols that focused on the amount of insulin administered and failed to attain appropriately defined glucose targets.32, 33 These publications offer no real guidance in crafting a modern glycemic targetoriented protocol.

Whereas more than 20 modern IIPs directed at glycemic targets have been published,7, 1517, 2127, 3450 many of the published protocols represent local modifications of ones previously published elsewhere, and no published, prospective, head‐to‐head comparisons of the best‐known IIPs are available.

Several reviews of previous published reports include comparisons of IIPs with varied areas of emphasis.5154 The reliability of such comparisons is limited by the inconsistency in methodology between studies and the different populations studied. For example, medical populations are generally harder to control and are more prone to hypoglycemia than surgical populations,7, 21, 23, 24, 50 and some studies include only patients with diabetes.4, 5, 38 In addition, definitions of hypoglycemia and methods of analyzing glycemic control are highly variable, making comparisons of IIPs challenging.39 As a result, attempts to compare published IIP results without consideration of the population studied could lead to erroneous conclusions.

In spite of the aforementioned limitations, there are several lessons we can learn from the IIP literature and accumulated clinical experience at a variety of centers.

Glycemic Targets and Other IIP Features Can Evolve over Time

Revisions of protocol details, including glycemic targets, often evolve over time. This deliberate approach can facilitate staff acceptance by demonstrating safe achievement of higher glycemic targets. The Yale team initially selected a conservative glycemic target of 100‐139 mg/dL, as depicted in Table 1.23, 24 They subsequently lowered the target range to 90‐119 mg/dL and increased the initial insulin bolus amount by 40%.50 The modified protocol displayed improved performance and yet retained safety, with only 1 glucose reading < 40 mg/dL in 101 patients over 117 runs of insulin infusion.

The Portland Protocol, used primarily in cardiac surgery patients, has also evolved over time. This group has altered the IIP in a number of ways at least 4 times. These protocols, including the most recent protocol targeting glucose levels of 70‐110 mg/dL, is found at www.portlandprotocol.org.4, 5, 55, 56

Medical and Surgical Patients Are Different

The most convincing evidence for stringent glycemic control evolved from studies of surgical patients.4, 5, 7 Acknowledging this fact, along with the greater degree of difficulty in achieving glycemic targets safely in critically ill medical patients, have led many to endorse higher glycemic targets for certain populations than others.57 Although we generally favor a uniform glycemic target for a unit serving a particular patient population, adopting a less stringent glycemic target in medical ICU settings compared to surgical ICU settings is reasonable and prudent in many institutional settings. However, the accompanying challenges regarding boarding patients and floating nurses between units would also need to be considered.

Local Factors and Implementation Methods Matter

The success or failure of a protocol likely depends on local factors and implementation methods as much as it does on the structure of the protocol itself. IIP development and implementation is a process that must be approached systematically and with attention to detail.19 Errors in approach can delay or abort the implementation, or potentially lead to an ineffective or unsafe protocol for the institution.

The Yale experience again provides us with a salient example.58 Initial efforts to implement an IIP failed due to a number of factors: a complicated protocol, insufficient nursing involvement, and inadequate training and education led to incomplete buy‐in, and nursing concerns over hypoglycemia that actually was within the goal range of the protocol. Successful implementation was not achieved until the leaders learned from their mistakes. Nurses and other clinical allies were involved and educated. Important stakeholders, who were not included earlier, were now involved, and front‐line nursing staff were engaged in proactive troubleshooting.

In another example, multisite studies like VISEP59 and Glucontrol9 have tried to adapt the Leuven protocol, only to struggle with excessive hypoglycemia and an inability to replicate the tight glycemic control enjoyed by van den Berghe and colleagues.7, 21 The Leuven care team augmented the performance of the IIP by their experience with the protocol, physician involvement, and adjustments made by the nursing staff.

Some IIPs Have Lower Hypoglycemia Rates than Others

Recent articles have highlighted the association of intensive insulin treatment, hypoglycemia, and mortality in the medical ICU population.60 Concerns that excessive hypoglycemia could reduce or reverse the overall benefits of intensive insulin therapy has led some to call for moderation of critical care glycemic targets.61 Comparisons of IIPs5254, 61 that include information about the propensity of the IIP to produce hypoglycemia are therefore important.

The Leuven IIP has been reported to yield high rates of hypoglycemia with almost 20% of patients suffering from severe hypoglycemia (glucose < 40 mg/dL) in some studies.9, 21, 59 By way of contrast, several different IIP regimens have frequently achieved identical or very similar glycemic control with less than 5% of the patients experiencing severe hypoglycemia.27, 50, 62 Although implementation factors, severity of illness, and other population factors play some role, some protocols have an inherent structural propensity to produce more hypoglycemia than others. In the case of the Leuven protocol, there is more of a role for clinician adjustment, and the written protocol itself does not call for much active adjustment as the patient enters into the hypoglycemic range.52 In contrast, more sophisticated and complicated regimens adjust more aggressively in this range and consistently induce less hypoglycemia.

Successful Methods to Manage the Complexity of an IIP

Many modern IIPs use bolus insulin to expedite control and adjust the infusion rate based on the velocity and direction of glucose change, not just the glucose value.52 Insulin resistance is taken into account in some models, and multiple calculation steps are required in several reported protocols.52 The improved automation and control refinements come at a cost of increased complexity.

Intensive implementation efforts and strong leadership can overcome some issues, as demonstrated by the Yale experience, but 2 other strategies have commonly demonstrated success. First, focused expert glycemic management teams that directly oversee many aspects of the IIP, or even assume direct management roles, can be quite effective,25 especially during early implementation.

Automation of calculations and computerization is another method to consider, and many recent reports involve applications of web‐based or other computerized models.27, 40, 42, 43, 46, 48, 63 Comparisons of computerized versus manual methods, computerized versus column methods, and a computerized nomogram‐versus‐chart method are now available.42, 45, 46, 48, 62 Computerized protocols show significant promise and would be expected to reduce dosing errors. These instruments generally present the nurse with a specific infusion rate after each monitored glucose and then recommend an interval for the next glucose determination. In direct comparisons, they tend to perform as well or often better than conventional methods. For example, in the most recent randomized trial comparing the Glucommander to a paper‐based column method in an ICU, Newton and colleagues found the computerized method reached the goal more rapidly and reached a lower mean glucose without increasing the rate of severe hypoglycemia (< 40 mg/dL).62 Computerized methods also facilitate data collection for analytical purposes.

Computerized systems (both commercial and home‐grown versions) are becoming more common and appear to hold significant benefits as long as they are backed by a validated algorithm. Whereas many institutions are not yet in a position to integrate such protocols into their standard or electronic record systems, we expect the trend for increased implementation to continue.

ENHANCING THE DESIGN OF YOUR IIP

Once the improvement team has identified and examined current order sets and protocols in the context of the literature, we encourage consolidation of institutional insulin infusion orders into a common basic structure. This basic structure should be enhanced by incorporating a variety of elements designed to enhance the reliability of use and safety of the IIP. These design features are outlined in Table 3. Randomized trial evidence of the effectiveness of these design features are largely lacking, but they are well grounded in reliability principles and common experience, and have also been recommended by others.1013, 58

Ingredients for Insulin Infusion Protocol Orders
□Identifies the glycemic target range
□Includes clear dosing instructions with acceptable calculation requirements for nurses
□Incorporates glucose monitoring expectations
□Easy physician ordering, check box simplicity
□Criteria for calling the physician
□Includes guidance on steps to follow for interruption of nutrition
□States guidelines on when to initiate the infusion and when to stop
□Defines the insulin concentration clearly and consistently
□Considers changing insulin sensitivity as well as the current glucose value and rate of change in attempting to reach goal and avoid hypoglycemia
□Includes or refers to a standardized hypoglycemia treatment protocol and prevention protocol.
□Incorporates guidelines and cautions for transition to subcutaneous insulin
□Ideally adaptable outside of critical care unitclear definition of locations where order set is to be used.

The orders should require a single physician signature and limited physician choices as the vehicle initiating the nurse‐driven protocol. The glycemic target range should be explicitly identified, and guidance for calling the physician and how to handle interruptions in nutrition should be embedded in the order set. Frequent monitoring of glucose levels is necessary for the safe infusion of insulin. Guidance for how often the monitoring is required must be explicit and included in the infusion order set, and standardization of documentation of the infusion rates and glucose values is highly desirable. IIPs that adjust based on the velocity of glucose change and insulin sensitivity are desirable. Certain elements may be more appropriate for some institutions than others, partly based on previous protocols and methods of practice. For example, the hypoglycemia protocol may be embedded or referred to as a separate standard of care with clear presence in the chart. The intended timing of conversion from IV to SC insulin should be included, but the actual method may be the subject of a separate order set. At other times, the conversion formula will be part of the initial intravenous order set.

IMPLEMENTATION: ADDRESSING SAFETY ISSUES

The use of insulin infusions comes with several potential hazards. Many of these potential complications can be proactively addressed, thereby minimizing accidental injuries to the patient on an insulin infusion.

Standardizing Insulin Infusion Preparations and Priming New Tubing

Varied concentrations or types of insulin for insulin infusions can lead to serious errors. Insulin infusions should generally be centrally prepared with a standard concentration of regular insulin in the pharmacy (usually 1 unit/cc), and the infusion concentration should be included in your infusion order set. Insulin binding to IV tubing can lead to false elevation of insulin requirements, potentially followed by serious hypoglycemia. When nurses change IV tubing or initially set up an insulin drip, education/emnstructions on priming new tubing with a small amount of insulin infusion to saturate the binding to the polyvinyl chloride tubing should be incorporated into their routine. Although 50 mL has often been recommended for priming, a recent study64 found that 20 mL of insulin infusion is enough to reach the saturation point.

Avoiding Over‐Reliance on the Insulin Protocol

Nurse‐driven insulin infusion protocols automate frequent insulin adjustment and reduce unnecessary calls to the physician. Although this is generally a decided advantage, the care team can be lulled into a sense of false security by the presence of orders that allow for such adjustment. Increasing the rate of an insulin infusion without thoughtful attention to factors that may be playing a role in this increased requirement (such as developing sepsis, other medical decompensation, steroid boluses, or an increase in carbohydrate intake) can have serious consequences. By the same token, an unanticipated rapid decrease in insulin requirement should lead to a reassessment of the infusion, and an inquiry about cessation of glucocorticoid therapy or nutrition. Rarely, a pharmacy or nursing error may induce a pseudo‐change in insulin requirements. The protocol should lead the nurse to seek advice and alert the physician to review potential causes of dramatic changes in insulin requirements, rather than simply adjusting insulin or nutrition to correct the present abnormal value.

Interruption of the Insulin Infusion

Interruption of insulin infusions may occur for many reasons, either intended or unintended. At times, the doctors or nurses may temporarily stop the protocol to allow for delivery of blood products or medications when IV access is limited. Infusions may mistakenly not be restarted, or deliberate discontinuation may not be adequately communicated, potentially leading to worsening hyperglycemia or even the development of ketoacidosis, and other adverse clinical outcomes. Therefore, the algorithm should have clear orders for the nurses to contact the ordering physician if the infusion is stopped for any reason, other than protocol‐driven cessation due to falling blood glucose concentrations.

Interruption of Nutrition, Field Trips, and Communication

Insulin infusion commonly provides both basal and nutritional insulin requirements. Interruptions in nutritional intake are extremely common in the inpatient setting, with a potential to cause serious hypoglycemia. Feeding tubes are often pulled out without warning; enteral nutrition may also need be halted if high gastric residuals are noted or during certain diagnostic tests. At times, IV carbohydrate sources (dextrose, partial parenteral nutrition, total parenteral nutrition) may be interrupted as well. In some cases, field trips out of the critical care units to the operating room, imaging studies, or other hospital locations add another layer of challenges to managing the IIP. Staff in these various areas may not be familiar with the IIP or monitoring standards and techniques, and potentially may not even be aware that the patient is on an insulin infusion. It is therefore crucial to anticipate these pitfalls and develop effective institutional procedures for addressing them. For example, many institutions use D10 solution to replace the carbohydrate calories that are lost when tube feedings have to be interrupted in a gram‐per‐gram fashion. Patients should be clearly identified as being on an insulin infusion. The requirement for consistent glucose monitoring, hypoglycemia recognition and treatment, and insulin infusion adjustment requires either critical care nurse care of the patient on the field trip, or training in the same skills in areas such as endoscopy, interventional radiology, and operating rooms including the preoperative and postoperative care units. In any case, all services should be involved in crafting solutions that will ensure a consistent approach to glycemic control as the patient travels off‐unit. Monitoring and treatment equipment needs to be readily available in all sites, and hypoglycemia protocols need to be distributed and supported in all areas.

Preventing and Treating Hypoglycemia

Some hypoglycemia will occur with infusion protocols, no matter how carefully a protocol is crafted and how well it is administered. Hypoglycemia protocols should therefore be incorporated directly into an infusion order set. Treatment of hypoglycemic events with a full 50 mL of D50 solution is equivalent to 25 g of carbohydrate, which will raise glucose levels in the average patient by 125 mg/dL. Many institutions discourage the overcorrection of hypoglycemic events by encouraging giving lesser aliquots of D50 based on the degree of hypoglycemia.

Preventing hypoglycemia by recognizing hypoglycemia risk factors, proper monitoring, and anticipating reductions in insulin requirements from decreasing severity of illness, nutritional intake, or steroid dosing can also reduce the frequency of hypoglycemic events.

IMPLEMENTATION: EDUCATING AND ENGAGING NURSING AND PHYSICIAN STAFF

Nursing staff generally bear the brunt of the burden on the front line of implementing intensive IIPs. Educational efforts for nurses should include the rationale for intensive insulin therapy and use of an IIP. Additionally, detailed, case‐based instruction on utilization of the IIP is required. Properly educated, nursing staff often become the strongest advocates of the IIP. In addition, they can frequently provide important input when situations arise that require troubleshooting. Regular feedback sessions early in implementation that address ease of use, clarity of orders, and difficulties encountered by nurses can be invaluable. Improvement teams need to provide frequent in‐service training and updates on the IIP selected after implementation. This is imperative to promote nursing acceptance and adherence to the IIP chosen, particularly with consideration for traveling nurses. The importance of nursing champions to design and carry out this work cannot be overstated. Educational programs focusing on the physician staff can also be very useful, particularly when focused on high‐volume physicians and influential thought leaders.

IMPLEMENTATION: ADDRESSING COMMON CLINICAL SITUATIONS

Steroids

Steroid boluses are commonly an integral part of regimens targeting a variety of conditions, such as transplant rejection, reactive airways disease, certain infections, cancer, and a variety of autoimmune disorders. This can lead to glycemic excursions and rapidly varying insulin requirements. Educational efforts and treatment regimens should address the disproportionate impact that steroids have on postprandial glycemic excursions. To minimize the glycemic impact of glucocorticoid therapy, a team should investigate promoting the use of steroid infusions in situations when a bolus is not absolutely necessary.

Dealing with the Eating Patient and Other Sources of Carbohydrate‐Induced Glycemic Excursions

Glucose levels can be difficult to control in patients who are eating while on insulin infusion, because the infusion chases the glycemic excursions through frequent adjustments, often with a late overshoot and inappropriate reduction in dose. We instead recommend providing bolus nutritional insulin to cover the expected glycemic excursion caused by carbohydrate ingestion. Carbohydrate counting and using a unit of insulin for each 10‐15 g of carbohydrate consumed can smooth out the rapid fluctuations in glucose. Guidance for this should be incorporated into the order set.

Transition Off of Insulin Infusion

Rational strategies for dealing with this transition are covered in detail elsewhere in this supplement.65 Guidance for managing this transition should be integrated into your insulin infusion and SC order sets. The transition to SC insulin may represent a separate order set but is sometimes best integrated into the IV insulin infusion order set itself.

IIPs Outside of the Critical Care Setting

IIPs are most commonly used in the critical care setting. In some institutions, IV insulin protocols are safely and effectively employed outside the ICU. Obviously, the number of nurses and other personnel who must be familiar with such protocols is much higher outside the ICU, and protocol errors are therefore likely to be somewhat higher. In addition the nurse‐per‐patient ratio is usually lower outside of the critical care setting. As a result, suggestions for safe implementation of insulin infusion regimens outside of the critical care setting include:

  • Choose an infusion protocol with a higher glycemic target.

  • Limit the medical and surgical units where this expertise will be developed.

  • Consider simplified infusion protocols but stay consistent with format.

  • Automated or computerized assistance of calculations may reduce human error and nursing burden.

ASSESSING THE IMPACT OF YOUR EFFORTS: FOLLOW‐UP AND FOLLOW‐THROUGH

Monitoring, Recording, and Analyzing Glycemic Control Data

Once the IIP is implemented, it is critical that the impact on glycemic control, hypoglycemia, insulin use, and other factors be analyzed and used for improving the IIP and care delivery. Frequent monitoring of glucose levels is necessary for the safe infusion of insulin. Guidance for how often the monitoring is required must be explicit and included in the infusion order set. Intermittent auditing for compliance with the frequency of glucose testing and appropriate dose selection is good practice. Attention should be paid to how the glucose level is obtained, recorded, and made available to the health care team in your institution. All glucose readings should be recorded electronically for ongoing analyses and retrieval, and ideally, this could be done in an automated or single‐step method. Try to eliminate duplication of effort, such as asking the nurse to record the glucose level and their reaction to it on paper and again in an electronic format. Your team should also provide guidance about the potential problems of using point‐of‐care glucose testing in settings with hypotension, sepsis, pressor use, and other conditions that may impair the accuracy of capillary glucose readings.

Reports on the time to reach the glycemic target, glycemic control while on infusion, and the incidence of hypoglycemia should be reviewed by the multidisciplinary steering committee. The Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force recommends analysis by patient day and by patient stay (or insulin infusion run) as preferred methodologies for analysis of glycemic control and hypoglycemia rates over the method of using each individual glucose reading as the unit of analysis. (The latter tends to under‐value the frequency of hypoglycemia.) Detailed practical recommendations for analyzing and summarizing glycemic control data are available elsewhere in this supplement.18 These data should drive decisions on modification of glycemic targets and the protocol structure. Patients meeting prespecified criteria should be referred to the improvement team for review. For example, patients who experience any glucose readings of 40 mg/dL, or who take more than 12 hours to reach the upper limit glycemic target should be referred to the team for a case review.

Assessing Adherence to the Protocol and Ease‐of‐Use Issues

Focused audits in the pilot and early implementation phases should look for nonadherence to the protocol. Deviations should be evaluated according to the patterns identified. For example, variation in application in some cases is specific for an individual and in others is characteristic of a specific group or the whole. Accordingly, this may point to gaps in education or attitudes about the importance of this endeavor. Front‐line staff may deviate from the protocol because they find it ineffective, unsafe, or impractical for certain situations or specific patients. Many IIPs are the subject of nursing errors related to the knowledge and acceptance of the nurse but also the complexity of the protocol. Appropriate modifications to the protocol based on these cases can frequently improve the ease of use and effectiveness of the protocol. The ongoing review process should identify issues that must be addressed with permanent solutions rather than accepting frequent individual alterations to meet goals. Revisions require supplementary education and rapid and wide dissemination. Although educational efforts and monitoring are often most intense in the early implementation phase, periodic retraining should continue to achieve optimal results and safety. Educational tools must consider nursing time commitments and will often include an interactive web‐based module that gives more flexibility for trainers and clinical nurses alike.

CONCLUSIONS

Insulin infusions are a powerful clinical tool in the inpatient setting to maintain glycemic control. Many IIPs have been developed and used successfully. The institutional challenge is to select, modify, and implement the IIP to reduce hyperglycemia and improve outcomes without excess hypoglycemia. In order to accomplish this goal safely and efficiently, standardized processes and collaboration between physicians, nurses, and pharmacists are needed. The keys to minimizing errors include developing a culture of safety and cooperation, back‐up checks, standardization, automation, and robust training for all those who are involved in the care of a patient on an insulin infusion. Although we encourage standardization and the use of protocols, providers always need to consider the unique clinical circumstances and potential problems presented by each individual patient. It is important to recognize the many barriers to successful implementation of an IIP, but strategies exist to overcome these. Finally, remember that the process does not end with the development phase. Continued review is paramount to success. Note variations in use, analyze them, and learn from them, in order to continually improve the process of care.

References
  1. Home PD,Massi‐Benedetti M,Shepherd GA,Hanning I,Alberti KG,Owens DR.A comparison of the activity and disposal of semi‐synthetic human insulin and porcine insulin in normal man by the glucose clamp technique.Diabetologia.1982;22(1):4145.
  2. Gavin LA.Perioperative management of the diabetic patient.Endocrinol Metab Clin North Am.1992;21(2):457475.
  3. Jovanovic‐Peterson L,Peterson CM.Pregnancy in the diabetic woman. Guidelines for a successful outcome.Endocrinol Metab Clin North Am.1992;21(2):433456.
  4. Furnary AP,Zerr KJ,Grunkemeier GL,Starr A.Continuous intravenous insulin infusion reduces the incidence of deep sternal wound infection in diabetic patients after cardiac surgical procedures.Ann Thorac Surg.1999;67(2):352360; discussion 360–362.
  5. Furnary AP,Gao G,Grunkemeier GL, et al.Continuous insulin infusion reduces mortality in patients with diabetes undergoing coronary artery bypass grafting.J Thorac Cardiovasc Surg.2003;125(5):10071021.
  6. Krinsley JS.Effect of an intensive glucose management protocol on the mortality of critically ill adult patients.Mayo Clin Proc.2004;79(8):9921000.
  7. Van den Berghe GP,Weekers F,Verwaest C, et al.Intensive insulin therapy in the critically ill patients.N Engl J Med.2001;345(19):13591367.
  8. American College of Endocrinology Position Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Metobolic Control.Endocr Pract.2004;10(suppl 2):59.
  9. Devos P,Preiser JC.Current controversies around tight glucose control in critically ill patients.Curr Opin Clin Nutr Metab Care.2007;10(2):206209.
  10. American Society of Health‐System Pharmacists and the Hospital and Health‐System Association of Pennsylvania. Recommendations for Safe Use of Insulin in Hospitals. http://www.ashp.org/s_ashp/docs/files/Safe_Use_of_Insulin.pdf. Accessed September 5,2008.
  11. Clement S,Braithwaite SS,Magee MF, et al.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in hospitals.Diabetes Care.2004;27(2):553591.
  12. Joint Commission. Disease Specific‐Care Certification. http://www.jointcommission.org/CertificationPrograms. Accessed September 5,2008.
  13. American College of Endocrinology and American Diabetes Association consensus statement on inpatient diabetes and glycemic control: a call to action.Diabetes Care2006;29(8):19551962.
  14. Standards of medical care in diabetes–2008.Diabetes Care2008;31(Suppl 1):S12S54.
  15. Li JY,Sun S,Wu SJ.Continuous insulin infusion improves postoperative glucose control in patients with diabetes mellitus undergoing coronary artery bypass surgery.Tex Heart Inst J.2006;33(4):445451.
  16. Quinn JA,Snyder SL,Berghoff JL,Colombo CS,Jacobi J.A practical approach to hyperglycemia management in the intensive care unit: evaluation of an intensive insulin infusion protocol.Pharmacotherapy.2006;26(10):14101420.
  17. Kanji S,Singh A,Tierney M,Meggison H,McIntyre L,Hebert PC.Standardization of intravenous insulin therapy improves the efficiency and safety of blood glucose control in critically ill adults.Intensive Care Med.2004;30(5):804810.
  18. Schnipper JL,Magee MF,Inzucchi SE,Magee MF,Larsen K,Maynard G.SHM Glycemic Control Task Force summary: practical recommendations for assessing the impact of glycemic control efforts.J Hosp Med supplement. In press.
  19. Preston S,Laver SR,Lloyd W,Padkin A.Introducing intensive insulin therapy: the nursing perspective.Nurs Crit Care.2006;11(2):7579.
  20. Aragon D.Evaluation of nursing work effort and perceptions about blood glucose testing in tight glycemic control.Am J Crit Care. Jul2006;15(4):370377.
  21. Van den Berghe G,Wilmer A,Hermans G, et al.Intensive insulin therapy in the medical ICU.N Engl J Med.2006;354(5):449461.
  22. Furnary AP,Wu Y,Bookin SO.Effect of hyperglycemia and continuous intravenous insulin infusions on outcomes of cardiac surgical procedures: the Portland Diabetic Project.Endocr Pract.2004;10(Suppl 2):2133.
  23. Goldberg PA,Siegel MD,Sherwin RS, et al.Implementation of a safe and effective insulin infusion protocol in a medical intensive care unit.Diabetes Care.2004;27(2):461467.
  24. Goldberg PA,Sakharova OV,Barrett PW, et al.Improving glycemic control in the cardiothoracic intensive care unit: clinical experience in two hospital settings.J Cardiothorac Vasc Anesth.2004;18(6):690697.
  25. DeSantis AJ,Schmeltz LR,Schmidt K, et al.Inpatient management of hyperglycemia: the Northwestern experience.Endocr Pract.2006;12(5):491505.
  26. Braithwaite SS,Edkins R,Macgregor KL, et al.Performance of a dose‐defining insulin infusion protocol among trauma service intensive care unit admissions.Diabetes Technol Ther.2006;8(4):476488.
  27. Davidson PC,Steed RD,Bode BW.Glucommander: a computer‐directed intravenous insulin system shown to be safe, simple, and effective in 120,618 h of operation.Diabetes Care.2005;28(10):24182423.
  28. Markovitz LJ,Wiechmann RJ,Harris N, et al.Description and evaluation of a glycemic management protocol for patients with diabetes undergoing heart surgery.Endocr Pract.2002;8(1):1018.
  29. Lazar HL,Chipkin SR,Fitzgerald CA,Bao Y,Cabral H,Apstein CS.Tight glycemic control in diabetic coronary artery bypass graft patients improves perioperative outcomes and decreases recurrent ischemic events.Circulation.2004;109(12):14971502.
  30. Boord JB,Graber AL,Christman JW,Powers AC.Practical management of diabetes in critically ill patients.Am J Respir Crit Care Med.2001;164(10 Pt 1):17631767.
  31. Watts NB,Gebhart SS,Clark RV,Phillips LS.Postoperative management of diabetes mellitus: steady‐state glucose control with bedside algorithm for insulin adjustment.Diabetes Care.1987;10(6):722728.
  32. Lazar HL,Chipkin S,Philippides G,Bao Y,Apstein C.Glucose‐insulin‐potassium solutions improve outcomes in diabetics who have coronary artery operations.Ann Thorac Surg.2000;70(1):145150.
  33. Malmberg K,Ryden L,Efendic S, et al.Randomized trial of insulin‐glucose infusion followed by subcutaneous insulin treatment in diabetic patients with acute myocardial infarction (DIGAMI study): effects on mortality at 1 year.J Am Coll Cardiol.1995;26(1):5765.
  34. Furnary AP,Wu Y.Eliminating the diabetic disadvantage: the Portland Diabetic Project.Semin Thorac Cardiovasc Surg.2006;18(4):302308.
  35. Chant C,Wilson G,Friedrich JO.Validation of an insulin infusion nomogram for intensive glucose control in critically ill patients.Pharmacotherapy.2005;25(3):352359.
  36. Furnary AP,Cheek DB,Holmes SC,Howell WL,Kelly SP.Achieving tight glycemic control in the operating room: lessons learned from 12 years in the trenches of a paradigm shift in anesthetic care.Semin Thorac Cardiovasc Surg.2006;18(4):339345.
  37. Trence DL,Kelly JL,Hirsch IB.The rationale and management of hyperglycemia for in‐patients with cardiovascular disease: time for change.J Clin Endocrinol Metab.2003;88(6):24302437.
  38. Zimmerman CR,Mlynarek ME,Jordan JA,Rajda CA,Horst HM.An insulin infusion protocol in critically ill cardiothoracic surgery patients.Ann Pharmacother.2004;38(7–8):11231129.
  39. Taylor BE,Schallom ME,Sona CS, et al.Efficacy and safety of an insulin infusion protocol in a surgical ICU.J Am Coll Surg.2006;202(1):19.
  40. Thomas AN,Marchant AE,Ogden MC,Collin S.Implementation of a tight glycaemic control protocol using a web‐based insulin dose calculator.Anaesthesia.2005;60(11):10931100.
  41. Toft P,Jorgensen HS,Toennesen E,Christiansen C.Intensive insulin therapy to non‐cardiac ICU patients: a prospective study.Eur J Anaesthesiol.2006;23(8):705709.
  42. Hovorka R,Kremen J,Blaha J, et al.Blood glucose control by a model predictive control algorithm with variable sampling rate versus a routine glucose management protocol in cardiac surgery patients: a randomized controlled trial.J Clin Endocrinol Metab.2007;92(8):29602964.
  43. Hermayer KL,Neal DE,Hushion TV, et al.Outcomes of a cardiothoracic intensive care web‐based online intravenous insulin infusion calculator study at a medical university hospital.Diabetes Technol Ther.2007;9(6):523534.
  44. Donaldson S,Villanuueva G,Rondinelli L,Baldwin D.Rush University guidelines and protocols for the management of hyperglycemia in hospitalized patients: elimination of the sliding scale and improvement of glycemic control throughout the hospital.Diabetes Educ.2006;32(6):954962.
  45. Fraser DD,Robley LR,Ballard NM,Peno‐Green LA.Collaborative development of an insulin nomogram for intensive insulin therapy.Crit Care Nurs Q.2006;29(1):96105.
  46. Boord JB,Sharifi M,Greevy RA, et al.Computer‐based insulin infusion protocol improves glycemia control over manual protocol.J Am Med Inform Assoc.2007;14(3):278287.
  47. Rea RS,Donihi AC,Bobeck M, et al.Implementing an intravenous insulin infusion protocol in the intensive care unit.Am J Health Syst Pharm.2007;64(4):385395.
  48. Rood E,Bosman RJ,van der Spoel JI,Taylor P,Zandstra DF.Use of a computerized guideline for glucose regulation in the intensive care unit improved both guideline adherence and glucose regulation.J Am Med Inform Assoc.2005;12(2):172180.
  49. Osburne RC,Cook CB,Stockton L, et al.Improving hyperglycemia management in the intensive care unit: preliminary report of a nurse‐driven quality improvement project using a redesigned insulin infusion algorithm.Diabetes Educ.2006;32(3):394403.
  50. Goldberg PA,Roussel MG,Inzucchi SE.Clinical results of an updated insulin infusion protocol in critically ill patients.Diabetes Spectrum.2005;18(1):2833.
  51. Pittas AG,Siegel RD,Lau J.Insulin therapy for critically ill hospitalized patients: a meta‐analysis of randomized controlled trials.Arch Intern Med.2004;164(18):20052011.
  52. Wilson M,Weinreb J,Hoo GW.Intensive insulin therapy in critical care: a review of 12 protocols.Diabetes Care.2007;30(4):10051011.
  53. Mechanick JI,Handelsman Y,Bloomgarden ZT.Hypoglycemia in the intensive care unit.Curr Opin Clin Nutr Metab Care.2007;10(2):193196.
  54. Nazer LH,Chow SL,Moghissi ES.Insulin infusion protocols for critically ill patients: a highlight of differences and similarities.Endocr Pract.2007;13(2):137146.
  55. Furnary AP,Wu Y,Bookin SO.Effect of hyperglycemia and continuous intravenous insulin infusions on outcomes of cardiac surgical procedures: the Portland Diabetic Project.Endocr Pract.2004;10(Suppl 2):2133.
  56. Providence Health 10(Suppl 2):7180.
  57. Goldberg PA.Memoirs of a root canal salesman: the successful implementation of a hospital‐wide intravenous insulin infusion protocol.Endocr Pract.2006;12(Suppl 3):7985.
  58. Brunkhorst FM,Engel C,Bloos F, et al.Intensive insulin therapy and pentastarch resuscitation in severe sepsis.N Engl J Med.2008;358(2):125139.
  59. Krinsley JS,Grover A.Severe hypoglycemia in critically ill patients: risk factors and outcomes.Crit Care Med.2007;35(10):22622267.
  60. Kitabchi AE,Freire AX,Umpierrez GE.Evidence for strict inpatient blood glucose control: time to revise glycemic goals in hospitalized patients.Metabolism.2008;57(1):116120.
  61. Newton CA,Smiley D,Davidson P, et al.Comparison of insulin infusion protocols in the ICU: computer‐guided versus standard column‐based insulin regimens [Abstract]. American Diabetes Association abstract,2008.
  62. Vogelzang M,Zijlstra F,Nijsten MW.Design and implementation of GRIP: a computerized glucose control system at a surgical intensive care unit.BMC Med Inform Decis Mak.2005;5:38.
  63. Goldberg PA,Kedves A,Walter K, et al.“Waste not, want not”: determining the optimal priming volume for intravenous infusions.Diabetes Technol Ther.2006;8(5):598601.
  64. O'Malley CW,Emanuele MA,Halasyamani L,Amin A.Bridge over troubled waters: safe and effective transitions of the inpatient with hyperglycemia.J Hosp Med supplement. In press.
References
  1. Home PD,Massi‐Benedetti M,Shepherd GA,Hanning I,Alberti KG,Owens DR.A comparison of the activity and disposal of semi‐synthetic human insulin and porcine insulin in normal man by the glucose clamp technique.Diabetologia.1982;22(1):4145.
  2. Gavin LA.Perioperative management of the diabetic patient.Endocrinol Metab Clin North Am.1992;21(2):457475.
  3. Jovanovic‐Peterson L,Peterson CM.Pregnancy in the diabetic woman. Guidelines for a successful outcome.Endocrinol Metab Clin North Am.1992;21(2):433456.
  4. Furnary AP,Zerr KJ,Grunkemeier GL,Starr A.Continuous intravenous insulin infusion reduces the incidence of deep sternal wound infection in diabetic patients after cardiac surgical procedures.Ann Thorac Surg.1999;67(2):352360; discussion 360–362.
  5. Furnary AP,Gao G,Grunkemeier GL, et al.Continuous insulin infusion reduces mortality in patients with diabetes undergoing coronary artery bypass grafting.J Thorac Cardiovasc Surg.2003;125(5):10071021.
  6. Krinsley JS.Effect of an intensive glucose management protocol on the mortality of critically ill adult patients.Mayo Clin Proc.2004;79(8):9921000.
  7. Van den Berghe GP,Weekers F,Verwaest C, et al.Intensive insulin therapy in the critically ill patients.N Engl J Med.2001;345(19):13591367.
  8. American College of Endocrinology Position Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Metobolic Control.Endocr Pract.2004;10(suppl 2):59.
  9. Devos P,Preiser JC.Current controversies around tight glucose control in critically ill patients.Curr Opin Clin Nutr Metab Care.2007;10(2):206209.
  10. American Society of Health‐System Pharmacists and the Hospital and Health‐System Association of Pennsylvania. Recommendations for Safe Use of Insulin in Hospitals. http://www.ashp.org/s_ashp/docs/files/Safe_Use_of_Insulin.pdf. Accessed September 5,2008.
  11. Clement S,Braithwaite SS,Magee MF, et al.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in hospitals.Diabetes Care.2004;27(2):553591.
  12. Joint Commission. Disease Specific‐Care Certification. http://www.jointcommission.org/CertificationPrograms. Accessed September 5,2008.
  13. American College of Endocrinology and American Diabetes Association consensus statement on inpatient diabetes and glycemic control: a call to action.Diabetes Care2006;29(8):19551962.
  14. Standards of medical care in diabetes–2008.Diabetes Care2008;31(Suppl 1):S12S54.
  15. Li JY,Sun S,Wu SJ.Continuous insulin infusion improves postoperative glucose control in patients with diabetes mellitus undergoing coronary artery bypass surgery.Tex Heart Inst J.2006;33(4):445451.
  16. Quinn JA,Snyder SL,Berghoff JL,Colombo CS,Jacobi J.A practical approach to hyperglycemia management in the intensive care unit: evaluation of an intensive insulin infusion protocol.Pharmacotherapy.2006;26(10):14101420.
  17. Kanji S,Singh A,Tierney M,Meggison H,McIntyre L,Hebert PC.Standardization of intravenous insulin therapy improves the efficiency and safety of blood glucose control in critically ill adults.Intensive Care Med.2004;30(5):804810.
  18. Schnipper JL,Magee MF,Inzucchi SE,Magee MF,Larsen K,Maynard G.SHM Glycemic Control Task Force summary: practical recommendations for assessing the impact of glycemic control efforts.J Hosp Med supplement. In press.
  19. Preston S,Laver SR,Lloyd W,Padkin A.Introducing intensive insulin therapy: the nursing perspective.Nurs Crit Care.2006;11(2):7579.
  20. Aragon D.Evaluation of nursing work effort and perceptions about blood glucose testing in tight glycemic control.Am J Crit Care. Jul2006;15(4):370377.
  21. Van den Berghe G,Wilmer A,Hermans G, et al.Intensive insulin therapy in the medical ICU.N Engl J Med.2006;354(5):449461.
  22. Furnary AP,Wu Y,Bookin SO.Effect of hyperglycemia and continuous intravenous insulin infusions on outcomes of cardiac surgical procedures: the Portland Diabetic Project.Endocr Pract.2004;10(Suppl 2):2133.
  23. Goldberg PA,Siegel MD,Sherwin RS, et al.Implementation of a safe and effective insulin infusion protocol in a medical intensive care unit.Diabetes Care.2004;27(2):461467.
  24. Goldberg PA,Sakharova OV,Barrett PW, et al.Improving glycemic control in the cardiothoracic intensive care unit: clinical experience in two hospital settings.J Cardiothorac Vasc Anesth.2004;18(6):690697.
  25. DeSantis AJ,Schmeltz LR,Schmidt K, et al.Inpatient management of hyperglycemia: the Northwestern experience.Endocr Pract.2006;12(5):491505.
  26. Braithwaite SS,Edkins R,Macgregor KL, et al.Performance of a dose‐defining insulin infusion protocol among trauma service intensive care unit admissions.Diabetes Technol Ther.2006;8(4):476488.
  27. Davidson PC,Steed RD,Bode BW.Glucommander: a computer‐directed intravenous insulin system shown to be safe, simple, and effective in 120,618 h of operation.Diabetes Care.2005;28(10):24182423.
  28. Markovitz LJ,Wiechmann RJ,Harris N, et al.Description and evaluation of a glycemic management protocol for patients with diabetes undergoing heart surgery.Endocr Pract.2002;8(1):1018.
  29. Lazar HL,Chipkin SR,Fitzgerald CA,Bao Y,Cabral H,Apstein CS.Tight glycemic control in diabetic coronary artery bypass graft patients improves perioperative outcomes and decreases recurrent ischemic events.Circulation.2004;109(12):14971502.
  30. Boord JB,Graber AL,Christman JW,Powers AC.Practical management of diabetes in critically ill patients.Am J Respir Crit Care Med.2001;164(10 Pt 1):17631767.
  31. Watts NB,Gebhart SS,Clark RV,Phillips LS.Postoperative management of diabetes mellitus: steady‐state glucose control with bedside algorithm for insulin adjustment.Diabetes Care.1987;10(6):722728.
  32. Lazar HL,Chipkin S,Philippides G,Bao Y,Apstein C.Glucose‐insulin‐potassium solutions improve outcomes in diabetics who have coronary artery operations.Ann Thorac Surg.2000;70(1):145150.
  33. Malmberg K,Ryden L,Efendic S, et al.Randomized trial of insulin‐glucose infusion followed by subcutaneous insulin treatment in diabetic patients with acute myocardial infarction (DIGAMI study): effects on mortality at 1 year.J Am Coll Cardiol.1995;26(1):5765.
  34. Furnary AP,Wu Y.Eliminating the diabetic disadvantage: the Portland Diabetic Project.Semin Thorac Cardiovasc Surg.2006;18(4):302308.
  35. Chant C,Wilson G,Friedrich JO.Validation of an insulin infusion nomogram for intensive glucose control in critically ill patients.Pharmacotherapy.2005;25(3):352359.
  36. Furnary AP,Cheek DB,Holmes SC,Howell WL,Kelly SP.Achieving tight glycemic control in the operating room: lessons learned from 12 years in the trenches of a paradigm shift in anesthetic care.Semin Thorac Cardiovasc Surg.2006;18(4):339345.
  37. Trence DL,Kelly JL,Hirsch IB.The rationale and management of hyperglycemia for in‐patients with cardiovascular disease: time for change.J Clin Endocrinol Metab.2003;88(6):24302437.
  38. Zimmerman CR,Mlynarek ME,Jordan JA,Rajda CA,Horst HM.An insulin infusion protocol in critically ill cardiothoracic surgery patients.Ann Pharmacother.2004;38(7–8):11231129.
  39. Taylor BE,Schallom ME,Sona CS, et al.Efficacy and safety of an insulin infusion protocol in a surgical ICU.J Am Coll Surg.2006;202(1):19.
  40. Thomas AN,Marchant AE,Ogden MC,Collin S.Implementation of a tight glycaemic control protocol using a web‐based insulin dose calculator.Anaesthesia.2005;60(11):10931100.
  41. Toft P,Jorgensen HS,Toennesen E,Christiansen C.Intensive insulin therapy to non‐cardiac ICU patients: a prospective study.Eur J Anaesthesiol.2006;23(8):705709.
  42. Hovorka R,Kremen J,Blaha J, et al.Blood glucose control by a model predictive control algorithm with variable sampling rate versus a routine glucose management protocol in cardiac surgery patients: a randomized controlled trial.J Clin Endocrinol Metab.2007;92(8):29602964.
  43. Hermayer KL,Neal DE,Hushion TV, et al.Outcomes of a cardiothoracic intensive care web‐based online intravenous insulin infusion calculator study at a medical university hospital.Diabetes Technol Ther.2007;9(6):523534.
  44. Donaldson S,Villanuueva G,Rondinelli L,Baldwin D.Rush University guidelines and protocols for the management of hyperglycemia in hospitalized patients: elimination of the sliding scale and improvement of glycemic control throughout the hospital.Diabetes Educ.2006;32(6):954962.
  45. Fraser DD,Robley LR,Ballard NM,Peno‐Green LA.Collaborative development of an insulin nomogram for intensive insulin therapy.Crit Care Nurs Q.2006;29(1):96105.
  46. Boord JB,Sharifi M,Greevy RA, et al.Computer‐based insulin infusion protocol improves glycemia control over manual protocol.J Am Med Inform Assoc.2007;14(3):278287.
  47. Rea RS,Donihi AC,Bobeck M, et al.Implementing an intravenous insulin infusion protocol in the intensive care unit.Am J Health Syst Pharm.2007;64(4):385395.
  48. Rood E,Bosman RJ,van der Spoel JI,Taylor P,Zandstra DF.Use of a computerized guideline for glucose regulation in the intensive care unit improved both guideline adherence and glucose regulation.J Am Med Inform Assoc.2005;12(2):172180.
  49. Osburne RC,Cook CB,Stockton L, et al.Improving hyperglycemia management in the intensive care unit: preliminary report of a nurse‐driven quality improvement project using a redesigned insulin infusion algorithm.Diabetes Educ.2006;32(3):394403.
  50. Goldberg PA,Roussel MG,Inzucchi SE.Clinical results of an updated insulin infusion protocol in critically ill patients.Diabetes Spectrum.2005;18(1):2833.
  51. Pittas AG,Siegel RD,Lau J.Insulin therapy for critically ill hospitalized patients: a meta‐analysis of randomized controlled trials.Arch Intern Med.2004;164(18):20052011.
  52. Wilson M,Weinreb J,Hoo GW.Intensive insulin therapy in critical care: a review of 12 protocols.Diabetes Care.2007;30(4):10051011.
  53. Mechanick JI,Handelsman Y,Bloomgarden ZT.Hypoglycemia in the intensive care unit.Curr Opin Clin Nutr Metab Care.2007;10(2):193196.
  54. Nazer LH,Chow SL,Moghissi ES.Insulin infusion protocols for critically ill patients: a highlight of differences and similarities.Endocr Pract.2007;13(2):137146.
  55. Furnary AP,Wu Y,Bookin SO.Effect of hyperglycemia and continuous intravenous insulin infusions on outcomes of cardiac surgical procedures: the Portland Diabetic Project.Endocr Pract.2004;10(Suppl 2):2133.
  56. Providence Health 10(Suppl 2):7180.
  57. Goldberg PA.Memoirs of a root canal salesman: the successful implementation of a hospital‐wide intravenous insulin infusion protocol.Endocr Pract.2006;12(Suppl 3):7985.
  58. Brunkhorst FM,Engel C,Bloos F, et al.Intensive insulin therapy and pentastarch resuscitation in severe sepsis.N Engl J Med.2008;358(2):125139.
  59. Krinsley JS,Grover A.Severe hypoglycemia in critically ill patients: risk factors and outcomes.Crit Care Med.2007;35(10):22622267.
  60. Kitabchi AE,Freire AX,Umpierrez GE.Evidence for strict inpatient blood glucose control: time to revise glycemic goals in hospitalized patients.Metabolism.2008;57(1):116120.
  61. Newton CA,Smiley D,Davidson P, et al.Comparison of insulin infusion protocols in the ICU: computer‐guided versus standard column‐based insulin regimens [Abstract]. American Diabetes Association abstract,2008.
  62. Vogelzang M,Zijlstra F,Nijsten MW.Design and implementation of GRIP: a computerized glucose control system at a surgical intensive care unit.BMC Med Inform Decis Mak.2005;5:38.
  63. Goldberg PA,Kedves A,Walter K, et al.“Waste not, want not”: determining the optimal priming volume for intravenous infusions.Diabetes Technol Ther.2006;8(5):598601.
  64. O'Malley CW,Emanuele MA,Halasyamani L,Amin A.Bridge over troubled waters: safe and effective transitions of the inpatient with hyperglycemia.J Hosp Med supplement. In press.
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Page Number
42-54
Page Number
42-54
Article Type
Display Headline
Designing and implementing insulin infusion protocols and order sets
Display Headline
Designing and implementing insulin infusion protocols and order sets
Legacy Keywords
intravenous infusion, insulin, critical care protocols, best practices
Legacy Keywords
intravenous infusion, insulin, critical care protocols, best practices
Sections
Article Source
Copyright © 2008 Society of Hospital Medicine
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
Gated (full article locked unless allowed per User)
Gating Strategy
First Peek Free
Article PDF Media

SC Insulin Order Sets and Protocols

Article Type
Changed
Mon, 01/02/2017 - 19:34
Display Headline
Subcutaneous insulin order sets and protocols: Effective design and implementation strategies

Inpatient glycemic control and hypoglycemia are issues with well deserved increased attention in recent years. Prominent guidelines and technical reviews have been published,13 and a recent, randomized controlled trial demonstrated the superiority of basal bolus insulin regimens compared to sliding‐scale regimens.4 Effective glycemic control for inpatients has remained elusive in most medical centers. Recent reports57 detail clinical inertia and the continued widespread use of sliding‐scale subcutaneous insulin regimens, as opposed to the anticipatory, physiologic basal‐nutrition‐correction dose insulin regimens endorsed by these reviews.

Inpatient glycemic control faces a number of barriers, including fears of inducing hypoglycemia, uneven knowledge and training among staff, and competing institutional and patient priorities. These barriers occur in the background of an inherently complex inpatient environment that poses unique challenges in maintaining safe glycemic control. Patients frequently move across a variety of care teams and geographic locations during a single inpatient stay, giving rise to multiple opportunities for failed communication, incomplete handoffs, and inconsistent treatment. In addition, insulin requirements may change dramatically due to variations in the stress of illness, exposure to medications that effect glucose levels, and varied forms of nutritional intake with frequent interruption. Although insulin is recognized as one of the medications most likely to be associated with adverse events in the hospital, many hospitals do not have protocols or order sets in place to standardize its use.

A Call to Action consensus conference,8, 9 hosted by the American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists (AACE) and the American Diabetes Association (ADA), brought together many thought leaders and organizations, including representation from the Society of Hospital Medicine (SHM), to address these barriers and to outline components necessary for successful implementation of a program to improve inpatient glycemic control in the face of these difficulties. Institutional insulin management protocols and standardized insulin order sets (supported by appropriate educational efforts) were identified as key interventions. It may be tempting to quickly deploy a generic insulin order set in an effort to improve care. This often results in mediocre results, due to inadequate incorporation of standardization and guidance into the order set and other documentation tools, and uneven use of the order set.

The SHM Glycemic Control Task Force (GCTF) recommends the following steps for developing and implementing successful protocols and order sets addressing the needs of the noncritical care inpatient with diabetes/hyperglycemia.

  • Form a steering committee for this work, and assess the current processes of care.

  • Identify best practices and preferred regimens to manage diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital.

  • Integrate best practices and preferred institutional choices into an inpatient glycemic control protocol. Crystallize your protocol into a one page summary.

  • Place guidance from your protocol into the flow of work, by integrating it into standardized subcutaneous insulin order sets and other documentation and treatment tools.

  • Monitor the use of your order sets and protocol. Intervene actively on nonadherents to your protocol and those with poor glycemic control, and revise your protocol/order sets as needed.

IDENTIFYING AND INCORPORATING KEY CONCEPTS AND BEST PRACTICES

A protocol is a document that endorses specific monitoring and treatment strategies in a given institution. This potentially extensive document should provide guidance for transitions, special situations (like steroids and total parenteral nutrition [TPN]) and should outline preferred insulin regimens for all of the most common nutritional situations. One of the most difficult parts of creating a protocol is the assimilation of all of the important information on which to base decisions. Your protocol and order set will be promoting a set of clinical practices. Fortunately, the current best practice for noncritical care hyperglycemic patients has been summarized by several authoritative sources,13, 811 including references from the SHM Glycemic Task Force published in this supplement.4, 12

Table 1 summarizes the key concepts that should be emphasized in a protocol for subcutaneous insulin management in the hospital. We recommend embedding guidance from your protocol into order sets, the medication administration record, and educational materials. Although the details contained in a protocol and order set might vary from one institution to another, the key concepts should not. The remainder of this article provides practical information about how these concepts and guidance for how preferred insulin regimens should be included in these tools. Appendices 1 and 2 give examples of an institutional one‐page summary protocol and subcutaneous insulin order set, respectively.

Key Concepts To Emphasize in Protocols and Order Sets for Subcutaneous Insulin Use in NonCritically Ill Inpatients
1. Establish a target range for blood glucose levels.
2. Standardize monitoring of glucose levels and assessment of long‐term control (HbA1c).
3. Incorporate nutritional management.
4. Prompt clinicians to consider discontinuing oral antihyperglycemic medications.
5. Prescribe physiologic (basal‐nutrition‐correction) insulin regimens.
a. Choose a total daily dose (TDD).
b. Divide the TDD into physiologic components of insulin therapy and provide basal and nutritional/correction separately.
c. Choose and dose a basal insulin.
d. Choose and dose a nutritional (prandial) insulin

i. Match exactly to nutritional intake (see Table 2).

ii. Include standing orders to allow nurses to hold nutritional insulin for nutritional interruptions and to modify nutritional insulin depending on the actual nutritional intake.
e. Add correction insulin
i. Match to an estimate of the patients insulin sensitivity using prefabricated scales.
ii. Use the same insulin as nutritional insulin.
6. Miscellaneous
a. Manage hypoglycemia in a standardized fashion and adjust regimen to prevent recurrences.
b. Provide diabetes education and appropriate consultation.
c. Coordinate glucose testing, nutrition delivery, and insulin administration.
d. Tailor discharge treatment regimens to the patient's individual circumstances and arrange for proper follow‐up.

Standardize the Monitoring of Blood Glucose Values and Glucosylated Hemoglobin

Guidance for the coordination of glucose testing, nutrition delivery, and insulin administration, should be integrated into your protocols, and order sets. For noncritical care areas, the minimal frequency for blood glucose monitoring for patients who are eating is before meals and at bedtime. For the patient designated nothing by mouth (NPO) or the patient on continuous tube feeding, the type of nutritional/correction insulin used should drive the minimum frequency (every 4‐6 hours if rapid acting analog insulins [RAA‐I] are used, and every 6 hours if regular insulin is used). Directions for administering scheduled RAA‐I immediately before or immediately after nutrition delivery should be incorporated into protocols, order sets, and medication administration records. Unfortunately, having this guidance in the order sets and protocols does not automatically translate into its being carried out in the real world. Wide variability in the coordination of glucose monitoring, nutritional delivery, and insulin administration is common, so monitoring the process to make sure the protocol is followed is important.

Obtaining a glucosylated hemoglobin (HbA1c) level is important in gauging how well the patient's outpatient regimen is maintaining glycemic control, distinguishing stress hyperglycemia from established diabetes, and guiding the inpatient approach to glycemic control. ADA guidelines2, 3 endorse obtaining HbA1c levels of inpatients if these levels are not already available from the month prior to admission.

Establish a Target Range for Blood Glucose in NonCritical Care Areas

It is important to adopt a glycemic target that is institution‐wide, for critical care areas and noncritical care areas alike. Your glycemic target need not be identical to the ADA/AACE glycemic targets, but should be similar to them.

Examples of institutional glycemic targets for noncritical care areas:

  • Preprandial target 90‐130 mg/dL, maximum random glucose <180 mg/dL (ADA/AACE consensus target)

  • 90‐150 mg/dL (a target used in some hospitals)

  • Preprandial target 90‐130 mg/dL for most patients, 100‐150 mg/dL if there are hypoglycemia risk factors, and <180 mg/dL if comfort‐care or end‐of‐life care (a more refined target, allowing for customization based on patient characteristics).

Your multidisciplinary glycemic control steering committee should pick the glycemic target it can most successfully implement and disseminate. It is fine to start with a conservative target and then ratchet down the goals as the environment becomes more accepting of the concept of tighter control of blood glucose in the hospital.

Although the choice of glycemic target is somewhat arbitrary, establishing an institutional glycemic target is critical to motivate clinical action. Your committee should design interventions, for instances when a patient's glycemic target is consistently not being met, including an assignment of responsibility.

Prompt Clinicians to Consider Discontinuing Oral Agents

Oral antihyperglycemic agents, in general, are difficult to quickly titrate to effect, and have side effects that limit their use in the hospital. In contrast, insulin acts rapidly and can be used in virtually all patients and clinical situations, making it the treatment of choice for treatment of hyperglycemia in the hospital.3, 11, 12 In certain circumstances, it may be entirely appropriate to continue a well‐controlled patient on his or her prior outpatient oral regimen. It is often also reasonable to resume oral agents in some patients when preparing for hospital discharge.

Incorporate Nutritional Management

Because diet is so integral to the management of diabetes and hyperglycemia, diet orders should be embedded in all diabetes or insulin‐related order sets. Diets with the same amount of carbohydrate with each meal should be the default rule for patients with diabetes. Nutritionist consultation should be considered and easy to access for patients with malnutrition, obesity, and other common conditions of the inpatient with diabetes.

Access Diabetes Education and Appropriate Consultation

Diabetes education should be offered to all hyperglycemic patients with normal mental status, complete with written materials, a listing of community resources, and survival skills. Consultation with physicians in internal medicine or endocrinology for difficult‐to‐control cases, or for cases in which the primary physician of record is not familiar with (or not adherent to) principles of inpatient glycemic management, should be very easy to obtain, or perhaps mandated, depending on your institution‐specific environment.

Prescribe Physiologic (Basal‐Nutritional‐Correction Dose) Insulin Regimens

Physiologic insulin use is the backbone of the recommended best practice for diabetes and hyperglycemia management in the hospital. The principles of such regimens are summarized elsewhere in this supplement.12 These principles will not be reiterated in detail here, but the major concepts that should be integrated into the protocols and order sets will be highlighted.

Choose a Total Daily Dose

Clinicians need guidance on how much subcutaneous insulin they should give a patient. These doses are well known from clinical experience and the published literature. The fear of hypoglycemia usually results in substantial underdosing of insulin, or total avoidance of scheduled insulin on admission. Your team should provide guidance for how much insulin to start a patient on when it is unclear from past experience how much insulin the patient needs. Waiting a few days to see how much insulin is required via sliding‐scale‐only regimens is a bad practice that should be discouraged for patients whose glucose values are substantially above the glycemic target. The total daily dose (TDD) can be estimated in several different ways (as demonstrated in Appendix 1 and 2), and protocols should make this step very clear for clinicians. Providing a specific location on the order set to declare the TDD may help ensure this step gets done more reliably. Some institutions with computer physician order entry (CPOE) provide assistance with calculating the TDD and the allocation of basal and nutritional components, based on data the ordering physician inputs into the system.

Select and Dose a Basal Insulin

Your protocol should describe how the TDD should be divided between basal and nutritional insulin. We generally recommend 50% of the TDD be given as basal insulin, with the other 50% administered on a scheduled basis to cover glycemic excursions from nutritional intake. The 50/50 rule is simple and generally works well, and should be widely promoted. However, there are exceptions to this rule that should be incorporated into your full protocol and educational programs. The order set should have separate steps for ordering basal insulin, nutritional insulin, and correction insulin. The advantage to providing these insulin components separately is that it allows them to be independently manipulated (eg, if a patient is unable to tolerate a meal, nutritional insulin is held, but basal insulin and correction insulin are continued).

The SHM GCTF specifically endorses long acting insulin (glargine and detemir) as the preferred basal insulin in the hospital setting, thus discouraging the use of neutral protamine Hagedorn (NPH) insulin and fixed combination insulin formulations (Table 2). In the absence of randomized controlled trials demonstrating superiority of the glargine or detemir to NPH insulin in the hospital, this endorsement deserves some further explanation. Although we believe that correctly dosed NPH containing insulin regimens can attain effective and safe glycemic control in the hospital setting, it is more difficult to standardize their use and adjust for fluctuations in nutritional intake. Glargine and detemir have much less pronounced spikes in their effect than NPH, rendering them relatively peakless in comparison. This pharmacokinetic profile allows for continued dosing with minimal or no correction when nutrition intake is variable, and allow for consistent reinforcement of the basal‐nutritional‐correction insulin concept.

Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force Recommendations: Preferred Insulin Regimens for Different Nutritional Situations
Nutritional situation Necessary insulin components Preferred regimen*
  • Abbreviations: D5, dextrate 5% solution; HS, at bedtime; IV, intravenous; NPO, nothing by mouth; q 4 hours, every 4 hours; q 6 hours, every 6 hours; q AC, before every meal; RAA, rapid‐acting analog; TDD, total daily dose; TPN, total parenteral nutrition.

  • These are the preferred regimens for most patients in these situations by consensus of the SHM Glycemic Control Task Force. Alternate regimens may appropriately be preferred by institutions or physicians to meet the needs of their own patient population. RAA insulins include lispro, aspart, and glulisine.

NPO (or clear liquids) Basal insulin: 50% of TDD. Nutritional insulin: None. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: None. Correctional insulin: Regular insulin q 6 hours or RAA insulin q 4 hours. Other comments: Dextrose infusion (e.g., D5 containing solution at 75‐150 cc/hour) recommended when nutrition is held. An IV insulin infusion is preferred for management of prolonged fasts or fasting type 1 diabetes patients.
Eating meals Basal insulin: 50% of TDD. Nutritional insulin: 50% of TDD, divided equally before each meal. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: RAA insulin with meals. Correctional insulin: RAA insulin q AC and HS (reduced dose at HS).
Bolus tube feeds Basal insulin: 40% of TDD. Nutritional insulin: 60% of the TDD, divided equally before each bolus feed. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: RAA insulin with each bolus. Correctional insulin: RAA insulin with each bolus.
Continuous tube feeds Basal insulin: 40% (conservative) of TDD. Nutritional insulin: 60% of the TDD in divided doses. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: RAA insulin q 4 hours or regular insulin q 6 hours. Correctional insulin: Should match nutritional insulin choice.
Parenteral nutrition Insulin is usually given parenterally, with the nutrition Initially, a separate insulin drip allows for accurate dose‐finding. Then, 80% of amount determined as TDD using drip is added to subsequent TPN bags as regular insulin. Use correctional subcutaneous insulin doses cautiously, in addition.

There are some caveats to this general recommendation. First, patients who are well controlled on home regimens with NPH basal insulin can (and sometimes should) stay on the regimen that has worked well for them. However, extra vigilance in reducing the dose for reductions in nutrition is required, because NPH is generally used to cover both nutritional and basal requirements. Second, extensive experience with glargine and detemir are not available in obstetric populations. They are not U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) approved for use in pregnant patients and formally carry a Class C rating, whereas NPH insulin has been used safely in obstetric populations for decades. Third, the insulin regimen used as an inpatient is not necessarily the preferred regimen to prescribe at discharge: cost, patient preferences, HbA1c level, and other factors should be considered in making this choice.

Select and Dose a Nutritional (Prandial) Insulin

The step for ordering nutritional insulin should assist the clinician in matching the insulin to the type of nutrition that the patient is receiving. For example, rapid‐acting insulin analogs are preferred over regular insulin in the eating patient, in view of their more physiologic profile, which averts the insulin stacking that can occur with regular insulin. If regular insulin is used as the preferred institutional choice for eating patients, the lunchtime dose should be reduced or eliminated altogether, to eliminate insulin stacking.

Table 2 outlines the SHM GCTF preferred regimens for different nutritional situations.

There should be a standing order for nutritional insulin to be held when nutrition is interrupted, whether intentional or unintentional. Patients with interrupted tube feedings could have standing orders for a dextrose infusion to replace the tube feeding carbohydrate load and prevent hypoglycemia. Ideally, there should also be a standing order allowing for real‐time management of the patient with uncertain nutritional intake. For example, when a patient's premeal assessment reveals that she may not tolerate the meal, the patient should be allowed to attempt to eat, and then the nutritional insulin should be given after the meal, in proportion to the amount of food that was eaten. This type of order will require significant nursing education and process redesign in many hospitals, but is essential for matching nutritional insulin to actual intake.

Add Correction Insulin

There is no convincing evidence for the benefit of correction (sliding‐scale) insulin in the inpatient setting, although a randomized trial demonstrating the superiority of basal/nutritional insulin regimens to sliding‐scale only regimens did incorporate a correction insulin scale as an adjunct to the superior basal/nutritional regimen.4 The SHM GCTF again emphasizes that control of hyperglycemia should be proactive and anticipatory of insulin needs, rather than reactive to hyperglycemia. Nonetheless, unexpected hyperglycemic excursions are common, and the use of correction insulin remains a pervasive and arguably logical practice. If correction insulin is used, it should be ordered as a separate step after considering basal and nutrition insulin needs. The doses of scheduled insulin should be adjusted regularly if correction insulin is consistently being required. Ideally, the prescriber should choose a preformatted corrective insulin scale, based on the patient's insulin sensitivity (Appendix 2). There should be a prompt to use the same type of insulin that is being used for nutritional insulin, and there should be instructions that this insulin is given in addition to the basal and nutritional insulin to correct for hyperglycemia. Nocturnal correction‐dose scales should be reduced in the eating patient.

Even after limiting insulin regimens to those in Table 2, multidisciplinary glycemic control teams are still left with several options within these SHM‐preferred regimens. We recommend that your team choose a single, institutionally‐preferred basal‐nutritional‐correction insulin combination for each situation.

Choosing one preferred option for these situations is advantageous because:

  • You can communicate preferred regimens more simply and succinctly to all staff.

  • You eliminate all inappropriate choices for insulin regimens for that situation, as well as some other less preferred, but acceptable choices.

  • You can encourage regimens that are most economical (by promoting the insulin regimens that reflect your hospital formulary choices).

  • Staff members can become very familiar with a few regimens, instead of being confused by a multitude of them. They can identify variations from your preferred choices and target these patients for extra scrutiny and actions should they fail to meet glycemic targets.

Although virtually every institution can provide specific guidance on insulin management in a protocol, there are tradeoffs inherent in how restrictive you can be in pushing these preferred choices in your order sets. Should you eliminate alternate basal or nutritional insulin choices from your order sets? As you integrate more and more of your preferred algorithm and regimens into your order set, you will gain incremental improvement in the standardization of inpatient insulin management. However, you reduce not only variability in ordering, but also the choices available to your prescribers and patients, and in effect you are pushing the providers to use an insulin regimen that often differs from the patient's outpatient regimen. If your institution is not yet ready to go with a single preferred insulin, simply listing your preferred insulin first with the annotation preferred can be enough to increase the use of the preferred insulin.

We endorse building the most protocol‐driven, proscriptive, insulin order set that the Glycemic Control Steering Committee believes their medical staff will accept. There are some caveats to this endorsement. First, there must be extra efforts on the backend of the admission, to ensure that the antihyperglycemic regimen is tailored to the unique needs of the patient (this is discussed further below). Second, a protocol‐driven approach is not a substitute for a good educational program for health care providers or well‐informed clinical judgment. Education should reinforce major concepts driving the protocol and should also highlight exceptions to the rule. Variance from the protocol endorsed choices should be allowed (and even encouraged) when the variance is driven by patient factors (as opposed to provider whim). Learning from this variance is a key concept in refining protocols. Education ideally should not be limited to only protocol‐endorsed choices, as staff should be familiar with the full range of antihyperglycemia regimens seen in inpatient and outpatient settings.

Special Situations

Most of the preferred regimens for different situations are outlined in Table 2 in a straightforward manner, and can be depicted in your protocols and order sets in the same way. Some conditions have enough complexity, however, that you will have difficulty placing all of the details into your one‐page protocol and order set. Details should be placed on your more detailed protocol, and educational programs should include the topics outlined below. Although insulin infusion is often the option that would provide the most reliable and expedient control of hyperglycemia in these special situations, it is an option not available in many noncritical care settings. Therefore, the discussion is limited to subcutaneous insulin control regimens.

Patient on Continuous Tube Feeding

The SHM GCTF endorses glargine or detemir as the basal insulin of choice for this setting. The nutritional and correction insulin of choice is either an RAA‐I every 4 hours (q4h), or regular insulin every 6 hours (q6h). We endorse this choice because it retains the basal‐nutritional‐correction dose concept, generally allows for continued basal insulin use if the tube feedings become interrupted, and is amenable to building a consistent institutional protocol.

There are some important caveats to this recommendation. First, realize that almost any regimen that provides a stable insulin supply would be acceptable, and many institutions will use glargine or detemir to cover both basal and nutritional needs. The downside to using large boluses of long‐acting insulin in this clinical situation is that any unexpected interruption of the feedings will necessitate prolonged infusions of dextrate 10% solution (D10) to avoid hypoglycemia

Second, because of the glycemic load inherent in tube feedings, maintenance of glycemic control in the setting of enteral feeding may be best managed by providing a higher percentage of the TDD as nutritional insulin. In these cases, ratios of basal to nutritional insulin of 40:60, or even less basal insulin, may be appropriate.

Glucocorticoid Therapy

High‐dose glucocorticoids are strongly associated with increased insulin requirements. The degree of hyperglycemia induced by steroids varies significantly from patient to patient, and the pattern of hyperglycemia will vary depending on the pattern of steroid administration. The general principle to keep in mind is that the hyperglycemia induced by a steroid dose will peak 8‐12 hours after it is given, so insulin regimens to address this should take this effect into account. For example, giving a long‐acting basal insulin like glargine to accommodate the hyperglycemic effect of a steroid bolus given in the morning would be inappropriate because the steroid effect would wane and then disappear overnight, leading to insulin‐induced hypoglycemia. NPH insulin can be ideal in this setting, either by itself, or by layering it on top of an existing regimen.

Another caveat: glucocorticoids exert their predominate effect on insulin sensitivity in muscle (as opposed to the liver), and as a result, have their most notable effect on postprandial glucose. For this reason, the best insulin regimens for this situation may use proportionally less basal insulin and more nutritional insulin. One common regimen calls for keeping the basal insulin dose the same as the preglucocorticoid dose, while escalating the RAA insulin dose at lunch and dinner.

Given the complexities of covering steroid‐induced hyperglycemia and its high prevalence in certain populations (such as transplantation patients and patients undergoing chemotherapy), this would be an excellent area on which to focus expertise. Examples include routine endocrinology consultation, intervention by a special glycemic control team, or incorporating routine glucose monitoring and triggers for initiating insulin infusion into the protocols for chemotherapy and transplantation patients.

Regiment the Management of Hypoglycemia

Hypoglycemia is defined by the ADA as a blood glucose of 70 mg/dL or less, based on the physiologic changes that can occur at this glucose level, even in subjectively asymptomatic patients.3 Protocols for management of hypoglycemia should be linked to your diabetes/hyperglycemia protocols. There are many hypoglycemia protocols available for review in the SHM Glycemic Control Resource Room and Glycemic Control Implementation Guide.10 Some common themes for effective implementation stand out. First, the protocols need to walk the balance between simplicity of use, and the need to provide instructions that will provide guidance in a variety of patient situations. Second, the protocols need to be nurse driven, so that nurses can initiate treatment without waiting for a physician order. Third, education and instruction regarding recognition of risk factors, and avoidance of hypoglycemia are needed to support a successful protocol. Importantly, any hypoglycemic event should lead to a reconsideration of the current anti‐hyperglycemic regimen so that future events can be prevented.

Plan for Discharge and Provide Guidance for the Transition

Your institution should have policies and procedures outlining all the steps needed to complete the important transition out of the hospital. At a minimum, this planning should include adequate education (including a learner assessment), appropriate follow‐up, referral to community resources, and a discharge glycemic control regimen that is tailored to the educational, financial, and motivational profile of a patient. The more your inpatient insulin management is driven by protocol, the more likely it is the patient will be on an inpatient treatment plan that differs from their outpatient regimen; therefore, it is even more important to plan this transition carefully and reliably.

Communicating the accurate hyperglycemia related diagnosis and related problems to the primary care provider is important for good care, perhaps even more so for patients who had hyperglycemia while hospitalized without a prior diagnosis of diabetes. Some centers place a prompt for hyperglycemia related diagnosis in the order set and/or discharge paperwork, to remind the clinician to convey the diagnosis to the primary provider, and to encourage more complete documentation. Improved documentation can also improve the business case for glycemic control, along with other strategies outlined elsewhere in this supplement.13

Transitions in care (including transitions out of the hospital and off of infusion insulin) are discussed in more detail14, 15 elsewhere in this supplement. The principles outlined in these references should be incorporated into your institutional protocol. Briefly, not all patients require or are capable of intensive basal‐bolus regimens upon discharge. The HbA1c can be very valuable in arriving at the optimal outpatient regimen.14 The capacities and preferences of the patient and the context of his or her outpatient care environment (including the preferences of the primary care provider) must be taken into consideration as an outpatient management program is planned.

PULLING IT ALL TOGETHER: MAKE SURE YOUR PROTOCOL/ORDER SET IS EASY TO USE AND WIDELY UTILIZED

When standardizing hospital management of diabetes and hyperglycemia, we recommend building the full protocol first, then crystallizing the protocol into a one‐page summary that can be widely disseminated. The protocol guidance is then incorporated into the order set and nursing medical administration record (MAR). Again, we recommend the most proscriptive and protocol‐driven order set feasible within the constraints of medical staff support. The example order set in Appendix 2 illustrates this approach along with other desirable features:

  • Check‐box simplicity on when to order appropriate glucose monitoring.

  • Prompt for the proper hyperglycemia‐related diagnosis.

  • Prompts to document diagnosis and to order HbA1c level.

  • Use of encouraged insulin terminology: basal, prandial (or nutritional), and correction. Language is a powerful thing, and just getting staff to use these terms goes a long way toward the more physiologic prescribing of insulin.

  • Statement/reminder of a glycemic goal.

  • Prompts and contact information for appropriate consultation.

  • Elimination of unapproved abbreviations (such as U for units).

  • Stating both generic and brand names of insulin preparations.

  • Important timing cues for administration of insulin.

  • Several correction‐dose scales suitable for different insulin sensitivities. One size does NOT fit all.

  • Incorporation of a simple hypoglycemia protocol into the order set.

  • Insulin dosing guidelines available at the point of care (in this case, on the back of the order set).

Additional nursing‐specific cues (such as an admonition to never mix glargine insulin with other types of insulin) can also be included in the MAR whenever glargine is ordered.

Once you have protocols and order sets to guide providers, you need to assure that they are used for the majority of hyperglycemic patients. Educational programs should introduce your interventions and the rationale for them. In order to make your method the default method of care, your team should survey all preprinted or CPOE insulin order sets of your institution. A review of postoperative, transfer, and admission order sets that all services use may reveal a half‐dozen or more embedded sliding‐scale insulin order sets that should be removed, with prompts to use the standardized insulin order set being placed in their stead.

Computerized order sets present both challenges and opportunities. Wording limitations and the scrolling nature can make concepts less clear, yet there is a capability for incorporating a hierarchical structure that allows for guiding the user through a more algorithmic approach. There is also a capacity to provide assistance with dosing calculations that do not exist in the paper world. Education remains of key importance for both methods.

MONITOR THE USE AND EFFECTIVENESS OF YOUR PROTOCOLS AND ORDER SETS

Creating and implementing protocols, order sets, and other tools is not the end of the journey to improve care. It is important to monitor order set utilization, insulin use patterns, and parameters measuring glycemic control and hypoglycemia, as outlined in more detail in another article in this supplement.16 In addition to summary data every month or so, we recommend daily reports that spur action in near real time. Triggers such as uncontrolled hyperglycemia, markedly elevated HbA1c levels, and nonphysiologic insulin regimens should initiate consultation, extra diabetes education, or referral to a glucose control team. If appropriate consultation is not readily available, the glycemic control steering group should lobby the administration to bolster this capability. Qualitative feedback from the frontline caregivers, as well as this quantitative data, can assist the local glycemic control champions in designing even more effective protocols, order sets, focused educational efforts, and concurrent mitigation of suboptimal care.

CONCLUSION

Diabetes, hyperglycemia, and iatrogenic hypoglycemia are common and important conditions affecting the noncritically ill inpatient. Interventional trials to validate the recommended noncritical care unit glycemic targets are needed. Although there is a growing consensus on best practices to care for these patients, numerous barriers and the complexity of caring for inpatients hamper the reliability of best practice delivery. Institutional protocols and protocol driven subcutaneous insulin orders, when implemented with the strategies outlined here, can be the key to delivering these best practices more reliably.

Appendix

References
  1. American College of Endocrinology Task Force on Inpatient Diabetes and Metabolic Control.American College of Endocrinology Position Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Metabolic Control.Endocr Pract.2004;10:7782.
  2. Clement S,Baithwaite SS,Magee MF,Ahmann A,Smith EP,Schafer RG,Hirsch IB.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in hospitals.Diabetes Care.2004;27:553591.
  3. American Diabetes Association.Standards of Medical Carein Diabetes‐2006.Diabetes Care.2006;29(suppl 1):s4s42.
  4. Umpierrez GE,Smiley D,Zisman A, et al.Randomized study of basal‐bolus insulin therapy in the inpatient management of patients with type 2 diabetes (RABBIT 2 Trial).Diabetes Care.2007;30:21812186.
  5. Schnipper JL,Barskey EE,Shaykevich S,Fitzmaurice G,Pendergrass ML.Inpatient management of diabetes and hyperglycemia among general medicine patients at a large teaching hospital.J Hosp Med.2006;1:145150.
  6. Knecht LAD,Gauthier SM,Castro JC, et al.Diabetes care in the hospital: is there clinical inertia?J Hosp Med.2006;1:151160.
  7. Cook CB,Curtis JC,Schmidt RE, et al.Diabetes care in hospitalized non‐critically ill patients: more evidence for clinical inertia and negative therapeutic momentum.JHosp Med.2007;2:203211.
  8. Inpatient Diabetes and Glycemic Control: A Call to Action Conference. Position Statement. AACE, February2006. Available at: http://www.aace.com/meetings/consensus/IIDC/IDGC0207.pdf. Accessed October, 2006.
  9. Proceedings of the American College of Endocrinology and American Diabetes Association Consensus Conference, Washington, DC, January 30–31, 2006. Endocr Pract.2006; 12(suppl 3):313.
  10. Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force. Implementation Guide: Improving Glycemic Control, Preventing Hypoglycemia, and Optimizing Care of the Inpatient with Hyperglycemia and Diabetes. Published January 2007 on the Society of Hospital Medicine website. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org. Accessed August,2007.
  11. Inzucchi SE.Management of hyperglycemia in the hospital setting.N Engl J Med.2006;355:19031911.
  12. Wesorick DH,O'Malley CW,Rushakoff R,Larsen K,Magee MF.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital: a practical guide to subcutaneous insulin use in the non‐critically ill adult patient.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5):S17S28.
  13. Magee MF,Beck A.Practical strategies for developing the business case for hospital glycemic control teams.J Hosp Med2008;3(5):S76S83.
  14. O'Malley CW,Emanuele MA,Halasyamani L,Amin A.Bridge over troubled waters: safe and effective transitions of the inpatient with hyperglycemia.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5):S55S65.
  15. Ahmann A,Hellman R,Larsen K,Maynard G.Designing and implementing insulin infusion protocols and order sets.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5):S42S54.
  16. Schnipper JL,Magee MF,Inzucchi SE,Magee MF,Larsen K,Maynard G.SHM Glycemic Control Task Force summary: practical recommendations for assessing the impact of glycemic control efforts.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5):S66S75.
Article PDF
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Page Number
29-41
Sections
Article PDF
Article PDF

Inpatient glycemic control and hypoglycemia are issues with well deserved increased attention in recent years. Prominent guidelines and technical reviews have been published,13 and a recent, randomized controlled trial demonstrated the superiority of basal bolus insulin regimens compared to sliding‐scale regimens.4 Effective glycemic control for inpatients has remained elusive in most medical centers. Recent reports57 detail clinical inertia and the continued widespread use of sliding‐scale subcutaneous insulin regimens, as opposed to the anticipatory, physiologic basal‐nutrition‐correction dose insulin regimens endorsed by these reviews.

Inpatient glycemic control faces a number of barriers, including fears of inducing hypoglycemia, uneven knowledge and training among staff, and competing institutional and patient priorities. These barriers occur in the background of an inherently complex inpatient environment that poses unique challenges in maintaining safe glycemic control. Patients frequently move across a variety of care teams and geographic locations during a single inpatient stay, giving rise to multiple opportunities for failed communication, incomplete handoffs, and inconsistent treatment. In addition, insulin requirements may change dramatically due to variations in the stress of illness, exposure to medications that effect glucose levels, and varied forms of nutritional intake with frequent interruption. Although insulin is recognized as one of the medications most likely to be associated with adverse events in the hospital, many hospitals do not have protocols or order sets in place to standardize its use.

A Call to Action consensus conference,8, 9 hosted by the American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists (AACE) and the American Diabetes Association (ADA), brought together many thought leaders and organizations, including representation from the Society of Hospital Medicine (SHM), to address these barriers and to outline components necessary for successful implementation of a program to improve inpatient glycemic control in the face of these difficulties. Institutional insulin management protocols and standardized insulin order sets (supported by appropriate educational efforts) were identified as key interventions. It may be tempting to quickly deploy a generic insulin order set in an effort to improve care. This often results in mediocre results, due to inadequate incorporation of standardization and guidance into the order set and other documentation tools, and uneven use of the order set.

The SHM Glycemic Control Task Force (GCTF) recommends the following steps for developing and implementing successful protocols and order sets addressing the needs of the noncritical care inpatient with diabetes/hyperglycemia.

  • Form a steering committee for this work, and assess the current processes of care.

  • Identify best practices and preferred regimens to manage diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital.

  • Integrate best practices and preferred institutional choices into an inpatient glycemic control protocol. Crystallize your protocol into a one page summary.

  • Place guidance from your protocol into the flow of work, by integrating it into standardized subcutaneous insulin order sets and other documentation and treatment tools.

  • Monitor the use of your order sets and protocol. Intervene actively on nonadherents to your protocol and those with poor glycemic control, and revise your protocol/order sets as needed.

IDENTIFYING AND INCORPORATING KEY CONCEPTS AND BEST PRACTICES

A protocol is a document that endorses specific monitoring and treatment strategies in a given institution. This potentially extensive document should provide guidance for transitions, special situations (like steroids and total parenteral nutrition [TPN]) and should outline preferred insulin regimens for all of the most common nutritional situations. One of the most difficult parts of creating a protocol is the assimilation of all of the important information on which to base decisions. Your protocol and order set will be promoting a set of clinical practices. Fortunately, the current best practice for noncritical care hyperglycemic patients has been summarized by several authoritative sources,13, 811 including references from the SHM Glycemic Task Force published in this supplement.4, 12

Table 1 summarizes the key concepts that should be emphasized in a protocol for subcutaneous insulin management in the hospital. We recommend embedding guidance from your protocol into order sets, the medication administration record, and educational materials. Although the details contained in a protocol and order set might vary from one institution to another, the key concepts should not. The remainder of this article provides practical information about how these concepts and guidance for how preferred insulin regimens should be included in these tools. Appendices 1 and 2 give examples of an institutional one‐page summary protocol and subcutaneous insulin order set, respectively.

Key Concepts To Emphasize in Protocols and Order Sets for Subcutaneous Insulin Use in NonCritically Ill Inpatients
1. Establish a target range for blood glucose levels.
2. Standardize monitoring of glucose levels and assessment of long‐term control (HbA1c).
3. Incorporate nutritional management.
4. Prompt clinicians to consider discontinuing oral antihyperglycemic medications.
5. Prescribe physiologic (basal‐nutrition‐correction) insulin regimens.
a. Choose a total daily dose (TDD).
b. Divide the TDD into physiologic components of insulin therapy and provide basal and nutritional/correction separately.
c. Choose and dose a basal insulin.
d. Choose and dose a nutritional (prandial) insulin

i. Match exactly to nutritional intake (see Table 2).

ii. Include standing orders to allow nurses to hold nutritional insulin for nutritional interruptions and to modify nutritional insulin depending on the actual nutritional intake.
e. Add correction insulin
i. Match to an estimate of the patients insulin sensitivity using prefabricated scales.
ii. Use the same insulin as nutritional insulin.
6. Miscellaneous
a. Manage hypoglycemia in a standardized fashion and adjust regimen to prevent recurrences.
b. Provide diabetes education and appropriate consultation.
c. Coordinate glucose testing, nutrition delivery, and insulin administration.
d. Tailor discharge treatment regimens to the patient's individual circumstances and arrange for proper follow‐up.

Standardize the Monitoring of Blood Glucose Values and Glucosylated Hemoglobin

Guidance for the coordination of glucose testing, nutrition delivery, and insulin administration, should be integrated into your protocols, and order sets. For noncritical care areas, the minimal frequency for blood glucose monitoring for patients who are eating is before meals and at bedtime. For the patient designated nothing by mouth (NPO) or the patient on continuous tube feeding, the type of nutritional/correction insulin used should drive the minimum frequency (every 4‐6 hours if rapid acting analog insulins [RAA‐I] are used, and every 6 hours if regular insulin is used). Directions for administering scheduled RAA‐I immediately before or immediately after nutrition delivery should be incorporated into protocols, order sets, and medication administration records. Unfortunately, having this guidance in the order sets and protocols does not automatically translate into its being carried out in the real world. Wide variability in the coordination of glucose monitoring, nutritional delivery, and insulin administration is common, so monitoring the process to make sure the protocol is followed is important.

Obtaining a glucosylated hemoglobin (HbA1c) level is important in gauging how well the patient's outpatient regimen is maintaining glycemic control, distinguishing stress hyperglycemia from established diabetes, and guiding the inpatient approach to glycemic control. ADA guidelines2, 3 endorse obtaining HbA1c levels of inpatients if these levels are not already available from the month prior to admission.

Establish a Target Range for Blood Glucose in NonCritical Care Areas

It is important to adopt a glycemic target that is institution‐wide, for critical care areas and noncritical care areas alike. Your glycemic target need not be identical to the ADA/AACE glycemic targets, but should be similar to them.

Examples of institutional glycemic targets for noncritical care areas:

  • Preprandial target 90‐130 mg/dL, maximum random glucose <180 mg/dL (ADA/AACE consensus target)

  • 90‐150 mg/dL (a target used in some hospitals)

  • Preprandial target 90‐130 mg/dL for most patients, 100‐150 mg/dL if there are hypoglycemia risk factors, and <180 mg/dL if comfort‐care or end‐of‐life care (a more refined target, allowing for customization based on patient characteristics).

Your multidisciplinary glycemic control steering committee should pick the glycemic target it can most successfully implement and disseminate. It is fine to start with a conservative target and then ratchet down the goals as the environment becomes more accepting of the concept of tighter control of blood glucose in the hospital.

Although the choice of glycemic target is somewhat arbitrary, establishing an institutional glycemic target is critical to motivate clinical action. Your committee should design interventions, for instances when a patient's glycemic target is consistently not being met, including an assignment of responsibility.

Prompt Clinicians to Consider Discontinuing Oral Agents

Oral antihyperglycemic agents, in general, are difficult to quickly titrate to effect, and have side effects that limit their use in the hospital. In contrast, insulin acts rapidly and can be used in virtually all patients and clinical situations, making it the treatment of choice for treatment of hyperglycemia in the hospital.3, 11, 12 In certain circumstances, it may be entirely appropriate to continue a well‐controlled patient on his or her prior outpatient oral regimen. It is often also reasonable to resume oral agents in some patients when preparing for hospital discharge.

Incorporate Nutritional Management

Because diet is so integral to the management of diabetes and hyperglycemia, diet orders should be embedded in all diabetes or insulin‐related order sets. Diets with the same amount of carbohydrate with each meal should be the default rule for patients with diabetes. Nutritionist consultation should be considered and easy to access for patients with malnutrition, obesity, and other common conditions of the inpatient with diabetes.

Access Diabetes Education and Appropriate Consultation

Diabetes education should be offered to all hyperglycemic patients with normal mental status, complete with written materials, a listing of community resources, and survival skills. Consultation with physicians in internal medicine or endocrinology for difficult‐to‐control cases, or for cases in which the primary physician of record is not familiar with (or not adherent to) principles of inpatient glycemic management, should be very easy to obtain, or perhaps mandated, depending on your institution‐specific environment.

Prescribe Physiologic (Basal‐Nutritional‐Correction Dose) Insulin Regimens

Physiologic insulin use is the backbone of the recommended best practice for diabetes and hyperglycemia management in the hospital. The principles of such regimens are summarized elsewhere in this supplement.12 These principles will not be reiterated in detail here, but the major concepts that should be integrated into the protocols and order sets will be highlighted.

Choose a Total Daily Dose

Clinicians need guidance on how much subcutaneous insulin they should give a patient. These doses are well known from clinical experience and the published literature. The fear of hypoglycemia usually results in substantial underdosing of insulin, or total avoidance of scheduled insulin on admission. Your team should provide guidance for how much insulin to start a patient on when it is unclear from past experience how much insulin the patient needs. Waiting a few days to see how much insulin is required via sliding‐scale‐only regimens is a bad practice that should be discouraged for patients whose glucose values are substantially above the glycemic target. The total daily dose (TDD) can be estimated in several different ways (as demonstrated in Appendix 1 and 2), and protocols should make this step very clear for clinicians. Providing a specific location on the order set to declare the TDD may help ensure this step gets done more reliably. Some institutions with computer physician order entry (CPOE) provide assistance with calculating the TDD and the allocation of basal and nutritional components, based on data the ordering physician inputs into the system.

Select and Dose a Basal Insulin

Your protocol should describe how the TDD should be divided between basal and nutritional insulin. We generally recommend 50% of the TDD be given as basal insulin, with the other 50% administered on a scheduled basis to cover glycemic excursions from nutritional intake. The 50/50 rule is simple and generally works well, and should be widely promoted. However, there are exceptions to this rule that should be incorporated into your full protocol and educational programs. The order set should have separate steps for ordering basal insulin, nutritional insulin, and correction insulin. The advantage to providing these insulin components separately is that it allows them to be independently manipulated (eg, if a patient is unable to tolerate a meal, nutritional insulin is held, but basal insulin and correction insulin are continued).

The SHM GCTF specifically endorses long acting insulin (glargine and detemir) as the preferred basal insulin in the hospital setting, thus discouraging the use of neutral protamine Hagedorn (NPH) insulin and fixed combination insulin formulations (Table 2). In the absence of randomized controlled trials demonstrating superiority of the glargine or detemir to NPH insulin in the hospital, this endorsement deserves some further explanation. Although we believe that correctly dosed NPH containing insulin regimens can attain effective and safe glycemic control in the hospital setting, it is more difficult to standardize their use and adjust for fluctuations in nutritional intake. Glargine and detemir have much less pronounced spikes in their effect than NPH, rendering them relatively peakless in comparison. This pharmacokinetic profile allows for continued dosing with minimal or no correction when nutrition intake is variable, and allow for consistent reinforcement of the basal‐nutritional‐correction insulin concept.

Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force Recommendations: Preferred Insulin Regimens for Different Nutritional Situations
Nutritional situation Necessary insulin components Preferred regimen*
  • Abbreviations: D5, dextrate 5% solution; HS, at bedtime; IV, intravenous; NPO, nothing by mouth; q 4 hours, every 4 hours; q 6 hours, every 6 hours; q AC, before every meal; RAA, rapid‐acting analog; TDD, total daily dose; TPN, total parenteral nutrition.

  • These are the preferred regimens for most patients in these situations by consensus of the SHM Glycemic Control Task Force. Alternate regimens may appropriately be preferred by institutions or physicians to meet the needs of their own patient population. RAA insulins include lispro, aspart, and glulisine.

NPO (or clear liquids) Basal insulin: 50% of TDD. Nutritional insulin: None. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: None. Correctional insulin: Regular insulin q 6 hours or RAA insulin q 4 hours. Other comments: Dextrose infusion (e.g., D5 containing solution at 75‐150 cc/hour) recommended when nutrition is held. An IV insulin infusion is preferred for management of prolonged fasts or fasting type 1 diabetes patients.
Eating meals Basal insulin: 50% of TDD. Nutritional insulin: 50% of TDD, divided equally before each meal. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: RAA insulin with meals. Correctional insulin: RAA insulin q AC and HS (reduced dose at HS).
Bolus tube feeds Basal insulin: 40% of TDD. Nutritional insulin: 60% of the TDD, divided equally before each bolus feed. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: RAA insulin with each bolus. Correctional insulin: RAA insulin with each bolus.
Continuous tube feeds Basal insulin: 40% (conservative) of TDD. Nutritional insulin: 60% of the TDD in divided doses. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: RAA insulin q 4 hours or regular insulin q 6 hours. Correctional insulin: Should match nutritional insulin choice.
Parenteral nutrition Insulin is usually given parenterally, with the nutrition Initially, a separate insulin drip allows for accurate dose‐finding. Then, 80% of amount determined as TDD using drip is added to subsequent TPN bags as regular insulin. Use correctional subcutaneous insulin doses cautiously, in addition.

There are some caveats to this general recommendation. First, patients who are well controlled on home regimens with NPH basal insulin can (and sometimes should) stay on the regimen that has worked well for them. However, extra vigilance in reducing the dose for reductions in nutrition is required, because NPH is generally used to cover both nutritional and basal requirements. Second, extensive experience with glargine and detemir are not available in obstetric populations. They are not U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) approved for use in pregnant patients and formally carry a Class C rating, whereas NPH insulin has been used safely in obstetric populations for decades. Third, the insulin regimen used as an inpatient is not necessarily the preferred regimen to prescribe at discharge: cost, patient preferences, HbA1c level, and other factors should be considered in making this choice.

Select and Dose a Nutritional (Prandial) Insulin

The step for ordering nutritional insulin should assist the clinician in matching the insulin to the type of nutrition that the patient is receiving. For example, rapid‐acting insulin analogs are preferred over regular insulin in the eating patient, in view of their more physiologic profile, which averts the insulin stacking that can occur with regular insulin. If regular insulin is used as the preferred institutional choice for eating patients, the lunchtime dose should be reduced or eliminated altogether, to eliminate insulin stacking.

Table 2 outlines the SHM GCTF preferred regimens for different nutritional situations.

There should be a standing order for nutritional insulin to be held when nutrition is interrupted, whether intentional or unintentional. Patients with interrupted tube feedings could have standing orders for a dextrose infusion to replace the tube feeding carbohydrate load and prevent hypoglycemia. Ideally, there should also be a standing order allowing for real‐time management of the patient with uncertain nutritional intake. For example, when a patient's premeal assessment reveals that she may not tolerate the meal, the patient should be allowed to attempt to eat, and then the nutritional insulin should be given after the meal, in proportion to the amount of food that was eaten. This type of order will require significant nursing education and process redesign in many hospitals, but is essential for matching nutritional insulin to actual intake.

Add Correction Insulin

There is no convincing evidence for the benefit of correction (sliding‐scale) insulin in the inpatient setting, although a randomized trial demonstrating the superiority of basal/nutritional insulin regimens to sliding‐scale only regimens did incorporate a correction insulin scale as an adjunct to the superior basal/nutritional regimen.4 The SHM GCTF again emphasizes that control of hyperglycemia should be proactive and anticipatory of insulin needs, rather than reactive to hyperglycemia. Nonetheless, unexpected hyperglycemic excursions are common, and the use of correction insulin remains a pervasive and arguably logical practice. If correction insulin is used, it should be ordered as a separate step after considering basal and nutrition insulin needs. The doses of scheduled insulin should be adjusted regularly if correction insulin is consistently being required. Ideally, the prescriber should choose a preformatted corrective insulin scale, based on the patient's insulin sensitivity (Appendix 2). There should be a prompt to use the same type of insulin that is being used for nutritional insulin, and there should be instructions that this insulin is given in addition to the basal and nutritional insulin to correct for hyperglycemia. Nocturnal correction‐dose scales should be reduced in the eating patient.

Even after limiting insulin regimens to those in Table 2, multidisciplinary glycemic control teams are still left with several options within these SHM‐preferred regimens. We recommend that your team choose a single, institutionally‐preferred basal‐nutritional‐correction insulin combination for each situation.

Choosing one preferred option for these situations is advantageous because:

  • You can communicate preferred regimens more simply and succinctly to all staff.

  • You eliminate all inappropriate choices for insulin regimens for that situation, as well as some other less preferred, but acceptable choices.

  • You can encourage regimens that are most economical (by promoting the insulin regimens that reflect your hospital formulary choices).

  • Staff members can become very familiar with a few regimens, instead of being confused by a multitude of them. They can identify variations from your preferred choices and target these patients for extra scrutiny and actions should they fail to meet glycemic targets.

Although virtually every institution can provide specific guidance on insulin management in a protocol, there are tradeoffs inherent in how restrictive you can be in pushing these preferred choices in your order sets. Should you eliminate alternate basal or nutritional insulin choices from your order sets? As you integrate more and more of your preferred algorithm and regimens into your order set, you will gain incremental improvement in the standardization of inpatient insulin management. However, you reduce not only variability in ordering, but also the choices available to your prescribers and patients, and in effect you are pushing the providers to use an insulin regimen that often differs from the patient's outpatient regimen. If your institution is not yet ready to go with a single preferred insulin, simply listing your preferred insulin first with the annotation preferred can be enough to increase the use of the preferred insulin.

We endorse building the most protocol‐driven, proscriptive, insulin order set that the Glycemic Control Steering Committee believes their medical staff will accept. There are some caveats to this endorsement. First, there must be extra efforts on the backend of the admission, to ensure that the antihyperglycemic regimen is tailored to the unique needs of the patient (this is discussed further below). Second, a protocol‐driven approach is not a substitute for a good educational program for health care providers or well‐informed clinical judgment. Education should reinforce major concepts driving the protocol and should also highlight exceptions to the rule. Variance from the protocol endorsed choices should be allowed (and even encouraged) when the variance is driven by patient factors (as opposed to provider whim). Learning from this variance is a key concept in refining protocols. Education ideally should not be limited to only protocol‐endorsed choices, as staff should be familiar with the full range of antihyperglycemia regimens seen in inpatient and outpatient settings.

Special Situations

Most of the preferred regimens for different situations are outlined in Table 2 in a straightforward manner, and can be depicted in your protocols and order sets in the same way. Some conditions have enough complexity, however, that you will have difficulty placing all of the details into your one‐page protocol and order set. Details should be placed on your more detailed protocol, and educational programs should include the topics outlined below. Although insulin infusion is often the option that would provide the most reliable and expedient control of hyperglycemia in these special situations, it is an option not available in many noncritical care settings. Therefore, the discussion is limited to subcutaneous insulin control regimens.

Patient on Continuous Tube Feeding

The SHM GCTF endorses glargine or detemir as the basal insulin of choice for this setting. The nutritional and correction insulin of choice is either an RAA‐I every 4 hours (q4h), or regular insulin every 6 hours (q6h). We endorse this choice because it retains the basal‐nutritional‐correction dose concept, generally allows for continued basal insulin use if the tube feedings become interrupted, and is amenable to building a consistent institutional protocol.

There are some important caveats to this recommendation. First, realize that almost any regimen that provides a stable insulin supply would be acceptable, and many institutions will use glargine or detemir to cover both basal and nutritional needs. The downside to using large boluses of long‐acting insulin in this clinical situation is that any unexpected interruption of the feedings will necessitate prolonged infusions of dextrate 10% solution (D10) to avoid hypoglycemia

Second, because of the glycemic load inherent in tube feedings, maintenance of glycemic control in the setting of enteral feeding may be best managed by providing a higher percentage of the TDD as nutritional insulin. In these cases, ratios of basal to nutritional insulin of 40:60, or even less basal insulin, may be appropriate.

Glucocorticoid Therapy

High‐dose glucocorticoids are strongly associated with increased insulin requirements. The degree of hyperglycemia induced by steroids varies significantly from patient to patient, and the pattern of hyperglycemia will vary depending on the pattern of steroid administration. The general principle to keep in mind is that the hyperglycemia induced by a steroid dose will peak 8‐12 hours after it is given, so insulin regimens to address this should take this effect into account. For example, giving a long‐acting basal insulin like glargine to accommodate the hyperglycemic effect of a steroid bolus given in the morning would be inappropriate because the steroid effect would wane and then disappear overnight, leading to insulin‐induced hypoglycemia. NPH insulin can be ideal in this setting, either by itself, or by layering it on top of an existing regimen.

Another caveat: glucocorticoids exert their predominate effect on insulin sensitivity in muscle (as opposed to the liver), and as a result, have their most notable effect on postprandial glucose. For this reason, the best insulin regimens for this situation may use proportionally less basal insulin and more nutritional insulin. One common regimen calls for keeping the basal insulin dose the same as the preglucocorticoid dose, while escalating the RAA insulin dose at lunch and dinner.

Given the complexities of covering steroid‐induced hyperglycemia and its high prevalence in certain populations (such as transplantation patients and patients undergoing chemotherapy), this would be an excellent area on which to focus expertise. Examples include routine endocrinology consultation, intervention by a special glycemic control team, or incorporating routine glucose monitoring and triggers for initiating insulin infusion into the protocols for chemotherapy and transplantation patients.

Regiment the Management of Hypoglycemia

Hypoglycemia is defined by the ADA as a blood glucose of 70 mg/dL or less, based on the physiologic changes that can occur at this glucose level, even in subjectively asymptomatic patients.3 Protocols for management of hypoglycemia should be linked to your diabetes/hyperglycemia protocols. There are many hypoglycemia protocols available for review in the SHM Glycemic Control Resource Room and Glycemic Control Implementation Guide.10 Some common themes for effective implementation stand out. First, the protocols need to walk the balance between simplicity of use, and the need to provide instructions that will provide guidance in a variety of patient situations. Second, the protocols need to be nurse driven, so that nurses can initiate treatment without waiting for a physician order. Third, education and instruction regarding recognition of risk factors, and avoidance of hypoglycemia are needed to support a successful protocol. Importantly, any hypoglycemic event should lead to a reconsideration of the current anti‐hyperglycemic regimen so that future events can be prevented.

Plan for Discharge and Provide Guidance for the Transition

Your institution should have policies and procedures outlining all the steps needed to complete the important transition out of the hospital. At a minimum, this planning should include adequate education (including a learner assessment), appropriate follow‐up, referral to community resources, and a discharge glycemic control regimen that is tailored to the educational, financial, and motivational profile of a patient. The more your inpatient insulin management is driven by protocol, the more likely it is the patient will be on an inpatient treatment plan that differs from their outpatient regimen; therefore, it is even more important to plan this transition carefully and reliably.

Communicating the accurate hyperglycemia related diagnosis and related problems to the primary care provider is important for good care, perhaps even more so for patients who had hyperglycemia while hospitalized without a prior diagnosis of diabetes. Some centers place a prompt for hyperglycemia related diagnosis in the order set and/or discharge paperwork, to remind the clinician to convey the diagnosis to the primary provider, and to encourage more complete documentation. Improved documentation can also improve the business case for glycemic control, along with other strategies outlined elsewhere in this supplement.13

Transitions in care (including transitions out of the hospital and off of infusion insulin) are discussed in more detail14, 15 elsewhere in this supplement. The principles outlined in these references should be incorporated into your institutional protocol. Briefly, not all patients require or are capable of intensive basal‐bolus regimens upon discharge. The HbA1c can be very valuable in arriving at the optimal outpatient regimen.14 The capacities and preferences of the patient and the context of his or her outpatient care environment (including the preferences of the primary care provider) must be taken into consideration as an outpatient management program is planned.

PULLING IT ALL TOGETHER: MAKE SURE YOUR PROTOCOL/ORDER SET IS EASY TO USE AND WIDELY UTILIZED

When standardizing hospital management of diabetes and hyperglycemia, we recommend building the full protocol first, then crystallizing the protocol into a one‐page summary that can be widely disseminated. The protocol guidance is then incorporated into the order set and nursing medical administration record (MAR). Again, we recommend the most proscriptive and protocol‐driven order set feasible within the constraints of medical staff support. The example order set in Appendix 2 illustrates this approach along with other desirable features:

  • Check‐box simplicity on when to order appropriate glucose monitoring.

  • Prompt for the proper hyperglycemia‐related diagnosis.

  • Prompts to document diagnosis and to order HbA1c level.

  • Use of encouraged insulin terminology: basal, prandial (or nutritional), and correction. Language is a powerful thing, and just getting staff to use these terms goes a long way toward the more physiologic prescribing of insulin.

  • Statement/reminder of a glycemic goal.

  • Prompts and contact information for appropriate consultation.

  • Elimination of unapproved abbreviations (such as U for units).

  • Stating both generic and brand names of insulin preparations.

  • Important timing cues for administration of insulin.

  • Several correction‐dose scales suitable for different insulin sensitivities. One size does NOT fit all.

  • Incorporation of a simple hypoglycemia protocol into the order set.

  • Insulin dosing guidelines available at the point of care (in this case, on the back of the order set).

Additional nursing‐specific cues (such as an admonition to never mix glargine insulin with other types of insulin) can also be included in the MAR whenever glargine is ordered.

Once you have protocols and order sets to guide providers, you need to assure that they are used for the majority of hyperglycemic patients. Educational programs should introduce your interventions and the rationale for them. In order to make your method the default method of care, your team should survey all preprinted or CPOE insulin order sets of your institution. A review of postoperative, transfer, and admission order sets that all services use may reveal a half‐dozen or more embedded sliding‐scale insulin order sets that should be removed, with prompts to use the standardized insulin order set being placed in their stead.

Computerized order sets present both challenges and opportunities. Wording limitations and the scrolling nature can make concepts less clear, yet there is a capability for incorporating a hierarchical structure that allows for guiding the user through a more algorithmic approach. There is also a capacity to provide assistance with dosing calculations that do not exist in the paper world. Education remains of key importance for both methods.

MONITOR THE USE AND EFFECTIVENESS OF YOUR PROTOCOLS AND ORDER SETS

Creating and implementing protocols, order sets, and other tools is not the end of the journey to improve care. It is important to monitor order set utilization, insulin use patterns, and parameters measuring glycemic control and hypoglycemia, as outlined in more detail in another article in this supplement.16 In addition to summary data every month or so, we recommend daily reports that spur action in near real time. Triggers such as uncontrolled hyperglycemia, markedly elevated HbA1c levels, and nonphysiologic insulin regimens should initiate consultation, extra diabetes education, or referral to a glucose control team. If appropriate consultation is not readily available, the glycemic control steering group should lobby the administration to bolster this capability. Qualitative feedback from the frontline caregivers, as well as this quantitative data, can assist the local glycemic control champions in designing even more effective protocols, order sets, focused educational efforts, and concurrent mitigation of suboptimal care.

CONCLUSION

Diabetes, hyperglycemia, and iatrogenic hypoglycemia are common and important conditions affecting the noncritically ill inpatient. Interventional trials to validate the recommended noncritical care unit glycemic targets are needed. Although there is a growing consensus on best practices to care for these patients, numerous barriers and the complexity of caring for inpatients hamper the reliability of best practice delivery. Institutional protocols and protocol driven subcutaneous insulin orders, when implemented with the strategies outlined here, can be the key to delivering these best practices more reliably.

Appendix

Inpatient glycemic control and hypoglycemia are issues with well deserved increased attention in recent years. Prominent guidelines and technical reviews have been published,13 and a recent, randomized controlled trial demonstrated the superiority of basal bolus insulin regimens compared to sliding‐scale regimens.4 Effective glycemic control for inpatients has remained elusive in most medical centers. Recent reports57 detail clinical inertia and the continued widespread use of sliding‐scale subcutaneous insulin regimens, as opposed to the anticipatory, physiologic basal‐nutrition‐correction dose insulin regimens endorsed by these reviews.

Inpatient glycemic control faces a number of barriers, including fears of inducing hypoglycemia, uneven knowledge and training among staff, and competing institutional and patient priorities. These barriers occur in the background of an inherently complex inpatient environment that poses unique challenges in maintaining safe glycemic control. Patients frequently move across a variety of care teams and geographic locations during a single inpatient stay, giving rise to multiple opportunities for failed communication, incomplete handoffs, and inconsistent treatment. In addition, insulin requirements may change dramatically due to variations in the stress of illness, exposure to medications that effect glucose levels, and varied forms of nutritional intake with frequent interruption. Although insulin is recognized as one of the medications most likely to be associated with adverse events in the hospital, many hospitals do not have protocols or order sets in place to standardize its use.

A Call to Action consensus conference,8, 9 hosted by the American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists (AACE) and the American Diabetes Association (ADA), brought together many thought leaders and organizations, including representation from the Society of Hospital Medicine (SHM), to address these barriers and to outline components necessary for successful implementation of a program to improve inpatient glycemic control in the face of these difficulties. Institutional insulin management protocols and standardized insulin order sets (supported by appropriate educational efforts) were identified as key interventions. It may be tempting to quickly deploy a generic insulin order set in an effort to improve care. This often results in mediocre results, due to inadequate incorporation of standardization and guidance into the order set and other documentation tools, and uneven use of the order set.

The SHM Glycemic Control Task Force (GCTF) recommends the following steps for developing and implementing successful protocols and order sets addressing the needs of the noncritical care inpatient with diabetes/hyperglycemia.

  • Form a steering committee for this work, and assess the current processes of care.

  • Identify best practices and preferred regimens to manage diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital.

  • Integrate best practices and preferred institutional choices into an inpatient glycemic control protocol. Crystallize your protocol into a one page summary.

  • Place guidance from your protocol into the flow of work, by integrating it into standardized subcutaneous insulin order sets and other documentation and treatment tools.

  • Monitor the use of your order sets and protocol. Intervene actively on nonadherents to your protocol and those with poor glycemic control, and revise your protocol/order sets as needed.

IDENTIFYING AND INCORPORATING KEY CONCEPTS AND BEST PRACTICES

A protocol is a document that endorses specific monitoring and treatment strategies in a given institution. This potentially extensive document should provide guidance for transitions, special situations (like steroids and total parenteral nutrition [TPN]) and should outline preferred insulin regimens for all of the most common nutritional situations. One of the most difficult parts of creating a protocol is the assimilation of all of the important information on which to base decisions. Your protocol and order set will be promoting a set of clinical practices. Fortunately, the current best practice for noncritical care hyperglycemic patients has been summarized by several authoritative sources,13, 811 including references from the SHM Glycemic Task Force published in this supplement.4, 12

Table 1 summarizes the key concepts that should be emphasized in a protocol for subcutaneous insulin management in the hospital. We recommend embedding guidance from your protocol into order sets, the medication administration record, and educational materials. Although the details contained in a protocol and order set might vary from one institution to another, the key concepts should not. The remainder of this article provides practical information about how these concepts and guidance for how preferred insulin regimens should be included in these tools. Appendices 1 and 2 give examples of an institutional one‐page summary protocol and subcutaneous insulin order set, respectively.

Key Concepts To Emphasize in Protocols and Order Sets for Subcutaneous Insulin Use in NonCritically Ill Inpatients
1. Establish a target range for blood glucose levels.
2. Standardize monitoring of glucose levels and assessment of long‐term control (HbA1c).
3. Incorporate nutritional management.
4. Prompt clinicians to consider discontinuing oral antihyperglycemic medications.
5. Prescribe physiologic (basal‐nutrition‐correction) insulin regimens.
a. Choose a total daily dose (TDD).
b. Divide the TDD into physiologic components of insulin therapy and provide basal and nutritional/correction separately.
c. Choose and dose a basal insulin.
d. Choose and dose a nutritional (prandial) insulin

i. Match exactly to nutritional intake (see Table 2).

ii. Include standing orders to allow nurses to hold nutritional insulin for nutritional interruptions and to modify nutritional insulin depending on the actual nutritional intake.
e. Add correction insulin
i. Match to an estimate of the patients insulin sensitivity using prefabricated scales.
ii. Use the same insulin as nutritional insulin.
6. Miscellaneous
a. Manage hypoglycemia in a standardized fashion and adjust regimen to prevent recurrences.
b. Provide diabetes education and appropriate consultation.
c. Coordinate glucose testing, nutrition delivery, and insulin administration.
d. Tailor discharge treatment regimens to the patient's individual circumstances and arrange for proper follow‐up.

Standardize the Monitoring of Blood Glucose Values and Glucosylated Hemoglobin

Guidance for the coordination of glucose testing, nutrition delivery, and insulin administration, should be integrated into your protocols, and order sets. For noncritical care areas, the minimal frequency for blood glucose monitoring for patients who are eating is before meals and at bedtime. For the patient designated nothing by mouth (NPO) or the patient on continuous tube feeding, the type of nutritional/correction insulin used should drive the minimum frequency (every 4‐6 hours if rapid acting analog insulins [RAA‐I] are used, and every 6 hours if regular insulin is used). Directions for administering scheduled RAA‐I immediately before or immediately after nutrition delivery should be incorporated into protocols, order sets, and medication administration records. Unfortunately, having this guidance in the order sets and protocols does not automatically translate into its being carried out in the real world. Wide variability in the coordination of glucose monitoring, nutritional delivery, and insulin administration is common, so monitoring the process to make sure the protocol is followed is important.

Obtaining a glucosylated hemoglobin (HbA1c) level is important in gauging how well the patient's outpatient regimen is maintaining glycemic control, distinguishing stress hyperglycemia from established diabetes, and guiding the inpatient approach to glycemic control. ADA guidelines2, 3 endorse obtaining HbA1c levels of inpatients if these levels are not already available from the month prior to admission.

Establish a Target Range for Blood Glucose in NonCritical Care Areas

It is important to adopt a glycemic target that is institution‐wide, for critical care areas and noncritical care areas alike. Your glycemic target need not be identical to the ADA/AACE glycemic targets, but should be similar to them.

Examples of institutional glycemic targets for noncritical care areas:

  • Preprandial target 90‐130 mg/dL, maximum random glucose <180 mg/dL (ADA/AACE consensus target)

  • 90‐150 mg/dL (a target used in some hospitals)

  • Preprandial target 90‐130 mg/dL for most patients, 100‐150 mg/dL if there are hypoglycemia risk factors, and <180 mg/dL if comfort‐care or end‐of‐life care (a more refined target, allowing for customization based on patient characteristics).

Your multidisciplinary glycemic control steering committee should pick the glycemic target it can most successfully implement and disseminate. It is fine to start with a conservative target and then ratchet down the goals as the environment becomes more accepting of the concept of tighter control of blood glucose in the hospital.

Although the choice of glycemic target is somewhat arbitrary, establishing an institutional glycemic target is critical to motivate clinical action. Your committee should design interventions, for instances when a patient's glycemic target is consistently not being met, including an assignment of responsibility.

Prompt Clinicians to Consider Discontinuing Oral Agents

Oral antihyperglycemic agents, in general, are difficult to quickly titrate to effect, and have side effects that limit their use in the hospital. In contrast, insulin acts rapidly and can be used in virtually all patients and clinical situations, making it the treatment of choice for treatment of hyperglycemia in the hospital.3, 11, 12 In certain circumstances, it may be entirely appropriate to continue a well‐controlled patient on his or her prior outpatient oral regimen. It is often also reasonable to resume oral agents in some patients when preparing for hospital discharge.

Incorporate Nutritional Management

Because diet is so integral to the management of diabetes and hyperglycemia, diet orders should be embedded in all diabetes or insulin‐related order sets. Diets with the same amount of carbohydrate with each meal should be the default rule for patients with diabetes. Nutritionist consultation should be considered and easy to access for patients with malnutrition, obesity, and other common conditions of the inpatient with diabetes.

Access Diabetes Education and Appropriate Consultation

Diabetes education should be offered to all hyperglycemic patients with normal mental status, complete with written materials, a listing of community resources, and survival skills. Consultation with physicians in internal medicine or endocrinology for difficult‐to‐control cases, or for cases in which the primary physician of record is not familiar with (or not adherent to) principles of inpatient glycemic management, should be very easy to obtain, or perhaps mandated, depending on your institution‐specific environment.

Prescribe Physiologic (Basal‐Nutritional‐Correction Dose) Insulin Regimens

Physiologic insulin use is the backbone of the recommended best practice for diabetes and hyperglycemia management in the hospital. The principles of such regimens are summarized elsewhere in this supplement.12 These principles will not be reiterated in detail here, but the major concepts that should be integrated into the protocols and order sets will be highlighted.

Choose a Total Daily Dose

Clinicians need guidance on how much subcutaneous insulin they should give a patient. These doses are well known from clinical experience and the published literature. The fear of hypoglycemia usually results in substantial underdosing of insulin, or total avoidance of scheduled insulin on admission. Your team should provide guidance for how much insulin to start a patient on when it is unclear from past experience how much insulin the patient needs. Waiting a few days to see how much insulin is required via sliding‐scale‐only regimens is a bad practice that should be discouraged for patients whose glucose values are substantially above the glycemic target. The total daily dose (TDD) can be estimated in several different ways (as demonstrated in Appendix 1 and 2), and protocols should make this step very clear for clinicians. Providing a specific location on the order set to declare the TDD may help ensure this step gets done more reliably. Some institutions with computer physician order entry (CPOE) provide assistance with calculating the TDD and the allocation of basal and nutritional components, based on data the ordering physician inputs into the system.

Select and Dose a Basal Insulin

Your protocol should describe how the TDD should be divided between basal and nutritional insulin. We generally recommend 50% of the TDD be given as basal insulin, with the other 50% administered on a scheduled basis to cover glycemic excursions from nutritional intake. The 50/50 rule is simple and generally works well, and should be widely promoted. However, there are exceptions to this rule that should be incorporated into your full protocol and educational programs. The order set should have separate steps for ordering basal insulin, nutritional insulin, and correction insulin. The advantage to providing these insulin components separately is that it allows them to be independently manipulated (eg, if a patient is unable to tolerate a meal, nutritional insulin is held, but basal insulin and correction insulin are continued).

The SHM GCTF specifically endorses long acting insulin (glargine and detemir) as the preferred basal insulin in the hospital setting, thus discouraging the use of neutral protamine Hagedorn (NPH) insulin and fixed combination insulin formulations (Table 2). In the absence of randomized controlled trials demonstrating superiority of the glargine or detemir to NPH insulin in the hospital, this endorsement deserves some further explanation. Although we believe that correctly dosed NPH containing insulin regimens can attain effective and safe glycemic control in the hospital setting, it is more difficult to standardize their use and adjust for fluctuations in nutritional intake. Glargine and detemir have much less pronounced spikes in their effect than NPH, rendering them relatively peakless in comparison. This pharmacokinetic profile allows for continued dosing with minimal or no correction when nutrition intake is variable, and allow for consistent reinforcement of the basal‐nutritional‐correction insulin concept.

Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force Recommendations: Preferred Insulin Regimens for Different Nutritional Situations
Nutritional situation Necessary insulin components Preferred regimen*
  • Abbreviations: D5, dextrate 5% solution; HS, at bedtime; IV, intravenous; NPO, nothing by mouth; q 4 hours, every 4 hours; q 6 hours, every 6 hours; q AC, before every meal; RAA, rapid‐acting analog; TDD, total daily dose; TPN, total parenteral nutrition.

  • These are the preferred regimens for most patients in these situations by consensus of the SHM Glycemic Control Task Force. Alternate regimens may appropriately be preferred by institutions or physicians to meet the needs of their own patient population. RAA insulins include lispro, aspart, and glulisine.

NPO (or clear liquids) Basal insulin: 50% of TDD. Nutritional insulin: None. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: None. Correctional insulin: Regular insulin q 6 hours or RAA insulin q 4 hours. Other comments: Dextrose infusion (e.g., D5 containing solution at 75‐150 cc/hour) recommended when nutrition is held. An IV insulin infusion is preferred for management of prolonged fasts or fasting type 1 diabetes patients.
Eating meals Basal insulin: 50% of TDD. Nutritional insulin: 50% of TDD, divided equally before each meal. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: RAA insulin with meals. Correctional insulin: RAA insulin q AC and HS (reduced dose at HS).
Bolus tube feeds Basal insulin: 40% of TDD. Nutritional insulin: 60% of the TDD, divided equally before each bolus feed. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: RAA insulin with each bolus. Correctional insulin: RAA insulin with each bolus.
Continuous tube feeds Basal insulin: 40% (conservative) of TDD. Nutritional insulin: 60% of the TDD in divided doses. Basal insulin: glargine given once daily or detemir given twice daily. Nutritional insulin: RAA insulin q 4 hours or regular insulin q 6 hours. Correctional insulin: Should match nutritional insulin choice.
Parenteral nutrition Insulin is usually given parenterally, with the nutrition Initially, a separate insulin drip allows for accurate dose‐finding. Then, 80% of amount determined as TDD using drip is added to subsequent TPN bags as regular insulin. Use correctional subcutaneous insulin doses cautiously, in addition.

There are some caveats to this general recommendation. First, patients who are well controlled on home regimens with NPH basal insulin can (and sometimes should) stay on the regimen that has worked well for them. However, extra vigilance in reducing the dose for reductions in nutrition is required, because NPH is generally used to cover both nutritional and basal requirements. Second, extensive experience with glargine and detemir are not available in obstetric populations. They are not U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) approved for use in pregnant patients and formally carry a Class C rating, whereas NPH insulin has been used safely in obstetric populations for decades. Third, the insulin regimen used as an inpatient is not necessarily the preferred regimen to prescribe at discharge: cost, patient preferences, HbA1c level, and other factors should be considered in making this choice.

Select and Dose a Nutritional (Prandial) Insulin

The step for ordering nutritional insulin should assist the clinician in matching the insulin to the type of nutrition that the patient is receiving. For example, rapid‐acting insulin analogs are preferred over regular insulin in the eating patient, in view of their more physiologic profile, which averts the insulin stacking that can occur with regular insulin. If regular insulin is used as the preferred institutional choice for eating patients, the lunchtime dose should be reduced or eliminated altogether, to eliminate insulin stacking.

Table 2 outlines the SHM GCTF preferred regimens for different nutritional situations.

There should be a standing order for nutritional insulin to be held when nutrition is interrupted, whether intentional or unintentional. Patients with interrupted tube feedings could have standing orders for a dextrose infusion to replace the tube feeding carbohydrate load and prevent hypoglycemia. Ideally, there should also be a standing order allowing for real‐time management of the patient with uncertain nutritional intake. For example, when a patient's premeal assessment reveals that she may not tolerate the meal, the patient should be allowed to attempt to eat, and then the nutritional insulin should be given after the meal, in proportion to the amount of food that was eaten. This type of order will require significant nursing education and process redesign in many hospitals, but is essential for matching nutritional insulin to actual intake.

Add Correction Insulin

There is no convincing evidence for the benefit of correction (sliding‐scale) insulin in the inpatient setting, although a randomized trial demonstrating the superiority of basal/nutritional insulin regimens to sliding‐scale only regimens did incorporate a correction insulin scale as an adjunct to the superior basal/nutritional regimen.4 The SHM GCTF again emphasizes that control of hyperglycemia should be proactive and anticipatory of insulin needs, rather than reactive to hyperglycemia. Nonetheless, unexpected hyperglycemic excursions are common, and the use of correction insulin remains a pervasive and arguably logical practice. If correction insulin is used, it should be ordered as a separate step after considering basal and nutrition insulin needs. The doses of scheduled insulin should be adjusted regularly if correction insulin is consistently being required. Ideally, the prescriber should choose a preformatted corrective insulin scale, based on the patient's insulin sensitivity (Appendix 2). There should be a prompt to use the same type of insulin that is being used for nutritional insulin, and there should be instructions that this insulin is given in addition to the basal and nutritional insulin to correct for hyperglycemia. Nocturnal correction‐dose scales should be reduced in the eating patient.

Even after limiting insulin regimens to those in Table 2, multidisciplinary glycemic control teams are still left with several options within these SHM‐preferred regimens. We recommend that your team choose a single, institutionally‐preferred basal‐nutritional‐correction insulin combination for each situation.

Choosing one preferred option for these situations is advantageous because:

  • You can communicate preferred regimens more simply and succinctly to all staff.

  • You eliminate all inappropriate choices for insulin regimens for that situation, as well as some other less preferred, but acceptable choices.

  • You can encourage regimens that are most economical (by promoting the insulin regimens that reflect your hospital formulary choices).

  • Staff members can become very familiar with a few regimens, instead of being confused by a multitude of them. They can identify variations from your preferred choices and target these patients for extra scrutiny and actions should they fail to meet glycemic targets.

Although virtually every institution can provide specific guidance on insulin management in a protocol, there are tradeoffs inherent in how restrictive you can be in pushing these preferred choices in your order sets. Should you eliminate alternate basal or nutritional insulin choices from your order sets? As you integrate more and more of your preferred algorithm and regimens into your order set, you will gain incremental improvement in the standardization of inpatient insulin management. However, you reduce not only variability in ordering, but also the choices available to your prescribers and patients, and in effect you are pushing the providers to use an insulin regimen that often differs from the patient's outpatient regimen. If your institution is not yet ready to go with a single preferred insulin, simply listing your preferred insulin first with the annotation preferred can be enough to increase the use of the preferred insulin.

We endorse building the most protocol‐driven, proscriptive, insulin order set that the Glycemic Control Steering Committee believes their medical staff will accept. There are some caveats to this endorsement. First, there must be extra efforts on the backend of the admission, to ensure that the antihyperglycemic regimen is tailored to the unique needs of the patient (this is discussed further below). Second, a protocol‐driven approach is not a substitute for a good educational program for health care providers or well‐informed clinical judgment. Education should reinforce major concepts driving the protocol and should also highlight exceptions to the rule. Variance from the protocol endorsed choices should be allowed (and even encouraged) when the variance is driven by patient factors (as opposed to provider whim). Learning from this variance is a key concept in refining protocols. Education ideally should not be limited to only protocol‐endorsed choices, as staff should be familiar with the full range of antihyperglycemia regimens seen in inpatient and outpatient settings.

Special Situations

Most of the preferred regimens for different situations are outlined in Table 2 in a straightforward manner, and can be depicted in your protocols and order sets in the same way. Some conditions have enough complexity, however, that you will have difficulty placing all of the details into your one‐page protocol and order set. Details should be placed on your more detailed protocol, and educational programs should include the topics outlined below. Although insulin infusion is often the option that would provide the most reliable and expedient control of hyperglycemia in these special situations, it is an option not available in many noncritical care settings. Therefore, the discussion is limited to subcutaneous insulin control regimens.

Patient on Continuous Tube Feeding

The SHM GCTF endorses glargine or detemir as the basal insulin of choice for this setting. The nutritional and correction insulin of choice is either an RAA‐I every 4 hours (q4h), or regular insulin every 6 hours (q6h). We endorse this choice because it retains the basal‐nutritional‐correction dose concept, generally allows for continued basal insulin use if the tube feedings become interrupted, and is amenable to building a consistent institutional protocol.

There are some important caveats to this recommendation. First, realize that almost any regimen that provides a stable insulin supply would be acceptable, and many institutions will use glargine or detemir to cover both basal and nutritional needs. The downside to using large boluses of long‐acting insulin in this clinical situation is that any unexpected interruption of the feedings will necessitate prolonged infusions of dextrate 10% solution (D10) to avoid hypoglycemia

Second, because of the glycemic load inherent in tube feedings, maintenance of glycemic control in the setting of enteral feeding may be best managed by providing a higher percentage of the TDD as nutritional insulin. In these cases, ratios of basal to nutritional insulin of 40:60, or even less basal insulin, may be appropriate.

Glucocorticoid Therapy

High‐dose glucocorticoids are strongly associated with increased insulin requirements. The degree of hyperglycemia induced by steroids varies significantly from patient to patient, and the pattern of hyperglycemia will vary depending on the pattern of steroid administration. The general principle to keep in mind is that the hyperglycemia induced by a steroid dose will peak 8‐12 hours after it is given, so insulin regimens to address this should take this effect into account. For example, giving a long‐acting basal insulin like glargine to accommodate the hyperglycemic effect of a steroid bolus given in the morning would be inappropriate because the steroid effect would wane and then disappear overnight, leading to insulin‐induced hypoglycemia. NPH insulin can be ideal in this setting, either by itself, or by layering it on top of an existing regimen.

Another caveat: glucocorticoids exert their predominate effect on insulin sensitivity in muscle (as opposed to the liver), and as a result, have their most notable effect on postprandial glucose. For this reason, the best insulin regimens for this situation may use proportionally less basal insulin and more nutritional insulin. One common regimen calls for keeping the basal insulin dose the same as the preglucocorticoid dose, while escalating the RAA insulin dose at lunch and dinner.

Given the complexities of covering steroid‐induced hyperglycemia and its high prevalence in certain populations (such as transplantation patients and patients undergoing chemotherapy), this would be an excellent area on which to focus expertise. Examples include routine endocrinology consultation, intervention by a special glycemic control team, or incorporating routine glucose monitoring and triggers for initiating insulin infusion into the protocols for chemotherapy and transplantation patients.

Regiment the Management of Hypoglycemia

Hypoglycemia is defined by the ADA as a blood glucose of 70 mg/dL or less, based on the physiologic changes that can occur at this glucose level, even in subjectively asymptomatic patients.3 Protocols for management of hypoglycemia should be linked to your diabetes/hyperglycemia protocols. There are many hypoglycemia protocols available for review in the SHM Glycemic Control Resource Room and Glycemic Control Implementation Guide.10 Some common themes for effective implementation stand out. First, the protocols need to walk the balance between simplicity of use, and the need to provide instructions that will provide guidance in a variety of patient situations. Second, the protocols need to be nurse driven, so that nurses can initiate treatment without waiting for a physician order. Third, education and instruction regarding recognition of risk factors, and avoidance of hypoglycemia are needed to support a successful protocol. Importantly, any hypoglycemic event should lead to a reconsideration of the current anti‐hyperglycemic regimen so that future events can be prevented.

Plan for Discharge and Provide Guidance for the Transition

Your institution should have policies and procedures outlining all the steps needed to complete the important transition out of the hospital. At a minimum, this planning should include adequate education (including a learner assessment), appropriate follow‐up, referral to community resources, and a discharge glycemic control regimen that is tailored to the educational, financial, and motivational profile of a patient. The more your inpatient insulin management is driven by protocol, the more likely it is the patient will be on an inpatient treatment plan that differs from their outpatient regimen; therefore, it is even more important to plan this transition carefully and reliably.

Communicating the accurate hyperglycemia related diagnosis and related problems to the primary care provider is important for good care, perhaps even more so for patients who had hyperglycemia while hospitalized without a prior diagnosis of diabetes. Some centers place a prompt for hyperglycemia related diagnosis in the order set and/or discharge paperwork, to remind the clinician to convey the diagnosis to the primary provider, and to encourage more complete documentation. Improved documentation can also improve the business case for glycemic control, along with other strategies outlined elsewhere in this supplement.13

Transitions in care (including transitions out of the hospital and off of infusion insulin) are discussed in more detail14, 15 elsewhere in this supplement. The principles outlined in these references should be incorporated into your institutional protocol. Briefly, not all patients require or are capable of intensive basal‐bolus regimens upon discharge. The HbA1c can be very valuable in arriving at the optimal outpatient regimen.14 The capacities and preferences of the patient and the context of his or her outpatient care environment (including the preferences of the primary care provider) must be taken into consideration as an outpatient management program is planned.

PULLING IT ALL TOGETHER: MAKE SURE YOUR PROTOCOL/ORDER SET IS EASY TO USE AND WIDELY UTILIZED

When standardizing hospital management of diabetes and hyperglycemia, we recommend building the full protocol first, then crystallizing the protocol into a one‐page summary that can be widely disseminated. The protocol guidance is then incorporated into the order set and nursing medical administration record (MAR). Again, we recommend the most proscriptive and protocol‐driven order set feasible within the constraints of medical staff support. The example order set in Appendix 2 illustrates this approach along with other desirable features:

  • Check‐box simplicity on when to order appropriate glucose monitoring.

  • Prompt for the proper hyperglycemia‐related diagnosis.

  • Prompts to document diagnosis and to order HbA1c level.

  • Use of encouraged insulin terminology: basal, prandial (or nutritional), and correction. Language is a powerful thing, and just getting staff to use these terms goes a long way toward the more physiologic prescribing of insulin.

  • Statement/reminder of a glycemic goal.

  • Prompts and contact information for appropriate consultation.

  • Elimination of unapproved abbreviations (such as U for units).

  • Stating both generic and brand names of insulin preparations.

  • Important timing cues for administration of insulin.

  • Several correction‐dose scales suitable for different insulin sensitivities. One size does NOT fit all.

  • Incorporation of a simple hypoglycemia protocol into the order set.

  • Insulin dosing guidelines available at the point of care (in this case, on the back of the order set).

Additional nursing‐specific cues (such as an admonition to never mix glargine insulin with other types of insulin) can also be included in the MAR whenever glargine is ordered.

Once you have protocols and order sets to guide providers, you need to assure that they are used for the majority of hyperglycemic patients. Educational programs should introduce your interventions and the rationale for them. In order to make your method the default method of care, your team should survey all preprinted or CPOE insulin order sets of your institution. A review of postoperative, transfer, and admission order sets that all services use may reveal a half‐dozen or more embedded sliding‐scale insulin order sets that should be removed, with prompts to use the standardized insulin order set being placed in their stead.

Computerized order sets present both challenges and opportunities. Wording limitations and the scrolling nature can make concepts less clear, yet there is a capability for incorporating a hierarchical structure that allows for guiding the user through a more algorithmic approach. There is also a capacity to provide assistance with dosing calculations that do not exist in the paper world. Education remains of key importance for both methods.

MONITOR THE USE AND EFFECTIVENESS OF YOUR PROTOCOLS AND ORDER SETS

Creating and implementing protocols, order sets, and other tools is not the end of the journey to improve care. It is important to monitor order set utilization, insulin use patterns, and parameters measuring glycemic control and hypoglycemia, as outlined in more detail in another article in this supplement.16 In addition to summary data every month or so, we recommend daily reports that spur action in near real time. Triggers such as uncontrolled hyperglycemia, markedly elevated HbA1c levels, and nonphysiologic insulin regimens should initiate consultation, extra diabetes education, or referral to a glucose control team. If appropriate consultation is not readily available, the glycemic control steering group should lobby the administration to bolster this capability. Qualitative feedback from the frontline caregivers, as well as this quantitative data, can assist the local glycemic control champions in designing even more effective protocols, order sets, focused educational efforts, and concurrent mitigation of suboptimal care.

CONCLUSION

Diabetes, hyperglycemia, and iatrogenic hypoglycemia are common and important conditions affecting the noncritically ill inpatient. Interventional trials to validate the recommended noncritical care unit glycemic targets are needed. Although there is a growing consensus on best practices to care for these patients, numerous barriers and the complexity of caring for inpatients hamper the reliability of best practice delivery. Institutional protocols and protocol driven subcutaneous insulin orders, when implemented with the strategies outlined here, can be the key to delivering these best practices more reliably.

Appendix

References
  1. American College of Endocrinology Task Force on Inpatient Diabetes and Metabolic Control.American College of Endocrinology Position Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Metabolic Control.Endocr Pract.2004;10:7782.
  2. Clement S,Baithwaite SS,Magee MF,Ahmann A,Smith EP,Schafer RG,Hirsch IB.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in hospitals.Diabetes Care.2004;27:553591.
  3. American Diabetes Association.Standards of Medical Carein Diabetes‐2006.Diabetes Care.2006;29(suppl 1):s4s42.
  4. Umpierrez GE,Smiley D,Zisman A, et al.Randomized study of basal‐bolus insulin therapy in the inpatient management of patients with type 2 diabetes (RABBIT 2 Trial).Diabetes Care.2007;30:21812186.
  5. Schnipper JL,Barskey EE,Shaykevich S,Fitzmaurice G,Pendergrass ML.Inpatient management of diabetes and hyperglycemia among general medicine patients at a large teaching hospital.J Hosp Med.2006;1:145150.
  6. Knecht LAD,Gauthier SM,Castro JC, et al.Diabetes care in the hospital: is there clinical inertia?J Hosp Med.2006;1:151160.
  7. Cook CB,Curtis JC,Schmidt RE, et al.Diabetes care in hospitalized non‐critically ill patients: more evidence for clinical inertia and negative therapeutic momentum.JHosp Med.2007;2:203211.
  8. Inpatient Diabetes and Glycemic Control: A Call to Action Conference. Position Statement. AACE, February2006. Available at: http://www.aace.com/meetings/consensus/IIDC/IDGC0207.pdf. Accessed October, 2006.
  9. Proceedings of the American College of Endocrinology and American Diabetes Association Consensus Conference, Washington, DC, January 30–31, 2006. Endocr Pract.2006; 12(suppl 3):313.
  10. Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force. Implementation Guide: Improving Glycemic Control, Preventing Hypoglycemia, and Optimizing Care of the Inpatient with Hyperglycemia and Diabetes. Published January 2007 on the Society of Hospital Medicine website. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org. Accessed August,2007.
  11. Inzucchi SE.Management of hyperglycemia in the hospital setting.N Engl J Med.2006;355:19031911.
  12. Wesorick DH,O'Malley CW,Rushakoff R,Larsen K,Magee MF.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital: a practical guide to subcutaneous insulin use in the non‐critically ill adult patient.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5):S17S28.
  13. Magee MF,Beck A.Practical strategies for developing the business case for hospital glycemic control teams.J Hosp Med2008;3(5):S76S83.
  14. O'Malley CW,Emanuele MA,Halasyamani L,Amin A.Bridge over troubled waters: safe and effective transitions of the inpatient with hyperglycemia.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5):S55S65.
  15. Ahmann A,Hellman R,Larsen K,Maynard G.Designing and implementing insulin infusion protocols and order sets.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5):S42S54.
  16. Schnipper JL,Magee MF,Inzucchi SE,Magee MF,Larsen K,Maynard G.SHM Glycemic Control Task Force summary: practical recommendations for assessing the impact of glycemic control efforts.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5):S66S75.
References
  1. American College of Endocrinology Task Force on Inpatient Diabetes and Metabolic Control.American College of Endocrinology Position Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Metabolic Control.Endocr Pract.2004;10:7782.
  2. Clement S,Baithwaite SS,Magee MF,Ahmann A,Smith EP,Schafer RG,Hirsch IB.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in hospitals.Diabetes Care.2004;27:553591.
  3. American Diabetes Association.Standards of Medical Carein Diabetes‐2006.Diabetes Care.2006;29(suppl 1):s4s42.
  4. Umpierrez GE,Smiley D,Zisman A, et al.Randomized study of basal‐bolus insulin therapy in the inpatient management of patients with type 2 diabetes (RABBIT 2 Trial).Diabetes Care.2007;30:21812186.
  5. Schnipper JL,Barskey EE,Shaykevich S,Fitzmaurice G,Pendergrass ML.Inpatient management of diabetes and hyperglycemia among general medicine patients at a large teaching hospital.J Hosp Med.2006;1:145150.
  6. Knecht LAD,Gauthier SM,Castro JC, et al.Diabetes care in the hospital: is there clinical inertia?J Hosp Med.2006;1:151160.
  7. Cook CB,Curtis JC,Schmidt RE, et al.Diabetes care in hospitalized non‐critically ill patients: more evidence for clinical inertia and negative therapeutic momentum.JHosp Med.2007;2:203211.
  8. Inpatient Diabetes and Glycemic Control: A Call to Action Conference. Position Statement. AACE, February2006. Available at: http://www.aace.com/meetings/consensus/IIDC/IDGC0207.pdf. Accessed October, 2006.
  9. Proceedings of the American College of Endocrinology and American Diabetes Association Consensus Conference, Washington, DC, January 30–31, 2006. Endocr Pract.2006; 12(suppl 3):313.
  10. Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force. Implementation Guide: Improving Glycemic Control, Preventing Hypoglycemia, and Optimizing Care of the Inpatient with Hyperglycemia and Diabetes. Published January 2007 on the Society of Hospital Medicine website. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org. Accessed August,2007.
  11. Inzucchi SE.Management of hyperglycemia in the hospital setting.N Engl J Med.2006;355:19031911.
  12. Wesorick DH,O'Malley CW,Rushakoff R,Larsen K,Magee MF.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital: a practical guide to subcutaneous insulin use in the non‐critically ill adult patient.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5):S17S28.
  13. Magee MF,Beck A.Practical strategies for developing the business case for hospital glycemic control teams.J Hosp Med2008;3(5):S76S83.
  14. O'Malley CW,Emanuele MA,Halasyamani L,Amin A.Bridge over troubled waters: safe and effective transitions of the inpatient with hyperglycemia.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5):S55S65.
  15. Ahmann A,Hellman R,Larsen K,Maynard G.Designing and implementing insulin infusion protocols and order sets.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5):S42S54.
  16. Schnipper JL,Magee MF,Inzucchi SE,Magee MF,Larsen K,Maynard G.SHM Glycemic Control Task Force summary: practical recommendations for assessing the impact of glycemic control efforts.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5):S66S75.
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Page Number
29-41
Page Number
29-41
Article Type
Display Headline
Subcutaneous insulin order sets and protocols: Effective design and implementation strategies
Display Headline
Subcutaneous insulin order sets and protocols: Effective design and implementation strategies
Sections
Article Source
Copyright © 2008 Society of Hospital Medicine
Disallow All Ads
Correspondence Location
Clinical Professor of Medicine and Chief, Division of Hospital Medicine, University of California, San Diego, 200 W. Arbor Drive 8485, San Diego, CA 92103‐8485
Content Gating
Gated (full article locked unless allowed per User)
Gating Strategy
First Peek Free
Article PDF Media

Transitions in Inpatient Hyperglycemia

Article Type
Changed
Mon, 01/02/2017 - 19:34
Display Headline
Bridge over troubled waters: Safe and effective transitions of the inpatient with hyperglycemia

Professional and patient safety organizations have recognized the importance of safe transitions as patients move through the health care system, and such attention is even more critical when attempting to achieve glycemic control.14 Since the publication of the Diabetes Control and Complications Trial (DCCT)5 and the United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS),6 we have known that intensive glycemic control in the ambulatory setting prevents complications in both type 1 and type 2 diabetes mellitus (DM). Despite the increased risk of hypoglycemia, these trials changed practice patterns in the outpatient settings in favor of intensification of diabetes therapy. In the same way, randomized, prospective trials using intravenous (IV) insulin therapy have revolutionized our thinking about inpatient care by showing that tight glycemic control in the critically ill7 and patients with acute myocardial infarction8 reduces mortality and morbidity. These, as well as additional observational studies associating hyperglycemia with poor outcomes in a variety of medical and surgical patients,915 have led to increased attention on glycemic control in all venues of care.16, 17 Concerns over excessive hypoglycemia and a nonsignificant increase in mortality in certain populations of medical intensive care unit (ICU) patients have raised questions over whether the initial studies can be reproduced or generalized to other groups of inpatients.18, 19 Additional studies are underway to clarify these questions but consensus exists that blood glucose values should at least be less than 180 mg/dL and that the traditional practice of ignoring hyperglycemia is no longer acceptable.

While a uniform focus on glycemic control will allow our patients to receive a consistent message about diabetes, the unique limitations inherent to each practice setting requires different therapeutic regimens and intentional focus on the risks as patients transition from one care area to another. This work addresses several areas of care transition that are particularly important in safely achieving glycemic control including: transition into the hospital for patients on a variety of home regimens, transitions within the hospital (related to changes in dietary intake, change from IV to subcutaneous [SC] therapy, and the perioperative setting), and the transition from the hospital to home or another healthcare facility.

TRANSITION INTO THE HOSPITAL

Until recently, most patients with diabetes admitted to the hospital were managed with sliding‐scale‐only regimens.20, 21 Unfortunately, this led to a variety of complications, including hyperglycemia, hypoglycemia, iatrogenic ketoacidosis, and an inconsistent message to patients on the importance of glycemic control.22 Some outpatient clinicians and patients combated this tradition by creating in‐hospital glucose control plans with orders, which patients would bring with them to the hospital.23 This practice continues to be a helpful way to guide inpatient therapy and is encouraged when available. Glycemic‐controlrelated documents from outpatient clinicians should include the most recent glycosylated hemoglobin (HbA1c) value, diagnosis and known complications, current names and doses of medications, and other patient‐specific preferences or needs (eg, compliance, financial, fear of needles). If the last HbA1c was performed more than 30 days before admission or is not available, one should be obtained upon hospital admission to help guide discharge therapy.24 By knowing the HbA1c, one can determine the level of diabetic control achieved with the current regimen and can help the inpatient team (clinician and patient) determine if a more aggressive glycemic control regimen is necessary at the time of discharge. It is important to note that if the patient has received a transfusion of red blood cells prior to HbA1c measurement or has a hemoglobinopathy, the HbA1c value may not be accurate.25, 26

In general, the outpatient regimen will need to be modified at admission to achieve the appropriate flexibility needed for the changing nutritional intake and insulin requirements that invariably accompany hospitalization. Sulfonylureas and dipeptidyl peptidase 4 inhibitors (DPP4), such as sitagliptin, have most of their effect immediately, but the other oral antihyperglycemic agents have a relatively long delay between treatment and effect, thus they are not a flexible enough method to achieve glycemic control in the hospital. Additionally, inpatients may have transient contraindications to their prior oral antihyperglycemic medications. Metformin is almost always on hold in the hospital setting, at least initially, due to concerns about lactic acidosis. Sulfonylureas can cause hypoglycemia in the setting of worsening renal function or reduced oral intake. Thiazoladinediones (TZDs) are often withheld due to concerns about fluid retention and should be avoided in patients admitted with heart failure. There is little experience in the hospital with the use of newer agents like exenatide, pramlintide, glinides, and DPP4 inhibitors.

Overall, it is generally recommended that oral antihyperglycemic agents be discontinued upon hospital admission and replaced with insulin infusions or scheduled SC insulin. An estimate of 0.4 to 0.5 units/kg of body weight provides a conservative starting point for the total daily dose of insulin (TDD) for most patients. This TDD should then be divided into basal and nutritional components to match the patients' caloric intake. Additional correction doses of insulin should be prescribed to cover episodes of hyperglycemia that develop despite the provision of anticipatory‐physiologic insulin. Further discussion of insulin dosing and SC regimens is available in detail elsewhere.27, 28 The recommendation for these insulin‐only regimens is made regardless of the glycemic control in the outpatient setting and is not meant to imply that they should be continued at discharge. In fact, most patients will return to their home regimen or to one that is intensified but less labor intensive than the basal‐nutritional‐correction insulin used in the hospital. The antihyperglycemic regimen planned for discharge should be anticipated as early as possible and clearly communicated to the patient and/or caregivers to allow for optimal education.

Outpatient insulin regimens that have a high percentage of basal insulin need to be modified during hospital admission to avoid hypoglycemia that may occur from variable nutritional intake. While hospitalized, the basal portion of the estimated TDD generally should not be more than 50% to 60%. The total number of units of all types of insulin used daily as an outpatient can be used as a starting point for determining the inpatient TDD by a 1:1 conversion. Adjustments up or down based on glycemic control, nutritional intake, and other factors are then necessary. If patients are on regimens with insulin plus oral agents at home, the inpatient TDD should either be the home insulin dose or the dose calculated based on their weight, whichever is greater. Patients who use carbohydrate counting to determine nutritional insulin doses as an outpatient might be continued on this regimen if they have a strong understanding of the methods, they are coherent enough to determine their doses, nursing staff are well educated, and dietary services provides the carbohydrate content for the hospital menu. If patients are on insulin pumps at home, these should be managed according to a uniform hospital policy to assure safety. If conversion to multiple daily injections is needed, the same 1:1 conversion is safe.29

Transitions Within the Hospital

General Issues

Within the hospital itself, there are several transitions that have important quality and safety implications regarding glycemic control. The handoffs between providers should follow a standardized format.4, 30, 31 Essential information will vary depending on the setting but should universally include recent hypoglycemia, insulin type and doses, and hypoglycemic risk factors such as changes in insulin doses, the development of renal insufficiency, inability of the patient to self‐report symptoms, tapering of steroids, and cessation or interruption of nutritional intake.32

One of the greatest risks for hypoglycemia in the hospital comes from the unpredictable nutritional interruptions that occur. Unplanned changes are best handled by nurses having an existing order to hold scheduled nutritional insulin if patients are classified nothing by mouth (NPO) or eat <50% of their meal. Additionally, nursing staff should have orders or policies that allow flexibility in the time of administering scheduled rapid‐acting nutritional insulin so that it may be given during or immediately following the meal in patients at higher risk for poor oral intake. Tube feedings also place patients at high risk for hypoglycemia because the tube may become dislodged or they may begin to have feeding intolerance. For these reasons, a measure of safety would be to have standing orders to substitute IV 10% dextrose in water (D10W) at the same rate as the prior tube feeds, hold nutritional insulin, and begin more frequent monitoring whenever tube feeds are stopped.33 Orders that rely on nursing staff to notify a physician when tube feedings are stopped are generally not directive enough because providers may be distracted by other changes or forget the patient is on long‐acting insulin. The need for this flexibility around nutritional dosing emphasizes the importance of avoiding excessive doses of basal insulin. If the total dose of basal insulin is 40% to 50% of the TDD, it can safely be continued at its usual dose despite changing nutritional intake. The only exception is neutral protamine Hagedorn (NPH) insulin, which should be reduced when patients are NPO due to its peak. Generally, a 50% reduction in NPH is recommended for morning doses, but bedtime doses may be given with little to no reduction. Because of the complexity of these issues, standardized order sets are the best way to reliably communicate all the necessary standing orders to nursing staff (Table 1).

Important Standing Orders To Include for Inpatients on Scheduled Insulin
  • Abbreviations: NPO, nothing by month; ICU, intensive care unit.

Nutritional insulin
Hold if patients are NPO or eat less than 50% of their meal.
Administer scheduled rapid acting nutritional insulin during or immediately following the meal if oral intake is questionable (ie, nausea, emesis, or newly advancing diet).
Tube feedings: When tube feeds are stopped unexpectedly
Start dextrose containing IV fluids (many institutions use D10W at the same rate as the prior tube feeds).
Hold scheduled nutritional insulin.
Notify physician.
Basal insulin
Continue if NPO.
Reduce morning dose of NPH by 50% if NPO and may need to reduce the dose of bedtime NPH.
IV to subcutaneous transition
Timing for discontinuing IV infusion in relation to first dose of subcutaneous insulin.
Prompts for verbal communication between ICU and general ward staff.

Transitioning the Patient Off of IV Insulin

The strongest evidence for tight glycemic control derives from studies in the surgical ICU.7 Many hospitals have robust, effective IV‐insulin protocols. The frequency of monitoring and rapidity of action of IV insulin allow quick achievement of blood glucose control. As patients begin to eat, the layering of SC nutritional insulin on top of the insulin infusion may reduce the lability of the infusion rate and prevent excursions in glycemic control. When the patient is ready to leave the ICU or start a full oral diet, it is recommended that they transition off of the IV insulin to a basal‐nutritional‐correction regimen.33, 34

The amount of insulin needed with IV infusion is a useful estimate of the TDD of insulin.28, 33, 35, 36 There are important general steps to take when making this transition; but, due to the lack of conclusive data proving the advantage of one regimen over another, there are a variety of acceptable specific protocols (Table 2).3739 First, it should be determined if patients are expected to require ongoing scheduled SC insulin or not. Certainly, all patients with type 1 DM will require scheduled SC insulin, but patients with type 2 DM on low insulin infusion rates or some patients with new hyperglycemia can appropriately be managed with sliding‐scale alone. Next, the average hourly rate of the infusion over the preceding 6 to 8 hours should be determined because it most accurately reflects current insulin needs during the changing stress, nutrition, and medications in critical care patients. This hourly rate will then be converted to a TDD using a safety factor to anticipate decreasing insulin requirements. Some portion of this daily total will then be assigned to be basal insulin. As patients' clinical conditions approach baseline, so will their insulin requirements, and the dose will need to be revised.24

Important Steps in Transitioning from Insulin Infusion to Subcutaneous Insulin
  • Institutional cutoffs may vary. Some use 1 to 2 units/hour.

Step 1: Is patient stable enough for transition? Hypotension, active sepsis, vasopressors, and intubation are contraindications to transition due to unreliable subcutaneous insulin absorption and continued need for the most flexible dosing due to frequently changing insulin requirements.
Step 2: Does this patient need a transition to scheduled subcutaneous (SC) insulin?
Yes
All patients with type 1 DM.
Type 2 DM patients on insulin as outpatient.
Type 2 DM patients with a recent mean infusion rate of 0.5 units/hour.*
No
Type 2 DM patients with infusion rate <0.5 units/hour.*
Stress hyperglycemia or previously unrecognized DM if infusion rate <1 unit/hour, or if HbA1c near normal.
Some institutions exclude all stress hyperglycemia patients from transition to a SC insulin regimen, regardless of drip rate.
Step 3: If transition is needed, calculate a total daily dose (TDD) of insulin. The TDD is an estimate of the 24‐hour insulin requirement when the patient is receiving full nutrition.
Determine mean insulin infusion rate from last 6 to 8 hours.
Calculate 24‐hour insulin dose based on this, and reduce this 24‐hour dose by some safety factor. There are several options for this step.
Multiply hourly rate by 24, then multiply by 0.7 or 0.8 to arrive at a safety‐adjusted 24 hour insulin dose.
OR
Multiply hourly infusion rate by 20 (80% of 24).
Determine if this total is the TDD or basal dose based on current nutrition. There are several options for this step for you or your institution to choose.
If infusion was serving basal AND nutritional needs of patient (such as a patient on 24‐hour tube feedings) this will be your TDD.
OR
If the infusion insulin was not covering significant nutrition, this could be the BASAL insulin dose.
Step 4: Construct a regimen tailored to the patient's nutritional situation, building in safeguards for any changes in nutritional intake and uncertainties about reliability of intake. Several options are again available.
Basal: should be ordered as basal glargine or detemir (these are preferred by SHM GCTF but NPH is also an option).
Dose is 40% to 50% of TDD.
OR
Adjusted 24‐hour IV requirement given all as basal.
Nutritional: The remainder of the TDD is scheduled nutritional insulin in divided doses. In general, these doses need to be adjusted down for <100% nutritional intake and the orders should allow for administering nutritional insulin just AFTER observed meals to allow an assessment of intake. There are several options for estimating the initial doses:
Use 50% of the TDD as nutritional coverage and divide this amount by 3 to determine the scheduled meal dose. Hold if they do not eat more than 50% of their meal.
Use a more conservative start of 10% to 20% of the basal dose scheduled with each meal.
Use carbohydrate counting to cover nutritional intake.
Step 5: Be sure to give SC insulin BEFORE the infusion stops
Basal glargine or detemir are ideally given at least 2 hours before infusion is discontinued.
Shorter lead times (30 minutes) are possible if rapid acting insulin is given with basal insulin.

SC insulin should be given before the drip is discontinued to allow an overlap that takes into consideration the onset of action. The first dose of basal insulin should be given 2 hours before the insulin infusion is discontinued.24, 40 However, because this is not always feasible, (ie, the patient needs to leave the ICU sooner), another option is to turn off the drip and give 10% of the basal dose as rapid acting insulin along with the basal dose.39 The timing of subsequent doses will depend on the specific basal insulin that is ordered as well as institutional consideration of usual care delivery and nursing workflow. Given that there are several options to achieve this important overlap between IV and SC insulin, it is best for a multidisciplinary team to choose some preferred way that is the institutional standard. Having a standard allows targeted education and tracking of adherence to best practices.

Because conversion to SC insulin is a complex task and the opportunity may arise while physicians are busy with other clinical priorities, there are several options to assure that the necessary steps take place. Some institutions may build a protocol for this transition on paper or computerized order entry, build cues and dosing charts into order sets, and/or develop nursing documentation and nursing process to influence physician and nurse behavior. This critical juncture is also a good place to focus expertise with a glycemic control team, pharmacist, specially trained nurses, or some other dedicated team to take over this transition for all patients.36 The complexity and aggressiveness of the specific institutional protocol used will depend on the confidence and experience of those individuals responsible for determining the transition doses.

The transition from IV to SC insulin often coincides with a change in patient location, (ie, from the ICU to general medical ward). It is imperative that appropriate communication occurs between the transferring and receiving nurses and physicians to continue with the care plan for glycemic management. This communication can be encouraged through provider education and automated into the standardized order process.

Perioperative Transitions

Patients undergoing surgery present a special challenge. They are faced with not only the physiologic and mental stress of surgery but also the hazards of multiple handoffs across several care teams, all with different priorities and cultures. As in other areas, standardized protocols specific to this area of transition are important in assuring safe and effective perioperative glycemic control. Procedures should preferably be scheduled for the early morning to have the least impact on insulin dosing. Patients who are admitted only for the procedure will have to manage this transition on their own and need to be given specific instructions along with the general preoperative orders.24, 41 In general, the usual dose of glargine can be given the day prior to the procedure if it is approximately 50% of their TDD. This is an important caution because some outpatient regimens use large doses of glargine, which essentially provide both basal and nutritional coverage. In those patients, the glargine dose should be reduced by 20% to 50% to provide a safety margin. As with any patient who is NPO, the morning dose of NPH should be one‐half of the usual dose, scheduled nutritional insulin should be held, and the usual doses of correction insulin should be reduced. The appropriate preoperative dose adjustments also depend on whether the individual patient is ketosis‐prone and how tight their glycemic control is as an outpatient.

Upon arrival to the hospital or during the time that the inpatient is NPO, dextrose containing IV fluids should be administered to minimize the risk of hypoglycemia and prevent ketosis. Given the risks for wide variation, blood glucose monitoring should occur every 1 to 2 hours before, during, and initially after the procedure. Infusion insulin allows the most rapid titration and reliable delivery (compared with SC infusions or injections) and is therefore the preferred regimen for major surgery requiring prolonged NPO status or prolonged surgery in patients with type 1 diabetes. Basal‐nutritional‐correction SC insulin is preferred in other surgical inpatients because their nutritional intake is variable and the stress of surgery affects insulin requirements.

Oral antihyperglycemic agents should be held around the time of surgery. If patients are on an oral agent that can result in hypoglycemia, (ie, sulfonylurea or other insulin secretagogue), it should be held on the day of the procedure. Metformin must be held for safety concerns, given the possible decrease in renal function around surgery. It should be held beginning on the day of the procedure or the day before in the case of the sustained‐release formulation. It can then be resumed 48 hours postoperation after normal renal function is secured and the patient is discharged home. Alpha‐glucosidase inhibitors should be held whenever patients are NPO because they only work when taken with meals. Thiazoladinediones have a long duration of action and so can be continued or stopped around surgery. Finally, glucagon‐like peptide (GLP‐1) agonists (exenatide) should be held until the patient is eating normally and discharged home due to the high incidence of gastrointestinal side effects.

TRANSITIONING FROM THE HOSPITAL

The final but perhaps most important transition is the one from the hospital. With much attention on glycemic control in the hospital, it will become clear to many clinicians that the outpatient regimen needs to be modified. However, any changes in medications increase the chances of hypoglycemia and the possibility of error. The postdischarge time frame has been poorly studied and was specifically identified by the Association for Clinical Endocrinologists (ACE) and American Diabetes Association (ADA) as an area in need of future research.36

Patients may be discharged to a nursing home, hospice, or home, and numerous factors need to be considered to determine the optimal discharge regimen. Important considerations are the HbA1c at admission, home medications, medication interactions, current medical problems, nutritional status, physical disabilities, frequency of self‐monitoring, hypoglycemic risk factors, contraindications to oral medications, goals of care/life expectancy, and financial and other resources. If there are temporary physical or self‐care limitations, then a visiting nurse may need to be arranged to assure a safe transition home with the optimal therapy. If patients are going to a skilled nursing facility or other acute care hospital, the formulary, processes, and staffing issues of that facility will be additional important considerations in determining whether therapy is the same as in the hospital or more like what it will be at home.

An algorithm for outpatient therapy for type 2 DM was recommended in a consensus statement from the ADA and European Association for the Study of Diabetes.42, 43 This has been modified using additional recommendations from the AACE44 and is depicted in Figure 1. While the delineation of these steps is helpful, it must be emphasized that both the choice of regimen and dose will need to be individualized. Prescribing the ideal frequently falls short if there is no way for the patient to implement the recommendations. Intensive insulin therapy requires training in food intake/emnsulin matching, motivation of the patient and outpatient clinician, 4 times daily self‐monitoring of blood glucose, and considerable expense. Some patients may be temporarily continued on basal‐nutritional‐correction regimens as their insulin requirements are rapidly changing and later converted to regimens that involve less frequent insulin doses, (ie, twice daily premixed insulin or basal insulin with oral agents or oral agents alone).45, 46 Other patients who may be medically appropriate for intensive insulin therapy may first need to gain confidence with more simple insulin regimens. There are numerous additional resources on initiating insulin that the reader is referred to for more detail.4448

Figure 1
A stepwise approach to intensifying type 2 outpatient glycemic control regimens around hospital discharge. Adapted from refs.42 to44. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists Inpatient Glycemic Control Resource Center. *© 2008 American Diabetes Association. From Diabetes Care®, Vol. 31, 2008; 173–175. Modified with permission from The American Diabetes Association.

Oral antihyperglycemic drugs are usually held while a patient is admitted to the hospital but once medical conditions are improved, oral intake is established, and renal function stabilized, these drugs can be restarted. If a patient has a new contraindication to metformin or sulfonylureas but does not need insulin, a TZD or DPP4 inhibitor should be considered. Elderly patients and those with renal or liver disease are at increased risk for developing hypoglycemia.49, 50 Glyburide should be avoided, and doses of other sulfonylureas may need to be adjusted. Other options that may be considered in this situation include sitagliptin and exenatide.51 When patients will be discharged on oral diabetic medications alone, discontinue the basal insulin 12 to 24 hours before and the scheduled nutritional insulin at the same time oral agents are restarted. Sulfonylureas, metformin, DPP4 inhibitors, and exenatide will have most of their effect in the first day, but TZDs have a delayed onset and may not be a good bridge for immediate control at discharge.

If patients are going to be discharged on basal insulin in addition to oral agents, several options exist for determining the dose. Because of the risk of hypoglycemia after discharge, it is advised to either reduce the doses of oral agents or choose more conservative insulin starting doses.52 One possibility is to discontinue the nutritional and correction doses, continue the hospital dose of basal insulin, and restart the oral antidiabetes medications. If the dose of basal insulin was more than 50% of the TDD of insulin, it may need to be reduced. A more conservative option for patients at a higher risk of hypoglycemia is to start 0.2 units/kg or 10 units of NPH, glargine, or detemir at bedtime (Figure 2). Once discharged, blood glucose should be measured 1 to 4 times a day and the basal dose titrated by several different validated methods.53, 54 Appropriate orders for necessary supplies for insulin therapy include a meter with test strips, lancets, syringes, needles, and glucagon kit.55

Figure 2
Starting basal insulin at the time of hospital discharge. Adapted from Refs.42, 45, 47, 48, 53 and54. Titrate based on the morning fasting blood sugar, decrease 4 units if below 60 mg/dL, decrease 2 units if 60 to 80 mg/dL, no change if 80 to 100 mg/dL, increase 2 units if 100 to 120 mg/dL, increase 4 units if 121 to 140 mg/dL, increase 6 units if 141 to 160 mg/dL, increase 8 units if 161 to 180 mg/dL, and 10 units if fasting blood sugar is >180 mg/dL. From Davies et al.53 (Diabetes Care. 2005;28:1282–1288) and Riddle et al.54 (Diabetes Care. 2003;26:3080–3086).

With a large number of patients with diabetes remaining undiagnosed, it is important to use the information available during hospitalization to identify previously unrecognized diabetes or prediabetes.24 Because there are no unique criteria for the diagnosis of DM in the stressed state, patients may have a presumptive diagnosis made in the hospital and/or follow‐up testing with fasting glucose or an oral glucose tolerance test. No ADA diagnostic thresholds for the HbA1c currently exist, but it can be a useful marker in making this distinction.56 Among patients with new hyperglycemia, an HbA1c of 6% or greater was 100% specific for predicting a future diagnosis of diabetes in the small prospective cohort study by Greci et al.,57 but many endocrinologists use a cutoff of 7%. For all hyperglycemic patients, lifestyle interventions that promote weight loss and increased activity levels should be encouraged. New hyperglycemia should be clearly identified as a diagnosis in discharge communication.

There are many barriers to diabetes self‐management education in the inpatient setting but there are also numerous resources and opportunities. New information will be available regarding patients' understanding of their disease and glycemic control and there may be plans for changes in the home medication regimen. Most of the focus of inpatient education sessions is on survival skills such as taking medications, performing blood glucose monitoring, basic meal planning, identification and treatment of hypoglycemia, sick‐day management, how to access further diabetes education as an outpatient, and when to call the healthcare team.58 The most effective way to accomplish all of this is to identify the discharge regimen early and include nurses and staff in a plan to educate all patients. An inpatient diabetes educator can provide additional help with newly‐diagnosed or uncontrolled patients. Dividing the material over the hospitalization makes it less overwhelming for patients, reinforces previously taught concepts, spreads the responsibility to more providers, and offers it in conjunction with the correlating clinical care. Throughout their hospital stay, patients can begin to practice new skills, including blood glucose monitoring and logbook use, drawing up and administering insulin, sharps disposal, basic diabetic diet information, and sick‐day management. The specific topics addressed in each session can be tracked as part of an interdisciplinary education record that allows coordination among the individuals involved in teaching.59 It is important to give patients the basics, support them with minimal written information, and provide them appropriate follow‐up diabetes education.60 Furthermore, the inpatient team should view the patient's glycemic control education as something that needs to continue across the continuum of care and develop communication strategies that connect with the follow‐up clinical team.

At the time of discharge, it is essential that written documentation and communication with outpatient care providers be completed.61, 62 The more standardized the inpatient insulin regimens are, the more likely the patient is to be on a much different glycemic control regimen than the one on admission; therefore, it is even more important to assure that the admission medication list is accurate and reconciled completely with the modified list at discharge. Discharge check lists and tools for assessing patient acceptance of the discharge plan help with this process.63 Follow‐up with the primary care physician should occur within 7 to 14 days if patients are new to insulin, had medication changes, or are elderly. An increased likelihood of keeping posthospitalization appointments with a diabetes specialty clinic has been associated with being discharged on insulin, a new diagnosis of diabetes, and direct referral.64 Additional attention should be paid to barriers to follow‐up, including lack of health insurance, prior difficulty with follow‐up, and transportation problems.65

SUMMARY

A variety of factors have contributed to difficulty in achieving inpatient and outpatient glucose control. These include care complexity, the lack of standardized protocols, limited knowledge about glucose control, and clinical inertia. Inpatient clinicians have a tendency toward keeping patients on their home regimen in hopes that they might test its effectiveness. Furthermore, there has been the notion of why optimize the glycemic regimen of inpatients because their diabetic needs will change in the outpatient setting. However, because the insulin requirements during acute illness are different and nutritional intake is variable, nearly all inpatients should be placed on multiple daily doses of scheduled insulin or IV insulin to allow the necessary flexibility for rapid titration and abrupt changes in nutrition. This intensive regimen is only appropriate for a minority of outpatients. This difference illustrates that a regimen that works perfectly in one clinical setting will not necessarily be optimal in the next. The patient's outpatient treatment regimen should be reassessed based on HbA1c, self‐monitoring prior to admission, and new contraindications based on medical issues. If a change is indicated and the inpatient physician is motivated, there are numerous helpful resources to aid in addressing all the necessary factors surrounding intensification of therapy.

Despite requiring different glycemic control regimens, the information gained from the needs in each setting guide the next, making communication and planning paramount. Important transitions that must be given attention are: (1) admission to the hospital; (2) in‐hospital transitions, including the perioperative period and IV‐to‐SC insulin; and (3) the hospital to outpatient transition. The complexity of such frequent transitions requires planning, education, and clear communication that are best handled with a systems approach and the development of standardized protocols and order sets. Hospitalists, endocrinologists, and other members of the healthcare team should take an aggressive role in developing systems and facilitating optimal transitions to maximize glycemic control. Further studies are needed to determine the best practices among the variety of options discussed in this article.

References
  1. ACE/ADA Task Force on Inpatient Diabetes.American College of Endocrinology and American Diabetes Association Consensus Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Glycemic Control.Endocr Pract.2006;12:458468.
  2. American Board of Internal Medicine Foundation Stepping Up to the Plate Alliance. Available at: http://www.abimfoundation.org/quality/suttp.shtm. Accessed November2007.
  3. National Transitions of Care Coalition. Available at: http://www.ntocc.org. Accessed November2007.
  4. JCAHO 2008 National Patient Safety Goals. Availableat: http://www.jointcommission.org/PatientSafety/NationalPatientSafetyGoals/08_hap_npsgs.htm. Accessed November2007.
  5. Diabetes Control and Complications Trial Research Group.The effect of intensive treatment of diabetes on the development and progression of long‐term complications in insulin‐dependent diabetes mellitus.N Engl J Med.1993;329:977986.
  6. UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group.Intensive blood‐glucose control with sulphonylureas or insulin compared with conventional treatment and risk of complications in patients with type 2 diabetes: UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group.Lancet.1998;352:837853.
  7. Van Den Berghe G,Wouters P,Weekers F, et al.,Intensive insulin therapy in critically ill patients.N Engl J Med.2001;345:13591367.
  8. Malmberg K,Norhammar A,Wedel H,Ryden L.Glycometabolic state at admission: important risk marker of mortality in conventionally treated patients with diabetes mellitus and acute myocardial infarction: long‐term results from the Diabetes and Insulin‐Glucose Infusion in Acute Myocardial Infarction (DIGAMI) study.Circulation.1999;99:26262632.
  9. Laird AM,Miller PR,Kilgo PD,Meredith JW,Chang MC.Relationship of early hyperglycemia to mortality in trauma patients.J Trauma.2004;56:10581062.
  10. Thomas MC,Mathew TH,Russ GR,Rao MM,Moran J.Early peri‐operative glycaemic control and allograft rejection in patients with diabetes mellitus: a pilot study.Transplantation.2001;72:13211324.
  11. Weiser MA,Cabanillas ME,Konopleva M, et al.Relation between the duration of remission and hyperglycemia in induction chemotherapy for acute lymphocytic leukemia with a hyperfractionated cyclophosphamide, vincristine, doxorubicin and dexamethasone/methotrexate cytarabine regimen.Cancer.2004;100:11791185.
  12. Capes SE,Hunt D,Malmberg K,Pathak P,Gerstein HC.Stress hyperglycemia and prognosis of stroke in nondiabetic and diabetic patients: a systematic overview.Stroke.2001;32:24262432.
  13. Thomsen RW,Hundborg HH,Lervang HH,Johnsen SP,Sorensen HT,Schonheyer HC.Diabetes and outcome of community‐acquired pneumococcal bacteriemia.Diabetes Care.2004;27:7076.
  14. Pomposelli JJ,Baxter JK,Babineau TJ.Early postoperative glucose control predicts nosocomial infection rate in diabetic patients.JPEN J Parenter Enteral Nutr.1998;22:7781.
  15. Vriesendorp TM,Morelis QJ,DeVries JH,Legemate DA,Hoekstra JB.Early post‐operative glucose levels are an independent risk factor for infection after peripheral vascular surgery. A retrospective study.Eur J Vasc Endovasc Surg.2004;28:520525.
  16. American Diabetes Association.Standards of medical care in diabetes, 2006.Diabetes Care.2006;29(suppl 1):s4s42.
  17. American College of Endocrinology Task Force on Inpatient Diabetes and Metabolic Control.American College of Endocrinology Position Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Metabolic Control.Endocr Pract.2004;10:7782.
  18. Van den Berghe G,Wilmer A,Hermans G, et al.Intensive insulin therapy in the medical ICU.N Engl J Med.2006;354:449461
  19. Brunkhorst FM,Engel C,Bloos F, et al.Intensive insulin therapy and pentastarch resuscitation in severe sepsis.N Engl J Med.2008;358(2):125139.
  20. Schnipper JL,Barsky EE,Shaykevich S,Fitzmaurice G,Pendergrass ML.Inpatient management of diabetes and hyperglycemia among general medicine patients at a large teaching hospital.J Hosp Med.2006;1:145150.
  21. Cook CB,Castro JC,Schmidt RE, et al.,Diabetes care in hospitalized noncritically ill patients: More evidence for clinical inertia and negative therapeutic momentum.J Hosp Med.2007;2:203211.
  22. Queale WS,Seidler AJ,Brancati FL.Glycemic control and sliding scale insulin use in medical inpatients with diabetes mellitus.Arch Intern Med.1997;157:545552.
  23. Campbell KB,Braithwaite SS.Hospital management of hyperglycemia.Clin Diabetes.2004;22:8188.
  24. Clement S,Braithwaite SS,Magee MF, et al.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in hospitals. [Erratum appears in Diabetes Care. 2005; 28: 1990. Dosage error in text].Diabetes Care.2004;27:553591.
  25. Gunton JE,McElduff A.Hemoglobinopathies and HbA(1c) measurement.Diabetes Care.2000;23(8):11971198.
  26. Schnedl WJ,Krause R,Halwachs‐Baumann G,Trinker M,Lipp RW,Krejs GJ.Evaluation of HbA1c determination methods in patients with hemoglobinopathiesDiabetes Care.2000;23(3):339344.
  27. Maynard G,Wesorick D,O'Malley CW,Inzucchi S.Subcutaneous insulin order sets and protocols: effective design and implementation strategies.J Hosp Med.2008;3.
  28. Wesorick D,O'Malley CW,Rushakoff R,Larsen K,Magee M.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital: a practical guide to subcutaneous insulin use in the non‐critically ill, adult patient.J Hosp Med.2008;3.PMID:8675920.
  29. Bode BW,Steed RD,Schleusener DS,Strange P.Switch to multiple daily injections with insulin glargine and insulin lispro from continuous subcutaneous insulin infusion with insulin lispro: a randomized, open‐label study using a continuous glucose monitoring system.Endocr Pract.2005;11:157164.
  30. SBAR technique for communication: a situational briefing model. Available at: http://www.ihi.org/IHI/Topics/PatientSafety/SafetyGeneral/Tools/SBARTechniqueforCommunicationASituationalBriefingModel.htm. Accessed December2007.
  31. Yates G. Promising quality improvement initiatives: reports from the field. AHRQ Summit—Improving Health Care Quality for All Americans: Celebrating Success, Measuring Progress, Moving Forward 2004. Available at: http://www.ahrq.gov/qual/qsummit/qsummit4.htm#sentara. Accessed December2007.
  32. Braithwaite SS,Buie MM,Thompson CL, et al.Hospital hypoglycemia: not only treatment but also prevention.Endocr Pract.2004;10(suppl 2):8999.
  33. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists Inpatient Glycemic Control Resource Center. Available at: http://resources.aace.com/PDF/Section_05‐Final‐Inpatient_Non‐ICU/Hyperglycemia_Non‐ICU_Protocols/Transition_from_ Intravenous_to_Subcutaneous_Insulin.PDF. Accessed November2007.
  34. Recommendations for safe use of insulin in hospitals. American Society of Health System Pharmacists and the Hospital and Health System Association of Pennsylvania. 2005. Available at: http://www.premierinc.com/safety/safety‐share/01–06‐downloads/01‐safe‐use‐insulin‐ashp.pdf. Accessed December2007.
  35. O'Malley CW,Emanuele MA,Maynard G, for the Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Taskforce. Glycemic control resource room: improving reliability of care across transitions and in the perioperative setting. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/ResourceRoomRedesign/html/07Layer_Inter/06_Transitions.cfm. Accessed August2008.
  36. ACE/ADA Task Force on Inpatient Diabetes American College of Endocrinology and American Diabetes Association Consensus Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Glycemic Control: a call to action.Diabetes Care.2006;29:19551962.
  37. Schmeltz LR,DeSantis AJ,Schmidt K, et al.Conversion of intravenous insulin infusions to subcutaneously administered insulin glargine in patients with hyperglycemia.Endocr Pract.2006;12:641650.
  38. Bode BW,Braithwaite SS,Steed RD,Davidson PC.Intravenous insulin infusion therapy: indications, methods, and transition to subcutaneous insulin therapy.Endocr Pract.2004;10(suppl 2):7180.
  39. DeSantis AJ,Schmeltz LR,Schmidt K, et al.Inpatient management of hyperglycemia: the northwestern experience.Endocr Pract.2006;12(5):491505.
  40. American Diabetes Association.Position statement: standards of medical care in diabetes‐2007.Diabetes Care.2007;30(suppl 1):S4S41.
  41. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists Inpatient Glycemic Control Resource Center. Available at: http://resources.aace.com/PDF/Section_05‐Final‐Inpatient_Non‐ICU/Hyperglycemia_Non‐ICU_Protocols/Pre‐Operative_Instructions_for_Patients_with_Diabetes.PDF Accessed November2007.
  42. Nathan DM,Buse JB,Davidson MB, et al.Management of hyperglycemia in type 2 diabetes: a consensus algorithm for the initiation and adjustment of therapy: a consensus statement from the American Diabetes Association and the European Association for the Study of Diabetes.Diabetes Care.2006;29:19631972.
  43. Nathan DM,Buse JB,Davidson MB, et al.Management of hyperglycemia in type 2 diabetes: a consensus algorithm for the initiation and adjustment of therapy: update regarding thiazoladinediones.Diabetes Care.2008;31:173175.
  44. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists Inpatient Glycemic Control Resource Center. Challenges in Effective Discharge Planning for Hospitalized Patients with Diabetes. Available at: http://resources.aace.com/PDF/Section_07‐Final‐Transition‐Inpatient_to_Outpatient/Challenges_in_Effective_Discharge_for_Diabetes_Patients.PPT. Accessed December2007.
  45. Raskin P,Allen E,Hollander P.Initiating insulin therapy in type 2 diabetes: a comparison of biphasic and basal insulin analogs.Diabetes Care.2005;28:260265.
  46. Holman RR,Thorne KI,Farmer AJ, et al.Addition of biphasic, prandial, or basal insulin to oral therapy in type 2 diabetes.N Engl J Med.2007;357:17161730.
  47. Mooradian AD,Bernbaum M,Albert SG.Narrative review: a rational approach to starting insulin therapy.Ann Intern Med.2006;145:125134.
  48. Hirsch IB,Bergenstal RM,Parkin CG,Wright E,Buse JB.A real‐world approach to insulin therapy in primary care practice.Clin Diabetes.2005;23:7886.
  49. Shorr RI,Ray WA,Daugherty JR,Griffin MR.Individual sulfonylureas and serious hypoglycemia in older persons.J Am Geriatr Soc.1996;44:751755.
  50. Shorr RI,Ray WA,Daugherty JR,Griffin MR.Incidence and risk factors for serious hypoglycemia in older persons using insulin or sulfonylureas.Arch Intern Med.1997;157(15):16811686.
  51. Heine RJ,Van Gaal LF,Johns D, et al.Exenatide versus insulin glargine in patients with suboptimally controlled type 2 diabetes: a randomized trial.Ann Intern Med.2005;143:559569.
  52. Braithwaite SS.The transition from insulin infusions to long‐term diabetes therapy: the argument for insulin analogs.Semin Thorac Cardiovasc Surg.2006;18:366378.
  53. Davies M,Storms F,Shutler S,Bianchi‐Biscay M,Gomis R.ATLANTUS Study Group. Improvement of glycemic control in subjects with poorly controlled type 2 diabetes.Diabetes Care.2005;28:12821288.
  54. Riddle M,Rosenstock J,Gerich J.Investigators Insulin Glargine 4002 Study. The Treat‐to Target trial: randomized addition of glargine or human NPH insulin to oral therapy of type 2 diabetes patients.Diabetes Care.2003;26:30803086.
  55. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists Inpatient Glycemic Control Resource Center. Available at: http://resources.aace.com/PDF/Section_07‐Final‐Transition‐Inpatient_to_Outpatient/Effective_Discharge_Planning‐Sample_Discharge_Plans/Inpatient_Diabetes_Discharge_Prescription.PDF. Accessed November2007.
  56. American Diabetes Association.Diagnosis and classification of diabetes mellitus.Diabetes Care.2007;30(suppl):S42S47.
  57. Greci LS,Kailasam M,Malkani S, et al.Utility of HbA1c levels for diabetes case finding in hospitalized patients with hyperglycemia.Diabetes Care.2003;26:10641068.
  58. Mensing C,Boucher J,Cypress M, et al.National standards for diabetes self‐management education.Diabetes Care.2006;29(suppl 1):S78S85.
  59. Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force. Workbook for improvement: improving glycemic control, preventing hypoglycemia and optimizing care of the inpatient with diabetes and hyperglycemia. page 105. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/ResourceRoomRedesign/pdf/GC_Workbook.pdf. Accessed December,2007.
  60. Joslin Diabetes Center. EZ Start Patient Information Handouts. Available at: http://www.joslin.org/ezstart. Accessed December2007.
  61. Kripalani S,Jackson AT,Schnipper JL,Coleman EA.Promoting effective transitions of care at hospital discharge: a review of key issues for hospitalists.J Hosp Med.2007;2:314323.
  62. Kripalani S,LeFevre F,Phillips CO,Williams MV,Basaviah P,Baker DW.Deficits in communication and information transfer between hospital‐based and primary care physicians: implications for patient safety and continuity of care.JAMA.2007;297:831841.
  63. Society of Hospital Medicine On‐line Clinical Tools. Ideal discharge for the elderly patient: a hospitalist checklist. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/AM/Template.cfm?Section=QI_Clinical_Toolsemplate=/CM/ContentDisplay.cfmContentID=10303. Accessed December2007.
  64. Wheeler K,Crawford R,McAdams D, et al.Inpatient to outpatient transfer of care in urban patients with diabetes: patterns and determinants of immediate post‐discharge follow‐up.Arch Intern Med.2004;164:447453.
  65. Wheeler K,Crawford R,McAdams D,Robinson R,Dunbar VG,Cook CB.Inpatient to outpatient transfer of diabetes care: perceptions of barriers to postdischarge follow‐up in urban African American patients.Ethn Dis.2007;17:238243.
Article PDF
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Page Number
55-65
Sections
Article PDF
Article PDF

Professional and patient safety organizations have recognized the importance of safe transitions as patients move through the health care system, and such attention is even more critical when attempting to achieve glycemic control.14 Since the publication of the Diabetes Control and Complications Trial (DCCT)5 and the United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS),6 we have known that intensive glycemic control in the ambulatory setting prevents complications in both type 1 and type 2 diabetes mellitus (DM). Despite the increased risk of hypoglycemia, these trials changed practice patterns in the outpatient settings in favor of intensification of diabetes therapy. In the same way, randomized, prospective trials using intravenous (IV) insulin therapy have revolutionized our thinking about inpatient care by showing that tight glycemic control in the critically ill7 and patients with acute myocardial infarction8 reduces mortality and morbidity. These, as well as additional observational studies associating hyperglycemia with poor outcomes in a variety of medical and surgical patients,915 have led to increased attention on glycemic control in all venues of care.16, 17 Concerns over excessive hypoglycemia and a nonsignificant increase in mortality in certain populations of medical intensive care unit (ICU) patients have raised questions over whether the initial studies can be reproduced or generalized to other groups of inpatients.18, 19 Additional studies are underway to clarify these questions but consensus exists that blood glucose values should at least be less than 180 mg/dL and that the traditional practice of ignoring hyperglycemia is no longer acceptable.

While a uniform focus on glycemic control will allow our patients to receive a consistent message about diabetes, the unique limitations inherent to each practice setting requires different therapeutic regimens and intentional focus on the risks as patients transition from one care area to another. This work addresses several areas of care transition that are particularly important in safely achieving glycemic control including: transition into the hospital for patients on a variety of home regimens, transitions within the hospital (related to changes in dietary intake, change from IV to subcutaneous [SC] therapy, and the perioperative setting), and the transition from the hospital to home or another healthcare facility.

TRANSITION INTO THE HOSPITAL

Until recently, most patients with diabetes admitted to the hospital were managed with sliding‐scale‐only regimens.20, 21 Unfortunately, this led to a variety of complications, including hyperglycemia, hypoglycemia, iatrogenic ketoacidosis, and an inconsistent message to patients on the importance of glycemic control.22 Some outpatient clinicians and patients combated this tradition by creating in‐hospital glucose control plans with orders, which patients would bring with them to the hospital.23 This practice continues to be a helpful way to guide inpatient therapy and is encouraged when available. Glycemic‐controlrelated documents from outpatient clinicians should include the most recent glycosylated hemoglobin (HbA1c) value, diagnosis and known complications, current names and doses of medications, and other patient‐specific preferences or needs (eg, compliance, financial, fear of needles). If the last HbA1c was performed more than 30 days before admission or is not available, one should be obtained upon hospital admission to help guide discharge therapy.24 By knowing the HbA1c, one can determine the level of diabetic control achieved with the current regimen and can help the inpatient team (clinician and patient) determine if a more aggressive glycemic control regimen is necessary at the time of discharge. It is important to note that if the patient has received a transfusion of red blood cells prior to HbA1c measurement or has a hemoglobinopathy, the HbA1c value may not be accurate.25, 26

In general, the outpatient regimen will need to be modified at admission to achieve the appropriate flexibility needed for the changing nutritional intake and insulin requirements that invariably accompany hospitalization. Sulfonylureas and dipeptidyl peptidase 4 inhibitors (DPP4), such as sitagliptin, have most of their effect immediately, but the other oral antihyperglycemic agents have a relatively long delay between treatment and effect, thus they are not a flexible enough method to achieve glycemic control in the hospital. Additionally, inpatients may have transient contraindications to their prior oral antihyperglycemic medications. Metformin is almost always on hold in the hospital setting, at least initially, due to concerns about lactic acidosis. Sulfonylureas can cause hypoglycemia in the setting of worsening renal function or reduced oral intake. Thiazoladinediones (TZDs) are often withheld due to concerns about fluid retention and should be avoided in patients admitted with heart failure. There is little experience in the hospital with the use of newer agents like exenatide, pramlintide, glinides, and DPP4 inhibitors.

Overall, it is generally recommended that oral antihyperglycemic agents be discontinued upon hospital admission and replaced with insulin infusions or scheduled SC insulin. An estimate of 0.4 to 0.5 units/kg of body weight provides a conservative starting point for the total daily dose of insulin (TDD) for most patients. This TDD should then be divided into basal and nutritional components to match the patients' caloric intake. Additional correction doses of insulin should be prescribed to cover episodes of hyperglycemia that develop despite the provision of anticipatory‐physiologic insulin. Further discussion of insulin dosing and SC regimens is available in detail elsewhere.27, 28 The recommendation for these insulin‐only regimens is made regardless of the glycemic control in the outpatient setting and is not meant to imply that they should be continued at discharge. In fact, most patients will return to their home regimen or to one that is intensified but less labor intensive than the basal‐nutritional‐correction insulin used in the hospital. The antihyperglycemic regimen planned for discharge should be anticipated as early as possible and clearly communicated to the patient and/or caregivers to allow for optimal education.

Outpatient insulin regimens that have a high percentage of basal insulin need to be modified during hospital admission to avoid hypoglycemia that may occur from variable nutritional intake. While hospitalized, the basal portion of the estimated TDD generally should not be more than 50% to 60%. The total number of units of all types of insulin used daily as an outpatient can be used as a starting point for determining the inpatient TDD by a 1:1 conversion. Adjustments up or down based on glycemic control, nutritional intake, and other factors are then necessary. If patients are on regimens with insulin plus oral agents at home, the inpatient TDD should either be the home insulin dose or the dose calculated based on their weight, whichever is greater. Patients who use carbohydrate counting to determine nutritional insulin doses as an outpatient might be continued on this regimen if they have a strong understanding of the methods, they are coherent enough to determine their doses, nursing staff are well educated, and dietary services provides the carbohydrate content for the hospital menu. If patients are on insulin pumps at home, these should be managed according to a uniform hospital policy to assure safety. If conversion to multiple daily injections is needed, the same 1:1 conversion is safe.29

Transitions Within the Hospital

General Issues

Within the hospital itself, there are several transitions that have important quality and safety implications regarding glycemic control. The handoffs between providers should follow a standardized format.4, 30, 31 Essential information will vary depending on the setting but should universally include recent hypoglycemia, insulin type and doses, and hypoglycemic risk factors such as changes in insulin doses, the development of renal insufficiency, inability of the patient to self‐report symptoms, tapering of steroids, and cessation or interruption of nutritional intake.32

One of the greatest risks for hypoglycemia in the hospital comes from the unpredictable nutritional interruptions that occur. Unplanned changes are best handled by nurses having an existing order to hold scheduled nutritional insulin if patients are classified nothing by mouth (NPO) or eat <50% of their meal. Additionally, nursing staff should have orders or policies that allow flexibility in the time of administering scheduled rapid‐acting nutritional insulin so that it may be given during or immediately following the meal in patients at higher risk for poor oral intake. Tube feedings also place patients at high risk for hypoglycemia because the tube may become dislodged or they may begin to have feeding intolerance. For these reasons, a measure of safety would be to have standing orders to substitute IV 10% dextrose in water (D10W) at the same rate as the prior tube feeds, hold nutritional insulin, and begin more frequent monitoring whenever tube feeds are stopped.33 Orders that rely on nursing staff to notify a physician when tube feedings are stopped are generally not directive enough because providers may be distracted by other changes or forget the patient is on long‐acting insulin. The need for this flexibility around nutritional dosing emphasizes the importance of avoiding excessive doses of basal insulin. If the total dose of basal insulin is 40% to 50% of the TDD, it can safely be continued at its usual dose despite changing nutritional intake. The only exception is neutral protamine Hagedorn (NPH) insulin, which should be reduced when patients are NPO due to its peak. Generally, a 50% reduction in NPH is recommended for morning doses, but bedtime doses may be given with little to no reduction. Because of the complexity of these issues, standardized order sets are the best way to reliably communicate all the necessary standing orders to nursing staff (Table 1).

Important Standing Orders To Include for Inpatients on Scheduled Insulin
  • Abbreviations: NPO, nothing by month; ICU, intensive care unit.

Nutritional insulin
Hold if patients are NPO or eat less than 50% of their meal.
Administer scheduled rapid acting nutritional insulin during or immediately following the meal if oral intake is questionable (ie, nausea, emesis, or newly advancing diet).
Tube feedings: When tube feeds are stopped unexpectedly
Start dextrose containing IV fluids (many institutions use D10W at the same rate as the prior tube feeds).
Hold scheduled nutritional insulin.
Notify physician.
Basal insulin
Continue if NPO.
Reduce morning dose of NPH by 50% if NPO and may need to reduce the dose of bedtime NPH.
IV to subcutaneous transition
Timing for discontinuing IV infusion in relation to first dose of subcutaneous insulin.
Prompts for verbal communication between ICU and general ward staff.

Transitioning the Patient Off of IV Insulin

The strongest evidence for tight glycemic control derives from studies in the surgical ICU.7 Many hospitals have robust, effective IV‐insulin protocols. The frequency of monitoring and rapidity of action of IV insulin allow quick achievement of blood glucose control. As patients begin to eat, the layering of SC nutritional insulin on top of the insulin infusion may reduce the lability of the infusion rate and prevent excursions in glycemic control. When the patient is ready to leave the ICU or start a full oral diet, it is recommended that they transition off of the IV insulin to a basal‐nutritional‐correction regimen.33, 34

The amount of insulin needed with IV infusion is a useful estimate of the TDD of insulin.28, 33, 35, 36 There are important general steps to take when making this transition; but, due to the lack of conclusive data proving the advantage of one regimen over another, there are a variety of acceptable specific protocols (Table 2).3739 First, it should be determined if patients are expected to require ongoing scheduled SC insulin or not. Certainly, all patients with type 1 DM will require scheduled SC insulin, but patients with type 2 DM on low insulin infusion rates or some patients with new hyperglycemia can appropriately be managed with sliding‐scale alone. Next, the average hourly rate of the infusion over the preceding 6 to 8 hours should be determined because it most accurately reflects current insulin needs during the changing stress, nutrition, and medications in critical care patients. This hourly rate will then be converted to a TDD using a safety factor to anticipate decreasing insulin requirements. Some portion of this daily total will then be assigned to be basal insulin. As patients' clinical conditions approach baseline, so will their insulin requirements, and the dose will need to be revised.24

Important Steps in Transitioning from Insulin Infusion to Subcutaneous Insulin
  • Institutional cutoffs may vary. Some use 1 to 2 units/hour.

Step 1: Is patient stable enough for transition? Hypotension, active sepsis, vasopressors, and intubation are contraindications to transition due to unreliable subcutaneous insulin absorption and continued need for the most flexible dosing due to frequently changing insulin requirements.
Step 2: Does this patient need a transition to scheduled subcutaneous (SC) insulin?
Yes
All patients with type 1 DM.
Type 2 DM patients on insulin as outpatient.
Type 2 DM patients with a recent mean infusion rate of 0.5 units/hour.*
No
Type 2 DM patients with infusion rate <0.5 units/hour.*
Stress hyperglycemia or previously unrecognized DM if infusion rate <1 unit/hour, or if HbA1c near normal.
Some institutions exclude all stress hyperglycemia patients from transition to a SC insulin regimen, regardless of drip rate.
Step 3: If transition is needed, calculate a total daily dose (TDD) of insulin. The TDD is an estimate of the 24‐hour insulin requirement when the patient is receiving full nutrition.
Determine mean insulin infusion rate from last 6 to 8 hours.
Calculate 24‐hour insulin dose based on this, and reduce this 24‐hour dose by some safety factor. There are several options for this step.
Multiply hourly rate by 24, then multiply by 0.7 or 0.8 to arrive at a safety‐adjusted 24 hour insulin dose.
OR
Multiply hourly infusion rate by 20 (80% of 24).
Determine if this total is the TDD or basal dose based on current nutrition. There are several options for this step for you or your institution to choose.
If infusion was serving basal AND nutritional needs of patient (such as a patient on 24‐hour tube feedings) this will be your TDD.
OR
If the infusion insulin was not covering significant nutrition, this could be the BASAL insulin dose.
Step 4: Construct a regimen tailored to the patient's nutritional situation, building in safeguards for any changes in nutritional intake and uncertainties about reliability of intake. Several options are again available.
Basal: should be ordered as basal glargine or detemir (these are preferred by SHM GCTF but NPH is also an option).
Dose is 40% to 50% of TDD.
OR
Adjusted 24‐hour IV requirement given all as basal.
Nutritional: The remainder of the TDD is scheduled nutritional insulin in divided doses. In general, these doses need to be adjusted down for <100% nutritional intake and the orders should allow for administering nutritional insulin just AFTER observed meals to allow an assessment of intake. There are several options for estimating the initial doses:
Use 50% of the TDD as nutritional coverage and divide this amount by 3 to determine the scheduled meal dose. Hold if they do not eat more than 50% of their meal.
Use a more conservative start of 10% to 20% of the basal dose scheduled with each meal.
Use carbohydrate counting to cover nutritional intake.
Step 5: Be sure to give SC insulin BEFORE the infusion stops
Basal glargine or detemir are ideally given at least 2 hours before infusion is discontinued.
Shorter lead times (30 minutes) are possible if rapid acting insulin is given with basal insulin.

SC insulin should be given before the drip is discontinued to allow an overlap that takes into consideration the onset of action. The first dose of basal insulin should be given 2 hours before the insulin infusion is discontinued.24, 40 However, because this is not always feasible, (ie, the patient needs to leave the ICU sooner), another option is to turn off the drip and give 10% of the basal dose as rapid acting insulin along with the basal dose.39 The timing of subsequent doses will depend on the specific basal insulin that is ordered as well as institutional consideration of usual care delivery and nursing workflow. Given that there are several options to achieve this important overlap between IV and SC insulin, it is best for a multidisciplinary team to choose some preferred way that is the institutional standard. Having a standard allows targeted education and tracking of adherence to best practices.

Because conversion to SC insulin is a complex task and the opportunity may arise while physicians are busy with other clinical priorities, there are several options to assure that the necessary steps take place. Some institutions may build a protocol for this transition on paper or computerized order entry, build cues and dosing charts into order sets, and/or develop nursing documentation and nursing process to influence physician and nurse behavior. This critical juncture is also a good place to focus expertise with a glycemic control team, pharmacist, specially trained nurses, or some other dedicated team to take over this transition for all patients.36 The complexity and aggressiveness of the specific institutional protocol used will depend on the confidence and experience of those individuals responsible for determining the transition doses.

The transition from IV to SC insulin often coincides with a change in patient location, (ie, from the ICU to general medical ward). It is imperative that appropriate communication occurs between the transferring and receiving nurses and physicians to continue with the care plan for glycemic management. This communication can be encouraged through provider education and automated into the standardized order process.

Perioperative Transitions

Patients undergoing surgery present a special challenge. They are faced with not only the physiologic and mental stress of surgery but also the hazards of multiple handoffs across several care teams, all with different priorities and cultures. As in other areas, standardized protocols specific to this area of transition are important in assuring safe and effective perioperative glycemic control. Procedures should preferably be scheduled for the early morning to have the least impact on insulin dosing. Patients who are admitted only for the procedure will have to manage this transition on their own and need to be given specific instructions along with the general preoperative orders.24, 41 In general, the usual dose of glargine can be given the day prior to the procedure if it is approximately 50% of their TDD. This is an important caution because some outpatient regimens use large doses of glargine, which essentially provide both basal and nutritional coverage. In those patients, the glargine dose should be reduced by 20% to 50% to provide a safety margin. As with any patient who is NPO, the morning dose of NPH should be one‐half of the usual dose, scheduled nutritional insulin should be held, and the usual doses of correction insulin should be reduced. The appropriate preoperative dose adjustments also depend on whether the individual patient is ketosis‐prone and how tight their glycemic control is as an outpatient.

Upon arrival to the hospital or during the time that the inpatient is NPO, dextrose containing IV fluids should be administered to minimize the risk of hypoglycemia and prevent ketosis. Given the risks for wide variation, blood glucose monitoring should occur every 1 to 2 hours before, during, and initially after the procedure. Infusion insulin allows the most rapid titration and reliable delivery (compared with SC infusions or injections) and is therefore the preferred regimen for major surgery requiring prolonged NPO status or prolonged surgery in patients with type 1 diabetes. Basal‐nutritional‐correction SC insulin is preferred in other surgical inpatients because their nutritional intake is variable and the stress of surgery affects insulin requirements.

Oral antihyperglycemic agents should be held around the time of surgery. If patients are on an oral agent that can result in hypoglycemia, (ie, sulfonylurea or other insulin secretagogue), it should be held on the day of the procedure. Metformin must be held for safety concerns, given the possible decrease in renal function around surgery. It should be held beginning on the day of the procedure or the day before in the case of the sustained‐release formulation. It can then be resumed 48 hours postoperation after normal renal function is secured and the patient is discharged home. Alpha‐glucosidase inhibitors should be held whenever patients are NPO because they only work when taken with meals. Thiazoladinediones have a long duration of action and so can be continued or stopped around surgery. Finally, glucagon‐like peptide (GLP‐1) agonists (exenatide) should be held until the patient is eating normally and discharged home due to the high incidence of gastrointestinal side effects.

TRANSITIONING FROM THE HOSPITAL

The final but perhaps most important transition is the one from the hospital. With much attention on glycemic control in the hospital, it will become clear to many clinicians that the outpatient regimen needs to be modified. However, any changes in medications increase the chances of hypoglycemia and the possibility of error. The postdischarge time frame has been poorly studied and was specifically identified by the Association for Clinical Endocrinologists (ACE) and American Diabetes Association (ADA) as an area in need of future research.36

Patients may be discharged to a nursing home, hospice, or home, and numerous factors need to be considered to determine the optimal discharge regimen. Important considerations are the HbA1c at admission, home medications, medication interactions, current medical problems, nutritional status, physical disabilities, frequency of self‐monitoring, hypoglycemic risk factors, contraindications to oral medications, goals of care/life expectancy, and financial and other resources. If there are temporary physical or self‐care limitations, then a visiting nurse may need to be arranged to assure a safe transition home with the optimal therapy. If patients are going to a skilled nursing facility or other acute care hospital, the formulary, processes, and staffing issues of that facility will be additional important considerations in determining whether therapy is the same as in the hospital or more like what it will be at home.

An algorithm for outpatient therapy for type 2 DM was recommended in a consensus statement from the ADA and European Association for the Study of Diabetes.42, 43 This has been modified using additional recommendations from the AACE44 and is depicted in Figure 1. While the delineation of these steps is helpful, it must be emphasized that both the choice of regimen and dose will need to be individualized. Prescribing the ideal frequently falls short if there is no way for the patient to implement the recommendations. Intensive insulin therapy requires training in food intake/emnsulin matching, motivation of the patient and outpatient clinician, 4 times daily self‐monitoring of blood glucose, and considerable expense. Some patients may be temporarily continued on basal‐nutritional‐correction regimens as their insulin requirements are rapidly changing and later converted to regimens that involve less frequent insulin doses, (ie, twice daily premixed insulin or basal insulin with oral agents or oral agents alone).45, 46 Other patients who may be medically appropriate for intensive insulin therapy may first need to gain confidence with more simple insulin regimens. There are numerous additional resources on initiating insulin that the reader is referred to for more detail.4448

Figure 1
A stepwise approach to intensifying type 2 outpatient glycemic control regimens around hospital discharge. Adapted from refs.42 to44. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists Inpatient Glycemic Control Resource Center. *© 2008 American Diabetes Association. From Diabetes Care®, Vol. 31, 2008; 173–175. Modified with permission from The American Diabetes Association.

Oral antihyperglycemic drugs are usually held while a patient is admitted to the hospital but once medical conditions are improved, oral intake is established, and renal function stabilized, these drugs can be restarted. If a patient has a new contraindication to metformin or sulfonylureas but does not need insulin, a TZD or DPP4 inhibitor should be considered. Elderly patients and those with renal or liver disease are at increased risk for developing hypoglycemia.49, 50 Glyburide should be avoided, and doses of other sulfonylureas may need to be adjusted. Other options that may be considered in this situation include sitagliptin and exenatide.51 When patients will be discharged on oral diabetic medications alone, discontinue the basal insulin 12 to 24 hours before and the scheduled nutritional insulin at the same time oral agents are restarted. Sulfonylureas, metformin, DPP4 inhibitors, and exenatide will have most of their effect in the first day, but TZDs have a delayed onset and may not be a good bridge for immediate control at discharge.

If patients are going to be discharged on basal insulin in addition to oral agents, several options exist for determining the dose. Because of the risk of hypoglycemia after discharge, it is advised to either reduce the doses of oral agents or choose more conservative insulin starting doses.52 One possibility is to discontinue the nutritional and correction doses, continue the hospital dose of basal insulin, and restart the oral antidiabetes medications. If the dose of basal insulin was more than 50% of the TDD of insulin, it may need to be reduced. A more conservative option for patients at a higher risk of hypoglycemia is to start 0.2 units/kg or 10 units of NPH, glargine, or detemir at bedtime (Figure 2). Once discharged, blood glucose should be measured 1 to 4 times a day and the basal dose titrated by several different validated methods.53, 54 Appropriate orders for necessary supplies for insulin therapy include a meter with test strips, lancets, syringes, needles, and glucagon kit.55

Figure 2
Starting basal insulin at the time of hospital discharge. Adapted from Refs.42, 45, 47, 48, 53 and54. Titrate based on the morning fasting blood sugar, decrease 4 units if below 60 mg/dL, decrease 2 units if 60 to 80 mg/dL, no change if 80 to 100 mg/dL, increase 2 units if 100 to 120 mg/dL, increase 4 units if 121 to 140 mg/dL, increase 6 units if 141 to 160 mg/dL, increase 8 units if 161 to 180 mg/dL, and 10 units if fasting blood sugar is >180 mg/dL. From Davies et al.53 (Diabetes Care. 2005;28:1282–1288) and Riddle et al.54 (Diabetes Care. 2003;26:3080–3086).

With a large number of patients with diabetes remaining undiagnosed, it is important to use the information available during hospitalization to identify previously unrecognized diabetes or prediabetes.24 Because there are no unique criteria for the diagnosis of DM in the stressed state, patients may have a presumptive diagnosis made in the hospital and/or follow‐up testing with fasting glucose or an oral glucose tolerance test. No ADA diagnostic thresholds for the HbA1c currently exist, but it can be a useful marker in making this distinction.56 Among patients with new hyperglycemia, an HbA1c of 6% or greater was 100% specific for predicting a future diagnosis of diabetes in the small prospective cohort study by Greci et al.,57 but many endocrinologists use a cutoff of 7%. For all hyperglycemic patients, lifestyle interventions that promote weight loss and increased activity levels should be encouraged. New hyperglycemia should be clearly identified as a diagnosis in discharge communication.

There are many barriers to diabetes self‐management education in the inpatient setting but there are also numerous resources and opportunities. New information will be available regarding patients' understanding of their disease and glycemic control and there may be plans for changes in the home medication regimen. Most of the focus of inpatient education sessions is on survival skills such as taking medications, performing blood glucose monitoring, basic meal planning, identification and treatment of hypoglycemia, sick‐day management, how to access further diabetes education as an outpatient, and when to call the healthcare team.58 The most effective way to accomplish all of this is to identify the discharge regimen early and include nurses and staff in a plan to educate all patients. An inpatient diabetes educator can provide additional help with newly‐diagnosed or uncontrolled patients. Dividing the material over the hospitalization makes it less overwhelming for patients, reinforces previously taught concepts, spreads the responsibility to more providers, and offers it in conjunction with the correlating clinical care. Throughout their hospital stay, patients can begin to practice new skills, including blood glucose monitoring and logbook use, drawing up and administering insulin, sharps disposal, basic diabetic diet information, and sick‐day management. The specific topics addressed in each session can be tracked as part of an interdisciplinary education record that allows coordination among the individuals involved in teaching.59 It is important to give patients the basics, support them with minimal written information, and provide them appropriate follow‐up diabetes education.60 Furthermore, the inpatient team should view the patient's glycemic control education as something that needs to continue across the continuum of care and develop communication strategies that connect with the follow‐up clinical team.

At the time of discharge, it is essential that written documentation and communication with outpatient care providers be completed.61, 62 The more standardized the inpatient insulin regimens are, the more likely the patient is to be on a much different glycemic control regimen than the one on admission; therefore, it is even more important to assure that the admission medication list is accurate and reconciled completely with the modified list at discharge. Discharge check lists and tools for assessing patient acceptance of the discharge plan help with this process.63 Follow‐up with the primary care physician should occur within 7 to 14 days if patients are new to insulin, had medication changes, or are elderly. An increased likelihood of keeping posthospitalization appointments with a diabetes specialty clinic has been associated with being discharged on insulin, a new diagnosis of diabetes, and direct referral.64 Additional attention should be paid to barriers to follow‐up, including lack of health insurance, prior difficulty with follow‐up, and transportation problems.65

SUMMARY

A variety of factors have contributed to difficulty in achieving inpatient and outpatient glucose control. These include care complexity, the lack of standardized protocols, limited knowledge about glucose control, and clinical inertia. Inpatient clinicians have a tendency toward keeping patients on their home regimen in hopes that they might test its effectiveness. Furthermore, there has been the notion of why optimize the glycemic regimen of inpatients because their diabetic needs will change in the outpatient setting. However, because the insulin requirements during acute illness are different and nutritional intake is variable, nearly all inpatients should be placed on multiple daily doses of scheduled insulin or IV insulin to allow the necessary flexibility for rapid titration and abrupt changes in nutrition. This intensive regimen is only appropriate for a minority of outpatients. This difference illustrates that a regimen that works perfectly in one clinical setting will not necessarily be optimal in the next. The patient's outpatient treatment regimen should be reassessed based on HbA1c, self‐monitoring prior to admission, and new contraindications based on medical issues. If a change is indicated and the inpatient physician is motivated, there are numerous helpful resources to aid in addressing all the necessary factors surrounding intensification of therapy.

Despite requiring different glycemic control regimens, the information gained from the needs in each setting guide the next, making communication and planning paramount. Important transitions that must be given attention are: (1) admission to the hospital; (2) in‐hospital transitions, including the perioperative period and IV‐to‐SC insulin; and (3) the hospital to outpatient transition. The complexity of such frequent transitions requires planning, education, and clear communication that are best handled with a systems approach and the development of standardized protocols and order sets. Hospitalists, endocrinologists, and other members of the healthcare team should take an aggressive role in developing systems and facilitating optimal transitions to maximize glycemic control. Further studies are needed to determine the best practices among the variety of options discussed in this article.

Professional and patient safety organizations have recognized the importance of safe transitions as patients move through the health care system, and such attention is even more critical when attempting to achieve glycemic control.14 Since the publication of the Diabetes Control and Complications Trial (DCCT)5 and the United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS),6 we have known that intensive glycemic control in the ambulatory setting prevents complications in both type 1 and type 2 diabetes mellitus (DM). Despite the increased risk of hypoglycemia, these trials changed practice patterns in the outpatient settings in favor of intensification of diabetes therapy. In the same way, randomized, prospective trials using intravenous (IV) insulin therapy have revolutionized our thinking about inpatient care by showing that tight glycemic control in the critically ill7 and patients with acute myocardial infarction8 reduces mortality and morbidity. These, as well as additional observational studies associating hyperglycemia with poor outcomes in a variety of medical and surgical patients,915 have led to increased attention on glycemic control in all venues of care.16, 17 Concerns over excessive hypoglycemia and a nonsignificant increase in mortality in certain populations of medical intensive care unit (ICU) patients have raised questions over whether the initial studies can be reproduced or generalized to other groups of inpatients.18, 19 Additional studies are underway to clarify these questions but consensus exists that blood glucose values should at least be less than 180 mg/dL and that the traditional practice of ignoring hyperglycemia is no longer acceptable.

While a uniform focus on glycemic control will allow our patients to receive a consistent message about diabetes, the unique limitations inherent to each practice setting requires different therapeutic regimens and intentional focus on the risks as patients transition from one care area to another. This work addresses several areas of care transition that are particularly important in safely achieving glycemic control including: transition into the hospital for patients on a variety of home regimens, transitions within the hospital (related to changes in dietary intake, change from IV to subcutaneous [SC] therapy, and the perioperative setting), and the transition from the hospital to home or another healthcare facility.

TRANSITION INTO THE HOSPITAL

Until recently, most patients with diabetes admitted to the hospital were managed with sliding‐scale‐only regimens.20, 21 Unfortunately, this led to a variety of complications, including hyperglycemia, hypoglycemia, iatrogenic ketoacidosis, and an inconsistent message to patients on the importance of glycemic control.22 Some outpatient clinicians and patients combated this tradition by creating in‐hospital glucose control plans with orders, which patients would bring with them to the hospital.23 This practice continues to be a helpful way to guide inpatient therapy and is encouraged when available. Glycemic‐controlrelated documents from outpatient clinicians should include the most recent glycosylated hemoglobin (HbA1c) value, diagnosis and known complications, current names and doses of medications, and other patient‐specific preferences or needs (eg, compliance, financial, fear of needles). If the last HbA1c was performed more than 30 days before admission or is not available, one should be obtained upon hospital admission to help guide discharge therapy.24 By knowing the HbA1c, one can determine the level of diabetic control achieved with the current regimen and can help the inpatient team (clinician and patient) determine if a more aggressive glycemic control regimen is necessary at the time of discharge. It is important to note that if the patient has received a transfusion of red blood cells prior to HbA1c measurement or has a hemoglobinopathy, the HbA1c value may not be accurate.25, 26

In general, the outpatient regimen will need to be modified at admission to achieve the appropriate flexibility needed for the changing nutritional intake and insulin requirements that invariably accompany hospitalization. Sulfonylureas and dipeptidyl peptidase 4 inhibitors (DPP4), such as sitagliptin, have most of their effect immediately, but the other oral antihyperglycemic agents have a relatively long delay between treatment and effect, thus they are not a flexible enough method to achieve glycemic control in the hospital. Additionally, inpatients may have transient contraindications to their prior oral antihyperglycemic medications. Metformin is almost always on hold in the hospital setting, at least initially, due to concerns about lactic acidosis. Sulfonylureas can cause hypoglycemia in the setting of worsening renal function or reduced oral intake. Thiazoladinediones (TZDs) are often withheld due to concerns about fluid retention and should be avoided in patients admitted with heart failure. There is little experience in the hospital with the use of newer agents like exenatide, pramlintide, glinides, and DPP4 inhibitors.

Overall, it is generally recommended that oral antihyperglycemic agents be discontinued upon hospital admission and replaced with insulin infusions or scheduled SC insulin. An estimate of 0.4 to 0.5 units/kg of body weight provides a conservative starting point for the total daily dose of insulin (TDD) for most patients. This TDD should then be divided into basal and nutritional components to match the patients' caloric intake. Additional correction doses of insulin should be prescribed to cover episodes of hyperglycemia that develop despite the provision of anticipatory‐physiologic insulin. Further discussion of insulin dosing and SC regimens is available in detail elsewhere.27, 28 The recommendation for these insulin‐only regimens is made regardless of the glycemic control in the outpatient setting and is not meant to imply that they should be continued at discharge. In fact, most patients will return to their home regimen or to one that is intensified but less labor intensive than the basal‐nutritional‐correction insulin used in the hospital. The antihyperglycemic regimen planned for discharge should be anticipated as early as possible and clearly communicated to the patient and/or caregivers to allow for optimal education.

Outpatient insulin regimens that have a high percentage of basal insulin need to be modified during hospital admission to avoid hypoglycemia that may occur from variable nutritional intake. While hospitalized, the basal portion of the estimated TDD generally should not be more than 50% to 60%. The total number of units of all types of insulin used daily as an outpatient can be used as a starting point for determining the inpatient TDD by a 1:1 conversion. Adjustments up or down based on glycemic control, nutritional intake, and other factors are then necessary. If patients are on regimens with insulin plus oral agents at home, the inpatient TDD should either be the home insulin dose or the dose calculated based on their weight, whichever is greater. Patients who use carbohydrate counting to determine nutritional insulin doses as an outpatient might be continued on this regimen if they have a strong understanding of the methods, they are coherent enough to determine their doses, nursing staff are well educated, and dietary services provides the carbohydrate content for the hospital menu. If patients are on insulin pumps at home, these should be managed according to a uniform hospital policy to assure safety. If conversion to multiple daily injections is needed, the same 1:1 conversion is safe.29

Transitions Within the Hospital

General Issues

Within the hospital itself, there are several transitions that have important quality and safety implications regarding glycemic control. The handoffs between providers should follow a standardized format.4, 30, 31 Essential information will vary depending on the setting but should universally include recent hypoglycemia, insulin type and doses, and hypoglycemic risk factors such as changes in insulin doses, the development of renal insufficiency, inability of the patient to self‐report symptoms, tapering of steroids, and cessation or interruption of nutritional intake.32

One of the greatest risks for hypoglycemia in the hospital comes from the unpredictable nutritional interruptions that occur. Unplanned changes are best handled by nurses having an existing order to hold scheduled nutritional insulin if patients are classified nothing by mouth (NPO) or eat <50% of their meal. Additionally, nursing staff should have orders or policies that allow flexibility in the time of administering scheduled rapid‐acting nutritional insulin so that it may be given during or immediately following the meal in patients at higher risk for poor oral intake. Tube feedings also place patients at high risk for hypoglycemia because the tube may become dislodged or they may begin to have feeding intolerance. For these reasons, a measure of safety would be to have standing orders to substitute IV 10% dextrose in water (D10W) at the same rate as the prior tube feeds, hold nutritional insulin, and begin more frequent monitoring whenever tube feeds are stopped.33 Orders that rely on nursing staff to notify a physician when tube feedings are stopped are generally not directive enough because providers may be distracted by other changes or forget the patient is on long‐acting insulin. The need for this flexibility around nutritional dosing emphasizes the importance of avoiding excessive doses of basal insulin. If the total dose of basal insulin is 40% to 50% of the TDD, it can safely be continued at its usual dose despite changing nutritional intake. The only exception is neutral protamine Hagedorn (NPH) insulin, which should be reduced when patients are NPO due to its peak. Generally, a 50% reduction in NPH is recommended for morning doses, but bedtime doses may be given with little to no reduction. Because of the complexity of these issues, standardized order sets are the best way to reliably communicate all the necessary standing orders to nursing staff (Table 1).

Important Standing Orders To Include for Inpatients on Scheduled Insulin
  • Abbreviations: NPO, nothing by month; ICU, intensive care unit.

Nutritional insulin
Hold if patients are NPO or eat less than 50% of their meal.
Administer scheduled rapid acting nutritional insulin during or immediately following the meal if oral intake is questionable (ie, nausea, emesis, or newly advancing diet).
Tube feedings: When tube feeds are stopped unexpectedly
Start dextrose containing IV fluids (many institutions use D10W at the same rate as the prior tube feeds).
Hold scheduled nutritional insulin.
Notify physician.
Basal insulin
Continue if NPO.
Reduce morning dose of NPH by 50% if NPO and may need to reduce the dose of bedtime NPH.
IV to subcutaneous transition
Timing for discontinuing IV infusion in relation to first dose of subcutaneous insulin.
Prompts for verbal communication between ICU and general ward staff.

Transitioning the Patient Off of IV Insulin

The strongest evidence for tight glycemic control derives from studies in the surgical ICU.7 Many hospitals have robust, effective IV‐insulin protocols. The frequency of monitoring and rapidity of action of IV insulin allow quick achievement of blood glucose control. As patients begin to eat, the layering of SC nutritional insulin on top of the insulin infusion may reduce the lability of the infusion rate and prevent excursions in glycemic control. When the patient is ready to leave the ICU or start a full oral diet, it is recommended that they transition off of the IV insulin to a basal‐nutritional‐correction regimen.33, 34

The amount of insulin needed with IV infusion is a useful estimate of the TDD of insulin.28, 33, 35, 36 There are important general steps to take when making this transition; but, due to the lack of conclusive data proving the advantage of one regimen over another, there are a variety of acceptable specific protocols (Table 2).3739 First, it should be determined if patients are expected to require ongoing scheduled SC insulin or not. Certainly, all patients with type 1 DM will require scheduled SC insulin, but patients with type 2 DM on low insulin infusion rates or some patients with new hyperglycemia can appropriately be managed with sliding‐scale alone. Next, the average hourly rate of the infusion over the preceding 6 to 8 hours should be determined because it most accurately reflects current insulin needs during the changing stress, nutrition, and medications in critical care patients. This hourly rate will then be converted to a TDD using a safety factor to anticipate decreasing insulin requirements. Some portion of this daily total will then be assigned to be basal insulin. As patients' clinical conditions approach baseline, so will their insulin requirements, and the dose will need to be revised.24

Important Steps in Transitioning from Insulin Infusion to Subcutaneous Insulin
  • Institutional cutoffs may vary. Some use 1 to 2 units/hour.

Step 1: Is patient stable enough for transition? Hypotension, active sepsis, vasopressors, and intubation are contraindications to transition due to unreliable subcutaneous insulin absorption and continued need for the most flexible dosing due to frequently changing insulin requirements.
Step 2: Does this patient need a transition to scheduled subcutaneous (SC) insulin?
Yes
All patients with type 1 DM.
Type 2 DM patients on insulin as outpatient.
Type 2 DM patients with a recent mean infusion rate of 0.5 units/hour.*
No
Type 2 DM patients with infusion rate <0.5 units/hour.*
Stress hyperglycemia or previously unrecognized DM if infusion rate <1 unit/hour, or if HbA1c near normal.
Some institutions exclude all stress hyperglycemia patients from transition to a SC insulin regimen, regardless of drip rate.
Step 3: If transition is needed, calculate a total daily dose (TDD) of insulin. The TDD is an estimate of the 24‐hour insulin requirement when the patient is receiving full nutrition.
Determine mean insulin infusion rate from last 6 to 8 hours.
Calculate 24‐hour insulin dose based on this, and reduce this 24‐hour dose by some safety factor. There are several options for this step.
Multiply hourly rate by 24, then multiply by 0.7 or 0.8 to arrive at a safety‐adjusted 24 hour insulin dose.
OR
Multiply hourly infusion rate by 20 (80% of 24).
Determine if this total is the TDD or basal dose based on current nutrition. There are several options for this step for you or your institution to choose.
If infusion was serving basal AND nutritional needs of patient (such as a patient on 24‐hour tube feedings) this will be your TDD.
OR
If the infusion insulin was not covering significant nutrition, this could be the BASAL insulin dose.
Step 4: Construct a regimen tailored to the patient's nutritional situation, building in safeguards for any changes in nutritional intake and uncertainties about reliability of intake. Several options are again available.
Basal: should be ordered as basal glargine or detemir (these are preferred by SHM GCTF but NPH is also an option).
Dose is 40% to 50% of TDD.
OR
Adjusted 24‐hour IV requirement given all as basal.
Nutritional: The remainder of the TDD is scheduled nutritional insulin in divided doses. In general, these doses need to be adjusted down for <100% nutritional intake and the orders should allow for administering nutritional insulin just AFTER observed meals to allow an assessment of intake. There are several options for estimating the initial doses:
Use 50% of the TDD as nutritional coverage and divide this amount by 3 to determine the scheduled meal dose. Hold if they do not eat more than 50% of their meal.
Use a more conservative start of 10% to 20% of the basal dose scheduled with each meal.
Use carbohydrate counting to cover nutritional intake.
Step 5: Be sure to give SC insulin BEFORE the infusion stops
Basal glargine or detemir are ideally given at least 2 hours before infusion is discontinued.
Shorter lead times (30 minutes) are possible if rapid acting insulin is given with basal insulin.

SC insulin should be given before the drip is discontinued to allow an overlap that takes into consideration the onset of action. The first dose of basal insulin should be given 2 hours before the insulin infusion is discontinued.24, 40 However, because this is not always feasible, (ie, the patient needs to leave the ICU sooner), another option is to turn off the drip and give 10% of the basal dose as rapid acting insulin along with the basal dose.39 The timing of subsequent doses will depend on the specific basal insulin that is ordered as well as institutional consideration of usual care delivery and nursing workflow. Given that there are several options to achieve this important overlap between IV and SC insulin, it is best for a multidisciplinary team to choose some preferred way that is the institutional standard. Having a standard allows targeted education and tracking of adherence to best practices.

Because conversion to SC insulin is a complex task and the opportunity may arise while physicians are busy with other clinical priorities, there are several options to assure that the necessary steps take place. Some institutions may build a protocol for this transition on paper or computerized order entry, build cues and dosing charts into order sets, and/or develop nursing documentation and nursing process to influence physician and nurse behavior. This critical juncture is also a good place to focus expertise with a glycemic control team, pharmacist, specially trained nurses, or some other dedicated team to take over this transition for all patients.36 The complexity and aggressiveness of the specific institutional protocol used will depend on the confidence and experience of those individuals responsible for determining the transition doses.

The transition from IV to SC insulin often coincides with a change in patient location, (ie, from the ICU to general medical ward). It is imperative that appropriate communication occurs between the transferring and receiving nurses and physicians to continue with the care plan for glycemic management. This communication can be encouraged through provider education and automated into the standardized order process.

Perioperative Transitions

Patients undergoing surgery present a special challenge. They are faced with not only the physiologic and mental stress of surgery but also the hazards of multiple handoffs across several care teams, all with different priorities and cultures. As in other areas, standardized protocols specific to this area of transition are important in assuring safe and effective perioperative glycemic control. Procedures should preferably be scheduled for the early morning to have the least impact on insulin dosing. Patients who are admitted only for the procedure will have to manage this transition on their own and need to be given specific instructions along with the general preoperative orders.24, 41 In general, the usual dose of glargine can be given the day prior to the procedure if it is approximately 50% of their TDD. This is an important caution because some outpatient regimens use large doses of glargine, which essentially provide both basal and nutritional coverage. In those patients, the glargine dose should be reduced by 20% to 50% to provide a safety margin. As with any patient who is NPO, the morning dose of NPH should be one‐half of the usual dose, scheduled nutritional insulin should be held, and the usual doses of correction insulin should be reduced. The appropriate preoperative dose adjustments also depend on whether the individual patient is ketosis‐prone and how tight their glycemic control is as an outpatient.

Upon arrival to the hospital or during the time that the inpatient is NPO, dextrose containing IV fluids should be administered to minimize the risk of hypoglycemia and prevent ketosis. Given the risks for wide variation, blood glucose monitoring should occur every 1 to 2 hours before, during, and initially after the procedure. Infusion insulin allows the most rapid titration and reliable delivery (compared with SC infusions or injections) and is therefore the preferred regimen for major surgery requiring prolonged NPO status or prolonged surgery in patients with type 1 diabetes. Basal‐nutritional‐correction SC insulin is preferred in other surgical inpatients because their nutritional intake is variable and the stress of surgery affects insulin requirements.

Oral antihyperglycemic agents should be held around the time of surgery. If patients are on an oral agent that can result in hypoglycemia, (ie, sulfonylurea or other insulin secretagogue), it should be held on the day of the procedure. Metformin must be held for safety concerns, given the possible decrease in renal function around surgery. It should be held beginning on the day of the procedure or the day before in the case of the sustained‐release formulation. It can then be resumed 48 hours postoperation after normal renal function is secured and the patient is discharged home. Alpha‐glucosidase inhibitors should be held whenever patients are NPO because they only work when taken with meals. Thiazoladinediones have a long duration of action and so can be continued or stopped around surgery. Finally, glucagon‐like peptide (GLP‐1) agonists (exenatide) should be held until the patient is eating normally and discharged home due to the high incidence of gastrointestinal side effects.

TRANSITIONING FROM THE HOSPITAL

The final but perhaps most important transition is the one from the hospital. With much attention on glycemic control in the hospital, it will become clear to many clinicians that the outpatient regimen needs to be modified. However, any changes in medications increase the chances of hypoglycemia and the possibility of error. The postdischarge time frame has been poorly studied and was specifically identified by the Association for Clinical Endocrinologists (ACE) and American Diabetes Association (ADA) as an area in need of future research.36

Patients may be discharged to a nursing home, hospice, or home, and numerous factors need to be considered to determine the optimal discharge regimen. Important considerations are the HbA1c at admission, home medications, medication interactions, current medical problems, nutritional status, physical disabilities, frequency of self‐monitoring, hypoglycemic risk factors, contraindications to oral medications, goals of care/life expectancy, and financial and other resources. If there are temporary physical or self‐care limitations, then a visiting nurse may need to be arranged to assure a safe transition home with the optimal therapy. If patients are going to a skilled nursing facility or other acute care hospital, the formulary, processes, and staffing issues of that facility will be additional important considerations in determining whether therapy is the same as in the hospital or more like what it will be at home.

An algorithm for outpatient therapy for type 2 DM was recommended in a consensus statement from the ADA and European Association for the Study of Diabetes.42, 43 This has been modified using additional recommendations from the AACE44 and is depicted in Figure 1. While the delineation of these steps is helpful, it must be emphasized that both the choice of regimen and dose will need to be individualized. Prescribing the ideal frequently falls short if there is no way for the patient to implement the recommendations. Intensive insulin therapy requires training in food intake/emnsulin matching, motivation of the patient and outpatient clinician, 4 times daily self‐monitoring of blood glucose, and considerable expense. Some patients may be temporarily continued on basal‐nutritional‐correction regimens as their insulin requirements are rapidly changing and later converted to regimens that involve less frequent insulin doses, (ie, twice daily premixed insulin or basal insulin with oral agents or oral agents alone).45, 46 Other patients who may be medically appropriate for intensive insulin therapy may first need to gain confidence with more simple insulin regimens. There are numerous additional resources on initiating insulin that the reader is referred to for more detail.4448

Figure 1
A stepwise approach to intensifying type 2 outpatient glycemic control regimens around hospital discharge. Adapted from refs.42 to44. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists Inpatient Glycemic Control Resource Center. *© 2008 American Diabetes Association. From Diabetes Care®, Vol. 31, 2008; 173–175. Modified with permission from The American Diabetes Association.

Oral antihyperglycemic drugs are usually held while a patient is admitted to the hospital but once medical conditions are improved, oral intake is established, and renal function stabilized, these drugs can be restarted. If a patient has a new contraindication to metformin or sulfonylureas but does not need insulin, a TZD or DPP4 inhibitor should be considered. Elderly patients and those with renal or liver disease are at increased risk for developing hypoglycemia.49, 50 Glyburide should be avoided, and doses of other sulfonylureas may need to be adjusted. Other options that may be considered in this situation include sitagliptin and exenatide.51 When patients will be discharged on oral diabetic medications alone, discontinue the basal insulin 12 to 24 hours before and the scheduled nutritional insulin at the same time oral agents are restarted. Sulfonylureas, metformin, DPP4 inhibitors, and exenatide will have most of their effect in the first day, but TZDs have a delayed onset and may not be a good bridge for immediate control at discharge.

If patients are going to be discharged on basal insulin in addition to oral agents, several options exist for determining the dose. Because of the risk of hypoglycemia after discharge, it is advised to either reduce the doses of oral agents or choose more conservative insulin starting doses.52 One possibility is to discontinue the nutritional and correction doses, continue the hospital dose of basal insulin, and restart the oral antidiabetes medications. If the dose of basal insulin was more than 50% of the TDD of insulin, it may need to be reduced. A more conservative option for patients at a higher risk of hypoglycemia is to start 0.2 units/kg or 10 units of NPH, glargine, or detemir at bedtime (Figure 2). Once discharged, blood glucose should be measured 1 to 4 times a day and the basal dose titrated by several different validated methods.53, 54 Appropriate orders for necessary supplies for insulin therapy include a meter with test strips, lancets, syringes, needles, and glucagon kit.55

Figure 2
Starting basal insulin at the time of hospital discharge. Adapted from Refs.42, 45, 47, 48, 53 and54. Titrate based on the morning fasting blood sugar, decrease 4 units if below 60 mg/dL, decrease 2 units if 60 to 80 mg/dL, no change if 80 to 100 mg/dL, increase 2 units if 100 to 120 mg/dL, increase 4 units if 121 to 140 mg/dL, increase 6 units if 141 to 160 mg/dL, increase 8 units if 161 to 180 mg/dL, and 10 units if fasting blood sugar is >180 mg/dL. From Davies et al.53 (Diabetes Care. 2005;28:1282–1288) and Riddle et al.54 (Diabetes Care. 2003;26:3080–3086).

With a large number of patients with diabetes remaining undiagnosed, it is important to use the information available during hospitalization to identify previously unrecognized diabetes or prediabetes.24 Because there are no unique criteria for the diagnosis of DM in the stressed state, patients may have a presumptive diagnosis made in the hospital and/or follow‐up testing with fasting glucose or an oral glucose tolerance test. No ADA diagnostic thresholds for the HbA1c currently exist, but it can be a useful marker in making this distinction.56 Among patients with new hyperglycemia, an HbA1c of 6% or greater was 100% specific for predicting a future diagnosis of diabetes in the small prospective cohort study by Greci et al.,57 but many endocrinologists use a cutoff of 7%. For all hyperglycemic patients, lifestyle interventions that promote weight loss and increased activity levels should be encouraged. New hyperglycemia should be clearly identified as a diagnosis in discharge communication.

There are many barriers to diabetes self‐management education in the inpatient setting but there are also numerous resources and opportunities. New information will be available regarding patients' understanding of their disease and glycemic control and there may be plans for changes in the home medication regimen. Most of the focus of inpatient education sessions is on survival skills such as taking medications, performing blood glucose monitoring, basic meal planning, identification and treatment of hypoglycemia, sick‐day management, how to access further diabetes education as an outpatient, and when to call the healthcare team.58 The most effective way to accomplish all of this is to identify the discharge regimen early and include nurses and staff in a plan to educate all patients. An inpatient diabetes educator can provide additional help with newly‐diagnosed or uncontrolled patients. Dividing the material over the hospitalization makes it less overwhelming for patients, reinforces previously taught concepts, spreads the responsibility to more providers, and offers it in conjunction with the correlating clinical care. Throughout their hospital stay, patients can begin to practice new skills, including blood glucose monitoring and logbook use, drawing up and administering insulin, sharps disposal, basic diabetic diet information, and sick‐day management. The specific topics addressed in each session can be tracked as part of an interdisciplinary education record that allows coordination among the individuals involved in teaching.59 It is important to give patients the basics, support them with minimal written information, and provide them appropriate follow‐up diabetes education.60 Furthermore, the inpatient team should view the patient's glycemic control education as something that needs to continue across the continuum of care and develop communication strategies that connect with the follow‐up clinical team.

At the time of discharge, it is essential that written documentation and communication with outpatient care providers be completed.61, 62 The more standardized the inpatient insulin regimens are, the more likely the patient is to be on a much different glycemic control regimen than the one on admission; therefore, it is even more important to assure that the admission medication list is accurate and reconciled completely with the modified list at discharge. Discharge check lists and tools for assessing patient acceptance of the discharge plan help with this process.63 Follow‐up with the primary care physician should occur within 7 to 14 days if patients are new to insulin, had medication changes, or are elderly. An increased likelihood of keeping posthospitalization appointments with a diabetes specialty clinic has been associated with being discharged on insulin, a new diagnosis of diabetes, and direct referral.64 Additional attention should be paid to barriers to follow‐up, including lack of health insurance, prior difficulty with follow‐up, and transportation problems.65

SUMMARY

A variety of factors have contributed to difficulty in achieving inpatient and outpatient glucose control. These include care complexity, the lack of standardized protocols, limited knowledge about glucose control, and clinical inertia. Inpatient clinicians have a tendency toward keeping patients on their home regimen in hopes that they might test its effectiveness. Furthermore, there has been the notion of why optimize the glycemic regimen of inpatients because their diabetic needs will change in the outpatient setting. However, because the insulin requirements during acute illness are different and nutritional intake is variable, nearly all inpatients should be placed on multiple daily doses of scheduled insulin or IV insulin to allow the necessary flexibility for rapid titration and abrupt changes in nutrition. This intensive regimen is only appropriate for a minority of outpatients. This difference illustrates that a regimen that works perfectly in one clinical setting will not necessarily be optimal in the next. The patient's outpatient treatment regimen should be reassessed based on HbA1c, self‐monitoring prior to admission, and new contraindications based on medical issues. If a change is indicated and the inpatient physician is motivated, there are numerous helpful resources to aid in addressing all the necessary factors surrounding intensification of therapy.

Despite requiring different glycemic control regimens, the information gained from the needs in each setting guide the next, making communication and planning paramount. Important transitions that must be given attention are: (1) admission to the hospital; (2) in‐hospital transitions, including the perioperative period and IV‐to‐SC insulin; and (3) the hospital to outpatient transition. The complexity of such frequent transitions requires planning, education, and clear communication that are best handled with a systems approach and the development of standardized protocols and order sets. Hospitalists, endocrinologists, and other members of the healthcare team should take an aggressive role in developing systems and facilitating optimal transitions to maximize glycemic control. Further studies are needed to determine the best practices among the variety of options discussed in this article.

References
  1. ACE/ADA Task Force on Inpatient Diabetes.American College of Endocrinology and American Diabetes Association Consensus Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Glycemic Control.Endocr Pract.2006;12:458468.
  2. American Board of Internal Medicine Foundation Stepping Up to the Plate Alliance. Available at: http://www.abimfoundation.org/quality/suttp.shtm. Accessed November2007.
  3. National Transitions of Care Coalition. Available at: http://www.ntocc.org. Accessed November2007.
  4. JCAHO 2008 National Patient Safety Goals. Availableat: http://www.jointcommission.org/PatientSafety/NationalPatientSafetyGoals/08_hap_npsgs.htm. Accessed November2007.
  5. Diabetes Control and Complications Trial Research Group.The effect of intensive treatment of diabetes on the development and progression of long‐term complications in insulin‐dependent diabetes mellitus.N Engl J Med.1993;329:977986.
  6. UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group.Intensive blood‐glucose control with sulphonylureas or insulin compared with conventional treatment and risk of complications in patients with type 2 diabetes: UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group.Lancet.1998;352:837853.
  7. Van Den Berghe G,Wouters P,Weekers F, et al.,Intensive insulin therapy in critically ill patients.N Engl J Med.2001;345:13591367.
  8. Malmberg K,Norhammar A,Wedel H,Ryden L.Glycometabolic state at admission: important risk marker of mortality in conventionally treated patients with diabetes mellitus and acute myocardial infarction: long‐term results from the Diabetes and Insulin‐Glucose Infusion in Acute Myocardial Infarction (DIGAMI) study.Circulation.1999;99:26262632.
  9. Laird AM,Miller PR,Kilgo PD,Meredith JW,Chang MC.Relationship of early hyperglycemia to mortality in trauma patients.J Trauma.2004;56:10581062.
  10. Thomas MC,Mathew TH,Russ GR,Rao MM,Moran J.Early peri‐operative glycaemic control and allograft rejection in patients with diabetes mellitus: a pilot study.Transplantation.2001;72:13211324.
  11. Weiser MA,Cabanillas ME,Konopleva M, et al.Relation between the duration of remission and hyperglycemia in induction chemotherapy for acute lymphocytic leukemia with a hyperfractionated cyclophosphamide, vincristine, doxorubicin and dexamethasone/methotrexate cytarabine regimen.Cancer.2004;100:11791185.
  12. Capes SE,Hunt D,Malmberg K,Pathak P,Gerstein HC.Stress hyperglycemia and prognosis of stroke in nondiabetic and diabetic patients: a systematic overview.Stroke.2001;32:24262432.
  13. Thomsen RW,Hundborg HH,Lervang HH,Johnsen SP,Sorensen HT,Schonheyer HC.Diabetes and outcome of community‐acquired pneumococcal bacteriemia.Diabetes Care.2004;27:7076.
  14. Pomposelli JJ,Baxter JK,Babineau TJ.Early postoperative glucose control predicts nosocomial infection rate in diabetic patients.JPEN J Parenter Enteral Nutr.1998;22:7781.
  15. Vriesendorp TM,Morelis QJ,DeVries JH,Legemate DA,Hoekstra JB.Early post‐operative glucose levels are an independent risk factor for infection after peripheral vascular surgery. A retrospective study.Eur J Vasc Endovasc Surg.2004;28:520525.
  16. American Diabetes Association.Standards of medical care in diabetes, 2006.Diabetes Care.2006;29(suppl 1):s4s42.
  17. American College of Endocrinology Task Force on Inpatient Diabetes and Metabolic Control.American College of Endocrinology Position Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Metabolic Control.Endocr Pract.2004;10:7782.
  18. Van den Berghe G,Wilmer A,Hermans G, et al.Intensive insulin therapy in the medical ICU.N Engl J Med.2006;354:449461
  19. Brunkhorst FM,Engel C,Bloos F, et al.Intensive insulin therapy and pentastarch resuscitation in severe sepsis.N Engl J Med.2008;358(2):125139.
  20. Schnipper JL,Barsky EE,Shaykevich S,Fitzmaurice G,Pendergrass ML.Inpatient management of diabetes and hyperglycemia among general medicine patients at a large teaching hospital.J Hosp Med.2006;1:145150.
  21. Cook CB,Castro JC,Schmidt RE, et al.,Diabetes care in hospitalized noncritically ill patients: More evidence for clinical inertia and negative therapeutic momentum.J Hosp Med.2007;2:203211.
  22. Queale WS,Seidler AJ,Brancati FL.Glycemic control and sliding scale insulin use in medical inpatients with diabetes mellitus.Arch Intern Med.1997;157:545552.
  23. Campbell KB,Braithwaite SS.Hospital management of hyperglycemia.Clin Diabetes.2004;22:8188.
  24. Clement S,Braithwaite SS,Magee MF, et al.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in hospitals. [Erratum appears in Diabetes Care. 2005; 28: 1990. Dosage error in text].Diabetes Care.2004;27:553591.
  25. Gunton JE,McElduff A.Hemoglobinopathies and HbA(1c) measurement.Diabetes Care.2000;23(8):11971198.
  26. Schnedl WJ,Krause R,Halwachs‐Baumann G,Trinker M,Lipp RW,Krejs GJ.Evaluation of HbA1c determination methods in patients with hemoglobinopathiesDiabetes Care.2000;23(3):339344.
  27. Maynard G,Wesorick D,O'Malley CW,Inzucchi S.Subcutaneous insulin order sets and protocols: effective design and implementation strategies.J Hosp Med.2008;3.
  28. Wesorick D,O'Malley CW,Rushakoff R,Larsen K,Magee M.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital: a practical guide to subcutaneous insulin use in the non‐critically ill, adult patient.J Hosp Med.2008;3.PMID:8675920.
  29. Bode BW,Steed RD,Schleusener DS,Strange P.Switch to multiple daily injections with insulin glargine and insulin lispro from continuous subcutaneous insulin infusion with insulin lispro: a randomized, open‐label study using a continuous glucose monitoring system.Endocr Pract.2005;11:157164.
  30. SBAR technique for communication: a situational briefing model. Available at: http://www.ihi.org/IHI/Topics/PatientSafety/SafetyGeneral/Tools/SBARTechniqueforCommunicationASituationalBriefingModel.htm. Accessed December2007.
  31. Yates G. Promising quality improvement initiatives: reports from the field. AHRQ Summit—Improving Health Care Quality for All Americans: Celebrating Success, Measuring Progress, Moving Forward 2004. Available at: http://www.ahrq.gov/qual/qsummit/qsummit4.htm#sentara. Accessed December2007.
  32. Braithwaite SS,Buie MM,Thompson CL, et al.Hospital hypoglycemia: not only treatment but also prevention.Endocr Pract.2004;10(suppl 2):8999.
  33. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists Inpatient Glycemic Control Resource Center. Available at: http://resources.aace.com/PDF/Section_05‐Final‐Inpatient_Non‐ICU/Hyperglycemia_Non‐ICU_Protocols/Transition_from_ Intravenous_to_Subcutaneous_Insulin.PDF. Accessed November2007.
  34. Recommendations for safe use of insulin in hospitals. American Society of Health System Pharmacists and the Hospital and Health System Association of Pennsylvania. 2005. Available at: http://www.premierinc.com/safety/safety‐share/01–06‐downloads/01‐safe‐use‐insulin‐ashp.pdf. Accessed December2007.
  35. O'Malley CW,Emanuele MA,Maynard G, for the Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Taskforce. Glycemic control resource room: improving reliability of care across transitions and in the perioperative setting. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/ResourceRoomRedesign/html/07Layer_Inter/06_Transitions.cfm. Accessed August2008.
  36. ACE/ADA Task Force on Inpatient Diabetes American College of Endocrinology and American Diabetes Association Consensus Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Glycemic Control: a call to action.Diabetes Care.2006;29:19551962.
  37. Schmeltz LR,DeSantis AJ,Schmidt K, et al.Conversion of intravenous insulin infusions to subcutaneously administered insulin glargine in patients with hyperglycemia.Endocr Pract.2006;12:641650.
  38. Bode BW,Braithwaite SS,Steed RD,Davidson PC.Intravenous insulin infusion therapy: indications, methods, and transition to subcutaneous insulin therapy.Endocr Pract.2004;10(suppl 2):7180.
  39. DeSantis AJ,Schmeltz LR,Schmidt K, et al.Inpatient management of hyperglycemia: the northwestern experience.Endocr Pract.2006;12(5):491505.
  40. American Diabetes Association.Position statement: standards of medical care in diabetes‐2007.Diabetes Care.2007;30(suppl 1):S4S41.
  41. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists Inpatient Glycemic Control Resource Center. Available at: http://resources.aace.com/PDF/Section_05‐Final‐Inpatient_Non‐ICU/Hyperglycemia_Non‐ICU_Protocols/Pre‐Operative_Instructions_for_Patients_with_Diabetes.PDF Accessed November2007.
  42. Nathan DM,Buse JB,Davidson MB, et al.Management of hyperglycemia in type 2 diabetes: a consensus algorithm for the initiation and adjustment of therapy: a consensus statement from the American Diabetes Association and the European Association for the Study of Diabetes.Diabetes Care.2006;29:19631972.
  43. Nathan DM,Buse JB,Davidson MB, et al.Management of hyperglycemia in type 2 diabetes: a consensus algorithm for the initiation and adjustment of therapy: update regarding thiazoladinediones.Diabetes Care.2008;31:173175.
  44. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists Inpatient Glycemic Control Resource Center. Challenges in Effective Discharge Planning for Hospitalized Patients with Diabetes. Available at: http://resources.aace.com/PDF/Section_07‐Final‐Transition‐Inpatient_to_Outpatient/Challenges_in_Effective_Discharge_for_Diabetes_Patients.PPT. Accessed December2007.
  45. Raskin P,Allen E,Hollander P.Initiating insulin therapy in type 2 diabetes: a comparison of biphasic and basal insulin analogs.Diabetes Care.2005;28:260265.
  46. Holman RR,Thorne KI,Farmer AJ, et al.Addition of biphasic, prandial, or basal insulin to oral therapy in type 2 diabetes.N Engl J Med.2007;357:17161730.
  47. Mooradian AD,Bernbaum M,Albert SG.Narrative review: a rational approach to starting insulin therapy.Ann Intern Med.2006;145:125134.
  48. Hirsch IB,Bergenstal RM,Parkin CG,Wright E,Buse JB.A real‐world approach to insulin therapy in primary care practice.Clin Diabetes.2005;23:7886.
  49. Shorr RI,Ray WA,Daugherty JR,Griffin MR.Individual sulfonylureas and serious hypoglycemia in older persons.J Am Geriatr Soc.1996;44:751755.
  50. Shorr RI,Ray WA,Daugherty JR,Griffin MR.Incidence and risk factors for serious hypoglycemia in older persons using insulin or sulfonylureas.Arch Intern Med.1997;157(15):16811686.
  51. Heine RJ,Van Gaal LF,Johns D, et al.Exenatide versus insulin glargine in patients with suboptimally controlled type 2 diabetes: a randomized trial.Ann Intern Med.2005;143:559569.
  52. Braithwaite SS.The transition from insulin infusions to long‐term diabetes therapy: the argument for insulin analogs.Semin Thorac Cardiovasc Surg.2006;18:366378.
  53. Davies M,Storms F,Shutler S,Bianchi‐Biscay M,Gomis R.ATLANTUS Study Group. Improvement of glycemic control in subjects with poorly controlled type 2 diabetes.Diabetes Care.2005;28:12821288.
  54. Riddle M,Rosenstock J,Gerich J.Investigators Insulin Glargine 4002 Study. The Treat‐to Target trial: randomized addition of glargine or human NPH insulin to oral therapy of type 2 diabetes patients.Diabetes Care.2003;26:30803086.
  55. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists Inpatient Glycemic Control Resource Center. Available at: http://resources.aace.com/PDF/Section_07‐Final‐Transition‐Inpatient_to_Outpatient/Effective_Discharge_Planning‐Sample_Discharge_Plans/Inpatient_Diabetes_Discharge_Prescription.PDF. Accessed November2007.
  56. American Diabetes Association.Diagnosis and classification of diabetes mellitus.Diabetes Care.2007;30(suppl):S42S47.
  57. Greci LS,Kailasam M,Malkani S, et al.Utility of HbA1c levels for diabetes case finding in hospitalized patients with hyperglycemia.Diabetes Care.2003;26:10641068.
  58. Mensing C,Boucher J,Cypress M, et al.National standards for diabetes self‐management education.Diabetes Care.2006;29(suppl 1):S78S85.
  59. Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force. Workbook for improvement: improving glycemic control, preventing hypoglycemia and optimizing care of the inpatient with diabetes and hyperglycemia. page 105. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/ResourceRoomRedesign/pdf/GC_Workbook.pdf. Accessed December,2007.
  60. Joslin Diabetes Center. EZ Start Patient Information Handouts. Available at: http://www.joslin.org/ezstart. Accessed December2007.
  61. Kripalani S,Jackson AT,Schnipper JL,Coleman EA.Promoting effective transitions of care at hospital discharge: a review of key issues for hospitalists.J Hosp Med.2007;2:314323.
  62. Kripalani S,LeFevre F,Phillips CO,Williams MV,Basaviah P,Baker DW.Deficits in communication and information transfer between hospital‐based and primary care physicians: implications for patient safety and continuity of care.JAMA.2007;297:831841.
  63. Society of Hospital Medicine On‐line Clinical Tools. Ideal discharge for the elderly patient: a hospitalist checklist. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/AM/Template.cfm?Section=QI_Clinical_Toolsemplate=/CM/ContentDisplay.cfmContentID=10303. Accessed December2007.
  64. Wheeler K,Crawford R,McAdams D, et al.Inpatient to outpatient transfer of care in urban patients with diabetes: patterns and determinants of immediate post‐discharge follow‐up.Arch Intern Med.2004;164:447453.
  65. Wheeler K,Crawford R,McAdams D,Robinson R,Dunbar VG,Cook CB.Inpatient to outpatient transfer of diabetes care: perceptions of barriers to postdischarge follow‐up in urban African American patients.Ethn Dis.2007;17:238243.
References
  1. ACE/ADA Task Force on Inpatient Diabetes.American College of Endocrinology and American Diabetes Association Consensus Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Glycemic Control.Endocr Pract.2006;12:458468.
  2. American Board of Internal Medicine Foundation Stepping Up to the Plate Alliance. Available at: http://www.abimfoundation.org/quality/suttp.shtm. Accessed November2007.
  3. National Transitions of Care Coalition. Available at: http://www.ntocc.org. Accessed November2007.
  4. JCAHO 2008 National Patient Safety Goals. Availableat: http://www.jointcommission.org/PatientSafety/NationalPatientSafetyGoals/08_hap_npsgs.htm. Accessed November2007.
  5. Diabetes Control and Complications Trial Research Group.The effect of intensive treatment of diabetes on the development and progression of long‐term complications in insulin‐dependent diabetes mellitus.N Engl J Med.1993;329:977986.
  6. UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group.Intensive blood‐glucose control with sulphonylureas or insulin compared with conventional treatment and risk of complications in patients with type 2 diabetes: UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group.Lancet.1998;352:837853.
  7. Van Den Berghe G,Wouters P,Weekers F, et al.,Intensive insulin therapy in critically ill patients.N Engl J Med.2001;345:13591367.
  8. Malmberg K,Norhammar A,Wedel H,Ryden L.Glycometabolic state at admission: important risk marker of mortality in conventionally treated patients with diabetes mellitus and acute myocardial infarction: long‐term results from the Diabetes and Insulin‐Glucose Infusion in Acute Myocardial Infarction (DIGAMI) study.Circulation.1999;99:26262632.
  9. Laird AM,Miller PR,Kilgo PD,Meredith JW,Chang MC.Relationship of early hyperglycemia to mortality in trauma patients.J Trauma.2004;56:10581062.
  10. Thomas MC,Mathew TH,Russ GR,Rao MM,Moran J.Early peri‐operative glycaemic control and allograft rejection in patients with diabetes mellitus: a pilot study.Transplantation.2001;72:13211324.
  11. Weiser MA,Cabanillas ME,Konopleva M, et al.Relation between the duration of remission and hyperglycemia in induction chemotherapy for acute lymphocytic leukemia with a hyperfractionated cyclophosphamide, vincristine, doxorubicin and dexamethasone/methotrexate cytarabine regimen.Cancer.2004;100:11791185.
  12. Capes SE,Hunt D,Malmberg K,Pathak P,Gerstein HC.Stress hyperglycemia and prognosis of stroke in nondiabetic and diabetic patients: a systematic overview.Stroke.2001;32:24262432.
  13. Thomsen RW,Hundborg HH,Lervang HH,Johnsen SP,Sorensen HT,Schonheyer HC.Diabetes and outcome of community‐acquired pneumococcal bacteriemia.Diabetes Care.2004;27:7076.
  14. Pomposelli JJ,Baxter JK,Babineau TJ.Early postoperative glucose control predicts nosocomial infection rate in diabetic patients.JPEN J Parenter Enteral Nutr.1998;22:7781.
  15. Vriesendorp TM,Morelis QJ,DeVries JH,Legemate DA,Hoekstra JB.Early post‐operative glucose levels are an independent risk factor for infection after peripheral vascular surgery. A retrospective study.Eur J Vasc Endovasc Surg.2004;28:520525.
  16. American Diabetes Association.Standards of medical care in diabetes, 2006.Diabetes Care.2006;29(suppl 1):s4s42.
  17. American College of Endocrinology Task Force on Inpatient Diabetes and Metabolic Control.American College of Endocrinology Position Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Metabolic Control.Endocr Pract.2004;10:7782.
  18. Van den Berghe G,Wilmer A,Hermans G, et al.Intensive insulin therapy in the medical ICU.N Engl J Med.2006;354:449461
  19. Brunkhorst FM,Engel C,Bloos F, et al.Intensive insulin therapy and pentastarch resuscitation in severe sepsis.N Engl J Med.2008;358(2):125139.
  20. Schnipper JL,Barsky EE,Shaykevich S,Fitzmaurice G,Pendergrass ML.Inpatient management of diabetes and hyperglycemia among general medicine patients at a large teaching hospital.J Hosp Med.2006;1:145150.
  21. Cook CB,Castro JC,Schmidt RE, et al.,Diabetes care in hospitalized noncritically ill patients: More evidence for clinical inertia and negative therapeutic momentum.J Hosp Med.2007;2:203211.
  22. Queale WS,Seidler AJ,Brancati FL.Glycemic control and sliding scale insulin use in medical inpatients with diabetes mellitus.Arch Intern Med.1997;157:545552.
  23. Campbell KB,Braithwaite SS.Hospital management of hyperglycemia.Clin Diabetes.2004;22:8188.
  24. Clement S,Braithwaite SS,Magee MF, et al.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in hospitals. [Erratum appears in Diabetes Care. 2005; 28: 1990. Dosage error in text].Diabetes Care.2004;27:553591.
  25. Gunton JE,McElduff A.Hemoglobinopathies and HbA(1c) measurement.Diabetes Care.2000;23(8):11971198.
  26. Schnedl WJ,Krause R,Halwachs‐Baumann G,Trinker M,Lipp RW,Krejs GJ.Evaluation of HbA1c determination methods in patients with hemoglobinopathiesDiabetes Care.2000;23(3):339344.
  27. Maynard G,Wesorick D,O'Malley CW,Inzucchi S.Subcutaneous insulin order sets and protocols: effective design and implementation strategies.J Hosp Med.2008;3.
  28. Wesorick D,O'Malley CW,Rushakoff R,Larsen K,Magee M.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital: a practical guide to subcutaneous insulin use in the non‐critically ill, adult patient.J Hosp Med.2008;3.PMID:8675920.
  29. Bode BW,Steed RD,Schleusener DS,Strange P.Switch to multiple daily injections with insulin glargine and insulin lispro from continuous subcutaneous insulin infusion with insulin lispro: a randomized, open‐label study using a continuous glucose monitoring system.Endocr Pract.2005;11:157164.
  30. SBAR technique for communication: a situational briefing model. Available at: http://www.ihi.org/IHI/Topics/PatientSafety/SafetyGeneral/Tools/SBARTechniqueforCommunicationASituationalBriefingModel.htm. Accessed December2007.
  31. Yates G. Promising quality improvement initiatives: reports from the field. AHRQ Summit—Improving Health Care Quality for All Americans: Celebrating Success, Measuring Progress, Moving Forward 2004. Available at: http://www.ahrq.gov/qual/qsummit/qsummit4.htm#sentara. Accessed December2007.
  32. Braithwaite SS,Buie MM,Thompson CL, et al.Hospital hypoglycemia: not only treatment but also prevention.Endocr Pract.2004;10(suppl 2):8999.
  33. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists Inpatient Glycemic Control Resource Center. Available at: http://resources.aace.com/PDF/Section_05‐Final‐Inpatient_Non‐ICU/Hyperglycemia_Non‐ICU_Protocols/Transition_from_ Intravenous_to_Subcutaneous_Insulin.PDF. Accessed November2007.
  34. Recommendations for safe use of insulin in hospitals. American Society of Health System Pharmacists and the Hospital and Health System Association of Pennsylvania. 2005. Available at: http://www.premierinc.com/safety/safety‐share/01–06‐downloads/01‐safe‐use‐insulin‐ashp.pdf. Accessed December2007.
  35. O'Malley CW,Emanuele MA,Maynard G, for the Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Taskforce. Glycemic control resource room: improving reliability of care across transitions and in the perioperative setting. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/ResourceRoomRedesign/html/07Layer_Inter/06_Transitions.cfm. Accessed August2008.
  36. ACE/ADA Task Force on Inpatient Diabetes American College of Endocrinology and American Diabetes Association Consensus Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Glycemic Control: a call to action.Diabetes Care.2006;29:19551962.
  37. Schmeltz LR,DeSantis AJ,Schmidt K, et al.Conversion of intravenous insulin infusions to subcutaneously administered insulin glargine in patients with hyperglycemia.Endocr Pract.2006;12:641650.
  38. Bode BW,Braithwaite SS,Steed RD,Davidson PC.Intravenous insulin infusion therapy: indications, methods, and transition to subcutaneous insulin therapy.Endocr Pract.2004;10(suppl 2):7180.
  39. DeSantis AJ,Schmeltz LR,Schmidt K, et al.Inpatient management of hyperglycemia: the northwestern experience.Endocr Pract.2006;12(5):491505.
  40. American Diabetes Association.Position statement: standards of medical care in diabetes‐2007.Diabetes Care.2007;30(suppl 1):S4S41.
  41. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists Inpatient Glycemic Control Resource Center. Available at: http://resources.aace.com/PDF/Section_05‐Final‐Inpatient_Non‐ICU/Hyperglycemia_Non‐ICU_Protocols/Pre‐Operative_Instructions_for_Patients_with_Diabetes.PDF Accessed November2007.
  42. Nathan DM,Buse JB,Davidson MB, et al.Management of hyperglycemia in type 2 diabetes: a consensus algorithm for the initiation and adjustment of therapy: a consensus statement from the American Diabetes Association and the European Association for the Study of Diabetes.Diabetes Care.2006;29:19631972.
  43. Nathan DM,Buse JB,Davidson MB, et al.Management of hyperglycemia in type 2 diabetes: a consensus algorithm for the initiation and adjustment of therapy: update regarding thiazoladinediones.Diabetes Care.2008;31:173175.
  44. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists Inpatient Glycemic Control Resource Center. Challenges in Effective Discharge Planning for Hospitalized Patients with Diabetes. Available at: http://resources.aace.com/PDF/Section_07‐Final‐Transition‐Inpatient_to_Outpatient/Challenges_in_Effective_Discharge_for_Diabetes_Patients.PPT. Accessed December2007.
  45. Raskin P,Allen E,Hollander P.Initiating insulin therapy in type 2 diabetes: a comparison of biphasic and basal insulin analogs.Diabetes Care.2005;28:260265.
  46. Holman RR,Thorne KI,Farmer AJ, et al.Addition of biphasic, prandial, or basal insulin to oral therapy in type 2 diabetes.N Engl J Med.2007;357:17161730.
  47. Mooradian AD,Bernbaum M,Albert SG.Narrative review: a rational approach to starting insulin therapy.Ann Intern Med.2006;145:125134.
  48. Hirsch IB,Bergenstal RM,Parkin CG,Wright E,Buse JB.A real‐world approach to insulin therapy in primary care practice.Clin Diabetes.2005;23:7886.
  49. Shorr RI,Ray WA,Daugherty JR,Griffin MR.Individual sulfonylureas and serious hypoglycemia in older persons.J Am Geriatr Soc.1996;44:751755.
  50. Shorr RI,Ray WA,Daugherty JR,Griffin MR.Incidence and risk factors for serious hypoglycemia in older persons using insulin or sulfonylureas.Arch Intern Med.1997;157(15):16811686.
  51. Heine RJ,Van Gaal LF,Johns D, et al.Exenatide versus insulin glargine in patients with suboptimally controlled type 2 diabetes: a randomized trial.Ann Intern Med.2005;143:559569.
  52. Braithwaite SS.The transition from insulin infusions to long‐term diabetes therapy: the argument for insulin analogs.Semin Thorac Cardiovasc Surg.2006;18:366378.
  53. Davies M,Storms F,Shutler S,Bianchi‐Biscay M,Gomis R.ATLANTUS Study Group. Improvement of glycemic control in subjects with poorly controlled type 2 diabetes.Diabetes Care.2005;28:12821288.
  54. Riddle M,Rosenstock J,Gerich J.Investigators Insulin Glargine 4002 Study. The Treat‐to Target trial: randomized addition of glargine or human NPH insulin to oral therapy of type 2 diabetes patients.Diabetes Care.2003;26:30803086.
  55. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists Inpatient Glycemic Control Resource Center. Available at: http://resources.aace.com/PDF/Section_07‐Final‐Transition‐Inpatient_to_Outpatient/Effective_Discharge_Planning‐Sample_Discharge_Plans/Inpatient_Diabetes_Discharge_Prescription.PDF. Accessed November2007.
  56. American Diabetes Association.Diagnosis and classification of diabetes mellitus.Diabetes Care.2007;30(suppl):S42S47.
  57. Greci LS,Kailasam M,Malkani S, et al.Utility of HbA1c levels for diabetes case finding in hospitalized patients with hyperglycemia.Diabetes Care.2003;26:10641068.
  58. Mensing C,Boucher J,Cypress M, et al.National standards for diabetes self‐management education.Diabetes Care.2006;29(suppl 1):S78S85.
  59. Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force. Workbook for improvement: improving glycemic control, preventing hypoglycemia and optimizing care of the inpatient with diabetes and hyperglycemia. page 105. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/ResourceRoomRedesign/pdf/GC_Workbook.pdf. Accessed December,2007.
  60. Joslin Diabetes Center. EZ Start Patient Information Handouts. Available at: http://www.joslin.org/ezstart. Accessed December2007.
  61. Kripalani S,Jackson AT,Schnipper JL,Coleman EA.Promoting effective transitions of care at hospital discharge: a review of key issues for hospitalists.J Hosp Med.2007;2:314323.
  62. Kripalani S,LeFevre F,Phillips CO,Williams MV,Basaviah P,Baker DW.Deficits in communication and information transfer between hospital‐based and primary care physicians: implications for patient safety and continuity of care.JAMA.2007;297:831841.
  63. Society of Hospital Medicine On‐line Clinical Tools. Ideal discharge for the elderly patient: a hospitalist checklist. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/AM/Template.cfm?Section=QI_Clinical_Toolsemplate=/CM/ContentDisplay.cfmContentID=10303. Accessed December2007.
  64. Wheeler K,Crawford R,McAdams D, et al.Inpatient to outpatient transfer of care in urban patients with diabetes: patterns and determinants of immediate post‐discharge follow‐up.Arch Intern Med.2004;164:447453.
  65. Wheeler K,Crawford R,McAdams D,Robinson R,Dunbar VG,Cook CB.Inpatient to outpatient transfer of diabetes care: perceptions of barriers to postdischarge follow‐up in urban African American patients.Ethn Dis.2007;17:238243.
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Page Number
55-65
Page Number
55-65
Article Type
Display Headline
Bridge over troubled waters: Safe and effective transitions of the inpatient with hyperglycemia
Display Headline
Bridge over troubled waters: Safe and effective transitions of the inpatient with hyperglycemia
Sections
Article Source
Copyright © 2008 Society of Hospital Medicine
Disallow All Ads
Correspondence Location
Internal Medicine, Banner Good Samaritan Medical Center, 1111 E. McDowell Road, Phoenix, AZ 85006
Content Gating
Gated (full article locked unless allowed per User)
Gating Strategy
First Peek Free
Article PDF Media

Supporting Inpatient Glycemic Control Programs Now

Article Type
Changed
Mon, 01/02/2017 - 19:34
Display Headline
The case for supporting inpatient glycemic control programs now: The evidence and beyond

Medical centers are faced with multiple competing priorities when deciding how to focus their improvement efforts and meet the ever expanding menu of publicly reported and regulatory issues. In this article we expand on the rationale for supporting inpatient glycemic control programs as a priority that should be moved near the top of the list. We review the evidence for establishing glycemic range targets, and also review the limitations of this evidence, acknowledging, as does the American Diabetes Association (ADA), that in both the critical care and non‐critical care venue, glycemic goals must take into account the individual patient's situation as well as hospital system support for achieving these goals.1, 2 We emphasize that inpatient glycemic control programs are needed to address a wide variety of quality and safety issues surrounding the care of the inpatient with diabetes and hyperglycemia, and we wish to elevate the dialogue beyond arguments surrounding adoption of one glycemic target versus another. The Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force members are not in unanimous agreement with the American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists (AACE)/ADA inpatient glycemic targets. However, we do agree on several other important points, which we will expand on in this article:

  • Uncontrolled hyperglycemia and iatrogenic hypoglycemia are common and potentially dangerous situations that are largely preventable with safe and proven methods.

  • The current state of care for our inpatients with hyperglycemia is unacceptably poor on a broad scale, with substandard education, communication, coordination, and treatment issues.

  • Concerted efforts with changes in the design of the process of care are needed to improve this state of affairs.

DIABETES AND HYPERGLYCEMIA ARE VERY COMMON INPATIENT CONDITIONS

Diabetes mellitus (DM) has reached epidemic proportions in the United States. A reported 9.3% of adults over 20 years of age have diabetes, representing over 20 million persons. Despite increasing awareness, diabetes remains undiagnosed in approximately 30% of these persons.3 Concurrent with the increasing prevalence of diabetes in the U.S. population from 1980 through 2003, the number of hospital discharges with diabetes as any listed diagnosis more than doubled, going from 2.2 to 5.1 million discharges.4 Hospital care for patients with diabetes and hyperglycemia poses a significant health economic burden in the United States, representing over 40 billion dollars in annual direct medical expenditures.5

Hyperglycemia in the hospital may be due to known diabetes, to previously unrecognized diabetes, to prediabetes, and/or to the stress of surgery or illness. Deterioration in glycemic control in the hospital setting is most commonly associated with one or more factors, including stress‐induced release of insulin counterregulatory hormones (catecholamines, cortisol, glucagon, and growth hormone), exogenous administration of high dose glucocorticoids, and suboptimal glycemic management strategies.68 In a Belgian medical intensive care unit (MICU) randomized controlled trial (RCT) of strict versus conventional glycemic control, mean blood glucose (BG) on admission to the unit in the intention to treat group was 162 70 mg/dL (n = 1200),9 and in this group's RCT of 1548 surgical intensive care unit (SICU) patients, BG > 110 mg/dL was observed in over 70% of subjects.10 Mean BG of >145 mg/dL has been reported in 39%11 and BG >200 mg/dL in anywhere from 11% to 31% of intensive care unit (ICU) patients.10, 12 For general medicine and surgery, 1 study of 2030 patients admitted to a teaching hospital revealed that 26% of admissions had a known history of DM and 12% had new hyperglycemia, as evidenced by an admission or in‐hospital fasting BG of 126 mg/dL or more or a random BG of 200 mg/dL or more on 2 or more determinations.13 National and regional estimates on hospital use maintained by the Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality include data concerning diabetes diagnoses alone, without hyperglycemia, and may be displayed by querying its Web site.14 In cardiovascular populations almost 70% of patients having a first myocardial infarction have been reported to have either known DM, previously unrecognized diabetes, or impaired glucose tolerance.15

THE EVIDENCE SUPPORTS INPATIENT GLYCEMIC CONTROL

Evidence: Physiology

The pathophysiologic mechanisms through which hyperglycemia is linked to suboptimal outcomes in the hospital are complex and multifactorial. Although it is beyond the scope of this article to discuss these mechanisms in detail, research has broadly focused in the following areas: (1) immune system dysfunction, associated with a proinflammatory state and impaired white blood cell function; (2) metabolic derangements leading to oxidative stress, release of free fatty acids, reduction in endogenous insulin secretion, and fluid and electrolyte imbalance; and (3) a wide variety of vascular system responses (eg, endothelial dysfunction with impairment of tissue perfusion, a prothrombotic state, increased platelet aggregation, and left ventricular dysfunction).8, 1618

Conversely administration of insulin suppresses or reverses many of these abnormalities including generation of reactive oxygen species (ROS) and activation of inflammatory mechanisms,19 and leads to a fall in C‐reactive protein, which accompanied the clinical benefit of intensive insulin therapy (IIT) in the Leuven, Belgium, ICU population,20 and prevents mitochondrial abnormalities in hepatocytes.21 In the same surgical ICU cohort, Langouche et al.22 report suppression of intracellular adhesion molecule‐1 (ICAM‐1) and E‐selectin, markers of inflammation, and reduction in plasma nitric oxide (NO) and innate nitric oxide (iNOS) expression with insulin administration in patients treated with intravenous (IV) IIT.22 These data further support the role of insulin infusion in suppressing inflammation and endothelial dysfunction. The authors suggest that maintaining normoglycemia with IIT during critical illness protects the endothelium, thereby contributing to prevention of organ failure and death.22 Based on accumulating data in the literature such as that cited above, it has been suggested that a new paradigm in which glucose and insulin are related not only through their metabolic action but also through inflammatory mechanisms offers important potential therapeutic opportunities.19

Evidence: Epidemiology/Observational Studies/Non‐RCT Interventional Studies

A strong association between hospital hyperglycemia and negative outcomes has been reported in numerous observational studies in diverse adult medical and surgical settings. In over 1800 hospital admissions, those with new hyperglycemia had an in‐hospital mortality rate of 16% compared with 3% mortality in patients with known diabetes and 1.7% in normoglycemic patients (P < 0.01). These data suggest that hyperglycemia due to previously unrecognized diabetes may be an independent marker of in‐hospital mortality.13

Hyperglycemia has been linked to adverse outcomes in myocardial infarction, stroke,2328 postoperative nosocomial infection risk, pneumonia, renal transplant, cancer chemotherapy, percutaneous coronary interventions, and cardiac surgery.2938 These observational studies have the usual limitations inherent in their design. Demonstrating a strong association of hyperglycemia with adverse outcomes is not a guarantee that the hyperglycemia is the cause for the poor outcome, as hyperglycemia can reflect a patient under more stress who is at a higher risk for adverse outcome. By the same token, the strong association of hyperglycemia with the risk of poor outcomes seen in these studies does not guarantee that euglycemia would mitigate this risk.

Nonetheless, there are several factors that make the body of evidence for glycemic control more compelling. First, the association has a rational physiologic basis as described above. Second, the associations are consistent across a variety of patient populations and disease entities, and demonstrate a dose‐response relationship. Third, in studies that control for comorbidities and severity of illness, hyperglycemia persists as an independent risk factor for adverse outcomes, whether the patient has a preexisting diagnosis of diabetes or not. Last, non‐RCT interventional studies and RCTs largely reinforce these studies.

The Portland Diabetic Project has reported prospective, nonrandomized data over 17 years on the use of an IV insulin therapy protocol in cardiac surgery patients.38 This program has implemented stepped lowering of target BG, with the most recent data report implementing a goal BG <150 mg/dL.35 The current protocol uses a BG target of 70110 mg/dL, but results have not yet been published.39 Mortality and deep sternal wound infection rates for patients with diabetes who remain on the IV insulin protocol for 3 days have been lowered to levels equivalent to those for nondiabetic patients. This group has also reported reductions in length of stay and cost‐effectiveness of targeted glycemic control in the cardiac surgery population.35 Their data have to a large extent driven a nationwide movement to implement targeted BG control in cardiac surgery patients.

Another large ICU study (mixed medical‐surgical, n = 800 patients) also supports a benefit through targeted BG control (130.7 versus 152.3 mg/dL, P < 0.001) when compared with historical controls. This study demonstrated reduction in in‐hospital mortality (relative risk reduction 29.3%, P = 0.002), duration of ICU stay (10.8%, P = 0.04), acute renal failure (75%, P = 0.03), and blood transfusions (18.7%, P = 0.002),40 representing a similar magnitude of effect as was demonstrated by the Belgian group.

Evidence: RCTs

Evidence is accumulating that demonstrates an advantage in terms of morbidity and mortality when targeted glycemic control using intravenous insulin infusion is implemented in the hospital. The most robust data have been reported from ICU and cardiac surgery settings. The largest randomized, controlled study to date enrolled 1548 patients in a surgical ICU in Leuven, Belgium who were randomized to either intensive (IT) or conventional (CT) insulin therapy. Mean glucose attained was 103 19 and 153 33 mg/dL in each arm, respectively. The intensive insulin group demonstrated a reduction in both ICU (4.6% versus 8.0%) and in‐hospital mortality (7.2% versus 10.9%), as well as bloodstream infections, acute renal failure, transfusions, and polyneuropathy, the latter being reflected by duration of mechanical ventilation (P < 0.01 for all). Although a similar study in an MICU did not achieve statistical significance in the overall intention‐to‐treat analysis, it did demonstrate reductions in mortality (from 52.5% to 43.0%) in patients with at least 3 days of ICU treatment. It should also be noted that in this MICU population hypoglycemia rates were higher and level of glycemic control attained not as rigorous as in the same group's SICU cohort, factors which may have had an impact on observed outcomes. A meta‐analysis of these two Leuven, Belgium, studies demonstrated a reduction in mortality (23.6% versus 20.4%, absolute risk reduction [ARR] 3.2%, P = 0.004)) in all patients treated with IIT, with a larger reduction in mortality (37.9% versus 30.1%, ARR 7.8%, P = 0.002) observed in patients with at least 3 days of IIT, as well as substantial reductions in morbidity.9, 10, 41, 42

Several other studies must be mentioned in this context. A small (n = 61), randomized study in another SICU did not show a mortality benefit, perhaps because the number of subjects was not adequate to reach statistical significance, but did result in a significant reduction in nosocomial infections in patients receiving IIT (BG = 125 versus 179 mg/dL, P < 0.001).43 Two international multicenter studies recently stopped enrollment due to excess rates of hypoglycemia. The Volume Substitution and Insulin Therapy in Severe Sepsis (VISEP) study, in a mixed medical and surgical sepsis population, showed no significant reduction in mortality in the intensively‐treated group. Serious adverse events were reported according to standard definitions. Enrollment was stopped before the full number of subjects had been randomized. Among the 537 evaluable cases, hypoglycemia (BG < 40 mg/dL) was reported as 17.0% in the IT group and 4.1% (P < 0.001) in the control group,44 and the rate of serious adverse events was higher in the IT group (10.9% versus 5.2%, P = 0.01). It is notable that the rate of hypoglycemia was comparable to the 18.7% rate seen in the IT group in the Leuven, Belgium, medical ICU study.9 The Glucontrol study enrolled 855 medical and surgical ICU patients and was similarly terminated because of hypoglycemia (BG < 40 mg/dL) at a rate of 8.6% compared to 2.4% in the control group (P < 0.001). Insulin infusion protocols and outcome data have not yet been published.42, 45

These studies with very high hypoglycemia rates each used an algorithm based on the Leuven, Belgium, protocol. The rates of severe hypoglycemia are 34 that reported by a variety of others achieving similar or identical glycemic targets. Hypoglycemia should not be construed as a reason to not use a standardized insulin infusion protocol. In comparing protocols that have been published, it is apparent that rates of hypoglycemia differ substantially and that performance results of some algorithms are not necessarily replicable across sites.46 Dose‐defining designs can be substantively more sophisticated than those used in the trials mentioned, in some cases incorporating principles of control engineering. The variability of hypoglycemia rates under differing insulin infusion protocols is a compelling reason to devote institutional effort to monitoring the efficacy and safety of the infusion protocols that are used.

High‐level evidence from randomized, controlled trials demonstrating outcomes benefit through targeted BG control outside the ICU is lacking at this point in time, but it must be noted that feasibility is suggested by a recent randomized control trial (RABBIT2) that demonstrated the superiority of basal bolus insulin regimens to sliding scale insulin in securing glycemic control, without any increase in hypoglycemia.47

Summing Up the Evidence

It is clear that hyperglycemia is associated with negative clinical outcomes throughout the hospital, and level A evidence is available to support tight glucose control in the SICU setting. However, in view of the imperfect and incomplete nature of the evidence, controversy persists around how stringent glycemic targets should be in the ICU, on whether glycemic targets should differ between SICU and MICU patients, and especially what the targets should be in the non‐ICU setting. There should be hesitancy to extrapolate glycemic targets to be applied beyond the populations that have been studied with RCTs or to assume benefit for medical conditions that have not been examined for the impact of interventions to control hyperglycemia. Institutions might justifiably choose more liberal targets than those promoted in national recommendations/guidelines2, 4850 until safe attainment of more moderate goals is demonstrated. However, even critics agree that uncontrolled hyperglycemia exceeding 180200 mg/dL in any acute care setting is undesirable. Moreover, strong observational data showing the hazards of hyperglycemia in noncritical care units (even after adjustment for severity of illness) combined with the high rate of adverse drug events associated with insulin use, argue strongly for a standardized approach to treating diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital. Even though no RCTs exist demonstrating outcomes benefits of achieving glycemic target on wards, the alternatives to control of hyperglycemia using scheduled insulin therapy are unacceptable. Oral agent therapy is potentially dangerous and within the necessary timeframe is likely to be ineffective; sliding scale management is inferior to basal‐bolus insulin therapy, as shown inan RCT,47 and is unsafe; and on the wards improved glycemic control can be achieved simultaneously with a reduction in hypoglycemia.51

INPATIENT GLYCEMIC CONTROL IS INCREASINGLY INCORPORATED INTO PUBLIC REPORTING, GUIDELINES, REGULATORY AGENCY, AND NATIONAL QUALITY INITIATIVE PRIORITIES

National quality initiatives, public reporting, pay‐for‐performance, and guideline‐based care continue to play an increasingly important role in the U.S. healthcare system. Over the years these initiatives have focused on various disease states (venous thromboembolism, congestive heart failure, community‐acquired pneumonia, etc.) in an attempt to standardize care and improve patient safety and quality. Inpatient hyperglycemic control is also increasingly being incorporated into public reporting, regulatory compliance, and national quality initiatives.

Professional organizations such as the ADA2 and AACE50 have published guidelines supporting improved glycemic control, the safe use of insulin, and other measures to improve care for hyperglycemic inpatients. The AACE has a Web site dedicated to hospital hyperglycemia.52 The Society of Hospital Medicine48 has created a resource room on its Web site and a workbook for improvement49 on optimizing the care of inpatients with hyperglycemia and diabetes. The guidelines and Web sites help raise awareness and educate physicians and healthcare workers in inpatient glucose management. The American Heart Association has incorporated specific recommendation regarding inpatient diabetic management in its Get With the Guidelines.53

The Joint Commission54 has developed an advanced disease‐specific certification on inpatient diabetes. Disease management programs are important components of complex healthcare systems that serve to coordinate chronic care, promote early detection and prevention, and reduce overall healthcare costs. Certification is increasingly important to providers, payers, and healthcare institutions because it demonstrates a commitment to quality and patient safety. The Joint Commission disease‐specific care certification is a patient‐centered model focusing on the delivery of clinical care and relationship between the practitioner and the patient. The evaluation and resulting certification by the Joint Commission is based on 3 core components: (1) an assessment of compliance with consensus‐based national standards; (2) the effective use of established clinical practice guidelines to manage and optimize care; and (3) an organized approach to performance measurement and improved activities.55 For inpatient diabetes, the Joint Commission program has 7 major elements following the ADA recommendations, including general recommendations regarding diabetic documentation, BG targets, preventing hypoglycemia, diabetes care providers, diabetes self‐management education, medical nutrition therapy, and BG monitoring.54 This mirrors the Call to Action Consensus Conference essential elements for successful glycemic control programs.1

Other organizations such as the Surgical Care Improvement Partnership (SCIP) and National Surgical Quality Improvement Program (NSQIP) have included perioperative glycemic control measures, as it impacts surgical wound infections. The University HealthSystem Consortium (UHC) has benchmarking data and endorses perioperative glycemic control measures, whereas the Institute for Healthcare Improvement (IHI) has focused on safe use of insulin practices in its 5 Million Lives campaign.

HOSPITALIZATION IS A MOMENT OF OPPORTUNITY TO ASSESS AND INTERVENE

The benefits of outpatient glycemic control and quality preventive care are well established, and the reduction of adverse consequences of uncontrolled diabetes are a high priority in ambulatory medicine.5658 Hospitalization provides an opportunity to identify previously undiagnosed diabetes or prediabetes and, for patients with known diabetes, to assess and impact upon the long term course of diabetes.

As a first step, unless a recent hemoglobin A1C (HbA1c) is known, among hospitalized hyperglycemic patients an HbA1C should be obtained upon admission. Greci et al.59 showed that an HbA1c level >6.0% was 100% specific (14/14) and 57% sensitive (12/21) for the diagnosis of diabetes. Among patients having known diabetes, an HbA1C elevation on admission may justify intensification of preadmission management at the time of discharge. If discharge and postdischarge adjustments of preadmission regimens are planned in response to admission A1C elevations, then the modified long‐term treatment strategy can improve the A1C in the ambulatory setting.60 Moreover, the event of hospitalization is the ideal teachable moment for patients and their caregivers to improve self‐care activities. Yet floor nurses may be overwhelmed by the tasks of patient education. For ideal patient education, both a nutritionist and a diabetes nurse educator are needed to assess compliance with medication, diet, and other aspects of care.6163 There also is need for outpatient follow‐up education. Finally, at the time of discharge, there is a duty and an opportunity for the diabetes provider to communicate with outpatient care providers about the patient's regimen and glycemic control, and also, based on information gathered during the admission, to convey any evidence that might support the need for a change of long‐term strategy.64 Unfortunately, the opportunity that hospitalization presents to assess, educate, and intervene frequently is underused.1, 8, 51, 65

LARGE GAPS EXIST BETWEEN CURRENT AND OPTIMAL CARE

Despite the evidence that inpatient glycemic control is important for patient outcomes, and despite guidelines recommending tighter inpatient glycemic control, clinical practice has been slow to change. In many institutions, inpatient glycemic management has not improved over the past decade, and large gaps remain between current practice and optimal practice.

Studies of individual institutions provide several insights into gaps in care. For example, Schnipper et al.66 examined practices on the general medicine service of an academic medical center in Boston in 2004. Among 107 prospectively identified patients with a known diagnosis of diabetes or at least 1 glucose reading >200 mg/dL (excluding patients with diabetic ketoacidosis, hyperglycemic hyperosmolar state, or pregnancy), they found scheduled long‐acting insulin prescribed in 43% of patients, scheduled short‐acting/rapid‐acting insulin in only 4% of patients, and 80 of 89 patients (90%) on the same sliding scale insulin regimen despite widely varying insulin requirements. Thirty‐one percent of glucose readings were >180 mg/dL compared with 1.2% of readings <60 mg/dL (but 11% of patients had at least 1 episode of hypoglycemia). Of the 75 patients with at least 1 episode of hyperglycemia or hypoglycemia, only 35% had any change to their insulin regimen during the first 5 days of the hospitalization.

Other studies have confirmed this concept of clinical inertia (ie, recognition of the problem but failure to act).67 A study by Cook et al.68 of all hospitalized non‐ICU patients with diabetes or hyperglycemia and length of stay of 3 days between 2001 and 2004 showed that 20% of patients had persistent hyperglycemia during the hospitalization (defined as a mean glucose >200 mg/dL). Forty‐six percent of patients whose average glucose was in the top tertile did not have their insulin regimen intensified to a combination of short‐acting/rapid‐acting and long‐acting insulin, and 35% of these patients either had no change in their total daily insulin dose or actually had a decrease in their dose when comparing the last 24 hours with the first 24 hours of hospitalization, a concept they term negative therapeutic momentum.

Perhaps the most well‐balanced view of the current state of medical practice comes from the UHC benchmarking project.69 UHC is an alliance of 90 academic health centers. For the diabetes project, each institution reviewed the records of 50 randomly selected patients over 18 years of age with at least a 72‐hour length of stay, 1 of 7 prespecified Diagnosis Related Group (DRG) codes, and at least 2 consecutive glucose readings >180 mg/dL or the receipt of insulin any time during the hospitalization. Patients with a history of pancreatic transplant, pregnant at the time of admission, receiving hospice or comfort care, or receiving insulin for a reason other than glucose management were excluded. The study showed widespread gaps in processes and outcomes (Table 1). Moreover, performance varied widely across hospitals. For example, the morning glucose in the ICU on the second measurement day was 110 mg/dL in 18% of patients for the median‐performing hospital, with a range of 0% to 67% across all 37 measured hospitals. In the non‐ICU setting on the second measurement day, 26% of patients had all BG measurements = 180 mg/dL in the median‐performing hospital, with a range of 7% to 48%. Of note, hypoglycemia was relatively uncommon: in the median hospital, 2.4% of patient‐days had 1 or more BG readings <50 mg/dL (range: 0%8.6%). Finally, in the median‐performing hospital, effective insulin therapy (defined as short‐acting/rapid‐acting and long‐acting subcutaneous insulin, continuous insulin infusion, or subcutaneous insulin pump therapy) was prescribed in 45% of patients, with a range of 12% to 77% across measured hospitals.

Results of the University HealthSystem Consortium Benchmarking Project
Key Performance Measure Results for Median‐Performing Hospital (%)
  • Abbreviation: ICU, intensive care unit.

  • Combination of short‐acting/rapid‐acting and long‐acting subcutaneous insulins, continuous insulin infusion, or subcutaneous insulin pump.

Documentation of diabetes 100
Hob A1c assessment within 30 days 36.1
Glucose measurement within 8 hours of admission 78.6
Glucose monitoring 4 times a day 85.4
Median glucose reading > 200 mg/dL 10.3
Effective insulin therapy* 44.7
ICU day 2 morning glucose 110 mg/dL 17.7
Non‐ICU day 2 all glucose readings 180 mg/dL 26.3
Patient‐days with at least 1 glucose reading < 50 mg/dL 2.4

FREQUENT PROBLEMS WITH COMMUNICATION AND COORDINATION

Those who work closely with frontline practitioners striving to improve inpatient glycemic management have noticed other deficiencies in care.1, 70 These include: a lack of coordination between feeding, BG measurement, and insulin administration, leading to mistimed and incorrectly dosed insulin; frequent use of sliding‐scale only regimens despite evidence that they are useless at best and harmful at worst;6, 47, 60, 71 discharge summaries that often do not mention follow‐up plans for hyperglycemic management; incomplete patient educational programs; breakdowns in care at transition points; nursing and medical staffs that are unevenly educated about the proper use of insulin; and patients who are often angry or confused about their diabetes care in the hospital. Collectively, these gaps in care serve as prime targets for any glycemic control program.

HYPOGLYCEMIA IS A PROMINENT INPATIENT SAFETY CONCERN

Hypoglycemia is common in the inpatient setting and is a legitimate safety concern. In a recently reported series of 2174 hospitalized patients receiving antihyperglycemic agents, it was found that 9.5% of patients experienced a total 484 hypoglycemic episodes (defined as 60 mg/dL).72 Hypoglycemia often occurred in the setting of insulin therapy and frequently resulted from a failure to recognize trends in BG readings or other clues that a patient was at risk for developing hypoglycemia.73 A common thread is the risk created by interruption of carbohydrate intake, noted by Fischer et al.73 and once again in the recent ICU study by Vriesendorp et al.74 Sources of error include: lack of coordination between feeding and medication administration, leading to mistiming of insulin action; lack of sufficient frequency in BG monitoring; lack of clarity or uniformity in the writing of orders; failure to recognize changes in insulin requirements due to advanced age, renal failure, liver disease, or change in clinical status; steroid use with subsequent tapering or interruption; changes in feeding; failure to reconcile medications; inappropriate use of oral antihyperglycemic agents, and communication or handoff failures.

It has been difficult to sort out whether hypoglycemia is a marker of severity of illness or whether it is an independent factor leading to poor outcomes. Observational studies lend credibility to the concept that patients having congestive heart failure or myocardial infarction may be at risk for excessive mortality if their average BG resides in the low end of the normal range.7578 Sympathetic activation occurs as the threshold for hypoglycemia is approached, such as occurs at BG = 70 or 72 mg/dL.79 Patients living with BG levels observed to be in the low end of the normal range might experience more severe but unobserved and undocumented episodes of neuroglycopenia. Arrhythmia and fatality have been directly attributed to strict glycemic control.80, 81 We are confronted with the need to interpret well conducted observational studies, evaluating subgroups at risk, and using multivariate analysis to assess the impact of hypoglycemia upon outcomes.82 In such studies, we will need to examine high‐risk subgroups, including cardiac patients, in particular, for the possibility that there is a J‐shaped curve for mortality as a function of average BG.

Unfortunately, clinical inertia exists in response to hypoglycemia just as it does with hyperglycemia. One recent study examined 52 patients who received intravenous 50% dextrose solution for an episode of hypoglycemia.83 Changes to insulin regimens were subsequently made in only 21 patients (40%), and diabetes specialists agreed with the changes for 11 of these patients. The other 31 patients (60%) received no changes in treatment, and diabetes specialists agreed with that decision for only 10 of these patients.

Although some increase in hypoglycemia might be expected with initiation of tight glycemic control efforts, the solution is not to undertreat hyperglycemia. Hyperglycemia creates an unsafe setting for the treatment of illness and disease. Sliding‐scaleonly regimens are ineffective in securing glycemic control and can result in increases in hypoglycemia as well as hyperglycemic excursions.6, 66 Inappropriate withholding of insulin doses can lead to severe glycemic excursions and even iatrogenic diabetic ketoacidosis (DKA). Systems approaches to avoid the errors outlined above can minimize or even reverse the increased risk of hypoglycemia expected with tighter glycemic targets.51

A SYSTEMS APPROACH IS NEEDED FOR THESE MULTIPLE COMPLEX PROBLEMS

Care is of the hyperglycemic inpatient is inherently complex. Previously established treatments are often inappropriate under conditions of altered insulin resistance, changing patterns of nutrition and carbohydrate exposure, comorbidities, concomitant medications, and rapidly changing medical and surgical status. Patients frequently undergo changes in the route and amount of nutritional exposure, including discrete meals, continuous intravenous dextrose, nil per orem (nothing by mouth status; NPO) status, grazing on nutritional supplements or liquid diets with or without meals, bolus enteral feedings, overnight enteral feedings with daytime grazing, total parenteral nutrition, continuous peritoneal dialysis, and overnight cycling of peritoneal dialysis. Relying on individual expertise and vigilance to negotiate this complex terrain without safeguards, protocols, standardization of orders, and other systems change is impractical and unwise.

Transitions across care providers and locations lead to multiple opportunities for breakdown in the quality, consistency, and safety of care.64, 65 At the time of ward transfer or change of patient status, previous medication and monitoring orders sometimes are purged. At the time of discharge, there may be risk of continuation of anti‐hyperglycemic therapy, initiated to cover medical stress, in doses that will subsequently be unsafe.

In the face of this complexity, educational programs alone will not suffice to improve care. Institutional commitment and systems changes are essential.

MARKED IMPROVEMENT IS POSSIBLE AND TOOLS EXIST: A ROADMAP IS IN PLACE

Fortunately, a roadmap is in place to help us achieve better glycemic control, improve insulin management, and address the long list of current deficiencies in care. This is imperative to develop consistent processes in order to achieve maximum patient quality outcomes that effective glycemic management offers. This roadmap entails 4 components: (1) national awareness, (2) national guidelines, (3) consensus statements, and (4) effective tools. As mentioned above, the first two components of this roadmap are now in place.

As these national guidelines become more widely accepted, the next step will be the incorporation of this into programs like Pay‐for Performance and the Physician Quality Reporting Initiative (PQRI), which will impact reimbursement to both hospitals and providers.

Regarding the third component, a recent multidisciplinary consensus conference1 outlined the essential elements needed for successful implementation of an inpatient glycemic control program which include:

  • An appropriate level of administrative support.

  • Formation of a multidisciplinary steering committee to drive the development of initiatives and empowered to enact change.

  • Assessment of current processes, quality of care, and barriers to practice change.

  • Development and implementation of interventions including standardized order sets, protocols, policies and algorithms with associated educational programs.

  • Metrics for evaluation of glycemic control, hypoglycemia, insulin use patterns, and other aspects of care.

Finally, extensive resources and effective tools are now available to help institutions achieve better inpatient glucose control. The Society of Hospital Medicine (SHM), in conjunction with the ADA, AACE, the American College of Physicians (ACP), the Case Management Society of America (CMSA), the American Society of Consultant Pharmacists, nursing, and diabetic educators have all partnered to produce a comprehensive guide to effective implementation of glycemic control and preventing hypoglycemia.49 This comprehensive workbook is a proven performance improvement framework and is available on the SHM Web site.48 Details and examples of all essential elements are covered in this workbook along with opportunities for marked improvement bolstered by integration of high reliability design features and attention to effective implementation techniques. The remainder of this supplement crystallizes a substantial portion of this material. The AACE has also recently offered a valuable web‐based resource to encourage institutional glycemic control efforts.49

GLYCEMIC CONTROL INITIATIVES CAN BE COST‐EFFECTIVE

Achieving optimal glycemic control safely requires monitoring, education, and other measures, which can be expensive, labor intensive, and require coordination of the services of many hospital divisions. This incremental expense has been shown to be cost‐effective in a variety of settings.1, 84, 85 The costs of glycemic control initiatives have demonstrated a good return on investment via:

  • Improved LOS, readmission rates, morbidity, and mortality.

  • Improved documentation of patient acuity and related payment for acuity.

  • Income generated via incremental physician and allied health professional billing.

CONCLUSION AND SUMMARY

Evidence exists that appropriate management of hyperglycemia improves outcomes, whereas the current state of affairs is that most medical centers currently manage this suboptimally. This is concerning given the magnitude of diabetes and hyperglycemia in our inpatient setting in the United States. To bring awareness to this issue, multiple initiatives (guidelines, certification programs, workbooks, etc.) are available by various organizations including the ADA, AACE, SCIP, NSQIP, IHI, UHC, the Joint Commission, and SHM. However, this is not enough. Change occurs at the local level, and institutional prioritization and support is needed to empower a multidisciplinary steering committee, with appropriate administrative support, to standardize and improve systems in the face of substantial cultural issues and complex barriers. Improved data collection and reporting, incremental monitoring, creation of metrics, and improved documentation are an absolutely necessary necessity to achieve breakthrough levels of improvement.

Now the time is right to make an assertive effort to improve inpatient glycemic control and related issues, and push for appropriate support at your institution to help achieve this in the interest of patient safety and optimal outcomes.

References
  1. American College of Endocrinology and American Diabetes Association Consensus Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Glycemic Control: A call to action.Diabetes Care.2006;29:19551962.
  2. Standards of medical care in diabetes‐‐2008.Diabetes Care.2008;31(Suppl 1):S12S54.
  3. Cowie CC,Rust KF,Byrd‐Holt DD, et al.Prevalence of diabetes and impaired fasting glucose in adults in the U.S. population: National Health And Nutrition Examination Survey 1999–2002.Diabetes Care.2006;29:12631268.
  4. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.National Diabetes Fact Sheet: General Information and National Estimates on Diabetes in the United States, 2005.Atlanta, GA:U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention,2005. Available at: http://www.cdc.gov/diabetes/pubs/factsheet05.htm. Accessed September 2007.
  5. Hogan P,Dall T,Nikolov P.Economic costs of diabetes in the US in 2002.Diabetes Care.2003;26:917932.
  6. Queale WS,Seidler AJ,Brancati FL.Glycemic control and sliding scale insulin use in medical inpatients with diabetes mellitus.Arch Intern Med.1997;157:545552.
  7. Metchick LN,Petit WA,Inzucchi SE.Inpatient management of diabetes mellitus.Am J Med.2002;113:317323.
  8. Clement S,Braithwaite SS,Magee MF, et al.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in hospitals.Diabetes Care.2004;27:553591.
  9. Van den Berghe G,Wilmer A,Hermans G, et al.Intensive insulin therapy in the medical ICU.N Engl J Med.2006;354:449461.
  10. Van den Berghe G,Wouters P,Weekers F, et al.Intensive insulin therapy in critically ill patients.N Engl J Med.2001;345:13591367.
  11. Krinsley JS.Association between hyperglycemia and increased hospital mortality in a heterogeneous population of critically ill patients.Mayo Clin Proc.2003;78:14711478.
  12. Levetan CS,Passaro M,Jablonski K,Kass M,Ratner RE.Unrecognized diabetes among hospitalized patients.Diabetes Care.1998;21:246249.
  13. Umpierrez GE,Isaacs SD,Bazargan N,You X,Thaler LM,Kitabchi AE.Hyperglycemia: an independent marker of in‐hospital mortality in patients with undiagnosed diabetes.J Clin Endocrinol Metab.2002;87:978982.
  14. United States Department of Health and Human Services Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality.2007. Available at: http://hcupnet.ahrq.gov. Accessed December 2007.
  15. Norhammar A,Tenerz A,Nilsson G, et al.Glucose metabolism in patients with acute myocardial infarction and no previous diagnosis of diabetes mellitus: a prospective study.Lancet.2002;359:21402144.
  16. Zarich SW.Mechanism by which hyperglycemia plays a role in the setting of acute cardiovascular illness.Rev Cardiovasc Med.2006;7(Suppl 2):S35S43.
  17. Bauters C,Ennezat PV,Tricot O,Lauwerier B,Lallemant R,Saadouni H, et al.Stress hyperglycaemia is an independent predictor of left ventricular remodelling after first anterior myocardial infarction in non‐diabetic patients.Eur Heart J.2007;28:546552.
  18. Zarich SW,Nesto RW.Implications and treatment of acute hyperglycemia in the setting of acute myocardial infarction.Circulation.2007;115:e436e439.
  19. Dandona P,Mohanty P,Chaudhuri A,Garg R,Aljada A.Insulin infusion in acute illness.J Clin Invest.2005;115:20692072.
  20. Hansen T,Thiel S,Wouters P,Christiansen J,Van den Berghe B.Intensive insulin therapy exerts antiinflammatory effects in critically ill patients and counteracts the adverse effect of low mannose‐gind lectin levels.J Clin Endocrinol Metab.2003;88:10821088.
  21. Vanhorebeek I,De Vos R,Mesotten D,Wouters PJ,De Wolf‐Peeters C,Van den Berghe G.Protection of hepatocyte mitochondrial ultrastructure and function by strict blood glucose control with insulin in critically ill patients.Lancet.2005;365:5359.
  22. Langouche L,Vanhorebeek I,Vlasselaers D, et al.Intensive insulin therapy protects the endothelium of critically ill patients.J Clin Invest.2005;115:22772286.
  23. Ainla T,Baburin A,Teesalu R,Rahu M.The association between hyperglycaemia on admission and 180‐day mortality in acute myocardial infarction patients with and without diabetes.Diabet Med.2005;22:13211325.
  24. Kosiborod M,Rathore SS,Inzucchi SE, et al.Admission glucose and mortality in elderly patients hospitalized with acute myocardial infarction: implications for patients with and without recognized diabetes.Circulation.2005;111:30783086.
  25. Malmberg K,Norhammar A,Wedel H,Ryden L.Glycometabolic state at admission: important risk marker of mortality in conventionally treated patients with diabetes mellitus and acute myocardial infarction: long‐term results from the Diabetes and Insulin‐Glucose Infusion in Acute Myocardial Infarction (DIGAMI) study.Circulation.1999;99:26262632.
  26. Capes S,Hunt D,Malmberg K,Gerstein H.Stress hyperglycaemia and increased risk of death after myocardial infarction in patients with and without diabetes: a systematic overview.Lancet.2000;355:773778.
  27. Bruno A,Williams LS,Kent TA.How important is hyperglycemia during acute brain infarction?Neurologist.2004;10:195200.
  28. Capes S,Hunt D,Malmberg K,Pathak P,Gerstein H.Stress hyperglycemia and prognosis of stroke in nondiabetic and diabetic patients: a systematic overview.Stroke.2001;32:24262432.
  29. Golden SH,Peart‐Vigilance C,Kao WHL,Brancati F.Perioperative glycemic control and the risk of infectious complications in a cohort of adults with diabetes.Diabetes Care.1999;22:14081414.
  30. Pomposelli JJ,Baxter JK,Babineau TJ, et al.Early postoperative glucose control predicts nosocomial infection rate in diabetic patients.JPEN J Parenter Enteral Nutr.1998;22:7781.
  31. McAlister FA,Majumdar SR,Blitz S,Rowe BH,Romney J,Marrie TJ.The relation between hyperglycemia and outcomes in 2,471 patients admitted to the hospital with community‐acquired pneumonia.Diabetes Care.2005;28:810815.
  32. Thomas M,Mathew T,Russ G,Rao M,Moran J.Early peri‐operative glycaemic control and allograft rejection in patients with diabetes mellitus: a pilot study.Transplantation.2001;72:13211324.
  33. Weiser MA,Cabanillas ME,Konopleva M, et al.Relation between the duration of remission and hyperglycemia during induction chemotherapy for acute lymphocytic leukemia with a hyperfractionated cyclophosphamide, vincristine, doxorubicin, and dexamethasone/methotrexate‐cytarabine regimen.Cancer.2004;100:11791185.
  34. Muhlestein JB,Anderson JL,Horne BD, et al.Effect of fasting glucose levels on mortality rate in patients with and without diabetes mellitus and coronary artery disease undergoing percutaneous coronary intervention.Am Heart J.2003;146:351358.
  35. Furnary AP,Wu Y,Bookin SO.Effect of hyperglycemia and continuous intravenous insulin infusions on outcomes of cardiac surgical procedures: the Portland diabetic project.Endocr Pract.2004;10(Suppl 2):2133.
  36. Gandhi GY,Nuttall GA,Abel MD, et al.Intraoperative hyperglycemia and perioperative outcomes in cardiac surgery patients.Mayo Clin Proc.2005;80:862866.
  37. Latham R,Lancaster AD,Covington JF,Pirolo JS,Thomas CS.The association of diabetes and glucose control with surgical‐site infections among cardiothoracic surgery patients.Infect Control Hosp Epidemiol.2001;22:607612.
  38. Zerr KJ,Furnary AP,Grunkemeier GL.Glucose control lowers the risk of wound infection in diabetics after open heart operations.Ann Thorac Surg.1997;63:356361.
  39. The Portland Protocol. Available at: http://www.providence.org/oregon/grograms_and_services/heart/portlandprotocol/. Accessed September2007.
  40. Krinsley JS.Effect of an intensive glucose management protocol on the mortality of critically ill adult patients.Mayo Clin Proc.2004;79:9921000.
  41. Van den Berghe G,Wilmer A,Milants I, et al.Intensive insulin therapy in mixed medical/surgical intensive care units: benefit versus harm.Diabetes.2006;55:31513159.
  42. Vanhorebeek I,Langouche L,Van den Berghe G.Tight blood glucose control with insulin in the ICU: facts and controversies.Chest.2007;132:268278.
  43. Grey NJ,Perdrizet GA.Reduction of nosocomial infections in the surgical intensive‐care unit by strict glycemic control.Endocr Pract.2004;10(Suppl 2):4652.
  44. Brunkhorst FM,Engel C,Bloos F,Meier‐Hellmann A,Ragaller M,Weiler N, et al.Intensive insulin therapy and pentastarch resuscitation in severe sepsis.N Engl J Med.2008;358:125139.
  45. Devos P,Preiser JC.Current controversies around tight glucose control in critically ill patients.Curr Opin Clin Nutr Metab Care.2007;10:206209.
  46. Ahmann A,Hellman R,Larsen K,Maynard G.Designing and implementing insulin infusion protocols and order sets.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5):S42S54.
  47. Umpierrez GE,Smiley D,Zisman A,Prieto LM,Palacio A,Ceron M, et al.Randomized study of basal‐bolus insulin therapy in the inpatient management of patients with type 2 diabetes (RABBIT 2 trial).Diabetes Care.2007;30:21812186.
  48. Society of Hospital Medicine. Glycemic control resource room. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/ResourceRoomRedesign/GlycemicControl.cfm. Accessed November2007.
  49. Society of Hospital Medicine. Workbook for improvement: improving glycemic control, preventing hypoglycemia, and optimizing care of the inpatient with hyperglycemia and diabetes. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/ResourceRoomRedesign/pdf/GC_Workbook.pdf. Accessed November2007.
  50. Garber AJ,Moghissi ES,Bransome ED, et al.American College of Endocrinology position statement on inpatient diabetes and metabolic control.Endocr Pract.2004;10:7782.
  51. Maynard G,Lee JH,Phillips G,Fink MA,Renvall M.Improved inpatient use of basal insulin, reduced hypoglycemia, and improved glycemic control: effect of structured subcutaneous insulin orders and an insulin management algorithm.J Hosp Med.2008. In press.
  52. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists Inpatient Glycemic Control Resource Center.2007. Available at: http://resources.aace.com/index.asp. Accessed December 2007.
  53. American Heart Association. Get With the Guidelines. Available at: http://www.americanheart.org/getwiththeguidelines. Accessed November2007.
  54. Joint Commission. Disease Specific‐Care Certification. Available at:http://www.jointcommission.org/CertificationPrograms. Accessed November2007.
  55. The Joint Commission Disease‐Specific Certification Program. Range JE. Oncology issues. July/August2007:4041.
  56. Anonymous.The Diabetes Control and Complications Trial Research Group (DCCT). The effect of intensive treatment of diabetes on the development and progression of long‐term complications in insulin‐dependent diabetes mellitus.N Engl J Med.1993;329:977986.
  57. Intensive blood‐glucose control with sulphonylureas or insulin compared with conventional treatment and risk of complications in patients with type, 2 diabetes (UKPDS 33). UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group.Lancet.1998;352:837853.
  58. Gaede P,Vedel P,Parving H‐H,Pedersen OU.Intensified multifactorial intervention in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus and microalbuminuria: the Steno type 2 randomised study.Lancet.1999;353:617622.
  59. Greci LS,Kailasam M,Malkani S, et al.Utility of HbA1c levels for diabetes case finding in hospitalized patients with hyperglycemia.Diabetes Care.2003;26:10641068.
  60. Baldwin D,Villanueva G,McNutt R,Bhatnagar S.Eliminating inpatient sliding‐scale insulin: a reeducation project with medical house staff.Diabetes Care.2005;28:10081011.
  61. Warshaw HS,Bolderman KM.Advanced carbohydrate counting. In:Practical Carbohydrate Counting: A How‐to‐Teach Guide for Health Professionals.Alexandria, VA:American Diabetes Association;2001:2628.
  62. Pastors JG,Warshaw H,Daly A,Franz M,Kulkarni K.The evidence for the effectiveness of medical nutrition therapy in diabetes management.Diabetes Care.2002;25:608613.
  63. Boucher JL,Swift CS,Franz MJ, et al.Inpatient management of diabetes and hyperglycemia: implications for nutrition practice and the food and nutrition professional.J Am Diet Assoc.2007;107:105111.
  64. Braithwaite SS.The transition from insulin infusions to long‐term diabetes therapy: the argument for insulin analogs.Semin Thorac Cardiovasc Surg.2006;18:366378.
  65. O'Malley .Transitions paper.J Hosp Med.2008.
  66. Schnipper JL,Barsky EE,Shaykevich S,Fitzmaurice G,Pendergrass ML.Inpatient management of diabetes and hyperglycemia among general medicine patients at a large teaching hospital.J Hosp Med.2006;1:145150.
  67. Phillips LS,Branch WT,Cook CB, et al.Clinical inertia.Ann Intern Med.2001;135:825834.
  68. Cook CB,Castro JC,Schmidt RE, et al.Diabetes care in hospitalized noncritically ill patients: more evidence for clinical inertia and negative therapeutic momentum.J Hosp Med.2007;2:203211.
  69. University HealthSystem Consortium.Glycemic control 2005 findings and conclusions. Presented at: Glycemic Control 2005 Knowledge Transfer Meeting; 2005 August 19,2005; Chicago, IL.
  70. Umpierrez G,Maynard G.Glycemic chaos (not glycemic control) still the rule for inpatient care: how do we stop the insanity?J Hosp Med.2006;1:141144.
  71. Golightly LK,Jones MA,Hamamura DH,Stolpman NM,McDermott MT.Management of diabetes mellitus in hospitalized patients: efficiency and effectiveness of sliding‐scale insulin therapy.Pharmacotherapy.2006;26:14211432.
  72. Varghese P,Gleason V,Sorokin R,Senholzi C,Jabbour S,Gottlieb JE.Hypoglycemia in hospitalized patients treated with antihyperglycemic agents.J Hosp Med.2007;2:234240.
  73. Fischer KF,Lees JA,Newman JH.Hypoglycemia in hospitalized patients.N Engl J Med.1986;315:12451250.
  74. Vriesendorp TM,van Santen S,DeVries JH, et al.Predisposing factors for hypoglycemia in the intensive care unit.Crit Care Med.2006;34:96101.
  75. Svensson AM,McGuire DK,Abrahamsson P,Dellborg M.Association between hyper‐ and hypoglycaemia and 2 year all‐cause mortality risk in diabetic patients with acute coronary events.Eur Heart J.2005;26:12551261.
  76. Pinto DS,Skolnick AH,Kirtane AJ, et al.U‐shaped relationship of blood glucose with adverse outcomes among patients with ST‐segment elevation myocardial infarction.J Am Coll Cardiol.2005;46:178180.
  77. Eshaghian S,Horwich TB,Fonarow GC.An unexpected inverse relationship between HbA1c levels and mortality in patients with diabetes and advanced systolic heart failure.Am Heart J.2006;151:91.
  78. Kosiborod M,Inzucchi SE,Krumholz HM, et al.Glucometrics in patients hospitalized with acute myocardial infarction: defining the optimal outcomes‐based measure of risk.Circulation.2008;117:10181027.
  79. Cryer PE,Davis SN,Shamoon H.Hypoglycemia in diabetes.Diabetes Care.2003;26:19021912.
  80. Bhatia A,Cadman B,Mackenzie I.Hypoglycemia and cardiac arrest in a critically ill patient on strict glycemic control.Anesth Analg.2006;102:549551.
  81. Scalea TM,Bochicchio GV,Bochicchio KM,Johnson SB,Joshi M,Pyle A.Tight glycemic control in critically injured trauma patients.Ann Surg.2007;246:605610; discussion 10–12.
  82. Krinsley JS,Grover A.Severe hypoglycemia in critically ill patients: risk factors and outcomes.Crit Care Med.2007;35:22622267.
  83. Garg R,Bhutani H,Jarry A,Pendergrass M.Provider response to insulin‐induced hypoglycemia in hospitalized patients.J Hosp Med.2007;2:258260.
  84. Newton CA,Young S.Financial implications of glycemic control: results of an inpatient diabetes management program.Endocr Pract.2006;12(Suppl 3):4348.
  85. Levetan CS,Salas JR,Wilets IF,Zumoff B.Impact of endocrine and diabetes team consultation on hospital length of stay for patients with diabetes.Am J Med.1995;99:2228.
Article PDF
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Page Number
6-16
Sections
Article PDF
Article PDF

Medical centers are faced with multiple competing priorities when deciding how to focus their improvement efforts and meet the ever expanding menu of publicly reported and regulatory issues. In this article we expand on the rationale for supporting inpatient glycemic control programs as a priority that should be moved near the top of the list. We review the evidence for establishing glycemic range targets, and also review the limitations of this evidence, acknowledging, as does the American Diabetes Association (ADA), that in both the critical care and non‐critical care venue, glycemic goals must take into account the individual patient's situation as well as hospital system support for achieving these goals.1, 2 We emphasize that inpatient glycemic control programs are needed to address a wide variety of quality and safety issues surrounding the care of the inpatient with diabetes and hyperglycemia, and we wish to elevate the dialogue beyond arguments surrounding adoption of one glycemic target versus another. The Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force members are not in unanimous agreement with the American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists (AACE)/ADA inpatient glycemic targets. However, we do agree on several other important points, which we will expand on in this article:

  • Uncontrolled hyperglycemia and iatrogenic hypoglycemia are common and potentially dangerous situations that are largely preventable with safe and proven methods.

  • The current state of care for our inpatients with hyperglycemia is unacceptably poor on a broad scale, with substandard education, communication, coordination, and treatment issues.

  • Concerted efforts with changes in the design of the process of care are needed to improve this state of affairs.

DIABETES AND HYPERGLYCEMIA ARE VERY COMMON INPATIENT CONDITIONS

Diabetes mellitus (DM) has reached epidemic proportions in the United States. A reported 9.3% of adults over 20 years of age have diabetes, representing over 20 million persons. Despite increasing awareness, diabetes remains undiagnosed in approximately 30% of these persons.3 Concurrent with the increasing prevalence of diabetes in the U.S. population from 1980 through 2003, the number of hospital discharges with diabetes as any listed diagnosis more than doubled, going from 2.2 to 5.1 million discharges.4 Hospital care for patients with diabetes and hyperglycemia poses a significant health economic burden in the United States, representing over 40 billion dollars in annual direct medical expenditures.5

Hyperglycemia in the hospital may be due to known diabetes, to previously unrecognized diabetes, to prediabetes, and/or to the stress of surgery or illness. Deterioration in glycemic control in the hospital setting is most commonly associated with one or more factors, including stress‐induced release of insulin counterregulatory hormones (catecholamines, cortisol, glucagon, and growth hormone), exogenous administration of high dose glucocorticoids, and suboptimal glycemic management strategies.68 In a Belgian medical intensive care unit (MICU) randomized controlled trial (RCT) of strict versus conventional glycemic control, mean blood glucose (BG) on admission to the unit in the intention to treat group was 162 70 mg/dL (n = 1200),9 and in this group's RCT of 1548 surgical intensive care unit (SICU) patients, BG > 110 mg/dL was observed in over 70% of subjects.10 Mean BG of >145 mg/dL has been reported in 39%11 and BG >200 mg/dL in anywhere from 11% to 31% of intensive care unit (ICU) patients.10, 12 For general medicine and surgery, 1 study of 2030 patients admitted to a teaching hospital revealed that 26% of admissions had a known history of DM and 12% had new hyperglycemia, as evidenced by an admission or in‐hospital fasting BG of 126 mg/dL or more or a random BG of 200 mg/dL or more on 2 or more determinations.13 National and regional estimates on hospital use maintained by the Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality include data concerning diabetes diagnoses alone, without hyperglycemia, and may be displayed by querying its Web site.14 In cardiovascular populations almost 70% of patients having a first myocardial infarction have been reported to have either known DM, previously unrecognized diabetes, or impaired glucose tolerance.15

THE EVIDENCE SUPPORTS INPATIENT GLYCEMIC CONTROL

Evidence: Physiology

The pathophysiologic mechanisms through which hyperglycemia is linked to suboptimal outcomes in the hospital are complex and multifactorial. Although it is beyond the scope of this article to discuss these mechanisms in detail, research has broadly focused in the following areas: (1) immune system dysfunction, associated with a proinflammatory state and impaired white blood cell function; (2) metabolic derangements leading to oxidative stress, release of free fatty acids, reduction in endogenous insulin secretion, and fluid and electrolyte imbalance; and (3) a wide variety of vascular system responses (eg, endothelial dysfunction with impairment of tissue perfusion, a prothrombotic state, increased platelet aggregation, and left ventricular dysfunction).8, 1618

Conversely administration of insulin suppresses or reverses many of these abnormalities including generation of reactive oxygen species (ROS) and activation of inflammatory mechanisms,19 and leads to a fall in C‐reactive protein, which accompanied the clinical benefit of intensive insulin therapy (IIT) in the Leuven, Belgium, ICU population,20 and prevents mitochondrial abnormalities in hepatocytes.21 In the same surgical ICU cohort, Langouche et al.22 report suppression of intracellular adhesion molecule‐1 (ICAM‐1) and E‐selectin, markers of inflammation, and reduction in plasma nitric oxide (NO) and innate nitric oxide (iNOS) expression with insulin administration in patients treated with intravenous (IV) IIT.22 These data further support the role of insulin infusion in suppressing inflammation and endothelial dysfunction. The authors suggest that maintaining normoglycemia with IIT during critical illness protects the endothelium, thereby contributing to prevention of organ failure and death.22 Based on accumulating data in the literature such as that cited above, it has been suggested that a new paradigm in which glucose and insulin are related not only through their metabolic action but also through inflammatory mechanisms offers important potential therapeutic opportunities.19

Evidence: Epidemiology/Observational Studies/Non‐RCT Interventional Studies

A strong association between hospital hyperglycemia and negative outcomes has been reported in numerous observational studies in diverse adult medical and surgical settings. In over 1800 hospital admissions, those with new hyperglycemia had an in‐hospital mortality rate of 16% compared with 3% mortality in patients with known diabetes and 1.7% in normoglycemic patients (P < 0.01). These data suggest that hyperglycemia due to previously unrecognized diabetes may be an independent marker of in‐hospital mortality.13

Hyperglycemia has been linked to adverse outcomes in myocardial infarction, stroke,2328 postoperative nosocomial infection risk, pneumonia, renal transplant, cancer chemotherapy, percutaneous coronary interventions, and cardiac surgery.2938 These observational studies have the usual limitations inherent in their design. Demonstrating a strong association of hyperglycemia with adverse outcomes is not a guarantee that the hyperglycemia is the cause for the poor outcome, as hyperglycemia can reflect a patient under more stress who is at a higher risk for adverse outcome. By the same token, the strong association of hyperglycemia with the risk of poor outcomes seen in these studies does not guarantee that euglycemia would mitigate this risk.

Nonetheless, there are several factors that make the body of evidence for glycemic control more compelling. First, the association has a rational physiologic basis as described above. Second, the associations are consistent across a variety of patient populations and disease entities, and demonstrate a dose‐response relationship. Third, in studies that control for comorbidities and severity of illness, hyperglycemia persists as an independent risk factor for adverse outcomes, whether the patient has a preexisting diagnosis of diabetes or not. Last, non‐RCT interventional studies and RCTs largely reinforce these studies.

The Portland Diabetic Project has reported prospective, nonrandomized data over 17 years on the use of an IV insulin therapy protocol in cardiac surgery patients.38 This program has implemented stepped lowering of target BG, with the most recent data report implementing a goal BG <150 mg/dL.35 The current protocol uses a BG target of 70110 mg/dL, but results have not yet been published.39 Mortality and deep sternal wound infection rates for patients with diabetes who remain on the IV insulin protocol for 3 days have been lowered to levels equivalent to those for nondiabetic patients. This group has also reported reductions in length of stay and cost‐effectiveness of targeted glycemic control in the cardiac surgery population.35 Their data have to a large extent driven a nationwide movement to implement targeted BG control in cardiac surgery patients.

Another large ICU study (mixed medical‐surgical, n = 800 patients) also supports a benefit through targeted BG control (130.7 versus 152.3 mg/dL, P < 0.001) when compared with historical controls. This study demonstrated reduction in in‐hospital mortality (relative risk reduction 29.3%, P = 0.002), duration of ICU stay (10.8%, P = 0.04), acute renal failure (75%, P = 0.03), and blood transfusions (18.7%, P = 0.002),40 representing a similar magnitude of effect as was demonstrated by the Belgian group.

Evidence: RCTs

Evidence is accumulating that demonstrates an advantage in terms of morbidity and mortality when targeted glycemic control using intravenous insulin infusion is implemented in the hospital. The most robust data have been reported from ICU and cardiac surgery settings. The largest randomized, controlled study to date enrolled 1548 patients in a surgical ICU in Leuven, Belgium who were randomized to either intensive (IT) or conventional (CT) insulin therapy. Mean glucose attained was 103 19 and 153 33 mg/dL in each arm, respectively. The intensive insulin group demonstrated a reduction in both ICU (4.6% versus 8.0%) and in‐hospital mortality (7.2% versus 10.9%), as well as bloodstream infections, acute renal failure, transfusions, and polyneuropathy, the latter being reflected by duration of mechanical ventilation (P < 0.01 for all). Although a similar study in an MICU did not achieve statistical significance in the overall intention‐to‐treat analysis, it did demonstrate reductions in mortality (from 52.5% to 43.0%) in patients with at least 3 days of ICU treatment. It should also be noted that in this MICU population hypoglycemia rates were higher and level of glycemic control attained not as rigorous as in the same group's SICU cohort, factors which may have had an impact on observed outcomes. A meta‐analysis of these two Leuven, Belgium, studies demonstrated a reduction in mortality (23.6% versus 20.4%, absolute risk reduction [ARR] 3.2%, P = 0.004)) in all patients treated with IIT, with a larger reduction in mortality (37.9% versus 30.1%, ARR 7.8%, P = 0.002) observed in patients with at least 3 days of IIT, as well as substantial reductions in morbidity.9, 10, 41, 42

Several other studies must be mentioned in this context. A small (n = 61), randomized study in another SICU did not show a mortality benefit, perhaps because the number of subjects was not adequate to reach statistical significance, but did result in a significant reduction in nosocomial infections in patients receiving IIT (BG = 125 versus 179 mg/dL, P < 0.001).43 Two international multicenter studies recently stopped enrollment due to excess rates of hypoglycemia. The Volume Substitution and Insulin Therapy in Severe Sepsis (VISEP) study, in a mixed medical and surgical sepsis population, showed no significant reduction in mortality in the intensively‐treated group. Serious adverse events were reported according to standard definitions. Enrollment was stopped before the full number of subjects had been randomized. Among the 537 evaluable cases, hypoglycemia (BG < 40 mg/dL) was reported as 17.0% in the IT group and 4.1% (P < 0.001) in the control group,44 and the rate of serious adverse events was higher in the IT group (10.9% versus 5.2%, P = 0.01). It is notable that the rate of hypoglycemia was comparable to the 18.7% rate seen in the IT group in the Leuven, Belgium, medical ICU study.9 The Glucontrol study enrolled 855 medical and surgical ICU patients and was similarly terminated because of hypoglycemia (BG < 40 mg/dL) at a rate of 8.6% compared to 2.4% in the control group (P < 0.001). Insulin infusion protocols and outcome data have not yet been published.42, 45

These studies with very high hypoglycemia rates each used an algorithm based on the Leuven, Belgium, protocol. The rates of severe hypoglycemia are 34 that reported by a variety of others achieving similar or identical glycemic targets. Hypoglycemia should not be construed as a reason to not use a standardized insulin infusion protocol. In comparing protocols that have been published, it is apparent that rates of hypoglycemia differ substantially and that performance results of some algorithms are not necessarily replicable across sites.46 Dose‐defining designs can be substantively more sophisticated than those used in the trials mentioned, in some cases incorporating principles of control engineering. The variability of hypoglycemia rates under differing insulin infusion protocols is a compelling reason to devote institutional effort to monitoring the efficacy and safety of the infusion protocols that are used.

High‐level evidence from randomized, controlled trials demonstrating outcomes benefit through targeted BG control outside the ICU is lacking at this point in time, but it must be noted that feasibility is suggested by a recent randomized control trial (RABBIT2) that demonstrated the superiority of basal bolus insulin regimens to sliding scale insulin in securing glycemic control, without any increase in hypoglycemia.47

Summing Up the Evidence

It is clear that hyperglycemia is associated with negative clinical outcomes throughout the hospital, and level A evidence is available to support tight glucose control in the SICU setting. However, in view of the imperfect and incomplete nature of the evidence, controversy persists around how stringent glycemic targets should be in the ICU, on whether glycemic targets should differ between SICU and MICU patients, and especially what the targets should be in the non‐ICU setting. There should be hesitancy to extrapolate glycemic targets to be applied beyond the populations that have been studied with RCTs or to assume benefit for medical conditions that have not been examined for the impact of interventions to control hyperglycemia. Institutions might justifiably choose more liberal targets than those promoted in national recommendations/guidelines2, 4850 until safe attainment of more moderate goals is demonstrated. However, even critics agree that uncontrolled hyperglycemia exceeding 180200 mg/dL in any acute care setting is undesirable. Moreover, strong observational data showing the hazards of hyperglycemia in noncritical care units (even after adjustment for severity of illness) combined with the high rate of adverse drug events associated with insulin use, argue strongly for a standardized approach to treating diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital. Even though no RCTs exist demonstrating outcomes benefits of achieving glycemic target on wards, the alternatives to control of hyperglycemia using scheduled insulin therapy are unacceptable. Oral agent therapy is potentially dangerous and within the necessary timeframe is likely to be ineffective; sliding scale management is inferior to basal‐bolus insulin therapy, as shown inan RCT,47 and is unsafe; and on the wards improved glycemic control can be achieved simultaneously with a reduction in hypoglycemia.51

INPATIENT GLYCEMIC CONTROL IS INCREASINGLY INCORPORATED INTO PUBLIC REPORTING, GUIDELINES, REGULATORY AGENCY, AND NATIONAL QUALITY INITIATIVE PRIORITIES

National quality initiatives, public reporting, pay‐for‐performance, and guideline‐based care continue to play an increasingly important role in the U.S. healthcare system. Over the years these initiatives have focused on various disease states (venous thromboembolism, congestive heart failure, community‐acquired pneumonia, etc.) in an attempt to standardize care and improve patient safety and quality. Inpatient hyperglycemic control is also increasingly being incorporated into public reporting, regulatory compliance, and national quality initiatives.

Professional organizations such as the ADA2 and AACE50 have published guidelines supporting improved glycemic control, the safe use of insulin, and other measures to improve care for hyperglycemic inpatients. The AACE has a Web site dedicated to hospital hyperglycemia.52 The Society of Hospital Medicine48 has created a resource room on its Web site and a workbook for improvement49 on optimizing the care of inpatients with hyperglycemia and diabetes. The guidelines and Web sites help raise awareness and educate physicians and healthcare workers in inpatient glucose management. The American Heart Association has incorporated specific recommendation regarding inpatient diabetic management in its Get With the Guidelines.53

The Joint Commission54 has developed an advanced disease‐specific certification on inpatient diabetes. Disease management programs are important components of complex healthcare systems that serve to coordinate chronic care, promote early detection and prevention, and reduce overall healthcare costs. Certification is increasingly important to providers, payers, and healthcare institutions because it demonstrates a commitment to quality and patient safety. The Joint Commission disease‐specific care certification is a patient‐centered model focusing on the delivery of clinical care and relationship between the practitioner and the patient. The evaluation and resulting certification by the Joint Commission is based on 3 core components: (1) an assessment of compliance with consensus‐based national standards; (2) the effective use of established clinical practice guidelines to manage and optimize care; and (3) an organized approach to performance measurement and improved activities.55 For inpatient diabetes, the Joint Commission program has 7 major elements following the ADA recommendations, including general recommendations regarding diabetic documentation, BG targets, preventing hypoglycemia, diabetes care providers, diabetes self‐management education, medical nutrition therapy, and BG monitoring.54 This mirrors the Call to Action Consensus Conference essential elements for successful glycemic control programs.1

Other organizations such as the Surgical Care Improvement Partnership (SCIP) and National Surgical Quality Improvement Program (NSQIP) have included perioperative glycemic control measures, as it impacts surgical wound infections. The University HealthSystem Consortium (UHC) has benchmarking data and endorses perioperative glycemic control measures, whereas the Institute for Healthcare Improvement (IHI) has focused on safe use of insulin practices in its 5 Million Lives campaign.

HOSPITALIZATION IS A MOMENT OF OPPORTUNITY TO ASSESS AND INTERVENE

The benefits of outpatient glycemic control and quality preventive care are well established, and the reduction of adverse consequences of uncontrolled diabetes are a high priority in ambulatory medicine.5658 Hospitalization provides an opportunity to identify previously undiagnosed diabetes or prediabetes and, for patients with known diabetes, to assess and impact upon the long term course of diabetes.

As a first step, unless a recent hemoglobin A1C (HbA1c) is known, among hospitalized hyperglycemic patients an HbA1C should be obtained upon admission. Greci et al.59 showed that an HbA1c level >6.0% was 100% specific (14/14) and 57% sensitive (12/21) for the diagnosis of diabetes. Among patients having known diabetes, an HbA1C elevation on admission may justify intensification of preadmission management at the time of discharge. If discharge and postdischarge adjustments of preadmission regimens are planned in response to admission A1C elevations, then the modified long‐term treatment strategy can improve the A1C in the ambulatory setting.60 Moreover, the event of hospitalization is the ideal teachable moment for patients and their caregivers to improve self‐care activities. Yet floor nurses may be overwhelmed by the tasks of patient education. For ideal patient education, both a nutritionist and a diabetes nurse educator are needed to assess compliance with medication, diet, and other aspects of care.6163 There also is need for outpatient follow‐up education. Finally, at the time of discharge, there is a duty and an opportunity for the diabetes provider to communicate with outpatient care providers about the patient's regimen and glycemic control, and also, based on information gathered during the admission, to convey any evidence that might support the need for a change of long‐term strategy.64 Unfortunately, the opportunity that hospitalization presents to assess, educate, and intervene frequently is underused.1, 8, 51, 65

LARGE GAPS EXIST BETWEEN CURRENT AND OPTIMAL CARE

Despite the evidence that inpatient glycemic control is important for patient outcomes, and despite guidelines recommending tighter inpatient glycemic control, clinical practice has been slow to change. In many institutions, inpatient glycemic management has not improved over the past decade, and large gaps remain between current practice and optimal practice.

Studies of individual institutions provide several insights into gaps in care. For example, Schnipper et al.66 examined practices on the general medicine service of an academic medical center in Boston in 2004. Among 107 prospectively identified patients with a known diagnosis of diabetes or at least 1 glucose reading >200 mg/dL (excluding patients with diabetic ketoacidosis, hyperglycemic hyperosmolar state, or pregnancy), they found scheduled long‐acting insulin prescribed in 43% of patients, scheduled short‐acting/rapid‐acting insulin in only 4% of patients, and 80 of 89 patients (90%) on the same sliding scale insulin regimen despite widely varying insulin requirements. Thirty‐one percent of glucose readings were >180 mg/dL compared with 1.2% of readings <60 mg/dL (but 11% of patients had at least 1 episode of hypoglycemia). Of the 75 patients with at least 1 episode of hyperglycemia or hypoglycemia, only 35% had any change to their insulin regimen during the first 5 days of the hospitalization.

Other studies have confirmed this concept of clinical inertia (ie, recognition of the problem but failure to act).67 A study by Cook et al.68 of all hospitalized non‐ICU patients with diabetes or hyperglycemia and length of stay of 3 days between 2001 and 2004 showed that 20% of patients had persistent hyperglycemia during the hospitalization (defined as a mean glucose >200 mg/dL). Forty‐six percent of patients whose average glucose was in the top tertile did not have their insulin regimen intensified to a combination of short‐acting/rapid‐acting and long‐acting insulin, and 35% of these patients either had no change in their total daily insulin dose or actually had a decrease in their dose when comparing the last 24 hours with the first 24 hours of hospitalization, a concept they term negative therapeutic momentum.

Perhaps the most well‐balanced view of the current state of medical practice comes from the UHC benchmarking project.69 UHC is an alliance of 90 academic health centers. For the diabetes project, each institution reviewed the records of 50 randomly selected patients over 18 years of age with at least a 72‐hour length of stay, 1 of 7 prespecified Diagnosis Related Group (DRG) codes, and at least 2 consecutive glucose readings >180 mg/dL or the receipt of insulin any time during the hospitalization. Patients with a history of pancreatic transplant, pregnant at the time of admission, receiving hospice or comfort care, or receiving insulin for a reason other than glucose management were excluded. The study showed widespread gaps in processes and outcomes (Table 1). Moreover, performance varied widely across hospitals. For example, the morning glucose in the ICU on the second measurement day was 110 mg/dL in 18% of patients for the median‐performing hospital, with a range of 0% to 67% across all 37 measured hospitals. In the non‐ICU setting on the second measurement day, 26% of patients had all BG measurements = 180 mg/dL in the median‐performing hospital, with a range of 7% to 48%. Of note, hypoglycemia was relatively uncommon: in the median hospital, 2.4% of patient‐days had 1 or more BG readings <50 mg/dL (range: 0%8.6%). Finally, in the median‐performing hospital, effective insulin therapy (defined as short‐acting/rapid‐acting and long‐acting subcutaneous insulin, continuous insulin infusion, or subcutaneous insulin pump therapy) was prescribed in 45% of patients, with a range of 12% to 77% across measured hospitals.

Results of the University HealthSystem Consortium Benchmarking Project
Key Performance Measure Results for Median‐Performing Hospital (%)
  • Abbreviation: ICU, intensive care unit.

  • Combination of short‐acting/rapid‐acting and long‐acting subcutaneous insulins, continuous insulin infusion, or subcutaneous insulin pump.

Documentation of diabetes 100
Hob A1c assessment within 30 days 36.1
Glucose measurement within 8 hours of admission 78.6
Glucose monitoring 4 times a day 85.4
Median glucose reading > 200 mg/dL 10.3
Effective insulin therapy* 44.7
ICU day 2 morning glucose 110 mg/dL 17.7
Non‐ICU day 2 all glucose readings 180 mg/dL 26.3
Patient‐days with at least 1 glucose reading < 50 mg/dL 2.4

FREQUENT PROBLEMS WITH COMMUNICATION AND COORDINATION

Those who work closely with frontline practitioners striving to improve inpatient glycemic management have noticed other deficiencies in care.1, 70 These include: a lack of coordination between feeding, BG measurement, and insulin administration, leading to mistimed and incorrectly dosed insulin; frequent use of sliding‐scale only regimens despite evidence that they are useless at best and harmful at worst;6, 47, 60, 71 discharge summaries that often do not mention follow‐up plans for hyperglycemic management; incomplete patient educational programs; breakdowns in care at transition points; nursing and medical staffs that are unevenly educated about the proper use of insulin; and patients who are often angry or confused about their diabetes care in the hospital. Collectively, these gaps in care serve as prime targets for any glycemic control program.

HYPOGLYCEMIA IS A PROMINENT INPATIENT SAFETY CONCERN

Hypoglycemia is common in the inpatient setting and is a legitimate safety concern. In a recently reported series of 2174 hospitalized patients receiving antihyperglycemic agents, it was found that 9.5% of patients experienced a total 484 hypoglycemic episodes (defined as 60 mg/dL).72 Hypoglycemia often occurred in the setting of insulin therapy and frequently resulted from a failure to recognize trends in BG readings or other clues that a patient was at risk for developing hypoglycemia.73 A common thread is the risk created by interruption of carbohydrate intake, noted by Fischer et al.73 and once again in the recent ICU study by Vriesendorp et al.74 Sources of error include: lack of coordination between feeding and medication administration, leading to mistiming of insulin action; lack of sufficient frequency in BG monitoring; lack of clarity or uniformity in the writing of orders; failure to recognize changes in insulin requirements due to advanced age, renal failure, liver disease, or change in clinical status; steroid use with subsequent tapering or interruption; changes in feeding; failure to reconcile medications; inappropriate use of oral antihyperglycemic agents, and communication or handoff failures.

It has been difficult to sort out whether hypoglycemia is a marker of severity of illness or whether it is an independent factor leading to poor outcomes. Observational studies lend credibility to the concept that patients having congestive heart failure or myocardial infarction may be at risk for excessive mortality if their average BG resides in the low end of the normal range.7578 Sympathetic activation occurs as the threshold for hypoglycemia is approached, such as occurs at BG = 70 or 72 mg/dL.79 Patients living with BG levels observed to be in the low end of the normal range might experience more severe but unobserved and undocumented episodes of neuroglycopenia. Arrhythmia and fatality have been directly attributed to strict glycemic control.80, 81 We are confronted with the need to interpret well conducted observational studies, evaluating subgroups at risk, and using multivariate analysis to assess the impact of hypoglycemia upon outcomes.82 In such studies, we will need to examine high‐risk subgroups, including cardiac patients, in particular, for the possibility that there is a J‐shaped curve for mortality as a function of average BG.

Unfortunately, clinical inertia exists in response to hypoglycemia just as it does with hyperglycemia. One recent study examined 52 patients who received intravenous 50% dextrose solution for an episode of hypoglycemia.83 Changes to insulin regimens were subsequently made in only 21 patients (40%), and diabetes specialists agreed with the changes for 11 of these patients. The other 31 patients (60%) received no changes in treatment, and diabetes specialists agreed with that decision for only 10 of these patients.

Although some increase in hypoglycemia might be expected with initiation of tight glycemic control efforts, the solution is not to undertreat hyperglycemia. Hyperglycemia creates an unsafe setting for the treatment of illness and disease. Sliding‐scaleonly regimens are ineffective in securing glycemic control and can result in increases in hypoglycemia as well as hyperglycemic excursions.6, 66 Inappropriate withholding of insulin doses can lead to severe glycemic excursions and even iatrogenic diabetic ketoacidosis (DKA). Systems approaches to avoid the errors outlined above can minimize or even reverse the increased risk of hypoglycemia expected with tighter glycemic targets.51

A SYSTEMS APPROACH IS NEEDED FOR THESE MULTIPLE COMPLEX PROBLEMS

Care is of the hyperglycemic inpatient is inherently complex. Previously established treatments are often inappropriate under conditions of altered insulin resistance, changing patterns of nutrition and carbohydrate exposure, comorbidities, concomitant medications, and rapidly changing medical and surgical status. Patients frequently undergo changes in the route and amount of nutritional exposure, including discrete meals, continuous intravenous dextrose, nil per orem (nothing by mouth status; NPO) status, grazing on nutritional supplements or liquid diets with or without meals, bolus enteral feedings, overnight enteral feedings with daytime grazing, total parenteral nutrition, continuous peritoneal dialysis, and overnight cycling of peritoneal dialysis. Relying on individual expertise and vigilance to negotiate this complex terrain without safeguards, protocols, standardization of orders, and other systems change is impractical and unwise.

Transitions across care providers and locations lead to multiple opportunities for breakdown in the quality, consistency, and safety of care.64, 65 At the time of ward transfer or change of patient status, previous medication and monitoring orders sometimes are purged. At the time of discharge, there may be risk of continuation of anti‐hyperglycemic therapy, initiated to cover medical stress, in doses that will subsequently be unsafe.

In the face of this complexity, educational programs alone will not suffice to improve care. Institutional commitment and systems changes are essential.

MARKED IMPROVEMENT IS POSSIBLE AND TOOLS EXIST: A ROADMAP IS IN PLACE

Fortunately, a roadmap is in place to help us achieve better glycemic control, improve insulin management, and address the long list of current deficiencies in care. This is imperative to develop consistent processes in order to achieve maximum patient quality outcomes that effective glycemic management offers. This roadmap entails 4 components: (1) national awareness, (2) national guidelines, (3) consensus statements, and (4) effective tools. As mentioned above, the first two components of this roadmap are now in place.

As these national guidelines become more widely accepted, the next step will be the incorporation of this into programs like Pay‐for Performance and the Physician Quality Reporting Initiative (PQRI), which will impact reimbursement to both hospitals and providers.

Regarding the third component, a recent multidisciplinary consensus conference1 outlined the essential elements needed for successful implementation of an inpatient glycemic control program which include:

  • An appropriate level of administrative support.

  • Formation of a multidisciplinary steering committee to drive the development of initiatives and empowered to enact change.

  • Assessment of current processes, quality of care, and barriers to practice change.

  • Development and implementation of interventions including standardized order sets, protocols, policies and algorithms with associated educational programs.

  • Metrics for evaluation of glycemic control, hypoglycemia, insulin use patterns, and other aspects of care.

Finally, extensive resources and effective tools are now available to help institutions achieve better inpatient glucose control. The Society of Hospital Medicine (SHM), in conjunction with the ADA, AACE, the American College of Physicians (ACP), the Case Management Society of America (CMSA), the American Society of Consultant Pharmacists, nursing, and diabetic educators have all partnered to produce a comprehensive guide to effective implementation of glycemic control and preventing hypoglycemia.49 This comprehensive workbook is a proven performance improvement framework and is available on the SHM Web site.48 Details and examples of all essential elements are covered in this workbook along with opportunities for marked improvement bolstered by integration of high reliability design features and attention to effective implementation techniques. The remainder of this supplement crystallizes a substantial portion of this material. The AACE has also recently offered a valuable web‐based resource to encourage institutional glycemic control efforts.49

GLYCEMIC CONTROL INITIATIVES CAN BE COST‐EFFECTIVE

Achieving optimal glycemic control safely requires monitoring, education, and other measures, which can be expensive, labor intensive, and require coordination of the services of many hospital divisions. This incremental expense has been shown to be cost‐effective in a variety of settings.1, 84, 85 The costs of glycemic control initiatives have demonstrated a good return on investment via:

  • Improved LOS, readmission rates, morbidity, and mortality.

  • Improved documentation of patient acuity and related payment for acuity.

  • Income generated via incremental physician and allied health professional billing.

CONCLUSION AND SUMMARY

Evidence exists that appropriate management of hyperglycemia improves outcomes, whereas the current state of affairs is that most medical centers currently manage this suboptimally. This is concerning given the magnitude of diabetes and hyperglycemia in our inpatient setting in the United States. To bring awareness to this issue, multiple initiatives (guidelines, certification programs, workbooks, etc.) are available by various organizations including the ADA, AACE, SCIP, NSQIP, IHI, UHC, the Joint Commission, and SHM. However, this is not enough. Change occurs at the local level, and institutional prioritization and support is needed to empower a multidisciplinary steering committee, with appropriate administrative support, to standardize and improve systems in the face of substantial cultural issues and complex barriers. Improved data collection and reporting, incremental monitoring, creation of metrics, and improved documentation are an absolutely necessary necessity to achieve breakthrough levels of improvement.

Now the time is right to make an assertive effort to improve inpatient glycemic control and related issues, and push for appropriate support at your institution to help achieve this in the interest of patient safety and optimal outcomes.

Medical centers are faced with multiple competing priorities when deciding how to focus their improvement efforts and meet the ever expanding menu of publicly reported and regulatory issues. In this article we expand on the rationale for supporting inpatient glycemic control programs as a priority that should be moved near the top of the list. We review the evidence for establishing glycemic range targets, and also review the limitations of this evidence, acknowledging, as does the American Diabetes Association (ADA), that in both the critical care and non‐critical care venue, glycemic goals must take into account the individual patient's situation as well as hospital system support for achieving these goals.1, 2 We emphasize that inpatient glycemic control programs are needed to address a wide variety of quality and safety issues surrounding the care of the inpatient with diabetes and hyperglycemia, and we wish to elevate the dialogue beyond arguments surrounding adoption of one glycemic target versus another. The Society of Hospital Medicine Glycemic Control Task Force members are not in unanimous agreement with the American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists (AACE)/ADA inpatient glycemic targets. However, we do agree on several other important points, which we will expand on in this article:

  • Uncontrolled hyperglycemia and iatrogenic hypoglycemia are common and potentially dangerous situations that are largely preventable with safe and proven methods.

  • The current state of care for our inpatients with hyperglycemia is unacceptably poor on a broad scale, with substandard education, communication, coordination, and treatment issues.

  • Concerted efforts with changes in the design of the process of care are needed to improve this state of affairs.

DIABETES AND HYPERGLYCEMIA ARE VERY COMMON INPATIENT CONDITIONS

Diabetes mellitus (DM) has reached epidemic proportions in the United States. A reported 9.3% of adults over 20 years of age have diabetes, representing over 20 million persons. Despite increasing awareness, diabetes remains undiagnosed in approximately 30% of these persons.3 Concurrent with the increasing prevalence of diabetes in the U.S. population from 1980 through 2003, the number of hospital discharges with diabetes as any listed diagnosis more than doubled, going from 2.2 to 5.1 million discharges.4 Hospital care for patients with diabetes and hyperglycemia poses a significant health economic burden in the United States, representing over 40 billion dollars in annual direct medical expenditures.5

Hyperglycemia in the hospital may be due to known diabetes, to previously unrecognized diabetes, to prediabetes, and/or to the stress of surgery or illness. Deterioration in glycemic control in the hospital setting is most commonly associated with one or more factors, including stress‐induced release of insulin counterregulatory hormones (catecholamines, cortisol, glucagon, and growth hormone), exogenous administration of high dose glucocorticoids, and suboptimal glycemic management strategies.68 In a Belgian medical intensive care unit (MICU) randomized controlled trial (RCT) of strict versus conventional glycemic control, mean blood glucose (BG) on admission to the unit in the intention to treat group was 162 70 mg/dL (n = 1200),9 and in this group's RCT of 1548 surgical intensive care unit (SICU) patients, BG > 110 mg/dL was observed in over 70% of subjects.10 Mean BG of >145 mg/dL has been reported in 39%11 and BG >200 mg/dL in anywhere from 11% to 31% of intensive care unit (ICU) patients.10, 12 For general medicine and surgery, 1 study of 2030 patients admitted to a teaching hospital revealed that 26% of admissions had a known history of DM and 12% had new hyperglycemia, as evidenced by an admission or in‐hospital fasting BG of 126 mg/dL or more or a random BG of 200 mg/dL or more on 2 or more determinations.13 National and regional estimates on hospital use maintained by the Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality include data concerning diabetes diagnoses alone, without hyperglycemia, and may be displayed by querying its Web site.14 In cardiovascular populations almost 70% of patients having a first myocardial infarction have been reported to have either known DM, previously unrecognized diabetes, or impaired glucose tolerance.15

THE EVIDENCE SUPPORTS INPATIENT GLYCEMIC CONTROL

Evidence: Physiology

The pathophysiologic mechanisms through which hyperglycemia is linked to suboptimal outcomes in the hospital are complex and multifactorial. Although it is beyond the scope of this article to discuss these mechanisms in detail, research has broadly focused in the following areas: (1) immune system dysfunction, associated with a proinflammatory state and impaired white blood cell function; (2) metabolic derangements leading to oxidative stress, release of free fatty acids, reduction in endogenous insulin secretion, and fluid and electrolyte imbalance; and (3) a wide variety of vascular system responses (eg, endothelial dysfunction with impairment of tissue perfusion, a prothrombotic state, increased platelet aggregation, and left ventricular dysfunction).8, 1618

Conversely administration of insulin suppresses or reverses many of these abnormalities including generation of reactive oxygen species (ROS) and activation of inflammatory mechanisms,19 and leads to a fall in C‐reactive protein, which accompanied the clinical benefit of intensive insulin therapy (IIT) in the Leuven, Belgium, ICU population,20 and prevents mitochondrial abnormalities in hepatocytes.21 In the same surgical ICU cohort, Langouche et al.22 report suppression of intracellular adhesion molecule‐1 (ICAM‐1) and E‐selectin, markers of inflammation, and reduction in plasma nitric oxide (NO) and innate nitric oxide (iNOS) expression with insulin administration in patients treated with intravenous (IV) IIT.22 These data further support the role of insulin infusion in suppressing inflammation and endothelial dysfunction. The authors suggest that maintaining normoglycemia with IIT during critical illness protects the endothelium, thereby contributing to prevention of organ failure and death.22 Based on accumulating data in the literature such as that cited above, it has been suggested that a new paradigm in which glucose and insulin are related not only through their metabolic action but also through inflammatory mechanisms offers important potential therapeutic opportunities.19

Evidence: Epidemiology/Observational Studies/Non‐RCT Interventional Studies

A strong association between hospital hyperglycemia and negative outcomes has been reported in numerous observational studies in diverse adult medical and surgical settings. In over 1800 hospital admissions, those with new hyperglycemia had an in‐hospital mortality rate of 16% compared with 3% mortality in patients with known diabetes and 1.7% in normoglycemic patients (P < 0.01). These data suggest that hyperglycemia due to previously unrecognized diabetes may be an independent marker of in‐hospital mortality.13

Hyperglycemia has been linked to adverse outcomes in myocardial infarction, stroke,2328 postoperative nosocomial infection risk, pneumonia, renal transplant, cancer chemotherapy, percutaneous coronary interventions, and cardiac surgery.2938 These observational studies have the usual limitations inherent in their design. Demonstrating a strong association of hyperglycemia with adverse outcomes is not a guarantee that the hyperglycemia is the cause for the poor outcome, as hyperglycemia can reflect a patient under more stress who is at a higher risk for adverse outcome. By the same token, the strong association of hyperglycemia with the risk of poor outcomes seen in these studies does not guarantee that euglycemia would mitigate this risk.

Nonetheless, there are several factors that make the body of evidence for glycemic control more compelling. First, the association has a rational physiologic basis as described above. Second, the associations are consistent across a variety of patient populations and disease entities, and demonstrate a dose‐response relationship. Third, in studies that control for comorbidities and severity of illness, hyperglycemia persists as an independent risk factor for adverse outcomes, whether the patient has a preexisting diagnosis of diabetes or not. Last, non‐RCT interventional studies and RCTs largely reinforce these studies.

The Portland Diabetic Project has reported prospective, nonrandomized data over 17 years on the use of an IV insulin therapy protocol in cardiac surgery patients.38 This program has implemented stepped lowering of target BG, with the most recent data report implementing a goal BG <150 mg/dL.35 The current protocol uses a BG target of 70110 mg/dL, but results have not yet been published.39 Mortality and deep sternal wound infection rates for patients with diabetes who remain on the IV insulin protocol for 3 days have been lowered to levels equivalent to those for nondiabetic patients. This group has also reported reductions in length of stay and cost‐effectiveness of targeted glycemic control in the cardiac surgery population.35 Their data have to a large extent driven a nationwide movement to implement targeted BG control in cardiac surgery patients.

Another large ICU study (mixed medical‐surgical, n = 800 patients) also supports a benefit through targeted BG control (130.7 versus 152.3 mg/dL, P < 0.001) when compared with historical controls. This study demonstrated reduction in in‐hospital mortality (relative risk reduction 29.3%, P = 0.002), duration of ICU stay (10.8%, P = 0.04), acute renal failure (75%, P = 0.03), and blood transfusions (18.7%, P = 0.002),40 representing a similar magnitude of effect as was demonstrated by the Belgian group.

Evidence: RCTs

Evidence is accumulating that demonstrates an advantage in terms of morbidity and mortality when targeted glycemic control using intravenous insulin infusion is implemented in the hospital. The most robust data have been reported from ICU and cardiac surgery settings. The largest randomized, controlled study to date enrolled 1548 patients in a surgical ICU in Leuven, Belgium who were randomized to either intensive (IT) or conventional (CT) insulin therapy. Mean glucose attained was 103 19 and 153 33 mg/dL in each arm, respectively. The intensive insulin group demonstrated a reduction in both ICU (4.6% versus 8.0%) and in‐hospital mortality (7.2% versus 10.9%), as well as bloodstream infections, acute renal failure, transfusions, and polyneuropathy, the latter being reflected by duration of mechanical ventilation (P < 0.01 for all). Although a similar study in an MICU did not achieve statistical significance in the overall intention‐to‐treat analysis, it did demonstrate reductions in mortality (from 52.5% to 43.0%) in patients with at least 3 days of ICU treatment. It should also be noted that in this MICU population hypoglycemia rates were higher and level of glycemic control attained not as rigorous as in the same group's SICU cohort, factors which may have had an impact on observed outcomes. A meta‐analysis of these two Leuven, Belgium, studies demonstrated a reduction in mortality (23.6% versus 20.4%, absolute risk reduction [ARR] 3.2%, P = 0.004)) in all patients treated with IIT, with a larger reduction in mortality (37.9% versus 30.1%, ARR 7.8%, P = 0.002) observed in patients with at least 3 days of IIT, as well as substantial reductions in morbidity.9, 10, 41, 42

Several other studies must be mentioned in this context. A small (n = 61), randomized study in another SICU did not show a mortality benefit, perhaps because the number of subjects was not adequate to reach statistical significance, but did result in a significant reduction in nosocomial infections in patients receiving IIT (BG = 125 versus 179 mg/dL, P < 0.001).43 Two international multicenter studies recently stopped enrollment due to excess rates of hypoglycemia. The Volume Substitution and Insulin Therapy in Severe Sepsis (VISEP) study, in a mixed medical and surgical sepsis population, showed no significant reduction in mortality in the intensively‐treated group. Serious adverse events were reported according to standard definitions. Enrollment was stopped before the full number of subjects had been randomized. Among the 537 evaluable cases, hypoglycemia (BG < 40 mg/dL) was reported as 17.0% in the IT group and 4.1% (P < 0.001) in the control group,44 and the rate of serious adverse events was higher in the IT group (10.9% versus 5.2%, P = 0.01). It is notable that the rate of hypoglycemia was comparable to the 18.7% rate seen in the IT group in the Leuven, Belgium, medical ICU study.9 The Glucontrol study enrolled 855 medical and surgical ICU patients and was similarly terminated because of hypoglycemia (BG < 40 mg/dL) at a rate of 8.6% compared to 2.4% in the control group (P < 0.001). Insulin infusion protocols and outcome data have not yet been published.42, 45

These studies with very high hypoglycemia rates each used an algorithm based on the Leuven, Belgium, protocol. The rates of severe hypoglycemia are 34 that reported by a variety of others achieving similar or identical glycemic targets. Hypoglycemia should not be construed as a reason to not use a standardized insulin infusion protocol. In comparing protocols that have been published, it is apparent that rates of hypoglycemia differ substantially and that performance results of some algorithms are not necessarily replicable across sites.46 Dose‐defining designs can be substantively more sophisticated than those used in the trials mentioned, in some cases incorporating principles of control engineering. The variability of hypoglycemia rates under differing insulin infusion protocols is a compelling reason to devote institutional effort to monitoring the efficacy and safety of the infusion protocols that are used.

High‐level evidence from randomized, controlled trials demonstrating outcomes benefit through targeted BG control outside the ICU is lacking at this point in time, but it must be noted that feasibility is suggested by a recent randomized control trial (RABBIT2) that demonstrated the superiority of basal bolus insulin regimens to sliding scale insulin in securing glycemic control, without any increase in hypoglycemia.47

Summing Up the Evidence

It is clear that hyperglycemia is associated with negative clinical outcomes throughout the hospital, and level A evidence is available to support tight glucose control in the SICU setting. However, in view of the imperfect and incomplete nature of the evidence, controversy persists around how stringent glycemic targets should be in the ICU, on whether glycemic targets should differ between SICU and MICU patients, and especially what the targets should be in the non‐ICU setting. There should be hesitancy to extrapolate glycemic targets to be applied beyond the populations that have been studied with RCTs or to assume benefit for medical conditions that have not been examined for the impact of interventions to control hyperglycemia. Institutions might justifiably choose more liberal targets than those promoted in national recommendations/guidelines2, 4850 until safe attainment of more moderate goals is demonstrated. However, even critics agree that uncontrolled hyperglycemia exceeding 180200 mg/dL in any acute care setting is undesirable. Moreover, strong observational data showing the hazards of hyperglycemia in noncritical care units (even after adjustment for severity of illness) combined with the high rate of adverse drug events associated with insulin use, argue strongly for a standardized approach to treating diabetes and hyperglycemia in the hospital. Even though no RCTs exist demonstrating outcomes benefits of achieving glycemic target on wards, the alternatives to control of hyperglycemia using scheduled insulin therapy are unacceptable. Oral agent therapy is potentially dangerous and within the necessary timeframe is likely to be ineffective; sliding scale management is inferior to basal‐bolus insulin therapy, as shown inan RCT,47 and is unsafe; and on the wards improved glycemic control can be achieved simultaneously with a reduction in hypoglycemia.51

INPATIENT GLYCEMIC CONTROL IS INCREASINGLY INCORPORATED INTO PUBLIC REPORTING, GUIDELINES, REGULATORY AGENCY, AND NATIONAL QUALITY INITIATIVE PRIORITIES

National quality initiatives, public reporting, pay‐for‐performance, and guideline‐based care continue to play an increasingly important role in the U.S. healthcare system. Over the years these initiatives have focused on various disease states (venous thromboembolism, congestive heart failure, community‐acquired pneumonia, etc.) in an attempt to standardize care and improve patient safety and quality. Inpatient hyperglycemic control is also increasingly being incorporated into public reporting, regulatory compliance, and national quality initiatives.

Professional organizations such as the ADA2 and AACE50 have published guidelines supporting improved glycemic control, the safe use of insulin, and other measures to improve care for hyperglycemic inpatients. The AACE has a Web site dedicated to hospital hyperglycemia.52 The Society of Hospital Medicine48 has created a resource room on its Web site and a workbook for improvement49 on optimizing the care of inpatients with hyperglycemia and diabetes. The guidelines and Web sites help raise awareness and educate physicians and healthcare workers in inpatient glucose management. The American Heart Association has incorporated specific recommendation regarding inpatient diabetic management in its Get With the Guidelines.53

The Joint Commission54 has developed an advanced disease‐specific certification on inpatient diabetes. Disease management programs are important components of complex healthcare systems that serve to coordinate chronic care, promote early detection and prevention, and reduce overall healthcare costs. Certification is increasingly important to providers, payers, and healthcare institutions because it demonstrates a commitment to quality and patient safety. The Joint Commission disease‐specific care certification is a patient‐centered model focusing on the delivery of clinical care and relationship between the practitioner and the patient. The evaluation and resulting certification by the Joint Commission is based on 3 core components: (1) an assessment of compliance with consensus‐based national standards; (2) the effective use of established clinical practice guidelines to manage and optimize care; and (3) an organized approach to performance measurement and improved activities.55 For inpatient diabetes, the Joint Commission program has 7 major elements following the ADA recommendations, including general recommendations regarding diabetic documentation, BG targets, preventing hypoglycemia, diabetes care providers, diabetes self‐management education, medical nutrition therapy, and BG monitoring.54 This mirrors the Call to Action Consensus Conference essential elements for successful glycemic control programs.1

Other organizations such as the Surgical Care Improvement Partnership (SCIP) and National Surgical Quality Improvement Program (NSQIP) have included perioperative glycemic control measures, as it impacts surgical wound infections. The University HealthSystem Consortium (UHC) has benchmarking data and endorses perioperative glycemic control measures, whereas the Institute for Healthcare Improvement (IHI) has focused on safe use of insulin practices in its 5 Million Lives campaign.

HOSPITALIZATION IS A MOMENT OF OPPORTUNITY TO ASSESS AND INTERVENE

The benefits of outpatient glycemic control and quality preventive care are well established, and the reduction of adverse consequences of uncontrolled diabetes are a high priority in ambulatory medicine.5658 Hospitalization provides an opportunity to identify previously undiagnosed diabetes or prediabetes and, for patients with known diabetes, to assess and impact upon the long term course of diabetes.

As a first step, unless a recent hemoglobin A1C (HbA1c) is known, among hospitalized hyperglycemic patients an HbA1C should be obtained upon admission. Greci et al.59 showed that an HbA1c level >6.0% was 100% specific (14/14) and 57% sensitive (12/21) for the diagnosis of diabetes. Among patients having known diabetes, an HbA1C elevation on admission may justify intensification of preadmission management at the time of discharge. If discharge and postdischarge adjustments of preadmission regimens are planned in response to admission A1C elevations, then the modified long‐term treatment strategy can improve the A1C in the ambulatory setting.60 Moreover, the event of hospitalization is the ideal teachable moment for patients and their caregivers to improve self‐care activities. Yet floor nurses may be overwhelmed by the tasks of patient education. For ideal patient education, both a nutritionist and a diabetes nurse educator are needed to assess compliance with medication, diet, and other aspects of care.6163 There also is need for outpatient follow‐up education. Finally, at the time of discharge, there is a duty and an opportunity for the diabetes provider to communicate with outpatient care providers about the patient's regimen and glycemic control, and also, based on information gathered during the admission, to convey any evidence that might support the need for a change of long‐term strategy.64 Unfortunately, the opportunity that hospitalization presents to assess, educate, and intervene frequently is underused.1, 8, 51, 65

LARGE GAPS EXIST BETWEEN CURRENT AND OPTIMAL CARE

Despite the evidence that inpatient glycemic control is important for patient outcomes, and despite guidelines recommending tighter inpatient glycemic control, clinical practice has been slow to change. In many institutions, inpatient glycemic management has not improved over the past decade, and large gaps remain between current practice and optimal practice.

Studies of individual institutions provide several insights into gaps in care. For example, Schnipper et al.66 examined practices on the general medicine service of an academic medical center in Boston in 2004. Among 107 prospectively identified patients with a known diagnosis of diabetes or at least 1 glucose reading >200 mg/dL (excluding patients with diabetic ketoacidosis, hyperglycemic hyperosmolar state, or pregnancy), they found scheduled long‐acting insulin prescribed in 43% of patients, scheduled short‐acting/rapid‐acting insulin in only 4% of patients, and 80 of 89 patients (90%) on the same sliding scale insulin regimen despite widely varying insulin requirements. Thirty‐one percent of glucose readings were >180 mg/dL compared with 1.2% of readings <60 mg/dL (but 11% of patients had at least 1 episode of hypoglycemia). Of the 75 patients with at least 1 episode of hyperglycemia or hypoglycemia, only 35% had any change to their insulin regimen during the first 5 days of the hospitalization.

Other studies have confirmed this concept of clinical inertia (ie, recognition of the problem but failure to act).67 A study by Cook et al.68 of all hospitalized non‐ICU patients with diabetes or hyperglycemia and length of stay of 3 days between 2001 and 2004 showed that 20% of patients had persistent hyperglycemia during the hospitalization (defined as a mean glucose >200 mg/dL). Forty‐six percent of patients whose average glucose was in the top tertile did not have their insulin regimen intensified to a combination of short‐acting/rapid‐acting and long‐acting insulin, and 35% of these patients either had no change in their total daily insulin dose or actually had a decrease in their dose when comparing the last 24 hours with the first 24 hours of hospitalization, a concept they term negative therapeutic momentum.

Perhaps the most well‐balanced view of the current state of medical practice comes from the UHC benchmarking project.69 UHC is an alliance of 90 academic health centers. For the diabetes project, each institution reviewed the records of 50 randomly selected patients over 18 years of age with at least a 72‐hour length of stay, 1 of 7 prespecified Diagnosis Related Group (DRG) codes, and at least 2 consecutive glucose readings >180 mg/dL or the receipt of insulin any time during the hospitalization. Patients with a history of pancreatic transplant, pregnant at the time of admission, receiving hospice or comfort care, or receiving insulin for a reason other than glucose management were excluded. The study showed widespread gaps in processes and outcomes (Table 1). Moreover, performance varied widely across hospitals. For example, the morning glucose in the ICU on the second measurement day was 110 mg/dL in 18% of patients for the median‐performing hospital, with a range of 0% to 67% across all 37 measured hospitals. In the non‐ICU setting on the second measurement day, 26% of patients had all BG measurements = 180 mg/dL in the median‐performing hospital, with a range of 7% to 48%. Of note, hypoglycemia was relatively uncommon: in the median hospital, 2.4% of patient‐days had 1 or more BG readings <50 mg/dL (range: 0%8.6%). Finally, in the median‐performing hospital, effective insulin therapy (defined as short‐acting/rapid‐acting and long‐acting subcutaneous insulin, continuous insulin infusion, or subcutaneous insulin pump therapy) was prescribed in 45% of patients, with a range of 12% to 77% across measured hospitals.

Results of the University HealthSystem Consortium Benchmarking Project
Key Performance Measure Results for Median‐Performing Hospital (%)
  • Abbreviation: ICU, intensive care unit.

  • Combination of short‐acting/rapid‐acting and long‐acting subcutaneous insulins, continuous insulin infusion, or subcutaneous insulin pump.

Documentation of diabetes 100
Hob A1c assessment within 30 days 36.1
Glucose measurement within 8 hours of admission 78.6
Glucose monitoring 4 times a day 85.4
Median glucose reading > 200 mg/dL 10.3
Effective insulin therapy* 44.7
ICU day 2 morning glucose 110 mg/dL 17.7
Non‐ICU day 2 all glucose readings 180 mg/dL 26.3
Patient‐days with at least 1 glucose reading < 50 mg/dL 2.4

FREQUENT PROBLEMS WITH COMMUNICATION AND COORDINATION

Those who work closely with frontline practitioners striving to improve inpatient glycemic management have noticed other deficiencies in care.1, 70 These include: a lack of coordination between feeding, BG measurement, and insulin administration, leading to mistimed and incorrectly dosed insulin; frequent use of sliding‐scale only regimens despite evidence that they are useless at best and harmful at worst;6, 47, 60, 71 discharge summaries that often do not mention follow‐up plans for hyperglycemic management; incomplete patient educational programs; breakdowns in care at transition points; nursing and medical staffs that are unevenly educated about the proper use of insulin; and patients who are often angry or confused about their diabetes care in the hospital. Collectively, these gaps in care serve as prime targets for any glycemic control program.

HYPOGLYCEMIA IS A PROMINENT INPATIENT SAFETY CONCERN

Hypoglycemia is common in the inpatient setting and is a legitimate safety concern. In a recently reported series of 2174 hospitalized patients receiving antihyperglycemic agents, it was found that 9.5% of patients experienced a total 484 hypoglycemic episodes (defined as 60 mg/dL).72 Hypoglycemia often occurred in the setting of insulin therapy and frequently resulted from a failure to recognize trends in BG readings or other clues that a patient was at risk for developing hypoglycemia.73 A common thread is the risk created by interruption of carbohydrate intake, noted by Fischer et al.73 and once again in the recent ICU study by Vriesendorp et al.74 Sources of error include: lack of coordination between feeding and medication administration, leading to mistiming of insulin action; lack of sufficient frequency in BG monitoring; lack of clarity or uniformity in the writing of orders; failure to recognize changes in insulin requirements due to advanced age, renal failure, liver disease, or change in clinical status; steroid use with subsequent tapering or interruption; changes in feeding; failure to reconcile medications; inappropriate use of oral antihyperglycemic agents, and communication or handoff failures.

It has been difficult to sort out whether hypoglycemia is a marker of severity of illness or whether it is an independent factor leading to poor outcomes. Observational studies lend credibility to the concept that patients having congestive heart failure or myocardial infarction may be at risk for excessive mortality if their average BG resides in the low end of the normal range.7578 Sympathetic activation occurs as the threshold for hypoglycemia is approached, such as occurs at BG = 70 or 72 mg/dL.79 Patients living with BG levels observed to be in the low end of the normal range might experience more severe but unobserved and undocumented episodes of neuroglycopenia. Arrhythmia and fatality have been directly attributed to strict glycemic control.80, 81 We are confronted with the need to interpret well conducted observational studies, evaluating subgroups at risk, and using multivariate analysis to assess the impact of hypoglycemia upon outcomes.82 In such studies, we will need to examine high‐risk subgroups, including cardiac patients, in particular, for the possibility that there is a J‐shaped curve for mortality as a function of average BG.

Unfortunately, clinical inertia exists in response to hypoglycemia just as it does with hyperglycemia. One recent study examined 52 patients who received intravenous 50% dextrose solution for an episode of hypoglycemia.83 Changes to insulin regimens were subsequently made in only 21 patients (40%), and diabetes specialists agreed with the changes for 11 of these patients. The other 31 patients (60%) received no changes in treatment, and diabetes specialists agreed with that decision for only 10 of these patients.

Although some increase in hypoglycemia might be expected with initiation of tight glycemic control efforts, the solution is not to undertreat hyperglycemia. Hyperglycemia creates an unsafe setting for the treatment of illness and disease. Sliding‐scaleonly regimens are ineffective in securing glycemic control and can result in increases in hypoglycemia as well as hyperglycemic excursions.6, 66 Inappropriate withholding of insulin doses can lead to severe glycemic excursions and even iatrogenic diabetic ketoacidosis (DKA). Systems approaches to avoid the errors outlined above can minimize or even reverse the increased risk of hypoglycemia expected with tighter glycemic targets.51

A SYSTEMS APPROACH IS NEEDED FOR THESE MULTIPLE COMPLEX PROBLEMS

Care is of the hyperglycemic inpatient is inherently complex. Previously established treatments are often inappropriate under conditions of altered insulin resistance, changing patterns of nutrition and carbohydrate exposure, comorbidities, concomitant medications, and rapidly changing medical and surgical status. Patients frequently undergo changes in the route and amount of nutritional exposure, including discrete meals, continuous intravenous dextrose, nil per orem (nothing by mouth status; NPO) status, grazing on nutritional supplements or liquid diets with or without meals, bolus enteral feedings, overnight enteral feedings with daytime grazing, total parenteral nutrition, continuous peritoneal dialysis, and overnight cycling of peritoneal dialysis. Relying on individual expertise and vigilance to negotiate this complex terrain without safeguards, protocols, standardization of orders, and other systems change is impractical and unwise.

Transitions across care providers and locations lead to multiple opportunities for breakdown in the quality, consistency, and safety of care.64, 65 At the time of ward transfer or change of patient status, previous medication and monitoring orders sometimes are purged. At the time of discharge, there may be risk of continuation of anti‐hyperglycemic therapy, initiated to cover medical stress, in doses that will subsequently be unsafe.

In the face of this complexity, educational programs alone will not suffice to improve care. Institutional commitment and systems changes are essential.

MARKED IMPROVEMENT IS POSSIBLE AND TOOLS EXIST: A ROADMAP IS IN PLACE

Fortunately, a roadmap is in place to help us achieve better glycemic control, improve insulin management, and address the long list of current deficiencies in care. This is imperative to develop consistent processes in order to achieve maximum patient quality outcomes that effective glycemic management offers. This roadmap entails 4 components: (1) national awareness, (2) national guidelines, (3) consensus statements, and (4) effective tools. As mentioned above, the first two components of this roadmap are now in place.

As these national guidelines become more widely accepted, the next step will be the incorporation of this into programs like Pay‐for Performance and the Physician Quality Reporting Initiative (PQRI), which will impact reimbursement to both hospitals and providers.

Regarding the third component, a recent multidisciplinary consensus conference1 outlined the essential elements needed for successful implementation of an inpatient glycemic control program which include:

  • An appropriate level of administrative support.

  • Formation of a multidisciplinary steering committee to drive the development of initiatives and empowered to enact change.

  • Assessment of current processes, quality of care, and barriers to practice change.

  • Development and implementation of interventions including standardized order sets, protocols, policies and algorithms with associated educational programs.

  • Metrics for evaluation of glycemic control, hypoglycemia, insulin use patterns, and other aspects of care.

Finally, extensive resources and effective tools are now available to help institutions achieve better inpatient glucose control. The Society of Hospital Medicine (SHM), in conjunction with the ADA, AACE, the American College of Physicians (ACP), the Case Management Society of America (CMSA), the American Society of Consultant Pharmacists, nursing, and diabetic educators have all partnered to produce a comprehensive guide to effective implementation of glycemic control and preventing hypoglycemia.49 This comprehensive workbook is a proven performance improvement framework and is available on the SHM Web site.48 Details and examples of all essential elements are covered in this workbook along with opportunities for marked improvement bolstered by integration of high reliability design features and attention to effective implementation techniques. The remainder of this supplement crystallizes a substantial portion of this material. The AACE has also recently offered a valuable web‐based resource to encourage institutional glycemic control efforts.49

GLYCEMIC CONTROL INITIATIVES CAN BE COST‐EFFECTIVE

Achieving optimal glycemic control safely requires monitoring, education, and other measures, which can be expensive, labor intensive, and require coordination of the services of many hospital divisions. This incremental expense has been shown to be cost‐effective in a variety of settings.1, 84, 85 The costs of glycemic control initiatives have demonstrated a good return on investment via:

  • Improved LOS, readmission rates, morbidity, and mortality.

  • Improved documentation of patient acuity and related payment for acuity.

  • Income generated via incremental physician and allied health professional billing.

CONCLUSION AND SUMMARY

Evidence exists that appropriate management of hyperglycemia improves outcomes, whereas the current state of affairs is that most medical centers currently manage this suboptimally. This is concerning given the magnitude of diabetes and hyperglycemia in our inpatient setting in the United States. To bring awareness to this issue, multiple initiatives (guidelines, certification programs, workbooks, etc.) are available by various organizations including the ADA, AACE, SCIP, NSQIP, IHI, UHC, the Joint Commission, and SHM. However, this is not enough. Change occurs at the local level, and institutional prioritization and support is needed to empower a multidisciplinary steering committee, with appropriate administrative support, to standardize and improve systems in the face of substantial cultural issues and complex barriers. Improved data collection and reporting, incremental monitoring, creation of metrics, and improved documentation are an absolutely necessary necessity to achieve breakthrough levels of improvement.

Now the time is right to make an assertive effort to improve inpatient glycemic control and related issues, and push for appropriate support at your institution to help achieve this in the interest of patient safety and optimal outcomes.

References
  1. American College of Endocrinology and American Diabetes Association Consensus Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Glycemic Control: A call to action.Diabetes Care.2006;29:19551962.
  2. Standards of medical care in diabetes‐‐2008.Diabetes Care.2008;31(Suppl 1):S12S54.
  3. Cowie CC,Rust KF,Byrd‐Holt DD, et al.Prevalence of diabetes and impaired fasting glucose in adults in the U.S. population: National Health And Nutrition Examination Survey 1999–2002.Diabetes Care.2006;29:12631268.
  4. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.National Diabetes Fact Sheet: General Information and National Estimates on Diabetes in the United States, 2005.Atlanta, GA:U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention,2005. Available at: http://www.cdc.gov/diabetes/pubs/factsheet05.htm. Accessed September 2007.
  5. Hogan P,Dall T,Nikolov P.Economic costs of diabetes in the US in 2002.Diabetes Care.2003;26:917932.
  6. Queale WS,Seidler AJ,Brancati FL.Glycemic control and sliding scale insulin use in medical inpatients with diabetes mellitus.Arch Intern Med.1997;157:545552.
  7. Metchick LN,Petit WA,Inzucchi SE.Inpatient management of diabetes mellitus.Am J Med.2002;113:317323.
  8. Clement S,Braithwaite SS,Magee MF, et al.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in hospitals.Diabetes Care.2004;27:553591.
  9. Van den Berghe G,Wilmer A,Hermans G, et al.Intensive insulin therapy in the medical ICU.N Engl J Med.2006;354:449461.
  10. Van den Berghe G,Wouters P,Weekers F, et al.Intensive insulin therapy in critically ill patients.N Engl J Med.2001;345:13591367.
  11. Krinsley JS.Association between hyperglycemia and increased hospital mortality in a heterogeneous population of critically ill patients.Mayo Clin Proc.2003;78:14711478.
  12. Levetan CS,Passaro M,Jablonski K,Kass M,Ratner RE.Unrecognized diabetes among hospitalized patients.Diabetes Care.1998;21:246249.
  13. Umpierrez GE,Isaacs SD,Bazargan N,You X,Thaler LM,Kitabchi AE.Hyperglycemia: an independent marker of in‐hospital mortality in patients with undiagnosed diabetes.J Clin Endocrinol Metab.2002;87:978982.
  14. United States Department of Health and Human Services Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality.2007. Available at: http://hcupnet.ahrq.gov. Accessed December 2007.
  15. Norhammar A,Tenerz A,Nilsson G, et al.Glucose metabolism in patients with acute myocardial infarction and no previous diagnosis of diabetes mellitus: a prospective study.Lancet.2002;359:21402144.
  16. Zarich SW.Mechanism by which hyperglycemia plays a role in the setting of acute cardiovascular illness.Rev Cardiovasc Med.2006;7(Suppl 2):S35S43.
  17. Bauters C,Ennezat PV,Tricot O,Lauwerier B,Lallemant R,Saadouni H, et al.Stress hyperglycaemia is an independent predictor of left ventricular remodelling after first anterior myocardial infarction in non‐diabetic patients.Eur Heart J.2007;28:546552.
  18. Zarich SW,Nesto RW.Implications and treatment of acute hyperglycemia in the setting of acute myocardial infarction.Circulation.2007;115:e436e439.
  19. Dandona P,Mohanty P,Chaudhuri A,Garg R,Aljada A.Insulin infusion in acute illness.J Clin Invest.2005;115:20692072.
  20. Hansen T,Thiel S,Wouters P,Christiansen J,Van den Berghe B.Intensive insulin therapy exerts antiinflammatory effects in critically ill patients and counteracts the adverse effect of low mannose‐gind lectin levels.J Clin Endocrinol Metab.2003;88:10821088.
  21. Vanhorebeek I,De Vos R,Mesotten D,Wouters PJ,De Wolf‐Peeters C,Van den Berghe G.Protection of hepatocyte mitochondrial ultrastructure and function by strict blood glucose control with insulin in critically ill patients.Lancet.2005;365:5359.
  22. Langouche L,Vanhorebeek I,Vlasselaers D, et al.Intensive insulin therapy protects the endothelium of critically ill patients.J Clin Invest.2005;115:22772286.
  23. Ainla T,Baburin A,Teesalu R,Rahu M.The association between hyperglycaemia on admission and 180‐day mortality in acute myocardial infarction patients with and without diabetes.Diabet Med.2005;22:13211325.
  24. Kosiborod M,Rathore SS,Inzucchi SE, et al.Admission glucose and mortality in elderly patients hospitalized with acute myocardial infarction: implications for patients with and without recognized diabetes.Circulation.2005;111:30783086.
  25. Malmberg K,Norhammar A,Wedel H,Ryden L.Glycometabolic state at admission: important risk marker of mortality in conventionally treated patients with diabetes mellitus and acute myocardial infarction: long‐term results from the Diabetes and Insulin‐Glucose Infusion in Acute Myocardial Infarction (DIGAMI) study.Circulation.1999;99:26262632.
  26. Capes S,Hunt D,Malmberg K,Gerstein H.Stress hyperglycaemia and increased risk of death after myocardial infarction in patients with and without diabetes: a systematic overview.Lancet.2000;355:773778.
  27. Bruno A,Williams LS,Kent TA.How important is hyperglycemia during acute brain infarction?Neurologist.2004;10:195200.
  28. Capes S,Hunt D,Malmberg K,Pathak P,Gerstein H.Stress hyperglycemia and prognosis of stroke in nondiabetic and diabetic patients: a systematic overview.Stroke.2001;32:24262432.
  29. Golden SH,Peart‐Vigilance C,Kao WHL,Brancati F.Perioperative glycemic control and the risk of infectious complications in a cohort of adults with diabetes.Diabetes Care.1999;22:14081414.
  30. Pomposelli JJ,Baxter JK,Babineau TJ, et al.Early postoperative glucose control predicts nosocomial infection rate in diabetic patients.JPEN J Parenter Enteral Nutr.1998;22:7781.
  31. McAlister FA,Majumdar SR,Blitz S,Rowe BH,Romney J,Marrie TJ.The relation between hyperglycemia and outcomes in 2,471 patients admitted to the hospital with community‐acquired pneumonia.Diabetes Care.2005;28:810815.
  32. Thomas M,Mathew T,Russ G,Rao M,Moran J.Early peri‐operative glycaemic control and allograft rejection in patients with diabetes mellitus: a pilot study.Transplantation.2001;72:13211324.
  33. Weiser MA,Cabanillas ME,Konopleva M, et al.Relation between the duration of remission and hyperglycemia during induction chemotherapy for acute lymphocytic leukemia with a hyperfractionated cyclophosphamide, vincristine, doxorubicin, and dexamethasone/methotrexate‐cytarabine regimen.Cancer.2004;100:11791185.
  34. Muhlestein JB,Anderson JL,Horne BD, et al.Effect of fasting glucose levels on mortality rate in patients with and without diabetes mellitus and coronary artery disease undergoing percutaneous coronary intervention.Am Heart J.2003;146:351358.
  35. Furnary AP,Wu Y,Bookin SO.Effect of hyperglycemia and continuous intravenous insulin infusions on outcomes of cardiac surgical procedures: the Portland diabetic project.Endocr Pract.2004;10(Suppl 2):2133.
  36. Gandhi GY,Nuttall GA,Abel MD, et al.Intraoperative hyperglycemia and perioperative outcomes in cardiac surgery patients.Mayo Clin Proc.2005;80:862866.
  37. Latham R,Lancaster AD,Covington JF,Pirolo JS,Thomas CS.The association of diabetes and glucose control with surgical‐site infections among cardiothoracic surgery patients.Infect Control Hosp Epidemiol.2001;22:607612.
  38. Zerr KJ,Furnary AP,Grunkemeier GL.Glucose control lowers the risk of wound infection in diabetics after open heart operations.Ann Thorac Surg.1997;63:356361.
  39. The Portland Protocol. Available at: http://www.providence.org/oregon/grograms_and_services/heart/portlandprotocol/. Accessed September2007.
  40. Krinsley JS.Effect of an intensive glucose management protocol on the mortality of critically ill adult patients.Mayo Clin Proc.2004;79:9921000.
  41. Van den Berghe G,Wilmer A,Milants I, et al.Intensive insulin therapy in mixed medical/surgical intensive care units: benefit versus harm.Diabetes.2006;55:31513159.
  42. Vanhorebeek I,Langouche L,Van den Berghe G.Tight blood glucose control with insulin in the ICU: facts and controversies.Chest.2007;132:268278.
  43. Grey NJ,Perdrizet GA.Reduction of nosocomial infections in the surgical intensive‐care unit by strict glycemic control.Endocr Pract.2004;10(Suppl 2):4652.
  44. Brunkhorst FM,Engel C,Bloos F,Meier‐Hellmann A,Ragaller M,Weiler N, et al.Intensive insulin therapy and pentastarch resuscitation in severe sepsis.N Engl J Med.2008;358:125139.
  45. Devos P,Preiser JC.Current controversies around tight glucose control in critically ill patients.Curr Opin Clin Nutr Metab Care.2007;10:206209.
  46. Ahmann A,Hellman R,Larsen K,Maynard G.Designing and implementing insulin infusion protocols and order sets.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5):S42S54.
  47. Umpierrez GE,Smiley D,Zisman A,Prieto LM,Palacio A,Ceron M, et al.Randomized study of basal‐bolus insulin therapy in the inpatient management of patients with type 2 diabetes (RABBIT 2 trial).Diabetes Care.2007;30:21812186.
  48. Society of Hospital Medicine. Glycemic control resource room. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/ResourceRoomRedesign/GlycemicControl.cfm. Accessed November2007.
  49. Society of Hospital Medicine. Workbook for improvement: improving glycemic control, preventing hypoglycemia, and optimizing care of the inpatient with hyperglycemia and diabetes. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/ResourceRoomRedesign/pdf/GC_Workbook.pdf. Accessed November2007.
  50. Garber AJ,Moghissi ES,Bransome ED, et al.American College of Endocrinology position statement on inpatient diabetes and metabolic control.Endocr Pract.2004;10:7782.
  51. Maynard G,Lee JH,Phillips G,Fink MA,Renvall M.Improved inpatient use of basal insulin, reduced hypoglycemia, and improved glycemic control: effect of structured subcutaneous insulin orders and an insulin management algorithm.J Hosp Med.2008. In press.
  52. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists Inpatient Glycemic Control Resource Center.2007. Available at: http://resources.aace.com/index.asp. Accessed December 2007.
  53. American Heart Association. Get With the Guidelines. Available at: http://www.americanheart.org/getwiththeguidelines. Accessed November2007.
  54. Joint Commission. Disease Specific‐Care Certification. Available at:http://www.jointcommission.org/CertificationPrograms. Accessed November2007.
  55. The Joint Commission Disease‐Specific Certification Program. Range JE. Oncology issues. July/August2007:4041.
  56. Anonymous.The Diabetes Control and Complications Trial Research Group (DCCT). The effect of intensive treatment of diabetes on the development and progression of long‐term complications in insulin‐dependent diabetes mellitus.N Engl J Med.1993;329:977986.
  57. Intensive blood‐glucose control with sulphonylureas or insulin compared with conventional treatment and risk of complications in patients with type, 2 diabetes (UKPDS 33). UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group.Lancet.1998;352:837853.
  58. Gaede P,Vedel P,Parving H‐H,Pedersen OU.Intensified multifactorial intervention in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus and microalbuminuria: the Steno type 2 randomised study.Lancet.1999;353:617622.
  59. Greci LS,Kailasam M,Malkani S, et al.Utility of HbA1c levels for diabetes case finding in hospitalized patients with hyperglycemia.Diabetes Care.2003;26:10641068.
  60. Baldwin D,Villanueva G,McNutt R,Bhatnagar S.Eliminating inpatient sliding‐scale insulin: a reeducation project with medical house staff.Diabetes Care.2005;28:10081011.
  61. Warshaw HS,Bolderman KM.Advanced carbohydrate counting. In:Practical Carbohydrate Counting: A How‐to‐Teach Guide for Health Professionals.Alexandria, VA:American Diabetes Association;2001:2628.
  62. Pastors JG,Warshaw H,Daly A,Franz M,Kulkarni K.The evidence for the effectiveness of medical nutrition therapy in diabetes management.Diabetes Care.2002;25:608613.
  63. Boucher JL,Swift CS,Franz MJ, et al.Inpatient management of diabetes and hyperglycemia: implications for nutrition practice and the food and nutrition professional.J Am Diet Assoc.2007;107:105111.
  64. Braithwaite SS.The transition from insulin infusions to long‐term diabetes therapy: the argument for insulin analogs.Semin Thorac Cardiovasc Surg.2006;18:366378.
  65. O'Malley .Transitions paper.J Hosp Med.2008.
  66. Schnipper JL,Barsky EE,Shaykevich S,Fitzmaurice G,Pendergrass ML.Inpatient management of diabetes and hyperglycemia among general medicine patients at a large teaching hospital.J Hosp Med.2006;1:145150.
  67. Phillips LS,Branch WT,Cook CB, et al.Clinical inertia.Ann Intern Med.2001;135:825834.
  68. Cook CB,Castro JC,Schmidt RE, et al.Diabetes care in hospitalized noncritically ill patients: more evidence for clinical inertia and negative therapeutic momentum.J Hosp Med.2007;2:203211.
  69. University HealthSystem Consortium.Glycemic control 2005 findings and conclusions. Presented at: Glycemic Control 2005 Knowledge Transfer Meeting; 2005 August 19,2005; Chicago, IL.
  70. Umpierrez G,Maynard G.Glycemic chaos (not glycemic control) still the rule for inpatient care: how do we stop the insanity?J Hosp Med.2006;1:141144.
  71. Golightly LK,Jones MA,Hamamura DH,Stolpman NM,McDermott MT.Management of diabetes mellitus in hospitalized patients: efficiency and effectiveness of sliding‐scale insulin therapy.Pharmacotherapy.2006;26:14211432.
  72. Varghese P,Gleason V,Sorokin R,Senholzi C,Jabbour S,Gottlieb JE.Hypoglycemia in hospitalized patients treated with antihyperglycemic agents.J Hosp Med.2007;2:234240.
  73. Fischer KF,Lees JA,Newman JH.Hypoglycemia in hospitalized patients.N Engl J Med.1986;315:12451250.
  74. Vriesendorp TM,van Santen S,DeVries JH, et al.Predisposing factors for hypoglycemia in the intensive care unit.Crit Care Med.2006;34:96101.
  75. Svensson AM,McGuire DK,Abrahamsson P,Dellborg M.Association between hyper‐ and hypoglycaemia and 2 year all‐cause mortality risk in diabetic patients with acute coronary events.Eur Heart J.2005;26:12551261.
  76. Pinto DS,Skolnick AH,Kirtane AJ, et al.U‐shaped relationship of blood glucose with adverse outcomes among patients with ST‐segment elevation myocardial infarction.J Am Coll Cardiol.2005;46:178180.
  77. Eshaghian S,Horwich TB,Fonarow GC.An unexpected inverse relationship between HbA1c levels and mortality in patients with diabetes and advanced systolic heart failure.Am Heart J.2006;151:91.
  78. Kosiborod M,Inzucchi SE,Krumholz HM, et al.Glucometrics in patients hospitalized with acute myocardial infarction: defining the optimal outcomes‐based measure of risk.Circulation.2008;117:10181027.
  79. Cryer PE,Davis SN,Shamoon H.Hypoglycemia in diabetes.Diabetes Care.2003;26:19021912.
  80. Bhatia A,Cadman B,Mackenzie I.Hypoglycemia and cardiac arrest in a critically ill patient on strict glycemic control.Anesth Analg.2006;102:549551.
  81. Scalea TM,Bochicchio GV,Bochicchio KM,Johnson SB,Joshi M,Pyle A.Tight glycemic control in critically injured trauma patients.Ann Surg.2007;246:605610; discussion 10–12.
  82. Krinsley JS,Grover A.Severe hypoglycemia in critically ill patients: risk factors and outcomes.Crit Care Med.2007;35:22622267.
  83. Garg R,Bhutani H,Jarry A,Pendergrass M.Provider response to insulin‐induced hypoglycemia in hospitalized patients.J Hosp Med.2007;2:258260.
  84. Newton CA,Young S.Financial implications of glycemic control: results of an inpatient diabetes management program.Endocr Pract.2006;12(Suppl 3):4348.
  85. Levetan CS,Salas JR,Wilets IF,Zumoff B.Impact of endocrine and diabetes team consultation on hospital length of stay for patients with diabetes.Am J Med.1995;99:2228.
References
  1. American College of Endocrinology and American Diabetes Association Consensus Statement on Inpatient Diabetes and Glycemic Control: A call to action.Diabetes Care.2006;29:19551962.
  2. Standards of medical care in diabetes‐‐2008.Diabetes Care.2008;31(Suppl 1):S12S54.
  3. Cowie CC,Rust KF,Byrd‐Holt DD, et al.Prevalence of diabetes and impaired fasting glucose in adults in the U.S. population: National Health And Nutrition Examination Survey 1999–2002.Diabetes Care.2006;29:12631268.
  4. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.National Diabetes Fact Sheet: General Information and National Estimates on Diabetes in the United States, 2005.Atlanta, GA:U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention,2005. Available at: http://www.cdc.gov/diabetes/pubs/factsheet05.htm. Accessed September 2007.
  5. Hogan P,Dall T,Nikolov P.Economic costs of diabetes in the US in 2002.Diabetes Care.2003;26:917932.
  6. Queale WS,Seidler AJ,Brancati FL.Glycemic control and sliding scale insulin use in medical inpatients with diabetes mellitus.Arch Intern Med.1997;157:545552.
  7. Metchick LN,Petit WA,Inzucchi SE.Inpatient management of diabetes mellitus.Am J Med.2002;113:317323.
  8. Clement S,Braithwaite SS,Magee MF, et al.Management of diabetes and hyperglycemia in hospitals.Diabetes Care.2004;27:553591.
  9. Van den Berghe G,Wilmer A,Hermans G, et al.Intensive insulin therapy in the medical ICU.N Engl J Med.2006;354:449461.
  10. Van den Berghe G,Wouters P,Weekers F, et al.Intensive insulin therapy in critically ill patients.N Engl J Med.2001;345:13591367.
  11. Krinsley JS.Association between hyperglycemia and increased hospital mortality in a heterogeneous population of critically ill patients.Mayo Clin Proc.2003;78:14711478.
  12. Levetan CS,Passaro M,Jablonski K,Kass M,Ratner RE.Unrecognized diabetes among hospitalized patients.Diabetes Care.1998;21:246249.
  13. Umpierrez GE,Isaacs SD,Bazargan N,You X,Thaler LM,Kitabchi AE.Hyperglycemia: an independent marker of in‐hospital mortality in patients with undiagnosed diabetes.J Clin Endocrinol Metab.2002;87:978982.
  14. United States Department of Health and Human Services Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality.2007. Available at: http://hcupnet.ahrq.gov. Accessed December 2007.
  15. Norhammar A,Tenerz A,Nilsson G, et al.Glucose metabolism in patients with acute myocardial infarction and no previous diagnosis of diabetes mellitus: a prospective study.Lancet.2002;359:21402144.
  16. Zarich SW.Mechanism by which hyperglycemia plays a role in the setting of acute cardiovascular illness.Rev Cardiovasc Med.2006;7(Suppl 2):S35S43.
  17. Bauters C,Ennezat PV,Tricot O,Lauwerier B,Lallemant R,Saadouni H, et al.Stress hyperglycaemia is an independent predictor of left ventricular remodelling after first anterior myocardial infarction in non‐diabetic patients.Eur Heart J.2007;28:546552.
  18. Zarich SW,Nesto RW.Implications and treatment of acute hyperglycemia in the setting of acute myocardial infarction.Circulation.2007;115:e436e439.
  19. Dandona P,Mohanty P,Chaudhuri A,Garg R,Aljada A.Insulin infusion in acute illness.J Clin Invest.2005;115:20692072.
  20. Hansen T,Thiel S,Wouters P,Christiansen J,Van den Berghe B.Intensive insulin therapy exerts antiinflammatory effects in critically ill patients and counteracts the adverse effect of low mannose‐gind lectin levels.J Clin Endocrinol Metab.2003;88:10821088.
  21. Vanhorebeek I,De Vos R,Mesotten D,Wouters PJ,De Wolf‐Peeters C,Van den Berghe G.Protection of hepatocyte mitochondrial ultrastructure and function by strict blood glucose control with insulin in critically ill patients.Lancet.2005;365:5359.
  22. Langouche L,Vanhorebeek I,Vlasselaers D, et al.Intensive insulin therapy protects the endothelium of critically ill patients.J Clin Invest.2005;115:22772286.
  23. Ainla T,Baburin A,Teesalu R,Rahu M.The association between hyperglycaemia on admission and 180‐day mortality in acute myocardial infarction patients with and without diabetes.Diabet Med.2005;22:13211325.
  24. Kosiborod M,Rathore SS,Inzucchi SE, et al.Admission glucose and mortality in elderly patients hospitalized with acute myocardial infarction: implications for patients with and without recognized diabetes.Circulation.2005;111:30783086.
  25. Malmberg K,Norhammar A,Wedel H,Ryden L.Glycometabolic state at admission: important risk marker of mortality in conventionally treated patients with diabetes mellitus and acute myocardial infarction: long‐term results from the Diabetes and Insulin‐Glucose Infusion in Acute Myocardial Infarction (DIGAMI) study.Circulation.1999;99:26262632.
  26. Capes S,Hunt D,Malmberg K,Gerstein H.Stress hyperglycaemia and increased risk of death after myocardial infarction in patients with and without diabetes: a systematic overview.Lancet.2000;355:773778.
  27. Bruno A,Williams LS,Kent TA.How important is hyperglycemia during acute brain infarction?Neurologist.2004;10:195200.
  28. Capes S,Hunt D,Malmberg K,Pathak P,Gerstein H.Stress hyperglycemia and prognosis of stroke in nondiabetic and diabetic patients: a systematic overview.Stroke.2001;32:24262432.
  29. Golden SH,Peart‐Vigilance C,Kao WHL,Brancati F.Perioperative glycemic control and the risk of infectious complications in a cohort of adults with diabetes.Diabetes Care.1999;22:14081414.
  30. Pomposelli JJ,Baxter JK,Babineau TJ, et al.Early postoperative glucose control predicts nosocomial infection rate in diabetic patients.JPEN J Parenter Enteral Nutr.1998;22:7781.
  31. McAlister FA,Majumdar SR,Blitz S,Rowe BH,Romney J,Marrie TJ.The relation between hyperglycemia and outcomes in 2,471 patients admitted to the hospital with community‐acquired pneumonia.Diabetes Care.2005;28:810815.
  32. Thomas M,Mathew T,Russ G,Rao M,Moran J.Early peri‐operative glycaemic control and allograft rejection in patients with diabetes mellitus: a pilot study.Transplantation.2001;72:13211324.
  33. Weiser MA,Cabanillas ME,Konopleva M, et al.Relation between the duration of remission and hyperglycemia during induction chemotherapy for acute lymphocytic leukemia with a hyperfractionated cyclophosphamide, vincristine, doxorubicin, and dexamethasone/methotrexate‐cytarabine regimen.Cancer.2004;100:11791185.
  34. Muhlestein JB,Anderson JL,Horne BD, et al.Effect of fasting glucose levels on mortality rate in patients with and without diabetes mellitus and coronary artery disease undergoing percutaneous coronary intervention.Am Heart J.2003;146:351358.
  35. Furnary AP,Wu Y,Bookin SO.Effect of hyperglycemia and continuous intravenous insulin infusions on outcomes of cardiac surgical procedures: the Portland diabetic project.Endocr Pract.2004;10(Suppl 2):2133.
  36. Gandhi GY,Nuttall GA,Abel MD, et al.Intraoperative hyperglycemia and perioperative outcomes in cardiac surgery patients.Mayo Clin Proc.2005;80:862866.
  37. Latham R,Lancaster AD,Covington JF,Pirolo JS,Thomas CS.The association of diabetes and glucose control with surgical‐site infections among cardiothoracic surgery patients.Infect Control Hosp Epidemiol.2001;22:607612.
  38. Zerr KJ,Furnary AP,Grunkemeier GL.Glucose control lowers the risk of wound infection in diabetics after open heart operations.Ann Thorac Surg.1997;63:356361.
  39. The Portland Protocol. Available at: http://www.providence.org/oregon/grograms_and_services/heart/portlandprotocol/. Accessed September2007.
  40. Krinsley JS.Effect of an intensive glucose management protocol on the mortality of critically ill adult patients.Mayo Clin Proc.2004;79:9921000.
  41. Van den Berghe G,Wilmer A,Milants I, et al.Intensive insulin therapy in mixed medical/surgical intensive care units: benefit versus harm.Diabetes.2006;55:31513159.
  42. Vanhorebeek I,Langouche L,Van den Berghe G.Tight blood glucose control with insulin in the ICU: facts and controversies.Chest.2007;132:268278.
  43. Grey NJ,Perdrizet GA.Reduction of nosocomial infections in the surgical intensive‐care unit by strict glycemic control.Endocr Pract.2004;10(Suppl 2):4652.
  44. Brunkhorst FM,Engel C,Bloos F,Meier‐Hellmann A,Ragaller M,Weiler N, et al.Intensive insulin therapy and pentastarch resuscitation in severe sepsis.N Engl J Med.2008;358:125139.
  45. Devos P,Preiser JC.Current controversies around tight glucose control in critically ill patients.Curr Opin Clin Nutr Metab Care.2007;10:206209.
  46. Ahmann A,Hellman R,Larsen K,Maynard G.Designing and implementing insulin infusion protocols and order sets.J Hosp Med.2008;3(5):S42S54.
  47. Umpierrez GE,Smiley D,Zisman A,Prieto LM,Palacio A,Ceron M, et al.Randomized study of basal‐bolus insulin therapy in the inpatient management of patients with type 2 diabetes (RABBIT 2 trial).Diabetes Care.2007;30:21812186.
  48. Society of Hospital Medicine. Glycemic control resource room. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/ResourceRoomRedesign/GlycemicControl.cfm. Accessed November2007.
  49. Society of Hospital Medicine. Workbook for improvement: improving glycemic control, preventing hypoglycemia, and optimizing care of the inpatient with hyperglycemia and diabetes. Available at: http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/ResourceRoomRedesign/pdf/GC_Workbook.pdf. Accessed November2007.
  50. Garber AJ,Moghissi ES,Bransome ED, et al.American College of Endocrinology position statement on inpatient diabetes and metabolic control.Endocr Pract.2004;10:7782.
  51. Maynard G,Lee JH,Phillips G,Fink MA,Renvall M.Improved inpatient use of basal insulin, reduced hypoglycemia, and improved glycemic control: effect of structured subcutaneous insulin orders and an insulin management algorithm.J Hosp Med.2008. In press.
  52. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists Inpatient Glycemic Control Resource Center.2007. Available at: http://resources.aace.com/index.asp. Accessed December 2007.
  53. American Heart Association. Get With the Guidelines. Available at: http://www.americanheart.org/getwiththeguidelines. Accessed November2007.
  54. Joint Commission. Disease Specific‐Care Certification. Available at:http://www.jointcommission.org/CertificationPrograms. Accessed November2007.
  55. The Joint Commission Disease‐Specific Certification Program. Range JE. Oncology issues. July/August2007:4041.
  56. Anonymous.The Diabetes Control and Complications Trial Research Group (DCCT). The effect of intensive treatment of diabetes on the development and progression of long‐term complications in insulin‐dependent diabetes mellitus.N Engl J Med.1993;329:977986.
  57. Intensive blood‐glucose control with sulphonylureas or insulin compared with conventional treatment and risk of complications in patients with type, 2 diabetes (UKPDS 33). UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group.Lancet.1998;352:837853.
  58. Gaede P,Vedel P,Parving H‐H,Pedersen OU.Intensified multifactorial intervention in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus and microalbuminuria: the Steno type 2 randomised study.Lancet.1999;353:617622.
  59. Greci LS,Kailasam M,Malkani S, et al.Utility of HbA1c levels for diabetes case finding in hospitalized patients with hyperglycemia.Diabetes Care.2003;26:10641068.
  60. Baldwin D,Villanueva G,McNutt R,Bhatnagar S.Eliminating inpatient sliding‐scale insulin: a reeducation project with medical house staff.Diabetes Care.2005;28:10081011.
  61. Warshaw HS,Bolderman KM.Advanced carbohydrate counting. In:Practical Carbohydrate Counting: A How‐to‐Teach Guide for Health Professionals.Alexandria, VA:American Diabetes Association;2001:2628.
  62. Pastors JG,Warshaw H,Daly A,Franz M,Kulkarni K.The evidence for the effectiveness of medical nutrition therapy in diabetes management.Diabetes Care.2002;25:608613.
  63. Boucher JL,Swift CS,Franz MJ, et al.Inpatient management of diabetes and hyperglycemia: implications for nutrition practice and the food and nutrition professional.J Am Diet Assoc.2007;107:105111.
  64. Braithwaite SS.The transition from insulin infusions to long‐term diabetes therapy: the argument for insulin analogs.Semin Thorac Cardiovasc Surg.2006;18:366378.
  65. O'Malley .Transitions paper.J Hosp Med.2008.
  66. Schnipper JL,Barsky EE,Shaykevich S,Fitzmaurice G,Pendergrass ML.Inpatient management of diabetes and hyperglycemia among general medicine patients at a large teaching hospital.J Hosp Med.2006;1:145150.
  67. Phillips LS,Branch WT,Cook CB, et al.Clinical inertia.Ann Intern Med.2001;135:825834.
  68. Cook CB,Castro JC,Schmidt RE, et al.Diabetes care in hospitalized noncritically ill patients: more evidence for clinical inertia and negative therapeutic momentum.J Hosp Med.2007;2:203211.
  69. University HealthSystem Consortium.Glycemic control 2005 findings and conclusions. Presented at: Glycemic Control 2005 Knowledge Transfer Meeting; 2005 August 19,2005; Chicago, IL.
  70. Umpierrez G,Maynard G.Glycemic chaos (not glycemic control) still the rule for inpatient care: how do we stop the insanity?J Hosp Med.2006;1:141144.
  71. Golightly LK,Jones MA,Hamamura DH,Stolpman NM,McDermott MT.Management of diabetes mellitus in hospitalized patients: efficiency and effectiveness of sliding‐scale insulin therapy.Pharmacotherapy.2006;26:14211432.
  72. Varghese P,Gleason V,Sorokin R,Senholzi C,Jabbour S,Gottlieb JE.Hypoglycemia in hospitalized patients treated with antihyperglycemic agents.J Hosp Med.2007;2:234240.
  73. Fischer KF,Lees JA,Newman JH.Hypoglycemia in hospitalized patients.N Engl J Med.1986;315:12451250.
  74. Vriesendorp TM,van Santen S,DeVries JH, et al.Predisposing factors for hypoglycemia in the intensive care unit.Crit Care Med.2006;34:96101.
  75. Svensson AM,McGuire DK,Abrahamsson P,Dellborg M.Association between hyper‐ and hypoglycaemia and 2 year all‐cause mortality risk in diabetic patients with acute coronary events.Eur Heart J.2005;26:12551261.
  76. Pinto DS,Skolnick AH,Kirtane AJ, et al.U‐shaped relationship of blood glucose with adverse outcomes among patients with ST‐segment elevation myocardial infarction.J Am Coll Cardiol.2005;46:178180.
  77. Eshaghian S,Horwich TB,Fonarow GC.An unexpected inverse relationship between HbA1c levels and mortality in patients with diabetes and advanced systolic heart failure.Am Heart J.2006;151:91.
  78. Kosiborod M,Inzucchi SE,Krumholz HM, et al.Glucometrics in patients hospitalized with acute myocardial infarction: defining the optimal outcomes‐based measure of risk.Circulation.2008;117:10181027.
  79. Cryer PE,Davis SN,Shamoon H.Hypoglycemia in diabetes.Diabetes Care.2003;26:19021912.
  80. Bhatia A,Cadman B,Mackenzie I.Hypoglycemia and cardiac arrest in a critically ill patient on strict glycemic control.Anesth Analg.2006;102:549551.
  81. Scalea TM,Bochicchio GV,Bochicchio KM,Johnson SB,Joshi M,Pyle A.Tight glycemic control in critically injured trauma patients.Ann Surg.2007;246:605610; discussion 10–12.
  82. Krinsley JS,Grover A.Severe hypoglycemia in critically ill patients: risk factors and outcomes.Crit Care Med.2007;35:22622267.
  83. Garg R,Bhutani H,Jarry A,Pendergrass M.Provider response to insulin‐induced hypoglycemia in hospitalized patients.J Hosp Med.2007;2:258260.
  84. Newton CA,Young S.Financial implications of glycemic control: results of an inpatient diabetes management program.Endocr Pract.2006;12(Suppl 3):4348.
  85. Levetan CS,Salas JR,Wilets IF,Zumoff B.Impact of endocrine and diabetes team consultation on hospital length of stay for patients with diabetes.Am J Med.1995;99:2228.
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Page Number
6-16
Page Number
6-16
Article Type
Display Headline
The case for supporting inpatient glycemic control programs now: The evidence and beyond
Display Headline
The case for supporting inpatient glycemic control programs now: The evidence and beyond
Sections
Article Source
Copyright © 2008 Society of Hospital Medicine
Disallow All Ads
Correspondence Location
University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, Chapel Hill, NC 27599
Content Gating
Gated (full article locked unless allowed per User)
Gating Strategy
First Peek Free
Article PDF Media

Debates in Hospital Medicine

Article Type
Changed
Mon, 01/02/2017 - 19:34
Display Headline
Just because you can, doesn't mean that you should: A call for the rational application of hospitalist comanagement

At a hospital at which I work, every patient who presents to the emergency department with a suspected stroke or transient ischemic attack is evaluated by the stroke team. Per protocol, the team rapidly assesses each patient, orders diagnostic and therapeutic interventions and then refers each and every patient to the hospitalist service for admission and medical comanagement. At no point is any consideration given to whether the patients actually have medical comorbidities, or if a hospitalist will have anything meaningful to add to the care. The firmly set expectation is that hospitalists admit all stroke patients for the purposes of comanagement, while the neurologists consult.

Comanagement has become a mainstay of hospital medicine.1 It is predicated upon the assumption that surgical and specialty patients benefit when their medical comorbidities are managed by hospitalists. It differs conceptually from traditional medical consultation in that hospitalists collaboratively manage patients with surgeons or specialists, sharing responsibility and authority. In practice, however, comanagement varies widely, ranging from a model of care indistinguishable from traditional medical consultation to one where hospitalists admit and assume primary responsibility for surgical and specialty patients. This variability makes it difficult to study and make generalizations about the role and impact of hospitalist comanagement. Nonetheless, recent evidence suggests that hospitalist consultation and comanagement may not be as effective as originally anticipated.

In a 2008 observational cohort study of patients undergoing surgery at an academic medical center, Auerbach et al demonstrated that medical consultation (provided by hospitalists) did not improve glycemic control or increase the likelihood of perioperative beta‐blockade and venous thromboembolism prophylaxis.2 Patients who received consultation had longer adjusted lengths of stay (12.98% longer; 95% confidence interval, 1.61%‐25.61%) and higher adjusted costs (24.36% higher; 95% confidence interval, 13.54%‐36.34%). Notwithstanding the limited generalizability of this study to community hospitals, it has raised concerns that hospitalist consultation does not automatically improve quality of care or cost effectiveness.3

Several other recent trials have also helped to define where hospitalist comanagement may work well and where it may not. In 2004, Huddleston et al published the Hospitalist Orthopedic Team (HOT) trial, the first randomized prospective trial comparing hospitalist‐surgical comanagement to standard care.4 A total of 526 patients undergoing elective hip or knee replacement surgery at the Mayo Clinic were randomized to either standard orthopedic care with consultation as needed, or immediate hospitalist comanagement. The outcomes were disappointing. Hospitalist comanagement reduced minor complications (such as incidence of urinary tract infections, fever, and hyponatremia) but had no effect on moderate or major complications. The HOT intervention modestly reduced adjusted length of stay (LOS), defined as the point at which patients were deemed stable for discharge, by 0.5 days, but had no impact on actual LOS or cost per case. Not surprisingly, orthopedic surgeons and nurses preferred the HOT model of care over the standard model. One year later, Phy et al analyzed outcomes for patients admitted with hip fracture at the same institution.5 This retrospective cohort study compared patients who were admitted to either a standard orthopedic service or to a hospitalist team. In contrast to the HOT trial, hospitalist comanagement of hip fracture patients decreased time to surgery and lowered LOS by 2.2 days without compromising patient outcomes.

How did two trials that occurred roughly simultaneously at the same hospital, involving the same hospitalists and orthopedic surgeons generate such different outcomes? A likely answer is patient selection. Patients who undergo elective joint replacement are usually relatively healthy. They are almost always ambulatory and their comorbidities, when present, are generally reasonably compensated. As a rule, they fare well postoperatively, as evidenced by the 1.3% major complication rate demonstrated in the HOT trial.3 In contrast, hip fracture patients are older, have greater comorbidity and are at remarkably high risk for developing perioperative delirium.3, 4, 6 By definition, their urgent/emergent hip surgery stratifies them to a higher operative risk category than patients who undergo elective joint replacement.7 Half of hip fracture patients do not return to premorbid levels of function, and the 1‐year mortality rate has been estimated to be as high as 25%.6, 8 Given these differences, it is not surprising that hip fracture patients are more likely than elective joint replacement patients to respond favorably to hospitalist comanagement.

In 2007, Simon et al published a retrospective study of 739 pediatric spinal fusion patients at Childrens' Hospital in Denver.9 Beginning in 2004, hospitalists comanaged selected, high‐risk surgical patients (14 of 115 spinal fusion patients, or 12%). Over the course of the study, the mean LOS for low‐risk patients decreased by 21% but the mean LOS for the high‐risk, hospitalist‐comanaged patients decreased by 28%; a 33% relative reduction favoring hospitalist‐managed patients. By targeting selected high‐risk patients, pediatric hospitalists were able to improve upon LOS reductions that occurred systemically across the entire spinal fusion program. Also in 2007, Southern et al compared outcomes for 2,913 patients admitted by full‐time teaching hospitalists vs 6,124 patients admitted by nonhospitalists at Montefiore Medical Center, Bronx, New York.10 Mean LOS for patients admitted to the hospitalist service was 5.01 days vs 5.87 days for the nonhospitalists. Subgroup analysis demonstrated the greatest LOS differentials for patients requiring close clinical monitoring (heart failure, stroke, asthma, or pneumonia) or complex discharge planning.

Although these studies, performed at large academic medical centers, may have limited generalizability, they support the common‐sense notion that hospitalists most benefit patients who are sick, frail, and medically or socially complex. As a corollary, hospitalists probably offer relatively little benefit to surgical and specialty patients who are young or have compensated medical comorbidities and/or straightforward disposition plans. The enormous variability across healthcare institutions makes it difficult if not impossible to define a patient acuity or complexity cutoff below which hospitalist comanagement is unlikely to be beneficial. Nonetheless, some degree of common sense can be applied. As a case in point, a hospitalist probably adds little value to the care of a basically healthy patient with a hemodynamically stable upper gastrointestinal bleed. Despite this, in many institutions, hospitalists admit or comanage all gastroenterology patients, irrespective of their diagnosis, acuity, or complexity.11

One can even hypothesize that hospitalist comanagement may potentially inject risk into patient care. Admitting that patient with a stable upper gastrointestinal bleed to a hospitalist service may delay the gastroenterologist's involvement and initiation of the necessary endoscopy. Having assumed that the hospitalist is running the show, the gastroenterologist may pay insufficient attention to the patient. The hospitalist and gastroenterologist may give conflicting orders and reports that confuse patients, families, and hospital staff, ultimately increasing the likelihood of medical errors.

Ultimately, the risks inherent in adding complexity into patient care must be balanced against the potential benefits. For patients who are sick, frail, or complicated, the risk‐benefit ratio probably tilts in favor of comanagement. However, for generally healthy patients, it is conceivable that adding complexity negates (or worse yet, exceeds) the putative benefits of comanagement.

Given the potential limitations of hospitalist comanagement, why are hospitalists admitting or managing broad and unselected populations of surgical and specialty patients? Hospital leaders have suggested that hospitalist comanagement may protect overstretched surgeons and specialists and extend their capacity. A hospital with only one neurosurgeon on staff might reasonably ask its hospitalists to primarily manage carefully selected low‐acuity neurosurgical patients, allowing the neurosurgeon to serve as a consultant. However, in communities where specialists and surgeons are abundant, this justification is less credible. In such cases, it is difficult not to suspect that the primary reason that hospitalists admit surgical and specialty patients is to enhance the income and quality of life of the surgeons and specialists.

Expanding hospitalist comanagement services for no other reason than to keep specialists and surgeons happy might be justifiable if hospital medicine was not faced with its own critical manpower shortage. Hospital medicine is expected to grow from approximately 20,000 current practitioners to more than 40,000 within a decade.12 The growing shortage of qualified hospitalists has become a preoccupation for hospitalist employers across the country.13 At its 2006 strategic planning retreat, the Board of Directors of the Society of Hospital Medicine identified this issue as one of the greatest threats to the future health of hospital medicine.14 Demand for hospitalists will not abate for at least a decade, which will leave many hospitalist programs significantly understaffed for the foreseeable future. Understaffing forces hospitalist programs to lower hiring standards, jeopardizes patient care, accelerates physician burnout, and may ultimately destabilize hospital medicine.15 Understaffed hospitalist programs should be very circumspect about how and where they expand their clinical coverage.

Another principle underlying hospitalist comanagement is that it improves care by allowing surgeons and specialists to focus on their areas of expertise. Surgeons and specialists who do not have to manage their patients' medical issues can presumably spend more time focusing on their own disciplines. Although this argument is conceptually appealing, there is no evidence that this actually occurs. In fact, it is equally conceivable that hospitalist comanagement could jeopardize care by disengaging surgeons and specialists from their patients' progress (or lack thereof). Furthermore, evidence suggests that hospitalists are underprepared to manage diagnoses that have historically been the purview of surgeons and specialists. Practicing hospitalists who manage acute neurological and neurosurgical conditions, orthopedic trauma, and acute psychiatric illnesses have reported relative undertraining in all of these disease states.10, 16 Generally, hospitalists are expected to deliver this care in the absence of any regime to assess their competence, provide targeted training to fill knowledge gaps, and monitor their progress. At minimum, this should raise concerns about the quality and consistency of care that hospitalists provide to nonmedical patients.

Finally, working collaboratively with other specialties should be a major professional benefit of comanagement. In well‐designed comanagement arrangements, hospitalists and specialists work equitably under clearly defined and mutually agreed upon rules of engagement. They share responsibility for patients, collaborate to improve care, and teach and learn from each other. Unfortunately, in many instances, the power structure becomes lopsided, with surgeons and specialists dictating how, when, and why hospitalists manage their patients.17 Emergency departments have learned to default surgical and specialty patient admissions to hospitalists when surgeons and specialists balk. Hospital administrations may tacitly or overtly expect their financially subsidized hospitalists to cheerfully accept any and all referrals, irrespective of how inappropriate they may be. Practicing hospitalists frequently complain about their subordinate status and inability to control their working conditions, both of which are identified risk factors for career dissatisfaction and burnout.14, 16, 18 Once again, as a specialty facing a critical manpower shortage, hospitalist programs should be very attuned to defining work conditions that foster career satisfaction and physician retention.

REFRAMING COMANAGEMENT

The history of healthcare is laden with examples of new ideas that were widely and indiscriminately adopted only to subsequently fail to withstand rigorous scrutiny.19, 20 The unchecked expansion of hospitalist comanagement has the potential to become another case in point. In the absence of clear definitions of comanagement and good evidence to define best practices, hospitalists are left to use their best judgment to define the parameters of their comanagement services. At minimum, hospitalist leaders should ask some basic questions as they ponder potential comanagement relationships:

  • Why are we being asked to provide this service?

  • Do the patients have comorbidities that require our input?

  • Is there a legitimate quality or efficiency case to be made to support our participation?

  • Do we have the manpower to provide the service? If not, what will suffer as a result?

  • Will the relationship be equitable?

  • What might go wrong?

Comanagement is an appealing construct that has grown to fill many niches of healthcare delivery.10 Given compelling reasons to be skeptical about the purported benefits of comanagement, hospitalists should be circumspect about how and where they offer such services. Comanagement should be applied carefully and methodically, paying close attention to the consequences, intended and unintended. Applying comanagement in a rational, evidence‐based, and sustainable fashion will ultimately better serve patients, the healthcare community, and hospital medicine.

References
  1. Society of Hospital Medicine. The Society of Hospital Medicine 2005–2006 Survey: The Authoritative Source on the State of the Hospital Medicine Movement. Published by the, 2006. Executive summary available at http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/AM/Template.cfm?Section=Surveys2167(21):23382344.
  2. Glasheen J.Exceed acceptable: new studies challenge hospitalists to prove our value.Hospitalist.2008;12(2):63.
  3. Huddleston JM,Long KH,Naessens JM, et al.Medical and surgical comanagement after elective hip and knee arthroplasty.Ann Intern Med.2004;141:2838.
  4. Phy MP,Vanness DJ,Melton LJ, et al.Effects of a hospitalist model on elderly patients with hip fracture.Arch Intern Med.2005;165:796801.
  5. Lu‐Yao GL,Baron JA,Barrett JA,Fischer ES.Treatment and survival among elderly Americans with hip fractures: a population‐based study.Am J Public Health.1994;84:12871291.
  6. Detsky AS,Abrams HB,McLaughlin JR, et al.Predicting cardiac complications in patients undergoing non‐cardiac surgery.J Gen Intern Med.1986;1:211219.
  7. Magaziner J,Simonsick EM,Kashner TM,Hebel JR,Kenzora JE.Predictors of functional recovery one year following hospital discharge for hip fracture: a prospective study.J Gerontol.1990;45(3):M101M107.
  8. Simon TD,Eilert R,Dickinson LM,Kempe A,Benefield E,Berman S.Pediatric hospitalist comanagement of spinal fusion surgery patients.J Hosp Med.2007;2:2329.
  9. Southern WN,Berger MA,Bellin EY,Hailpern SM,Arnsten JH.Hospitalist care and length of stay in patients requiring complex discharge planning and close clinical monitoring.Arch Intern Med.2007;167:18691874.
  10. Glasheen JJ,Epstein KR,Siegal E,Kutner J,Prochazka AV.The spectrum of community‐based hospitalist practice, a call to tailor internal medicine residency training.Arch Intern Med.2007;167(7):727728.
  11. Society of Hospital Medicine. Growth of Hospital Medicine Nationwide. http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/Content/NavigationMenu/Media/GrowthofHospitalMedicineNation wide/Growth_of_Hospital_M.htm. Accessed September 2,2008.
  12. Singer A,Swenson D,Wilcox G, et al.Rebuilding the future of the private practice of hospital medicine.The Phoenix Group, May2007.
  13. Society of Hospital Medicine Board of Directors Strategic Planning Retreat: November 28‐29,2006.
  14. Linzer M,Gerrity M,Douglas JA,McMurray JE,Williams ES,Konrad TR,for the SGIM Career Satisfaction Study Group.Physician stress: results from the physician worklife study.Stress Health.2001;18(1):3742.
  15. Plauth WH,Pantilat SZ,Wachter RM, et al.Hospitalist's perceptions of their residency training needs: Results of a national survey.Am J Med.2001;111:247254.
  16. Gesensway D.Feeling pressure to admit surgical patients? Hospitalists work to set limits on co‐management arrangements.Today's Hospitalist. January2008.
  17. Society of Hospital Medicine. Career Satisfaction White Paper. http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/AM/Template.cfm?Section=Practice_Resources321:406412.
  18. Shure D.Pulmonary‐artery catheters—peace at last?N Engl J Med.2006;354(21):22732274.
Article PDF
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Page Number
398-402
Sections
Article PDF
Article PDF

At a hospital at which I work, every patient who presents to the emergency department with a suspected stroke or transient ischemic attack is evaluated by the stroke team. Per protocol, the team rapidly assesses each patient, orders diagnostic and therapeutic interventions and then refers each and every patient to the hospitalist service for admission and medical comanagement. At no point is any consideration given to whether the patients actually have medical comorbidities, or if a hospitalist will have anything meaningful to add to the care. The firmly set expectation is that hospitalists admit all stroke patients for the purposes of comanagement, while the neurologists consult.

Comanagement has become a mainstay of hospital medicine.1 It is predicated upon the assumption that surgical and specialty patients benefit when their medical comorbidities are managed by hospitalists. It differs conceptually from traditional medical consultation in that hospitalists collaboratively manage patients with surgeons or specialists, sharing responsibility and authority. In practice, however, comanagement varies widely, ranging from a model of care indistinguishable from traditional medical consultation to one where hospitalists admit and assume primary responsibility for surgical and specialty patients. This variability makes it difficult to study and make generalizations about the role and impact of hospitalist comanagement. Nonetheless, recent evidence suggests that hospitalist consultation and comanagement may not be as effective as originally anticipated.

In a 2008 observational cohort study of patients undergoing surgery at an academic medical center, Auerbach et al demonstrated that medical consultation (provided by hospitalists) did not improve glycemic control or increase the likelihood of perioperative beta‐blockade and venous thromboembolism prophylaxis.2 Patients who received consultation had longer adjusted lengths of stay (12.98% longer; 95% confidence interval, 1.61%‐25.61%) and higher adjusted costs (24.36% higher; 95% confidence interval, 13.54%‐36.34%). Notwithstanding the limited generalizability of this study to community hospitals, it has raised concerns that hospitalist consultation does not automatically improve quality of care or cost effectiveness.3

Several other recent trials have also helped to define where hospitalist comanagement may work well and where it may not. In 2004, Huddleston et al published the Hospitalist Orthopedic Team (HOT) trial, the first randomized prospective trial comparing hospitalist‐surgical comanagement to standard care.4 A total of 526 patients undergoing elective hip or knee replacement surgery at the Mayo Clinic were randomized to either standard orthopedic care with consultation as needed, or immediate hospitalist comanagement. The outcomes were disappointing. Hospitalist comanagement reduced minor complications (such as incidence of urinary tract infections, fever, and hyponatremia) but had no effect on moderate or major complications. The HOT intervention modestly reduced adjusted length of stay (LOS), defined as the point at which patients were deemed stable for discharge, by 0.5 days, but had no impact on actual LOS or cost per case. Not surprisingly, orthopedic surgeons and nurses preferred the HOT model of care over the standard model. One year later, Phy et al analyzed outcomes for patients admitted with hip fracture at the same institution.5 This retrospective cohort study compared patients who were admitted to either a standard orthopedic service or to a hospitalist team. In contrast to the HOT trial, hospitalist comanagement of hip fracture patients decreased time to surgery and lowered LOS by 2.2 days without compromising patient outcomes.

How did two trials that occurred roughly simultaneously at the same hospital, involving the same hospitalists and orthopedic surgeons generate such different outcomes? A likely answer is patient selection. Patients who undergo elective joint replacement are usually relatively healthy. They are almost always ambulatory and their comorbidities, when present, are generally reasonably compensated. As a rule, they fare well postoperatively, as evidenced by the 1.3% major complication rate demonstrated in the HOT trial.3 In contrast, hip fracture patients are older, have greater comorbidity and are at remarkably high risk for developing perioperative delirium.3, 4, 6 By definition, their urgent/emergent hip surgery stratifies them to a higher operative risk category than patients who undergo elective joint replacement.7 Half of hip fracture patients do not return to premorbid levels of function, and the 1‐year mortality rate has been estimated to be as high as 25%.6, 8 Given these differences, it is not surprising that hip fracture patients are more likely than elective joint replacement patients to respond favorably to hospitalist comanagement.

In 2007, Simon et al published a retrospective study of 739 pediatric spinal fusion patients at Childrens' Hospital in Denver.9 Beginning in 2004, hospitalists comanaged selected, high‐risk surgical patients (14 of 115 spinal fusion patients, or 12%). Over the course of the study, the mean LOS for low‐risk patients decreased by 21% but the mean LOS for the high‐risk, hospitalist‐comanaged patients decreased by 28%; a 33% relative reduction favoring hospitalist‐managed patients. By targeting selected high‐risk patients, pediatric hospitalists were able to improve upon LOS reductions that occurred systemically across the entire spinal fusion program. Also in 2007, Southern et al compared outcomes for 2,913 patients admitted by full‐time teaching hospitalists vs 6,124 patients admitted by nonhospitalists at Montefiore Medical Center, Bronx, New York.10 Mean LOS for patients admitted to the hospitalist service was 5.01 days vs 5.87 days for the nonhospitalists. Subgroup analysis demonstrated the greatest LOS differentials for patients requiring close clinical monitoring (heart failure, stroke, asthma, or pneumonia) or complex discharge planning.

Although these studies, performed at large academic medical centers, may have limited generalizability, they support the common‐sense notion that hospitalists most benefit patients who are sick, frail, and medically or socially complex. As a corollary, hospitalists probably offer relatively little benefit to surgical and specialty patients who are young or have compensated medical comorbidities and/or straightforward disposition plans. The enormous variability across healthcare institutions makes it difficult if not impossible to define a patient acuity or complexity cutoff below which hospitalist comanagement is unlikely to be beneficial. Nonetheless, some degree of common sense can be applied. As a case in point, a hospitalist probably adds little value to the care of a basically healthy patient with a hemodynamically stable upper gastrointestinal bleed. Despite this, in many institutions, hospitalists admit or comanage all gastroenterology patients, irrespective of their diagnosis, acuity, or complexity.11

One can even hypothesize that hospitalist comanagement may potentially inject risk into patient care. Admitting that patient with a stable upper gastrointestinal bleed to a hospitalist service may delay the gastroenterologist's involvement and initiation of the necessary endoscopy. Having assumed that the hospitalist is running the show, the gastroenterologist may pay insufficient attention to the patient. The hospitalist and gastroenterologist may give conflicting orders and reports that confuse patients, families, and hospital staff, ultimately increasing the likelihood of medical errors.

Ultimately, the risks inherent in adding complexity into patient care must be balanced against the potential benefits. For patients who are sick, frail, or complicated, the risk‐benefit ratio probably tilts in favor of comanagement. However, for generally healthy patients, it is conceivable that adding complexity negates (or worse yet, exceeds) the putative benefits of comanagement.

Given the potential limitations of hospitalist comanagement, why are hospitalists admitting or managing broad and unselected populations of surgical and specialty patients? Hospital leaders have suggested that hospitalist comanagement may protect overstretched surgeons and specialists and extend their capacity. A hospital with only one neurosurgeon on staff might reasonably ask its hospitalists to primarily manage carefully selected low‐acuity neurosurgical patients, allowing the neurosurgeon to serve as a consultant. However, in communities where specialists and surgeons are abundant, this justification is less credible. In such cases, it is difficult not to suspect that the primary reason that hospitalists admit surgical and specialty patients is to enhance the income and quality of life of the surgeons and specialists.

Expanding hospitalist comanagement services for no other reason than to keep specialists and surgeons happy might be justifiable if hospital medicine was not faced with its own critical manpower shortage. Hospital medicine is expected to grow from approximately 20,000 current practitioners to more than 40,000 within a decade.12 The growing shortage of qualified hospitalists has become a preoccupation for hospitalist employers across the country.13 At its 2006 strategic planning retreat, the Board of Directors of the Society of Hospital Medicine identified this issue as one of the greatest threats to the future health of hospital medicine.14 Demand for hospitalists will not abate for at least a decade, which will leave many hospitalist programs significantly understaffed for the foreseeable future. Understaffing forces hospitalist programs to lower hiring standards, jeopardizes patient care, accelerates physician burnout, and may ultimately destabilize hospital medicine.15 Understaffed hospitalist programs should be very circumspect about how and where they expand their clinical coverage.

Another principle underlying hospitalist comanagement is that it improves care by allowing surgeons and specialists to focus on their areas of expertise. Surgeons and specialists who do not have to manage their patients' medical issues can presumably spend more time focusing on their own disciplines. Although this argument is conceptually appealing, there is no evidence that this actually occurs. In fact, it is equally conceivable that hospitalist comanagement could jeopardize care by disengaging surgeons and specialists from their patients' progress (or lack thereof). Furthermore, evidence suggests that hospitalists are underprepared to manage diagnoses that have historically been the purview of surgeons and specialists. Practicing hospitalists who manage acute neurological and neurosurgical conditions, orthopedic trauma, and acute psychiatric illnesses have reported relative undertraining in all of these disease states.10, 16 Generally, hospitalists are expected to deliver this care in the absence of any regime to assess their competence, provide targeted training to fill knowledge gaps, and monitor their progress. At minimum, this should raise concerns about the quality and consistency of care that hospitalists provide to nonmedical patients.

Finally, working collaboratively with other specialties should be a major professional benefit of comanagement. In well‐designed comanagement arrangements, hospitalists and specialists work equitably under clearly defined and mutually agreed upon rules of engagement. They share responsibility for patients, collaborate to improve care, and teach and learn from each other. Unfortunately, in many instances, the power structure becomes lopsided, with surgeons and specialists dictating how, when, and why hospitalists manage their patients.17 Emergency departments have learned to default surgical and specialty patient admissions to hospitalists when surgeons and specialists balk. Hospital administrations may tacitly or overtly expect their financially subsidized hospitalists to cheerfully accept any and all referrals, irrespective of how inappropriate they may be. Practicing hospitalists frequently complain about their subordinate status and inability to control their working conditions, both of which are identified risk factors for career dissatisfaction and burnout.14, 16, 18 Once again, as a specialty facing a critical manpower shortage, hospitalist programs should be very attuned to defining work conditions that foster career satisfaction and physician retention.

REFRAMING COMANAGEMENT

The history of healthcare is laden with examples of new ideas that were widely and indiscriminately adopted only to subsequently fail to withstand rigorous scrutiny.19, 20 The unchecked expansion of hospitalist comanagement has the potential to become another case in point. In the absence of clear definitions of comanagement and good evidence to define best practices, hospitalists are left to use their best judgment to define the parameters of their comanagement services. At minimum, hospitalist leaders should ask some basic questions as they ponder potential comanagement relationships:

  • Why are we being asked to provide this service?

  • Do the patients have comorbidities that require our input?

  • Is there a legitimate quality or efficiency case to be made to support our participation?

  • Do we have the manpower to provide the service? If not, what will suffer as a result?

  • Will the relationship be equitable?

  • What might go wrong?

Comanagement is an appealing construct that has grown to fill many niches of healthcare delivery.10 Given compelling reasons to be skeptical about the purported benefits of comanagement, hospitalists should be circumspect about how and where they offer such services. Comanagement should be applied carefully and methodically, paying close attention to the consequences, intended and unintended. Applying comanagement in a rational, evidence‐based, and sustainable fashion will ultimately better serve patients, the healthcare community, and hospital medicine.

At a hospital at which I work, every patient who presents to the emergency department with a suspected stroke or transient ischemic attack is evaluated by the stroke team. Per protocol, the team rapidly assesses each patient, orders diagnostic and therapeutic interventions and then refers each and every patient to the hospitalist service for admission and medical comanagement. At no point is any consideration given to whether the patients actually have medical comorbidities, or if a hospitalist will have anything meaningful to add to the care. The firmly set expectation is that hospitalists admit all stroke patients for the purposes of comanagement, while the neurologists consult.

Comanagement has become a mainstay of hospital medicine.1 It is predicated upon the assumption that surgical and specialty patients benefit when their medical comorbidities are managed by hospitalists. It differs conceptually from traditional medical consultation in that hospitalists collaboratively manage patients with surgeons or specialists, sharing responsibility and authority. In practice, however, comanagement varies widely, ranging from a model of care indistinguishable from traditional medical consultation to one where hospitalists admit and assume primary responsibility for surgical and specialty patients. This variability makes it difficult to study and make generalizations about the role and impact of hospitalist comanagement. Nonetheless, recent evidence suggests that hospitalist consultation and comanagement may not be as effective as originally anticipated.

In a 2008 observational cohort study of patients undergoing surgery at an academic medical center, Auerbach et al demonstrated that medical consultation (provided by hospitalists) did not improve glycemic control or increase the likelihood of perioperative beta‐blockade and venous thromboembolism prophylaxis.2 Patients who received consultation had longer adjusted lengths of stay (12.98% longer; 95% confidence interval, 1.61%‐25.61%) and higher adjusted costs (24.36% higher; 95% confidence interval, 13.54%‐36.34%). Notwithstanding the limited generalizability of this study to community hospitals, it has raised concerns that hospitalist consultation does not automatically improve quality of care or cost effectiveness.3

Several other recent trials have also helped to define where hospitalist comanagement may work well and where it may not. In 2004, Huddleston et al published the Hospitalist Orthopedic Team (HOT) trial, the first randomized prospective trial comparing hospitalist‐surgical comanagement to standard care.4 A total of 526 patients undergoing elective hip or knee replacement surgery at the Mayo Clinic were randomized to either standard orthopedic care with consultation as needed, or immediate hospitalist comanagement. The outcomes were disappointing. Hospitalist comanagement reduced minor complications (such as incidence of urinary tract infections, fever, and hyponatremia) but had no effect on moderate or major complications. The HOT intervention modestly reduced adjusted length of stay (LOS), defined as the point at which patients were deemed stable for discharge, by 0.5 days, but had no impact on actual LOS or cost per case. Not surprisingly, orthopedic surgeons and nurses preferred the HOT model of care over the standard model. One year later, Phy et al analyzed outcomes for patients admitted with hip fracture at the same institution.5 This retrospective cohort study compared patients who were admitted to either a standard orthopedic service or to a hospitalist team. In contrast to the HOT trial, hospitalist comanagement of hip fracture patients decreased time to surgery and lowered LOS by 2.2 days without compromising patient outcomes.

How did two trials that occurred roughly simultaneously at the same hospital, involving the same hospitalists and orthopedic surgeons generate such different outcomes? A likely answer is patient selection. Patients who undergo elective joint replacement are usually relatively healthy. They are almost always ambulatory and their comorbidities, when present, are generally reasonably compensated. As a rule, they fare well postoperatively, as evidenced by the 1.3% major complication rate demonstrated in the HOT trial.3 In contrast, hip fracture patients are older, have greater comorbidity and are at remarkably high risk for developing perioperative delirium.3, 4, 6 By definition, their urgent/emergent hip surgery stratifies them to a higher operative risk category than patients who undergo elective joint replacement.7 Half of hip fracture patients do not return to premorbid levels of function, and the 1‐year mortality rate has been estimated to be as high as 25%.6, 8 Given these differences, it is not surprising that hip fracture patients are more likely than elective joint replacement patients to respond favorably to hospitalist comanagement.

In 2007, Simon et al published a retrospective study of 739 pediatric spinal fusion patients at Childrens' Hospital in Denver.9 Beginning in 2004, hospitalists comanaged selected, high‐risk surgical patients (14 of 115 spinal fusion patients, or 12%). Over the course of the study, the mean LOS for low‐risk patients decreased by 21% but the mean LOS for the high‐risk, hospitalist‐comanaged patients decreased by 28%; a 33% relative reduction favoring hospitalist‐managed patients. By targeting selected high‐risk patients, pediatric hospitalists were able to improve upon LOS reductions that occurred systemically across the entire spinal fusion program. Also in 2007, Southern et al compared outcomes for 2,913 patients admitted by full‐time teaching hospitalists vs 6,124 patients admitted by nonhospitalists at Montefiore Medical Center, Bronx, New York.10 Mean LOS for patients admitted to the hospitalist service was 5.01 days vs 5.87 days for the nonhospitalists. Subgroup analysis demonstrated the greatest LOS differentials for patients requiring close clinical monitoring (heart failure, stroke, asthma, or pneumonia) or complex discharge planning.

Although these studies, performed at large academic medical centers, may have limited generalizability, they support the common‐sense notion that hospitalists most benefit patients who are sick, frail, and medically or socially complex. As a corollary, hospitalists probably offer relatively little benefit to surgical and specialty patients who are young or have compensated medical comorbidities and/or straightforward disposition plans. The enormous variability across healthcare institutions makes it difficult if not impossible to define a patient acuity or complexity cutoff below which hospitalist comanagement is unlikely to be beneficial. Nonetheless, some degree of common sense can be applied. As a case in point, a hospitalist probably adds little value to the care of a basically healthy patient with a hemodynamically stable upper gastrointestinal bleed. Despite this, in many institutions, hospitalists admit or comanage all gastroenterology patients, irrespective of their diagnosis, acuity, or complexity.11

One can even hypothesize that hospitalist comanagement may potentially inject risk into patient care. Admitting that patient with a stable upper gastrointestinal bleed to a hospitalist service may delay the gastroenterologist's involvement and initiation of the necessary endoscopy. Having assumed that the hospitalist is running the show, the gastroenterologist may pay insufficient attention to the patient. The hospitalist and gastroenterologist may give conflicting orders and reports that confuse patients, families, and hospital staff, ultimately increasing the likelihood of medical errors.

Ultimately, the risks inherent in adding complexity into patient care must be balanced against the potential benefits. For patients who are sick, frail, or complicated, the risk‐benefit ratio probably tilts in favor of comanagement. However, for generally healthy patients, it is conceivable that adding complexity negates (or worse yet, exceeds) the putative benefits of comanagement.

Given the potential limitations of hospitalist comanagement, why are hospitalists admitting or managing broad and unselected populations of surgical and specialty patients? Hospital leaders have suggested that hospitalist comanagement may protect overstretched surgeons and specialists and extend their capacity. A hospital with only one neurosurgeon on staff might reasonably ask its hospitalists to primarily manage carefully selected low‐acuity neurosurgical patients, allowing the neurosurgeon to serve as a consultant. However, in communities where specialists and surgeons are abundant, this justification is less credible. In such cases, it is difficult not to suspect that the primary reason that hospitalists admit surgical and specialty patients is to enhance the income and quality of life of the surgeons and specialists.

Expanding hospitalist comanagement services for no other reason than to keep specialists and surgeons happy might be justifiable if hospital medicine was not faced with its own critical manpower shortage. Hospital medicine is expected to grow from approximately 20,000 current practitioners to more than 40,000 within a decade.12 The growing shortage of qualified hospitalists has become a preoccupation for hospitalist employers across the country.13 At its 2006 strategic planning retreat, the Board of Directors of the Society of Hospital Medicine identified this issue as one of the greatest threats to the future health of hospital medicine.14 Demand for hospitalists will not abate for at least a decade, which will leave many hospitalist programs significantly understaffed for the foreseeable future. Understaffing forces hospitalist programs to lower hiring standards, jeopardizes patient care, accelerates physician burnout, and may ultimately destabilize hospital medicine.15 Understaffed hospitalist programs should be very circumspect about how and where they expand their clinical coverage.

Another principle underlying hospitalist comanagement is that it improves care by allowing surgeons and specialists to focus on their areas of expertise. Surgeons and specialists who do not have to manage their patients' medical issues can presumably spend more time focusing on their own disciplines. Although this argument is conceptually appealing, there is no evidence that this actually occurs. In fact, it is equally conceivable that hospitalist comanagement could jeopardize care by disengaging surgeons and specialists from their patients' progress (or lack thereof). Furthermore, evidence suggests that hospitalists are underprepared to manage diagnoses that have historically been the purview of surgeons and specialists. Practicing hospitalists who manage acute neurological and neurosurgical conditions, orthopedic trauma, and acute psychiatric illnesses have reported relative undertraining in all of these disease states.10, 16 Generally, hospitalists are expected to deliver this care in the absence of any regime to assess their competence, provide targeted training to fill knowledge gaps, and monitor their progress. At minimum, this should raise concerns about the quality and consistency of care that hospitalists provide to nonmedical patients.

Finally, working collaboratively with other specialties should be a major professional benefit of comanagement. In well‐designed comanagement arrangements, hospitalists and specialists work equitably under clearly defined and mutually agreed upon rules of engagement. They share responsibility for patients, collaborate to improve care, and teach and learn from each other. Unfortunately, in many instances, the power structure becomes lopsided, with surgeons and specialists dictating how, when, and why hospitalists manage their patients.17 Emergency departments have learned to default surgical and specialty patient admissions to hospitalists when surgeons and specialists balk. Hospital administrations may tacitly or overtly expect their financially subsidized hospitalists to cheerfully accept any and all referrals, irrespective of how inappropriate they may be. Practicing hospitalists frequently complain about their subordinate status and inability to control their working conditions, both of which are identified risk factors for career dissatisfaction and burnout.14, 16, 18 Once again, as a specialty facing a critical manpower shortage, hospitalist programs should be very attuned to defining work conditions that foster career satisfaction and physician retention.

REFRAMING COMANAGEMENT

The history of healthcare is laden with examples of new ideas that were widely and indiscriminately adopted only to subsequently fail to withstand rigorous scrutiny.19, 20 The unchecked expansion of hospitalist comanagement has the potential to become another case in point. In the absence of clear definitions of comanagement and good evidence to define best practices, hospitalists are left to use their best judgment to define the parameters of their comanagement services. At minimum, hospitalist leaders should ask some basic questions as they ponder potential comanagement relationships:

  • Why are we being asked to provide this service?

  • Do the patients have comorbidities that require our input?

  • Is there a legitimate quality or efficiency case to be made to support our participation?

  • Do we have the manpower to provide the service? If not, what will suffer as a result?

  • Will the relationship be equitable?

  • What might go wrong?

Comanagement is an appealing construct that has grown to fill many niches of healthcare delivery.10 Given compelling reasons to be skeptical about the purported benefits of comanagement, hospitalists should be circumspect about how and where they offer such services. Comanagement should be applied carefully and methodically, paying close attention to the consequences, intended and unintended. Applying comanagement in a rational, evidence‐based, and sustainable fashion will ultimately better serve patients, the healthcare community, and hospital medicine.

References
  1. Society of Hospital Medicine. The Society of Hospital Medicine 2005–2006 Survey: The Authoritative Source on the State of the Hospital Medicine Movement. Published by the, 2006. Executive summary available at http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/AM/Template.cfm?Section=Surveys2167(21):23382344.
  2. Glasheen J.Exceed acceptable: new studies challenge hospitalists to prove our value.Hospitalist.2008;12(2):63.
  3. Huddleston JM,Long KH,Naessens JM, et al.Medical and surgical comanagement after elective hip and knee arthroplasty.Ann Intern Med.2004;141:2838.
  4. Phy MP,Vanness DJ,Melton LJ, et al.Effects of a hospitalist model on elderly patients with hip fracture.Arch Intern Med.2005;165:796801.
  5. Lu‐Yao GL,Baron JA,Barrett JA,Fischer ES.Treatment and survival among elderly Americans with hip fractures: a population‐based study.Am J Public Health.1994;84:12871291.
  6. Detsky AS,Abrams HB,McLaughlin JR, et al.Predicting cardiac complications in patients undergoing non‐cardiac surgery.J Gen Intern Med.1986;1:211219.
  7. Magaziner J,Simonsick EM,Kashner TM,Hebel JR,Kenzora JE.Predictors of functional recovery one year following hospital discharge for hip fracture: a prospective study.J Gerontol.1990;45(3):M101M107.
  8. Simon TD,Eilert R,Dickinson LM,Kempe A,Benefield E,Berman S.Pediatric hospitalist comanagement of spinal fusion surgery patients.J Hosp Med.2007;2:2329.
  9. Southern WN,Berger MA,Bellin EY,Hailpern SM,Arnsten JH.Hospitalist care and length of stay in patients requiring complex discharge planning and close clinical monitoring.Arch Intern Med.2007;167:18691874.
  10. Glasheen JJ,Epstein KR,Siegal E,Kutner J,Prochazka AV.The spectrum of community‐based hospitalist practice, a call to tailor internal medicine residency training.Arch Intern Med.2007;167(7):727728.
  11. Society of Hospital Medicine. Growth of Hospital Medicine Nationwide. http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/Content/NavigationMenu/Media/GrowthofHospitalMedicineNation wide/Growth_of_Hospital_M.htm. Accessed September 2,2008.
  12. Singer A,Swenson D,Wilcox G, et al.Rebuilding the future of the private practice of hospital medicine.The Phoenix Group, May2007.
  13. Society of Hospital Medicine Board of Directors Strategic Planning Retreat: November 28‐29,2006.
  14. Linzer M,Gerrity M,Douglas JA,McMurray JE,Williams ES,Konrad TR,for the SGIM Career Satisfaction Study Group.Physician stress: results from the physician worklife study.Stress Health.2001;18(1):3742.
  15. Plauth WH,Pantilat SZ,Wachter RM, et al.Hospitalist's perceptions of their residency training needs: Results of a national survey.Am J Med.2001;111:247254.
  16. Gesensway D.Feeling pressure to admit surgical patients? Hospitalists work to set limits on co‐management arrangements.Today's Hospitalist. January2008.
  17. Society of Hospital Medicine. Career Satisfaction White Paper. http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/AM/Template.cfm?Section=Practice_Resources321:406412.
  18. Shure D.Pulmonary‐artery catheters—peace at last?N Engl J Med.2006;354(21):22732274.
References
  1. Society of Hospital Medicine. The Society of Hospital Medicine 2005–2006 Survey: The Authoritative Source on the State of the Hospital Medicine Movement. Published by the, 2006. Executive summary available at http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/AM/Template.cfm?Section=Surveys2167(21):23382344.
  2. Glasheen J.Exceed acceptable: new studies challenge hospitalists to prove our value.Hospitalist.2008;12(2):63.
  3. Huddleston JM,Long KH,Naessens JM, et al.Medical and surgical comanagement after elective hip and knee arthroplasty.Ann Intern Med.2004;141:2838.
  4. Phy MP,Vanness DJ,Melton LJ, et al.Effects of a hospitalist model on elderly patients with hip fracture.Arch Intern Med.2005;165:796801.
  5. Lu‐Yao GL,Baron JA,Barrett JA,Fischer ES.Treatment and survival among elderly Americans with hip fractures: a population‐based study.Am J Public Health.1994;84:12871291.
  6. Detsky AS,Abrams HB,McLaughlin JR, et al.Predicting cardiac complications in patients undergoing non‐cardiac surgery.J Gen Intern Med.1986;1:211219.
  7. Magaziner J,Simonsick EM,Kashner TM,Hebel JR,Kenzora JE.Predictors of functional recovery one year following hospital discharge for hip fracture: a prospective study.J Gerontol.1990;45(3):M101M107.
  8. Simon TD,Eilert R,Dickinson LM,Kempe A,Benefield E,Berman S.Pediatric hospitalist comanagement of spinal fusion surgery patients.J Hosp Med.2007;2:2329.
  9. Southern WN,Berger MA,Bellin EY,Hailpern SM,Arnsten JH.Hospitalist care and length of stay in patients requiring complex discharge planning and close clinical monitoring.Arch Intern Med.2007;167:18691874.
  10. Glasheen JJ,Epstein KR,Siegal E,Kutner J,Prochazka AV.The spectrum of community‐based hospitalist practice, a call to tailor internal medicine residency training.Arch Intern Med.2007;167(7):727728.
  11. Society of Hospital Medicine. Growth of Hospital Medicine Nationwide. http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/Content/NavigationMenu/Media/GrowthofHospitalMedicineNation wide/Growth_of_Hospital_M.htm. Accessed September 2,2008.
  12. Singer A,Swenson D,Wilcox G, et al.Rebuilding the future of the private practice of hospital medicine.The Phoenix Group, May2007.
  13. Society of Hospital Medicine Board of Directors Strategic Planning Retreat: November 28‐29,2006.
  14. Linzer M,Gerrity M,Douglas JA,McMurray JE,Williams ES,Konrad TR,for the SGIM Career Satisfaction Study Group.Physician stress: results from the physician worklife study.Stress Health.2001;18(1):3742.
  15. Plauth WH,Pantilat SZ,Wachter RM, et al.Hospitalist's perceptions of their residency training needs: Results of a national survey.Am J Med.2001;111:247254.
  16. Gesensway D.Feeling pressure to admit surgical patients? Hospitalists work to set limits on co‐management arrangements.Today's Hospitalist. January2008.
  17. Society of Hospital Medicine. Career Satisfaction White Paper. http://www.hospitalmedicine.org/AM/Template.cfm?Section=Practice_Resources321:406412.
  18. Shure D.Pulmonary‐artery catheters—peace at last?N Engl J Med.2006;354(21):22732274.
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Page Number
398-402
Page Number
398-402
Article Type
Display Headline
Just because you can, doesn't mean that you should: A call for the rational application of hospitalist comanagement
Display Headline
Just because you can, doesn't mean that you should: A call for the rational application of hospitalist comanagement
Sections
Article Source
Copyright © 2008 Society of Hospital Medicine
Disallow All Ads
Correspondence Location
600 Highland Ave., BX 9988, CSC, Madison, WI 53792
Content Gating
Gated (full article locked unless allowed per User)
Gating Strategy
First Peek Free
Article PDF Media

Purple Like a Glove

Article Type
Changed
Mon, 01/02/2017 - 19:34
Display Headline
Purple like a glove

A 90‐year‐old female nursing home resident was admitted for hyponatremia and altered mental status. A Foley catheter was placed on admission. On hospital day 2, the Foley catheter was found to be draining violet urine. Urinalysis showed a pH of 9.0, numerous white cells, leukocyte esterase, and bacteria. Urine culture grew Proteus mirabilis. Purple Urine Bag Syndrome (PUBS) is a rare phenomenon associated with alkaline urine due to a urinary tract infection. The patient was treated with ciprofloxacin, and her urine returned to a pale yellow color. While alarming to patients and providers alike, PUBS is a benign herald of urinary tract infection, often in an elderly woman with constipation. In normal individuals, tryptophan is metabolized to indole by gut flora, which is in turn conjugated to indoxyl sulfate (IS) by the liver. Urine excretion of IS varies by individual. Sulfatase‐containing bacteria, notably Providencia, Klebsiella, and Proteus species, then catabolize IS to indoxyl. In an alkaline environment indoxyl isomers interact to alternately yield indigo or indirubin which jointly create the urine's characteristic violet color.0

Figure 1
Striking violet color indicative of Purple Urine Bag Syndrome.
References
  1. Dealler S,Hawkey P,Millar M.Enzymatic degradation of urinary indoxyl sulfate by Providencia stuartii and Klebsiella pneumonia causes the purple urine bag syndrome.J Clin Microbiol.1988;26(10):21522156.
Article PDF
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Page Number
430-430
Sections
Article PDF
Article PDF

A 90‐year‐old female nursing home resident was admitted for hyponatremia and altered mental status. A Foley catheter was placed on admission. On hospital day 2, the Foley catheter was found to be draining violet urine. Urinalysis showed a pH of 9.0, numerous white cells, leukocyte esterase, and bacteria. Urine culture grew Proteus mirabilis. Purple Urine Bag Syndrome (PUBS) is a rare phenomenon associated with alkaline urine due to a urinary tract infection. The patient was treated with ciprofloxacin, and her urine returned to a pale yellow color. While alarming to patients and providers alike, PUBS is a benign herald of urinary tract infection, often in an elderly woman with constipation. In normal individuals, tryptophan is metabolized to indole by gut flora, which is in turn conjugated to indoxyl sulfate (IS) by the liver. Urine excretion of IS varies by individual. Sulfatase‐containing bacteria, notably Providencia, Klebsiella, and Proteus species, then catabolize IS to indoxyl. In an alkaline environment indoxyl isomers interact to alternately yield indigo or indirubin which jointly create the urine's characteristic violet color.0

Figure 1
Striking violet color indicative of Purple Urine Bag Syndrome.

A 90‐year‐old female nursing home resident was admitted for hyponatremia and altered mental status. A Foley catheter was placed on admission. On hospital day 2, the Foley catheter was found to be draining violet urine. Urinalysis showed a pH of 9.0, numerous white cells, leukocyte esterase, and bacteria. Urine culture grew Proteus mirabilis. Purple Urine Bag Syndrome (PUBS) is a rare phenomenon associated with alkaline urine due to a urinary tract infection. The patient was treated with ciprofloxacin, and her urine returned to a pale yellow color. While alarming to patients and providers alike, PUBS is a benign herald of urinary tract infection, often in an elderly woman with constipation. In normal individuals, tryptophan is metabolized to indole by gut flora, which is in turn conjugated to indoxyl sulfate (IS) by the liver. Urine excretion of IS varies by individual. Sulfatase‐containing bacteria, notably Providencia, Klebsiella, and Proteus species, then catabolize IS to indoxyl. In an alkaline environment indoxyl isomers interact to alternately yield indigo or indirubin which jointly create the urine's characteristic violet color.0

Figure 1
Striking violet color indicative of Purple Urine Bag Syndrome.
References
  1. Dealler S,Hawkey P,Millar M.Enzymatic degradation of urinary indoxyl sulfate by Providencia stuartii and Klebsiella pneumonia causes the purple urine bag syndrome.J Clin Microbiol.1988;26(10):21522156.
References
  1. Dealler S,Hawkey P,Millar M.Enzymatic degradation of urinary indoxyl sulfate by Providencia stuartii and Klebsiella pneumonia causes the purple urine bag syndrome.J Clin Microbiol.1988;26(10):21522156.
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Page Number
430-430
Page Number
430-430
Article Type
Display Headline
Purple like a glove
Display Headline
Purple like a glove
Sections
Article Source
Copyright © 2008 Society of Hospital Medicine
Disallow All Ads
Correspondence Location
609 Virginia Avenue NE 3303, Atlanta, GA 30306
Content Gating
Gated (full article locked unless allowed per User)
Gating Strategy
First Peek Free
Article PDF Media

Ethics of Discharge Against Medical Advice

Article Type
Changed
Mon, 01/02/2017 - 19:34
Display Headline
Discharge against medical advice: Ethical considerations and professional obligations

BACKGROUND

Discharges against medical advice (AMA) account for approximately 1% of discharges for general medical patients and up to 10% and 30% for patients afflicted with HIV disease and psychiatric disorders, respectively.17 Patients discharged AMA have higher rates of readmission, longer subsequent hospital stays, and worse health outcomes.3, 5, 811 Not unexpectedly, discharges AMA are associated with overall health costs of up to 50% greater than usual discharges.2

Patients who leave AMA are more likely to have poorer social supports, to abuse alcohol, heroin, and other substances, and often have weighty psychosocial or financial concerns.1218 They are also less likely to have an established relationship with a primary care physician.19 Although studies have found that rates of discharge AMA are higher among some ethnic minorities, one recent study suggests that other patient variables, such as level of income and type of insurance, may be more closely related.7, 20 Unfortunately, many patients who leave AMA have dual sources of distress: compelling personal concerns that fuel one's wish to leave and the illness that initially caused the patient to seek care.

Physicians are often distressed by the clinical and ethical challenges of discharges AMA. How should physicians manage their conflicted obligations to respect patients' choices and to prevent harms from befalling their patients? What are physicians' obligations to their patients who leave accepting only partial or inadequate treatment plans or no treatment at all? When should physicians call into question the decision‐making capacity of patients' who make seemingly unwise or clearly dangerous judgments to leave the hospital? In addition to these sorts of concerns, physicians who discharge patients AMA enjoy no definitive legal protection from the consequences of their patients' choices.2123 In fact, good clinical judgement and careful documentation provide the best liability protection.24

Clearly, discharges AMA are problematic for patients, stressful for physicians, and resource intensive for health facilities. Therefore, efforts to understand, better manage, and ultimately decrease discharges AMA will benefit all parties. Whereas the literature on discharge AMA tends to focus on psychiatric and substance abuse patients, this review examines the professional and ethical implications of discharge AMA more generally.

Does Discharge AMA Differ from Treatment Nonadherence Elsewhere in Health Care?

Patients' nonadherence to recommended treatment is often influenced by treatment side effects, costs, inconvenience, psychosocial burden, and the quality of the patient‐physician relationship. Not surprisingly, these same factors are often associated with discharge AMA.2528 In fact, nonadherence in discharge AMA and nonadherence elsewhere are fundamentally similar. Differences, where they exist, are often in the degree or imminency of health risk and in the ability of physicians to monitor the patient.

Discharges AMA tend to involve health risks that are more acute and more severe compared to general nonadherence. To illustrate, Patient A is diagnosed with the metabolic syndrome during an office visit. His physician recommends medical therapy, and the patient declines, thereby incurring a high risk of a cardiovascular event within the next 10 years. Patient B presents to the hospital with an acute coronary syndrome. He declines to remain in the hospital for an evaluation of ischemic burden despite a high risk of a myocardial infarction in the next few days. Patient A is motivated by the cost of medication and chooses to purchase his wife's medications, foregoing his own. Patient B is motivated by distress over leaving his frail wife alone at home and concerns of medical bills that he can not afford to pay. The patient in each of these cases is motivated by social and financial concerns. The consequence of each patient's choice is a higher risk of a cardiovascular event. A major difference is the temporal relationship between the decision to not accept treatment and the ensuing adverse event.

Of course, high‐risk situations are not exclusive to the inpatient setting. For example, a patient presents to a physician's office after having experienced substernal chest pain during the previous evening. The physician recommends hospitalization but the patient declines. Conversely, a hospitalized patient may pursue discharge AMA because the patient disagrees with the physician's stipulations for safe discharge plan including assistance at home. Yet, these concerns about custodial needs, if identified by the physician in an office setting, may not necessarily compel the physician to hospitalize the patient.

Another difference between discharge AMA and general nonadherence is that adherence is more readily and closely measured in the inpatient setting. Hospital‐based occurrences of nonadherence are immediately identified and addressed. To contrast, in the outpatient setting, adherence is far poorer with a 20% nonadherence rate considered to be good compliance.2931 Regardless of the setting for nonadherence, the variance between recommended and accepted treatments often stems from the fact that patients tend to make decisions based on values and broader interests whereas physicians tend to emphasize more circumscribed medical goals.32, 33

Informed and Voluntary Refusal of Treatment

A patient's intention to leave AMA may trigger physicians and other hospital staff to question the patient's decision‐making capacity.34 One's capacity to make decisions is specific to the decision at hand. For example, a patient with early dementia and an infected arterial insufficiency ulcer may not be able to fully appreciate all the consequences of premature discharge on her health, but may be able to reliably indicate her preferred health agent.

Clinicians commonly make implicit capacity determinations, and do so each time a patient's general consent for treatment is accepted. These assessments tend to be made more explicitly when the patient's decision appears to be grossly contrary to his or her welfare. Capacity to make decisions includes the ability to understand information germane to the decision, to deliberate, and to appreciate the consequences of choices.35 As with consent to treatment, a physician who accepts a patient's refusal for treatment has determined that the patient has adequate decision‐making capacity. However, physicians do not regularly document assessments of capacity in discharge AMA.3638

Writers on the subject suggest that patients who refuse low‐risk but high‐benefit treatments should be held to a higher standard of capacity.22 This notion could expose patients to incapacity determinations based on a physician's subjective assessment of net benefit or net harm. Rather, I contend that the standard itself should not vary. It should always require that the patient's level of cognitive function, insight, and deliberative abilities be appropriate to the decision at hand and sufficient for the patient to render an autonomous decision. The relative benefit of a treatment, in and of itself, is not relevant to the level of capacity required. Rather, net benefit is relevant to physicians' obligations to more carefully verify patients' understanding of the pertinent information and their perceptions of the consequences of their choices when declining high benefit/low harm treatments.

A capacitated patient's decision to leave AMA, however well informed, may nevertheless not be entirely voluntary. Voluntary decisions are those that are made with substantially free choice.39 Various controlling influences may impact a patient's decision to leave AMA, including social or emotional challenges such as a desperate concern about losing employment.9, 1315 Health professionals may view a patient's action under some controlling influences as meritorious, for example, leaving AMA to fulfill one's obligation to care for a demented spouse, whereas professionals may view acting on other controlling influences as contemptible, such as a leaving to satisfy a drug addiction. Physicians should view controlling influences, regardless of its moral valence, as affecting the voluntariness of a patient's decision. Moreover, physicians are positioned, through either support or coercion, to influence the degree to which a patient's decision about treatment is voluntary. To illustrate, physicians who support their substance abuse patients by providing adequate treatment of their withdrawal symptoms see lower rates of discharge AMA among these addicted patients.3, 5, 7 Regarding coercion, physicians of hospitalized patients may state their refusal to prescribe a beneficial but inferior outpatient treatment in order to compel their patients to accept standard inpatient treatment.

Physicians' Obligations in Discharge AMA

Broadly stated, physicians' obligations are to promote their patients' welfare and to respect their autonomy which is understood as serving the patient's self‐defined best interests including maintaining dignity.40 When discharging a patient AMA, physicians are sometimes limited in the ways in which they can fulfill these obligations. Physicians should attempt to promote informed decision‐making by discussing the likely harms of premature discharge, the likely harms and benefits of inpatient treatment, and alternatives to inpatient treatment, including medically inferior options where these exist.

Within this obligation to promote patients' welfare, physicians should render only objective and conservative assessments of harm and benefit. These assessments may directly reflect well‐established medical evidence (eg, use of statins in acute coronary syndromes), but may also be partly or even wholly dependent on clinical judgment (eg, interpreting and applying criteria for inpatient versus outpatient treatment of pneumonia). The process though which these clinical judgments are made is critical because it forms the basis of the medical advice that defines whether a patient's discharge is routine or AMA. Physicians, in addition to their obligation to objectively assess options for treatment, should be mindful of their fiduciary responsibilities in their position to influence patients' choices by the content, emphasis, and manner with which they communicate treatment options.4144

In addition to supporting patient autonomy through information and education, physicians can promote authenticity of choice by identifying patients' compelling reasons to leave AMA. Does the patient have a demented spouse alone at home? Does the patient have a cultural or religious requirement that they perceive cannot be met while hospitalized? Is the patient concerned about loss of employment? Does the patient have an important family obligation (eg, wedding, funeral) to fulfill? Ways in which these concerns can be mitigated should be explored, often through a multidisciplinary approach that may include social work and pastoral care.45

What are physicians' obligations to patients who are willing to accept only partial or inadequate treatment plans upon discharge AMA? Should physicians be complicit in treatments that are substandard, such as the writing of a prescription for an oral antibiotic for a patient whose clinical condition meets criteria for inpatient treatment of pneumonia? Should physicians be complicit in treatments that are somewhat effective, but clearly inadequate and potentially dangerous? An example of this is the providing of a prescription for an oral anti‐arrhythmic medication for a patient diagnosed in the emergency department (ED) with syncope from a tachyarrhythmia.

In considering these scenarios, physicians may need to focus primarily on their ethical obligations to not cause harms, because discharge AMA limits physicians' ability to actively promote patients' health.46 To illustrate, Patient C, a frequent abuser of alcohol, presents to the ED and is diagnosed with a pulmonary embolus. She wants only analgesic medication for her chest pain and states that she plans no outpatient follow up. What options should the ED physician consider? The physician should not discharge the patient with a prescription for warfarin, the use of which requires close and careful monitoring especially in the setting of alcohol consumption, because this treatment, along with this patient's social practices and disinclination for follow up, introduces risks similar in seriousness to her medical condition.47 Should the ED physician give her an injection of low molecular weight heparin before the patient exits? Although a single injection of heparin is not likely to meaningfully affect her disease course, there is little direct harm in providing it. However, one must also consider possible indirect harms. For example, the offer of heparin may harm Patient C if she construes it as a bona fide treatment alternative, thereby influencing her decision to leave AMA. In another scenario, Patient D presents to the ED with an upper gastrointestinal hemorrhage and orthostatic hypotension that responds quickly to intravenous fluids. The patient unconditionally refuses to undergo an endoscopy or to accept admission into the hospital. Should the ED physician administer a dose of intravenous proton pump inhibitor (PPI), and write a prescription for high‐dose oral PPI? Because the harms of PPIs are low and it may prevent rebleeding, providing such care does not violate the obligation to not cause disproportionate harms, and attends to the obligation to promote the patient's health. To summarize, physicians' obligations to provide treatment upon discharge AMA is determined by a complex evaluation of the likelihood and magnitude of each the harms and benefits associated with the outpatient treatment and the disease‐associated risks of morbidity and mortality. This assessment is outlined in Table 1.

Obligations to Provide Treatment Upon Discharge AMA
Disease Risk Treatment Efficacy Treatment Risk Ethical Obligation
High High Low Clear obligation to treat
High Low Low Weak obligation to treat
Low High Low Weak obligation to treat
High High High No clear obligation to treat
High Low High No clear obligation to treat
Low High High No clear obligation to treat
Low Low Low No clear obligation to treat
Low Low High Clear obligation not to treat

Do physicians have obligations for facilitating after‐care when discharging a patient AMA? The policy of some hospitals is that there are no such obligations.48 Arguably, providing resources for after‐care to these patients may benefit these patients with no additional medical risk, with the caveat that offering after‐care does not influence the patient's decision to leave AMA. Therefore, physicians are ethically obligated to offer this care. In fact, this is the practice of many physicians and consistent with a number of authorities in medicine and ethics.24, 36, 49, 50 There is little evidence to support the concern that providing patients with after‐care resources exposes physicians or institutions to greater legal liability. In fact the opposite may be true.51 For patients who habitually leave AMA and who repeatedly have not sought recommended after‐care, it should not be ethically obligatory for hospital staff to expend efforts to secure after‐care.

A corollary to physicians' obligations is the obligations of patients as users of health resources. There is an enormous literature on patients' rights, yet a relative dearth of discourse, let alone consensus, on patients' duties and responsibilities.52, 53 At a minimum, patients are obligated to honor commitments and to disclose relevant information in the interest of their personal health.54 Do patients discharged AMA have moral obligations to their fellow patients or to society in terms of responsible use of often costly and sometimes limited health resources? If so, what do these obligations require and which patients should be so obligated? These are important questions to consider, yet are beyond the scope of this discussion.

Summary and Conclusions

Clinicians caring for patients who seek discharge AMA are often faced with emotionally charged and time‐pressured treatment situations. These clinicians must weigh multiple considerations for the benefit of their patients, and maintain professional standards of clinical care. Clinicians presented with these situations should (1) evaluate patients' decision‐making capacity, (2) assess the degree to which their choices are influenced by controlling external influences and mitigate these factors where possible, and (3) encourage and facilitate after‐care (Table 2).

Clinicians' Discharge AMA Response List
1. Capacity Assess patient's factual understanding, reasoning, and insight into consequences of decision
2. Voluntariness Assess for controlling influences; physical, social, emotional, psychiatric, cultural
3. Mitigation Multidisciplinary efforts to mitigate controlling influences
4. Treatment alternatives Assess for medically appropriate outpatient treatment alternatives. (See table 1)
5. Aftercare Encourage and facilitate after care

Although discharge AMA accounts for only a small percentage of hospital discharges, its medical, emotional, and resource utilization consequences for patients as well as for physicians and hospitals is disproportionate. The clinical impacts of discharge AMA should be further investigated and specific strategies and interventions to mitigate its health effects should be validated.

References
  1. Ibrahim SA,Kwoh CK,Krishnan E.Factors associated with patients who leave acute‐care hospitals against medical advice.Am J Public Health.2007;97(12):22042208.
  2. Aliyu ZY.Discharge against medical advice: sociodemographic, clinical and financial perspectives.Int J Clin Pract.2002;56(5):325327.
  3. Anis AH,Sun H,Guh DP,Palepu A,Schechter MT,O'Shaughnessy MV.Leaving hospital against medical advice among HIV‐positive patients.CMAJ.2002;167(6):633637.
  4. O'Hara D,Hart W,McDonald I.Leaving hospital against medical advice.J Qual Clin Pract.1996;16(3):157164.
  5. Pages KP,Russo JE,Wingerson DK,Ries RK,Roy‐Byrne PP,Cowley DS.Predictors and outcome of discharge against medical advice from the psychiatric units of a general hospital.Psychiatr Serv.1998;49(9):11871192.
  6. Smith DB,Telles JL.Discharges against medical advice at regional acute care hospitals.Am J Public Health.1991;81(2):212215.
  7. Franks P,Meldrum S,Fiscella K.Discharges against medical advice: are race/ethnicity predictors?J Gen Intern Med.2006;21(9):955960.
  8. Hwang SW,Li J,Gupta R,Chien V,Martin RE.What happens to patients who leave hospital against medical advice?CMAJ.2003;168(4):417420.
  9. Baptist AP,Warrier I,Arora R,Ager J,Massanari RM.Hospitalized patients with asthma who leave against medical advice: characteristics, reasons, and outcomes.J Allergy Clin Immunol.2007;19(4):924929.
  10. Fiscella K,Meldrum S,Franks P.Post partum discharge against medical advice: who leaves and does it matter?Matern Child Health J.2007;11(5):431436.
  11. Ding R,Jung JJ,Kirsch TD,Levy F,McCarthy ML.Uncompleted emergency department care: patients who leave against medical advice.Acad Emerg Med.2007;14(10):870876.
  12. Chan AC,Palepu A,Guh DP, et al.HIV‐positive injection drug users who leave the hospital against medical advice: the mitigating role of methadone and social support.J Acquir Immune Defic Syndr.2004;35(1):5659.
  13. Cook CA,Booth BM,Blow FC,McAleenan KA,Bunn JY.Risk fctors for AMA discharge from VA inpatient alcoholism treatment programs.J Subst Abuse Treat.1994;11(3):239245.
  14. Endicott P,Watson B.Interventions to improve the AMA‐discharge rate for opiate‐addicted patients.J Psychosoc Nurs Ment Health Serv.1994;32(8):3640.
  15. Green P,Watts D,Poole S,Dhopesh V.Why patients sign out against medical advice (AMA): factors motivating patients to sign out AMA.Am J Drug Alcohol Abuse.2004;30(2):489493.
  16. Jankowski CB,Drum DE.Diagnostic correlates of discharge against medical advice.Arch Gen Psychiatry.1977;34(2):153155.
  17. Jeremiah J,O'Sullivan P,Stein MD.Who leaves against medical advice?J Gen Intern Med.1995;10(7):403405.
  18. Fiscella K,Meldrum S,Barnett S.Hospital discharge against medical advice after myocardial infarction: deaths and readmissions.Am J Med.2007;120(12):104153.
  19. Weingart SN,Davis RB,Phillips RS.Patients discharged against medical advice from a general medicine service.J Gen Intern Med.1998;13(8):568571.
  20. Moy E,Bartman BA.Race and hospital discharge against medical advice.J Natl Med Assoc.1996;88(10):658660.
  21. Devitt PJ,Devitt AC,Dewan M.An examination of whether discharging patients against medical advice protects physicians from malpractice charges.Psychiatr Serv.2000;51(7):899902.
  22. Gerbasi JB,Simon RI.Patients' rights and psychiatrists' duties: discharging patients against medical advice.Harv Rev Psychiatry.2003;11(6):333343.
  23. Devitt PJ,Devitt AC,Dewan M.Does identifying a discharge as “against medical advice” confer legal protection?J Fam Pract.2000;49(3):224227.
  24. American College of Emergency Physicians Scientific Meeting. http://meetings.acep.org/NR/rdonlyres/3389C314–2395‐4FCE‐BD9A‐FAABFFC0DFB6/0/WE184.pdf. Accessed November 30,2007.
  25. Shemesh E,Yehuda R,Milo O, et al.Posttraumatic stress, nonadherence, and adverse outcome in survivors of a myocardial infarction.Psychosom Med.2004;66(4):521526.
  26. Piette JD,Heisler M,Krein S,Kerr EA.The role of patient‐physician trust in moderating medication nonadherence due to cost pressures.Arch Intern Med.2005;165(15):17491755.
  27. George J,Kong DC,Thoman R,Stewart K.Factors associated with medication nonadherence in patients with COPD.Chest.2005;128(5):31983204.
  28. Elbogen EB,Swanson JW,Swartz MS,Van Dorn R.Medication nonadherence and substance abuse in psychotic disorders: impact of depressive symptoms and social stability.J Nerv Ment Dis.2005;193(10):673679.
  29. Monane M,Bohn RL,Gurwitz JH,Glynn RJ,Levin R,Avorn J.Compliance with antihypertensive therapy among elderly medicaid enrollees: the roles of age, gender, and race.Am J Public Health.1996;86(12):18051808.
  30. Wang PS,Benner JS,Glynn RJ,Winkelmayer WC,Mogun H,Avorn J.How well do patients report noncompliance with antihypertensive medications?: a comparison of self‐report versus filled prescriptions.Pharmacoepidemiol Drug Saf.2004;13(1):1119.
  31. DiMatteo MR.Variations in patients' adherence to medical recommendations: a quantitative review of 50 years of research.Med Care.2004;42(3):200209.
  32. van Kleffens T,van Leeuwen E.Physicians' evaluations of patients' decisions to refuse oncological treatment.J Med Ethics.2005;31(3):131136.
  33. Donovan JL,Blake DR.Patient non‐compliance: deviance or reasoned decision‐making?Soc Sci Med.1992;34(5):507513.
  34. Ganzini L,Volicer L,Nelson WA,Fox E,Derse AR.Ten myths about decision‐making capacity.J Am Med Dir Assoc.2005;6(3 Suppl):S100S104.
  35. Grisso T,Appelbaum PS,Hill‐Fotouhi C.The MacCAT‐T: a clinical tool to assess patients' capacities to make treatment decisions.Psychiatr Serv.1997;48(11):14151419.
  36. Dubow D,Propp D,Narasimhan K.Emergency department discharges against medical advice.J Emerg Med.1992;10(4):513516.
  37. Seaborn MH,Osmun WE.Discharges against medical advice: a community hospital's experience.Can J Rural Med.2004;9(3):148153.
  38. Henson VL,Vickery DS.Patient self discharge from the emergency department: who is at Risk?Emergency Med J.2005;22(7):499501.
  39. Beauchamp JF,Childress TL.Respect for Autonomy.Principles of Biomedical Ethics.Fifth ed.New York:Oxford University Press;2001. p.57112.
  40. Snyder L,Leffler C.Ethics Manual: fifth edition.Ann Intern Med.2005;142(7):560582.
  41. Mazur DJ,Hickam DH.The effect of physician's explanations on patients' treatment preferences: five‐year survival data.Med Decis Making.1994;14(3):255258.
  42. Mazur DJ,Merz JF.How the manner of presentation of data influences older patients in determining their treatment preferences.J Am Geriatr Soc.1993;41(3):223228.
  43. Mazur DJ,Hickam DH,Mazur MD,Mazur MD.The role of doctor's opinion in shared decision making: what does shared decision making really mean when considering invasive medical procedures?Health Expect.2005;8(2):97102.
  44. Malloy TR,Wigton RS,Meeske J,Tape TG.The influence of treatment descriptions on advance medical directive decisions.J Am Geriatr Soc.1992;40(12):12551260.
  45. Holden P,Vogtsberger KN,Mohl PC,Fuller DS.Patients who leave the hospital against medical advice: the role of the psychiatric consultant.Psychosomatics.1989;30(4):396404.
  46. Beauchamp JF,Childress TL.Nonmaleficence.Principles of Biomedical Ethics.Fifth ed.New York:Oxford University Press;2001:113164.
  47. Stein PD,Henry JW,Relyea B.Untreated patients with pulmonary embolism. Outcome, clinical, and laboratory assessment.Chest.1995;107(4):931935.
  48. Memorial Hospital Pembroke, Pembroke Pines, Florida. Medical Staff Rules and Regulations. http://www.mhs.net/AboutUs/Physician_Bylaws/pdfs/mhp/MHP_Rules_and%20_Regs_2004.pdf. Accessed August 29,2008.
  49. Quill TE,Cassel CK.Nonabandonment: a central obligation for physicians.Ann Intern Med.1995;122(5):368374.
  50. Swota AH.Changing policy to reflect a concern for patients who sign out against medical advice.Am J Bioethic.2007;7(3):3234.
  51. Strinko JM,Howard CA,Schaeffer SL,Laughlin JA,Berry MA,Turner SN.Reducing risk with telephone follow‐up of patients who leave against medical advice of fail to complete an ED visit.J Emerg Nurs.2000;26(3):223232.
  52. English DC.Moral obligations of patients: a clinical view.J Med Philos.2005;30(2):139152.
  53. Draper H,Sorell T.Patients' responsibilities in medical ethics.Bioethics.2002;16(4):335352.
  54. Brody H.Patients' Responsibilities. In:Post SG, ed.Encyclopedia of Bioethics.Third ed.New York:Thompson Gale;2004. p.19901992.
Article PDF
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Page Number
403-408
Legacy Keywords
ethics, consent, compliance, discharge
Sections
Article PDF
Article PDF

BACKGROUND

Discharges against medical advice (AMA) account for approximately 1% of discharges for general medical patients and up to 10% and 30% for patients afflicted with HIV disease and psychiatric disorders, respectively.17 Patients discharged AMA have higher rates of readmission, longer subsequent hospital stays, and worse health outcomes.3, 5, 811 Not unexpectedly, discharges AMA are associated with overall health costs of up to 50% greater than usual discharges.2

Patients who leave AMA are more likely to have poorer social supports, to abuse alcohol, heroin, and other substances, and often have weighty psychosocial or financial concerns.1218 They are also less likely to have an established relationship with a primary care physician.19 Although studies have found that rates of discharge AMA are higher among some ethnic minorities, one recent study suggests that other patient variables, such as level of income and type of insurance, may be more closely related.7, 20 Unfortunately, many patients who leave AMA have dual sources of distress: compelling personal concerns that fuel one's wish to leave and the illness that initially caused the patient to seek care.

Physicians are often distressed by the clinical and ethical challenges of discharges AMA. How should physicians manage their conflicted obligations to respect patients' choices and to prevent harms from befalling their patients? What are physicians' obligations to their patients who leave accepting only partial or inadequate treatment plans or no treatment at all? When should physicians call into question the decision‐making capacity of patients' who make seemingly unwise or clearly dangerous judgments to leave the hospital? In addition to these sorts of concerns, physicians who discharge patients AMA enjoy no definitive legal protection from the consequences of their patients' choices.2123 In fact, good clinical judgement and careful documentation provide the best liability protection.24

Clearly, discharges AMA are problematic for patients, stressful for physicians, and resource intensive for health facilities. Therefore, efforts to understand, better manage, and ultimately decrease discharges AMA will benefit all parties. Whereas the literature on discharge AMA tends to focus on psychiatric and substance abuse patients, this review examines the professional and ethical implications of discharge AMA more generally.

Does Discharge AMA Differ from Treatment Nonadherence Elsewhere in Health Care?

Patients' nonadherence to recommended treatment is often influenced by treatment side effects, costs, inconvenience, psychosocial burden, and the quality of the patient‐physician relationship. Not surprisingly, these same factors are often associated with discharge AMA.2528 In fact, nonadherence in discharge AMA and nonadherence elsewhere are fundamentally similar. Differences, where they exist, are often in the degree or imminency of health risk and in the ability of physicians to monitor the patient.

Discharges AMA tend to involve health risks that are more acute and more severe compared to general nonadherence. To illustrate, Patient A is diagnosed with the metabolic syndrome during an office visit. His physician recommends medical therapy, and the patient declines, thereby incurring a high risk of a cardiovascular event within the next 10 years. Patient B presents to the hospital with an acute coronary syndrome. He declines to remain in the hospital for an evaluation of ischemic burden despite a high risk of a myocardial infarction in the next few days. Patient A is motivated by the cost of medication and chooses to purchase his wife's medications, foregoing his own. Patient B is motivated by distress over leaving his frail wife alone at home and concerns of medical bills that he can not afford to pay. The patient in each of these cases is motivated by social and financial concerns. The consequence of each patient's choice is a higher risk of a cardiovascular event. A major difference is the temporal relationship between the decision to not accept treatment and the ensuing adverse event.

Of course, high‐risk situations are not exclusive to the inpatient setting. For example, a patient presents to a physician's office after having experienced substernal chest pain during the previous evening. The physician recommends hospitalization but the patient declines. Conversely, a hospitalized patient may pursue discharge AMA because the patient disagrees with the physician's stipulations for safe discharge plan including assistance at home. Yet, these concerns about custodial needs, if identified by the physician in an office setting, may not necessarily compel the physician to hospitalize the patient.

Another difference between discharge AMA and general nonadherence is that adherence is more readily and closely measured in the inpatient setting. Hospital‐based occurrences of nonadherence are immediately identified and addressed. To contrast, in the outpatient setting, adherence is far poorer with a 20% nonadherence rate considered to be good compliance.2931 Regardless of the setting for nonadherence, the variance between recommended and accepted treatments often stems from the fact that patients tend to make decisions based on values and broader interests whereas physicians tend to emphasize more circumscribed medical goals.32, 33

Informed and Voluntary Refusal of Treatment

A patient's intention to leave AMA may trigger physicians and other hospital staff to question the patient's decision‐making capacity.34 One's capacity to make decisions is specific to the decision at hand. For example, a patient with early dementia and an infected arterial insufficiency ulcer may not be able to fully appreciate all the consequences of premature discharge on her health, but may be able to reliably indicate her preferred health agent.

Clinicians commonly make implicit capacity determinations, and do so each time a patient's general consent for treatment is accepted. These assessments tend to be made more explicitly when the patient's decision appears to be grossly contrary to his or her welfare. Capacity to make decisions includes the ability to understand information germane to the decision, to deliberate, and to appreciate the consequences of choices.35 As with consent to treatment, a physician who accepts a patient's refusal for treatment has determined that the patient has adequate decision‐making capacity. However, physicians do not regularly document assessments of capacity in discharge AMA.3638

Writers on the subject suggest that patients who refuse low‐risk but high‐benefit treatments should be held to a higher standard of capacity.22 This notion could expose patients to incapacity determinations based on a physician's subjective assessment of net benefit or net harm. Rather, I contend that the standard itself should not vary. It should always require that the patient's level of cognitive function, insight, and deliberative abilities be appropriate to the decision at hand and sufficient for the patient to render an autonomous decision. The relative benefit of a treatment, in and of itself, is not relevant to the level of capacity required. Rather, net benefit is relevant to physicians' obligations to more carefully verify patients' understanding of the pertinent information and their perceptions of the consequences of their choices when declining high benefit/low harm treatments.

A capacitated patient's decision to leave AMA, however well informed, may nevertheless not be entirely voluntary. Voluntary decisions are those that are made with substantially free choice.39 Various controlling influences may impact a patient's decision to leave AMA, including social or emotional challenges such as a desperate concern about losing employment.9, 1315 Health professionals may view a patient's action under some controlling influences as meritorious, for example, leaving AMA to fulfill one's obligation to care for a demented spouse, whereas professionals may view acting on other controlling influences as contemptible, such as a leaving to satisfy a drug addiction. Physicians should view controlling influences, regardless of its moral valence, as affecting the voluntariness of a patient's decision. Moreover, physicians are positioned, through either support or coercion, to influence the degree to which a patient's decision about treatment is voluntary. To illustrate, physicians who support their substance abuse patients by providing adequate treatment of their withdrawal symptoms see lower rates of discharge AMA among these addicted patients.3, 5, 7 Regarding coercion, physicians of hospitalized patients may state their refusal to prescribe a beneficial but inferior outpatient treatment in order to compel their patients to accept standard inpatient treatment.

Physicians' Obligations in Discharge AMA

Broadly stated, physicians' obligations are to promote their patients' welfare and to respect their autonomy which is understood as serving the patient's self‐defined best interests including maintaining dignity.40 When discharging a patient AMA, physicians are sometimes limited in the ways in which they can fulfill these obligations. Physicians should attempt to promote informed decision‐making by discussing the likely harms of premature discharge, the likely harms and benefits of inpatient treatment, and alternatives to inpatient treatment, including medically inferior options where these exist.

Within this obligation to promote patients' welfare, physicians should render only objective and conservative assessments of harm and benefit. These assessments may directly reflect well‐established medical evidence (eg, use of statins in acute coronary syndromes), but may also be partly or even wholly dependent on clinical judgment (eg, interpreting and applying criteria for inpatient versus outpatient treatment of pneumonia). The process though which these clinical judgments are made is critical because it forms the basis of the medical advice that defines whether a patient's discharge is routine or AMA. Physicians, in addition to their obligation to objectively assess options for treatment, should be mindful of their fiduciary responsibilities in their position to influence patients' choices by the content, emphasis, and manner with which they communicate treatment options.4144

In addition to supporting patient autonomy through information and education, physicians can promote authenticity of choice by identifying patients' compelling reasons to leave AMA. Does the patient have a demented spouse alone at home? Does the patient have a cultural or religious requirement that they perceive cannot be met while hospitalized? Is the patient concerned about loss of employment? Does the patient have an important family obligation (eg, wedding, funeral) to fulfill? Ways in which these concerns can be mitigated should be explored, often through a multidisciplinary approach that may include social work and pastoral care.45

What are physicians' obligations to patients who are willing to accept only partial or inadequate treatment plans upon discharge AMA? Should physicians be complicit in treatments that are substandard, such as the writing of a prescription for an oral antibiotic for a patient whose clinical condition meets criteria for inpatient treatment of pneumonia? Should physicians be complicit in treatments that are somewhat effective, but clearly inadequate and potentially dangerous? An example of this is the providing of a prescription for an oral anti‐arrhythmic medication for a patient diagnosed in the emergency department (ED) with syncope from a tachyarrhythmia.

In considering these scenarios, physicians may need to focus primarily on their ethical obligations to not cause harms, because discharge AMA limits physicians' ability to actively promote patients' health.46 To illustrate, Patient C, a frequent abuser of alcohol, presents to the ED and is diagnosed with a pulmonary embolus. She wants only analgesic medication for her chest pain and states that she plans no outpatient follow up. What options should the ED physician consider? The physician should not discharge the patient with a prescription for warfarin, the use of which requires close and careful monitoring especially in the setting of alcohol consumption, because this treatment, along with this patient's social practices and disinclination for follow up, introduces risks similar in seriousness to her medical condition.47 Should the ED physician give her an injection of low molecular weight heparin before the patient exits? Although a single injection of heparin is not likely to meaningfully affect her disease course, there is little direct harm in providing it. However, one must also consider possible indirect harms. For example, the offer of heparin may harm Patient C if she construes it as a bona fide treatment alternative, thereby influencing her decision to leave AMA. In another scenario, Patient D presents to the ED with an upper gastrointestinal hemorrhage and orthostatic hypotension that responds quickly to intravenous fluids. The patient unconditionally refuses to undergo an endoscopy or to accept admission into the hospital. Should the ED physician administer a dose of intravenous proton pump inhibitor (PPI), and write a prescription for high‐dose oral PPI? Because the harms of PPIs are low and it may prevent rebleeding, providing such care does not violate the obligation to not cause disproportionate harms, and attends to the obligation to promote the patient's health. To summarize, physicians' obligations to provide treatment upon discharge AMA is determined by a complex evaluation of the likelihood and magnitude of each the harms and benefits associated with the outpatient treatment and the disease‐associated risks of morbidity and mortality. This assessment is outlined in Table 1.

Obligations to Provide Treatment Upon Discharge AMA
Disease Risk Treatment Efficacy Treatment Risk Ethical Obligation
High High Low Clear obligation to treat
High Low Low Weak obligation to treat
Low High Low Weak obligation to treat
High High High No clear obligation to treat
High Low High No clear obligation to treat
Low High High No clear obligation to treat
Low Low Low No clear obligation to treat
Low Low High Clear obligation not to treat

Do physicians have obligations for facilitating after‐care when discharging a patient AMA? The policy of some hospitals is that there are no such obligations.48 Arguably, providing resources for after‐care to these patients may benefit these patients with no additional medical risk, with the caveat that offering after‐care does not influence the patient's decision to leave AMA. Therefore, physicians are ethically obligated to offer this care. In fact, this is the practice of many physicians and consistent with a number of authorities in medicine and ethics.24, 36, 49, 50 There is little evidence to support the concern that providing patients with after‐care resources exposes physicians or institutions to greater legal liability. In fact the opposite may be true.51 For patients who habitually leave AMA and who repeatedly have not sought recommended after‐care, it should not be ethically obligatory for hospital staff to expend efforts to secure after‐care.

A corollary to physicians' obligations is the obligations of patients as users of health resources. There is an enormous literature on patients' rights, yet a relative dearth of discourse, let alone consensus, on patients' duties and responsibilities.52, 53 At a minimum, patients are obligated to honor commitments and to disclose relevant information in the interest of their personal health.54 Do patients discharged AMA have moral obligations to their fellow patients or to society in terms of responsible use of often costly and sometimes limited health resources? If so, what do these obligations require and which patients should be so obligated? These are important questions to consider, yet are beyond the scope of this discussion.

Summary and Conclusions

Clinicians caring for patients who seek discharge AMA are often faced with emotionally charged and time‐pressured treatment situations. These clinicians must weigh multiple considerations for the benefit of their patients, and maintain professional standards of clinical care. Clinicians presented with these situations should (1) evaluate patients' decision‐making capacity, (2) assess the degree to which their choices are influenced by controlling external influences and mitigate these factors where possible, and (3) encourage and facilitate after‐care (Table 2).

Clinicians' Discharge AMA Response List
1. Capacity Assess patient's factual understanding, reasoning, and insight into consequences of decision
2. Voluntariness Assess for controlling influences; physical, social, emotional, psychiatric, cultural
3. Mitigation Multidisciplinary efforts to mitigate controlling influences
4. Treatment alternatives Assess for medically appropriate outpatient treatment alternatives. (See table 1)
5. Aftercare Encourage and facilitate after care

Although discharge AMA accounts for only a small percentage of hospital discharges, its medical, emotional, and resource utilization consequences for patients as well as for physicians and hospitals is disproportionate. The clinical impacts of discharge AMA should be further investigated and specific strategies and interventions to mitigate its health effects should be validated.

BACKGROUND

Discharges against medical advice (AMA) account for approximately 1% of discharges for general medical patients and up to 10% and 30% for patients afflicted with HIV disease and psychiatric disorders, respectively.17 Patients discharged AMA have higher rates of readmission, longer subsequent hospital stays, and worse health outcomes.3, 5, 811 Not unexpectedly, discharges AMA are associated with overall health costs of up to 50% greater than usual discharges.2

Patients who leave AMA are more likely to have poorer social supports, to abuse alcohol, heroin, and other substances, and often have weighty psychosocial or financial concerns.1218 They are also less likely to have an established relationship with a primary care physician.19 Although studies have found that rates of discharge AMA are higher among some ethnic minorities, one recent study suggests that other patient variables, such as level of income and type of insurance, may be more closely related.7, 20 Unfortunately, many patients who leave AMA have dual sources of distress: compelling personal concerns that fuel one's wish to leave and the illness that initially caused the patient to seek care.

Physicians are often distressed by the clinical and ethical challenges of discharges AMA. How should physicians manage their conflicted obligations to respect patients' choices and to prevent harms from befalling their patients? What are physicians' obligations to their patients who leave accepting only partial or inadequate treatment plans or no treatment at all? When should physicians call into question the decision‐making capacity of patients' who make seemingly unwise or clearly dangerous judgments to leave the hospital? In addition to these sorts of concerns, physicians who discharge patients AMA enjoy no definitive legal protection from the consequences of their patients' choices.2123 In fact, good clinical judgement and careful documentation provide the best liability protection.24

Clearly, discharges AMA are problematic for patients, stressful for physicians, and resource intensive for health facilities. Therefore, efforts to understand, better manage, and ultimately decrease discharges AMA will benefit all parties. Whereas the literature on discharge AMA tends to focus on psychiatric and substance abuse patients, this review examines the professional and ethical implications of discharge AMA more generally.

Does Discharge AMA Differ from Treatment Nonadherence Elsewhere in Health Care?

Patients' nonadherence to recommended treatment is often influenced by treatment side effects, costs, inconvenience, psychosocial burden, and the quality of the patient‐physician relationship. Not surprisingly, these same factors are often associated with discharge AMA.2528 In fact, nonadherence in discharge AMA and nonadherence elsewhere are fundamentally similar. Differences, where they exist, are often in the degree or imminency of health risk and in the ability of physicians to monitor the patient.

Discharges AMA tend to involve health risks that are more acute and more severe compared to general nonadherence. To illustrate, Patient A is diagnosed with the metabolic syndrome during an office visit. His physician recommends medical therapy, and the patient declines, thereby incurring a high risk of a cardiovascular event within the next 10 years. Patient B presents to the hospital with an acute coronary syndrome. He declines to remain in the hospital for an evaluation of ischemic burden despite a high risk of a myocardial infarction in the next few days. Patient A is motivated by the cost of medication and chooses to purchase his wife's medications, foregoing his own. Patient B is motivated by distress over leaving his frail wife alone at home and concerns of medical bills that he can not afford to pay. The patient in each of these cases is motivated by social and financial concerns. The consequence of each patient's choice is a higher risk of a cardiovascular event. A major difference is the temporal relationship between the decision to not accept treatment and the ensuing adverse event.

Of course, high‐risk situations are not exclusive to the inpatient setting. For example, a patient presents to a physician's office after having experienced substernal chest pain during the previous evening. The physician recommends hospitalization but the patient declines. Conversely, a hospitalized patient may pursue discharge AMA because the patient disagrees with the physician's stipulations for safe discharge plan including assistance at home. Yet, these concerns about custodial needs, if identified by the physician in an office setting, may not necessarily compel the physician to hospitalize the patient.

Another difference between discharge AMA and general nonadherence is that adherence is more readily and closely measured in the inpatient setting. Hospital‐based occurrences of nonadherence are immediately identified and addressed. To contrast, in the outpatient setting, adherence is far poorer with a 20% nonadherence rate considered to be good compliance.2931 Regardless of the setting for nonadherence, the variance between recommended and accepted treatments often stems from the fact that patients tend to make decisions based on values and broader interests whereas physicians tend to emphasize more circumscribed medical goals.32, 33

Informed and Voluntary Refusal of Treatment

A patient's intention to leave AMA may trigger physicians and other hospital staff to question the patient's decision‐making capacity.34 One's capacity to make decisions is specific to the decision at hand. For example, a patient with early dementia and an infected arterial insufficiency ulcer may not be able to fully appreciate all the consequences of premature discharge on her health, but may be able to reliably indicate her preferred health agent.

Clinicians commonly make implicit capacity determinations, and do so each time a patient's general consent for treatment is accepted. These assessments tend to be made more explicitly when the patient's decision appears to be grossly contrary to his or her welfare. Capacity to make decisions includes the ability to understand information germane to the decision, to deliberate, and to appreciate the consequences of choices.35 As with consent to treatment, a physician who accepts a patient's refusal for treatment has determined that the patient has adequate decision‐making capacity. However, physicians do not regularly document assessments of capacity in discharge AMA.3638

Writers on the subject suggest that patients who refuse low‐risk but high‐benefit treatments should be held to a higher standard of capacity.22 This notion could expose patients to incapacity determinations based on a physician's subjective assessment of net benefit or net harm. Rather, I contend that the standard itself should not vary. It should always require that the patient's level of cognitive function, insight, and deliberative abilities be appropriate to the decision at hand and sufficient for the patient to render an autonomous decision. The relative benefit of a treatment, in and of itself, is not relevant to the level of capacity required. Rather, net benefit is relevant to physicians' obligations to more carefully verify patients' understanding of the pertinent information and their perceptions of the consequences of their choices when declining high benefit/low harm treatments.

A capacitated patient's decision to leave AMA, however well informed, may nevertheless not be entirely voluntary. Voluntary decisions are those that are made with substantially free choice.39 Various controlling influences may impact a patient's decision to leave AMA, including social or emotional challenges such as a desperate concern about losing employment.9, 1315 Health professionals may view a patient's action under some controlling influences as meritorious, for example, leaving AMA to fulfill one's obligation to care for a demented spouse, whereas professionals may view acting on other controlling influences as contemptible, such as a leaving to satisfy a drug addiction. Physicians should view controlling influences, regardless of its moral valence, as affecting the voluntariness of a patient's decision. Moreover, physicians are positioned, through either support or coercion, to influence the degree to which a patient's decision about treatment is voluntary. To illustrate, physicians who support their substance abuse patients by providing adequate treatment of their withdrawal symptoms see lower rates of discharge AMA among these addicted patients.3, 5, 7 Regarding coercion, physicians of hospitalized patients may state their refusal to prescribe a beneficial but inferior outpatient treatment in order to compel their patients to accept standard inpatient treatment.

Physicians' Obligations in Discharge AMA

Broadly stated, physicians' obligations are to promote their patients' welfare and to respect their autonomy which is understood as serving the patient's self‐defined best interests including maintaining dignity.40 When discharging a patient AMA, physicians are sometimes limited in the ways in which they can fulfill these obligations. Physicians should attempt to promote informed decision‐making by discussing the likely harms of premature discharge, the likely harms and benefits of inpatient treatment, and alternatives to inpatient treatment, including medically inferior options where these exist.

Within this obligation to promote patients' welfare, physicians should render only objective and conservative assessments of harm and benefit. These assessments may directly reflect well‐established medical evidence (eg, use of statins in acute coronary syndromes), but may also be partly or even wholly dependent on clinical judgment (eg, interpreting and applying criteria for inpatient versus outpatient treatment of pneumonia). The process though which these clinical judgments are made is critical because it forms the basis of the medical advice that defines whether a patient's discharge is routine or AMA. Physicians, in addition to their obligation to objectively assess options for treatment, should be mindful of their fiduciary responsibilities in their position to influence patients' choices by the content, emphasis, and manner with which they communicate treatment options.4144

In addition to supporting patient autonomy through information and education, physicians can promote authenticity of choice by identifying patients' compelling reasons to leave AMA. Does the patient have a demented spouse alone at home? Does the patient have a cultural or religious requirement that they perceive cannot be met while hospitalized? Is the patient concerned about loss of employment? Does the patient have an important family obligation (eg, wedding, funeral) to fulfill? Ways in which these concerns can be mitigated should be explored, often through a multidisciplinary approach that may include social work and pastoral care.45

What are physicians' obligations to patients who are willing to accept only partial or inadequate treatment plans upon discharge AMA? Should physicians be complicit in treatments that are substandard, such as the writing of a prescription for an oral antibiotic for a patient whose clinical condition meets criteria for inpatient treatment of pneumonia? Should physicians be complicit in treatments that are somewhat effective, but clearly inadequate and potentially dangerous? An example of this is the providing of a prescription for an oral anti‐arrhythmic medication for a patient diagnosed in the emergency department (ED) with syncope from a tachyarrhythmia.

In considering these scenarios, physicians may need to focus primarily on their ethical obligations to not cause harms, because discharge AMA limits physicians' ability to actively promote patients' health.46 To illustrate, Patient C, a frequent abuser of alcohol, presents to the ED and is diagnosed with a pulmonary embolus. She wants only analgesic medication for her chest pain and states that she plans no outpatient follow up. What options should the ED physician consider? The physician should not discharge the patient with a prescription for warfarin, the use of which requires close and careful monitoring especially in the setting of alcohol consumption, because this treatment, along with this patient's social practices and disinclination for follow up, introduces risks similar in seriousness to her medical condition.47 Should the ED physician give her an injection of low molecular weight heparin before the patient exits? Although a single injection of heparin is not likely to meaningfully affect her disease course, there is little direct harm in providing it. However, one must also consider possible indirect harms. For example, the offer of heparin may harm Patient C if she construes it as a bona fide treatment alternative, thereby influencing her decision to leave AMA. In another scenario, Patient D presents to the ED with an upper gastrointestinal hemorrhage and orthostatic hypotension that responds quickly to intravenous fluids. The patient unconditionally refuses to undergo an endoscopy or to accept admission into the hospital. Should the ED physician administer a dose of intravenous proton pump inhibitor (PPI), and write a prescription for high‐dose oral PPI? Because the harms of PPIs are low and it may prevent rebleeding, providing such care does not violate the obligation to not cause disproportionate harms, and attends to the obligation to promote the patient's health. To summarize, physicians' obligations to provide treatment upon discharge AMA is determined by a complex evaluation of the likelihood and magnitude of each the harms and benefits associated with the outpatient treatment and the disease‐associated risks of morbidity and mortality. This assessment is outlined in Table 1.

Obligations to Provide Treatment Upon Discharge AMA
Disease Risk Treatment Efficacy Treatment Risk Ethical Obligation
High High Low Clear obligation to treat
High Low Low Weak obligation to treat
Low High Low Weak obligation to treat
High High High No clear obligation to treat
High Low High No clear obligation to treat
Low High High No clear obligation to treat
Low Low Low No clear obligation to treat
Low Low High Clear obligation not to treat

Do physicians have obligations for facilitating after‐care when discharging a patient AMA? The policy of some hospitals is that there are no such obligations.48 Arguably, providing resources for after‐care to these patients may benefit these patients with no additional medical risk, with the caveat that offering after‐care does not influence the patient's decision to leave AMA. Therefore, physicians are ethically obligated to offer this care. In fact, this is the practice of many physicians and consistent with a number of authorities in medicine and ethics.24, 36, 49, 50 There is little evidence to support the concern that providing patients with after‐care resources exposes physicians or institutions to greater legal liability. In fact the opposite may be true.51 For patients who habitually leave AMA and who repeatedly have not sought recommended after‐care, it should not be ethically obligatory for hospital staff to expend efforts to secure after‐care.

A corollary to physicians' obligations is the obligations of patients as users of health resources. There is an enormous literature on patients' rights, yet a relative dearth of discourse, let alone consensus, on patients' duties and responsibilities.52, 53 At a minimum, patients are obligated to honor commitments and to disclose relevant information in the interest of their personal health.54 Do patients discharged AMA have moral obligations to their fellow patients or to society in terms of responsible use of often costly and sometimes limited health resources? If so, what do these obligations require and which patients should be so obligated? These are important questions to consider, yet are beyond the scope of this discussion.

Summary and Conclusions

Clinicians caring for patients who seek discharge AMA are often faced with emotionally charged and time‐pressured treatment situations. These clinicians must weigh multiple considerations for the benefit of their patients, and maintain professional standards of clinical care. Clinicians presented with these situations should (1) evaluate patients' decision‐making capacity, (2) assess the degree to which their choices are influenced by controlling external influences and mitigate these factors where possible, and (3) encourage and facilitate after‐care (Table 2).

Clinicians' Discharge AMA Response List
1. Capacity Assess patient's factual understanding, reasoning, and insight into consequences of decision
2. Voluntariness Assess for controlling influences; physical, social, emotional, psychiatric, cultural
3. Mitigation Multidisciplinary efforts to mitigate controlling influences
4. Treatment alternatives Assess for medically appropriate outpatient treatment alternatives. (See table 1)
5. Aftercare Encourage and facilitate after care

Although discharge AMA accounts for only a small percentage of hospital discharges, its medical, emotional, and resource utilization consequences for patients as well as for physicians and hospitals is disproportionate. The clinical impacts of discharge AMA should be further investigated and specific strategies and interventions to mitigate its health effects should be validated.

References
  1. Ibrahim SA,Kwoh CK,Krishnan E.Factors associated with patients who leave acute‐care hospitals against medical advice.Am J Public Health.2007;97(12):22042208.
  2. Aliyu ZY.Discharge against medical advice: sociodemographic, clinical and financial perspectives.Int J Clin Pract.2002;56(5):325327.
  3. Anis AH,Sun H,Guh DP,Palepu A,Schechter MT,O'Shaughnessy MV.Leaving hospital against medical advice among HIV‐positive patients.CMAJ.2002;167(6):633637.
  4. O'Hara D,Hart W,McDonald I.Leaving hospital against medical advice.J Qual Clin Pract.1996;16(3):157164.
  5. Pages KP,Russo JE,Wingerson DK,Ries RK,Roy‐Byrne PP,Cowley DS.Predictors and outcome of discharge against medical advice from the psychiatric units of a general hospital.Psychiatr Serv.1998;49(9):11871192.
  6. Smith DB,Telles JL.Discharges against medical advice at regional acute care hospitals.Am J Public Health.1991;81(2):212215.
  7. Franks P,Meldrum S,Fiscella K.Discharges against medical advice: are race/ethnicity predictors?J Gen Intern Med.2006;21(9):955960.
  8. Hwang SW,Li J,Gupta R,Chien V,Martin RE.What happens to patients who leave hospital against medical advice?CMAJ.2003;168(4):417420.
  9. Baptist AP,Warrier I,Arora R,Ager J,Massanari RM.Hospitalized patients with asthma who leave against medical advice: characteristics, reasons, and outcomes.J Allergy Clin Immunol.2007;19(4):924929.
  10. Fiscella K,Meldrum S,Franks P.Post partum discharge against medical advice: who leaves and does it matter?Matern Child Health J.2007;11(5):431436.
  11. Ding R,Jung JJ,Kirsch TD,Levy F,McCarthy ML.Uncompleted emergency department care: patients who leave against medical advice.Acad Emerg Med.2007;14(10):870876.
  12. Chan AC,Palepu A,Guh DP, et al.HIV‐positive injection drug users who leave the hospital against medical advice: the mitigating role of methadone and social support.J Acquir Immune Defic Syndr.2004;35(1):5659.
  13. Cook CA,Booth BM,Blow FC,McAleenan KA,Bunn JY.Risk fctors for AMA discharge from VA inpatient alcoholism treatment programs.J Subst Abuse Treat.1994;11(3):239245.
  14. Endicott P,Watson B.Interventions to improve the AMA‐discharge rate for opiate‐addicted patients.J Psychosoc Nurs Ment Health Serv.1994;32(8):3640.
  15. Green P,Watts D,Poole S,Dhopesh V.Why patients sign out against medical advice (AMA): factors motivating patients to sign out AMA.Am J Drug Alcohol Abuse.2004;30(2):489493.
  16. Jankowski CB,Drum DE.Diagnostic correlates of discharge against medical advice.Arch Gen Psychiatry.1977;34(2):153155.
  17. Jeremiah J,O'Sullivan P,Stein MD.Who leaves against medical advice?J Gen Intern Med.1995;10(7):403405.
  18. Fiscella K,Meldrum S,Barnett S.Hospital discharge against medical advice after myocardial infarction: deaths and readmissions.Am J Med.2007;120(12):104153.
  19. Weingart SN,Davis RB,Phillips RS.Patients discharged against medical advice from a general medicine service.J Gen Intern Med.1998;13(8):568571.
  20. Moy E,Bartman BA.Race and hospital discharge against medical advice.J Natl Med Assoc.1996;88(10):658660.
  21. Devitt PJ,Devitt AC,Dewan M.An examination of whether discharging patients against medical advice protects physicians from malpractice charges.Psychiatr Serv.2000;51(7):899902.
  22. Gerbasi JB,Simon RI.Patients' rights and psychiatrists' duties: discharging patients against medical advice.Harv Rev Psychiatry.2003;11(6):333343.
  23. Devitt PJ,Devitt AC,Dewan M.Does identifying a discharge as “against medical advice” confer legal protection?J Fam Pract.2000;49(3):224227.
  24. American College of Emergency Physicians Scientific Meeting. http://meetings.acep.org/NR/rdonlyres/3389C314–2395‐4FCE‐BD9A‐FAABFFC0DFB6/0/WE184.pdf. Accessed November 30,2007.
  25. Shemesh E,Yehuda R,Milo O, et al.Posttraumatic stress, nonadherence, and adverse outcome in survivors of a myocardial infarction.Psychosom Med.2004;66(4):521526.
  26. Piette JD,Heisler M,Krein S,Kerr EA.The role of patient‐physician trust in moderating medication nonadherence due to cost pressures.Arch Intern Med.2005;165(15):17491755.
  27. George J,Kong DC,Thoman R,Stewart K.Factors associated with medication nonadherence in patients with COPD.Chest.2005;128(5):31983204.
  28. Elbogen EB,Swanson JW,Swartz MS,Van Dorn R.Medication nonadherence and substance abuse in psychotic disorders: impact of depressive symptoms and social stability.J Nerv Ment Dis.2005;193(10):673679.
  29. Monane M,Bohn RL,Gurwitz JH,Glynn RJ,Levin R,Avorn J.Compliance with antihypertensive therapy among elderly medicaid enrollees: the roles of age, gender, and race.Am J Public Health.1996;86(12):18051808.
  30. Wang PS,Benner JS,Glynn RJ,Winkelmayer WC,Mogun H,Avorn J.How well do patients report noncompliance with antihypertensive medications?: a comparison of self‐report versus filled prescriptions.Pharmacoepidemiol Drug Saf.2004;13(1):1119.
  31. DiMatteo MR.Variations in patients' adherence to medical recommendations: a quantitative review of 50 years of research.Med Care.2004;42(3):200209.
  32. van Kleffens T,van Leeuwen E.Physicians' evaluations of patients' decisions to refuse oncological treatment.J Med Ethics.2005;31(3):131136.
  33. Donovan JL,Blake DR.Patient non‐compliance: deviance or reasoned decision‐making?Soc Sci Med.1992;34(5):507513.
  34. Ganzini L,Volicer L,Nelson WA,Fox E,Derse AR.Ten myths about decision‐making capacity.J Am Med Dir Assoc.2005;6(3 Suppl):S100S104.
  35. Grisso T,Appelbaum PS,Hill‐Fotouhi C.The MacCAT‐T: a clinical tool to assess patients' capacities to make treatment decisions.Psychiatr Serv.1997;48(11):14151419.
  36. Dubow D,Propp D,Narasimhan K.Emergency department discharges against medical advice.J Emerg Med.1992;10(4):513516.
  37. Seaborn MH,Osmun WE.Discharges against medical advice: a community hospital's experience.Can J Rural Med.2004;9(3):148153.
  38. Henson VL,Vickery DS.Patient self discharge from the emergency department: who is at Risk?Emergency Med J.2005;22(7):499501.
  39. Beauchamp JF,Childress TL.Respect for Autonomy.Principles of Biomedical Ethics.Fifth ed.New York:Oxford University Press;2001. p.57112.
  40. Snyder L,Leffler C.Ethics Manual: fifth edition.Ann Intern Med.2005;142(7):560582.
  41. Mazur DJ,Hickam DH.The effect of physician's explanations on patients' treatment preferences: five‐year survival data.Med Decis Making.1994;14(3):255258.
  42. Mazur DJ,Merz JF.How the manner of presentation of data influences older patients in determining their treatment preferences.J Am Geriatr Soc.1993;41(3):223228.
  43. Mazur DJ,Hickam DH,Mazur MD,Mazur MD.The role of doctor's opinion in shared decision making: what does shared decision making really mean when considering invasive medical procedures?Health Expect.2005;8(2):97102.
  44. Malloy TR,Wigton RS,Meeske J,Tape TG.The influence of treatment descriptions on advance medical directive decisions.J Am Geriatr Soc.1992;40(12):12551260.
  45. Holden P,Vogtsberger KN,Mohl PC,Fuller DS.Patients who leave the hospital against medical advice: the role of the psychiatric consultant.Psychosomatics.1989;30(4):396404.
  46. Beauchamp JF,Childress TL.Nonmaleficence.Principles of Biomedical Ethics.Fifth ed.New York:Oxford University Press;2001:113164.
  47. Stein PD,Henry JW,Relyea B.Untreated patients with pulmonary embolism. Outcome, clinical, and laboratory assessment.Chest.1995;107(4):931935.
  48. Memorial Hospital Pembroke, Pembroke Pines, Florida. Medical Staff Rules and Regulations. http://www.mhs.net/AboutUs/Physician_Bylaws/pdfs/mhp/MHP_Rules_and%20_Regs_2004.pdf. Accessed August 29,2008.
  49. Quill TE,Cassel CK.Nonabandonment: a central obligation for physicians.Ann Intern Med.1995;122(5):368374.
  50. Swota AH.Changing policy to reflect a concern for patients who sign out against medical advice.Am J Bioethic.2007;7(3):3234.
  51. Strinko JM,Howard CA,Schaeffer SL,Laughlin JA,Berry MA,Turner SN.Reducing risk with telephone follow‐up of patients who leave against medical advice of fail to complete an ED visit.J Emerg Nurs.2000;26(3):223232.
  52. English DC.Moral obligations of patients: a clinical view.J Med Philos.2005;30(2):139152.
  53. Draper H,Sorell T.Patients' responsibilities in medical ethics.Bioethics.2002;16(4):335352.
  54. Brody H.Patients' Responsibilities. In:Post SG, ed.Encyclopedia of Bioethics.Third ed.New York:Thompson Gale;2004. p.19901992.
References
  1. Ibrahim SA,Kwoh CK,Krishnan E.Factors associated with patients who leave acute‐care hospitals against medical advice.Am J Public Health.2007;97(12):22042208.
  2. Aliyu ZY.Discharge against medical advice: sociodemographic, clinical and financial perspectives.Int J Clin Pract.2002;56(5):325327.
  3. Anis AH,Sun H,Guh DP,Palepu A,Schechter MT,O'Shaughnessy MV.Leaving hospital against medical advice among HIV‐positive patients.CMAJ.2002;167(6):633637.
  4. O'Hara D,Hart W,McDonald I.Leaving hospital against medical advice.J Qual Clin Pract.1996;16(3):157164.
  5. Pages KP,Russo JE,Wingerson DK,Ries RK,Roy‐Byrne PP,Cowley DS.Predictors and outcome of discharge against medical advice from the psychiatric units of a general hospital.Psychiatr Serv.1998;49(9):11871192.
  6. Smith DB,Telles JL.Discharges against medical advice at regional acute care hospitals.Am J Public Health.1991;81(2):212215.
  7. Franks P,Meldrum S,Fiscella K.Discharges against medical advice: are race/ethnicity predictors?J Gen Intern Med.2006;21(9):955960.
  8. Hwang SW,Li J,Gupta R,Chien V,Martin RE.What happens to patients who leave hospital against medical advice?CMAJ.2003;168(4):417420.
  9. Baptist AP,Warrier I,Arora R,Ager J,Massanari RM.Hospitalized patients with asthma who leave against medical advice: characteristics, reasons, and outcomes.J Allergy Clin Immunol.2007;19(4):924929.
  10. Fiscella K,Meldrum S,Franks P.Post partum discharge against medical advice: who leaves and does it matter?Matern Child Health J.2007;11(5):431436.
  11. Ding R,Jung JJ,Kirsch TD,Levy F,McCarthy ML.Uncompleted emergency department care: patients who leave against medical advice.Acad Emerg Med.2007;14(10):870876.
  12. Chan AC,Palepu A,Guh DP, et al.HIV‐positive injection drug users who leave the hospital against medical advice: the mitigating role of methadone and social support.J Acquir Immune Defic Syndr.2004;35(1):5659.
  13. Cook CA,Booth BM,Blow FC,McAleenan KA,Bunn JY.Risk fctors for AMA discharge from VA inpatient alcoholism treatment programs.J Subst Abuse Treat.1994;11(3):239245.
  14. Endicott P,Watson B.Interventions to improve the AMA‐discharge rate for opiate‐addicted patients.J Psychosoc Nurs Ment Health Serv.1994;32(8):3640.
  15. Green P,Watts D,Poole S,Dhopesh V.Why patients sign out against medical advice (AMA): factors motivating patients to sign out AMA.Am J Drug Alcohol Abuse.2004;30(2):489493.
  16. Jankowski CB,Drum DE.Diagnostic correlates of discharge against medical advice.Arch Gen Psychiatry.1977;34(2):153155.
  17. Jeremiah J,O'Sullivan P,Stein MD.Who leaves against medical advice?J Gen Intern Med.1995;10(7):403405.
  18. Fiscella K,Meldrum S,Barnett S.Hospital discharge against medical advice after myocardial infarction: deaths and readmissions.Am J Med.2007;120(12):104153.
  19. Weingart SN,Davis RB,Phillips RS.Patients discharged against medical advice from a general medicine service.J Gen Intern Med.1998;13(8):568571.
  20. Moy E,Bartman BA.Race and hospital discharge against medical advice.J Natl Med Assoc.1996;88(10):658660.
  21. Devitt PJ,Devitt AC,Dewan M.An examination of whether discharging patients against medical advice protects physicians from malpractice charges.Psychiatr Serv.2000;51(7):899902.
  22. Gerbasi JB,Simon RI.Patients' rights and psychiatrists' duties: discharging patients against medical advice.Harv Rev Psychiatry.2003;11(6):333343.
  23. Devitt PJ,Devitt AC,Dewan M.Does identifying a discharge as “against medical advice” confer legal protection?J Fam Pract.2000;49(3):224227.
  24. American College of Emergency Physicians Scientific Meeting. http://meetings.acep.org/NR/rdonlyres/3389C314–2395‐4FCE‐BD9A‐FAABFFC0DFB6/0/WE184.pdf. Accessed November 30,2007.
  25. Shemesh E,Yehuda R,Milo O, et al.Posttraumatic stress, nonadherence, and adverse outcome in survivors of a myocardial infarction.Psychosom Med.2004;66(4):521526.
  26. Piette JD,Heisler M,Krein S,Kerr EA.The role of patient‐physician trust in moderating medication nonadherence due to cost pressures.Arch Intern Med.2005;165(15):17491755.
  27. George J,Kong DC,Thoman R,Stewart K.Factors associated with medication nonadherence in patients with COPD.Chest.2005;128(5):31983204.
  28. Elbogen EB,Swanson JW,Swartz MS,Van Dorn R.Medication nonadherence and substance abuse in psychotic disorders: impact of depressive symptoms and social stability.J Nerv Ment Dis.2005;193(10):673679.
  29. Monane M,Bohn RL,Gurwitz JH,Glynn RJ,Levin R,Avorn J.Compliance with antihypertensive therapy among elderly medicaid enrollees: the roles of age, gender, and race.Am J Public Health.1996;86(12):18051808.
  30. Wang PS,Benner JS,Glynn RJ,Winkelmayer WC,Mogun H,Avorn J.How well do patients report noncompliance with antihypertensive medications?: a comparison of self‐report versus filled prescriptions.Pharmacoepidemiol Drug Saf.2004;13(1):1119.
  31. DiMatteo MR.Variations in patients' adherence to medical recommendations: a quantitative review of 50 years of research.Med Care.2004;42(3):200209.
  32. van Kleffens T,van Leeuwen E.Physicians' evaluations of patients' decisions to refuse oncological treatment.J Med Ethics.2005;31(3):131136.
  33. Donovan JL,Blake DR.Patient non‐compliance: deviance or reasoned decision‐making?Soc Sci Med.1992;34(5):507513.
  34. Ganzini L,Volicer L,Nelson WA,Fox E,Derse AR.Ten myths about decision‐making capacity.J Am Med Dir Assoc.2005;6(3 Suppl):S100S104.
  35. Grisso T,Appelbaum PS,Hill‐Fotouhi C.The MacCAT‐T: a clinical tool to assess patients' capacities to make treatment decisions.Psychiatr Serv.1997;48(11):14151419.
  36. Dubow D,Propp D,Narasimhan K.Emergency department discharges against medical advice.J Emerg Med.1992;10(4):513516.
  37. Seaborn MH,Osmun WE.Discharges against medical advice: a community hospital's experience.Can J Rural Med.2004;9(3):148153.
  38. Henson VL,Vickery DS.Patient self discharge from the emergency department: who is at Risk?Emergency Med J.2005;22(7):499501.
  39. Beauchamp JF,Childress TL.Respect for Autonomy.Principles of Biomedical Ethics.Fifth ed.New York:Oxford University Press;2001. p.57112.
  40. Snyder L,Leffler C.Ethics Manual: fifth edition.Ann Intern Med.2005;142(7):560582.
  41. Mazur DJ,Hickam DH.The effect of physician's explanations on patients' treatment preferences: five‐year survival data.Med Decis Making.1994;14(3):255258.
  42. Mazur DJ,Merz JF.How the manner of presentation of data influences older patients in determining their treatment preferences.J Am Geriatr Soc.1993;41(3):223228.
  43. Mazur DJ,Hickam DH,Mazur MD,Mazur MD.The role of doctor's opinion in shared decision making: what does shared decision making really mean when considering invasive medical procedures?Health Expect.2005;8(2):97102.
  44. Malloy TR,Wigton RS,Meeske J,Tape TG.The influence of treatment descriptions on advance medical directive decisions.J Am Geriatr Soc.1992;40(12):12551260.
  45. Holden P,Vogtsberger KN,Mohl PC,Fuller DS.Patients who leave the hospital against medical advice: the role of the psychiatric consultant.Psychosomatics.1989;30(4):396404.
  46. Beauchamp JF,Childress TL.Nonmaleficence.Principles of Biomedical Ethics.Fifth ed.New York:Oxford University Press;2001:113164.
  47. Stein PD,Henry JW,Relyea B.Untreated patients with pulmonary embolism. Outcome, clinical, and laboratory assessment.Chest.1995;107(4):931935.
  48. Memorial Hospital Pembroke, Pembroke Pines, Florida. Medical Staff Rules and Regulations. http://www.mhs.net/AboutUs/Physician_Bylaws/pdfs/mhp/MHP_Rules_and%20_Regs_2004.pdf. Accessed August 29,2008.
  49. Quill TE,Cassel CK.Nonabandonment: a central obligation for physicians.Ann Intern Med.1995;122(5):368374.
  50. Swota AH.Changing policy to reflect a concern for patients who sign out against medical advice.Am J Bioethic.2007;7(3):3234.
  51. Strinko JM,Howard CA,Schaeffer SL,Laughlin JA,Berry MA,Turner SN.Reducing risk with telephone follow‐up of patients who leave against medical advice of fail to complete an ED visit.J Emerg Nurs.2000;26(3):223232.
  52. English DC.Moral obligations of patients: a clinical view.J Med Philos.2005;30(2):139152.
  53. Draper H,Sorell T.Patients' responsibilities in medical ethics.Bioethics.2002;16(4):335352.
  54. Brody H.Patients' Responsibilities. In:Post SG, ed.Encyclopedia of Bioethics.Third ed.New York:Thompson Gale;2004. p.19901992.
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Page Number
403-408
Page Number
403-408
Article Type
Display Headline
Discharge against medical advice: Ethical considerations and professional obligations
Display Headline
Discharge against medical advice: Ethical considerations and professional obligations
Legacy Keywords
ethics, consent, compliance, discharge
Legacy Keywords
ethics, consent, compliance, discharge
Sections
Article Source
Copyright © 2008 Society of Hospital Medicine
Disallow All Ads
Correspondence Location
222 Station Plaza North, Suite 518, Mineola, NY 11501
Content Gating
Gated (full article locked unless allowed per User)
Gating Strategy
First Peek Free
Article PDF Media

ITP and Hyperthyroidism

Article Type
Changed
Mon, 01/02/2017 - 19:34
Display Headline
Idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura (ITP) and hyperthyroidism: An unusual but critical association for clinicians

The connection between idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura (ITP) and Grave's disease is not well known in the Western hemisphere. The immunologic relationship between these 2 conditions is well reported15 but poorly defined in the literature. New‐onset hyperthyroidism in the setting of preexisting ITP can be overlooked and, if untreated, lead to worsening of the ITP, rendering it refractory to standard therapy. Early recognition and treatment of the hyperthyroid state with antithyroid medications can lead to significant improvement in the platelet count.1, 8 We report this rare but critical clinical relationship.

CASE REPORT

A 35‐year‐old Asian woman with a known history of stable ITP for 12 years (baseline platelet count of 40,000/mL) presented to her outpatient provider with a diffuse petechial rash, easy bruisability, and heavy menorrhagia for 2 weeks. Her new platelet count was 7000/mL. She was immediately started on prednisone at a dose of 1 mg/kg without any improvement in her platelet count. At the end of 4 weeks on prednisone, she developed fever, intractable nausea and vomiting, severe headache, hypotension, and tachycardia. She was subsequently hospitalized with the presumptive diagnosis of meningitis and sepsis syndrome. Her clinical syndrome was consistent with systemic inflammatory response syndrome. She was treated aggressively with intravenous fluids and a broad‐spectrum empirical antimicrobial regimen consisting of ceftriaxone, vancomycin, and acyclovir. Lumbar puncture was deferred because of her low platelet count. The sepsis workup, which included viral, fungal, and bacterial blood cultures, remained negative. Her peripheral smear did not show evidence of microangiopathic hemolytic anemia, therefore ruling out thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura and disseminated intravascular coagulation. HIV and tuberculosis were also ruled out. After the initial sepsis workup turned out negative, she was started on solumedrol 125 mg IV every 6 hours. Over the next 2 weeks, she received an average of 4‐6 units of platelets per day and multiple blood transfusions to maintain her hemoglobin and platelet counts. The latter remained in the 1000‐5000 platelets/mL range throughout her hospitalization without any significant improvement. Her clinical course was further complicated by multiple small intracranial hemorrhages without major focal neurological deficits. A bone marrow biopsy was eventually done. It showed early dysplastic cells but no definite features of myelodysplasia and few large megakaryocytes. She received 1 dose of vincristine without response in the bone marrow after 2 weeks, and consideration was given to treatment with rituximab for refractory ITP. At that point, she informed her hematologist that 10 years ago, she had been treated for hyperthyroidism with antithyroid medications for 6 months, without further follow‐up. A thyroid panel was then ordered, and she was found to be hyperthyroid, with thyroid‐stimulating hormone (TSH) < 0.01 mU/mL and free T4 of 3.1 ng/dL. She was subsequently started on propylthiouracil at 300 mg per day. Her platelet count dramatically improved and went up to the 50,000/mm3 range without further intervention over the next few months. After her discharge, an outpatient thyroid scan showed diffuse, homogeneous uptake of iodine, thereby confirming the diagnosis of Grave's disease. Retrospectively, her initial clinical syndrome of fever, hypotension, and tachycardia may have been the result of thyrotoxicosis or worsened by it.

DISCUSSION

The association between ITP and Grave's disease is poorly understood. Many hypotheses from observational data have been given in the literature. The leading theory to explain the coexistence of these 2 disorders is the presence of a common autoimmune pathway with production of 2 kinds of antibodies against platelets and TSH receptors. Indeed, autoimmune disorders tend to occur concurrently in individuals or families. Bizzaro et al. reported the coexistence of ITP and Grave's in 4 members of the same family.6 Hymes et al. found elevated levels of platelet‐bound IgG in 44% of 25 study patients with Grave's thyrotoxicosis.7 Most of these patients had easy bruising and/or bleeding, and 12% were thrombocytopenic. Panzer et al. reported the presence of antiplatelet IgG in patients with Grave's as well as improved platelet counts and increased mean platelet volume after successful antithyroid therapy.8

In addition to the coexistence of thyroid‐stimulatingimmunoglobulins (TSIs) and antiplatelet antibodies as a potential mechanism for Grave's‐associated thrombocytopenia, some have postulated that in Grave's patients, TSIs and other thyroid antibodies might actually bind to the platelets themselves. The postulated site for binding would be a truncated actin‐binding protein on the platelets that would link the high‐affinity Fc receptor of immunoglobulin G to the platelets' cytoskeleton, thereby accelerating their destruction.9

Another plausible mechanism is activation of the reticuloendothelial system by thyroid hormones, with increased clearance of platelets by the spleen in thyrotoxic states. This may explain the restoration of the platelet count when euthyroidism is reached.

Finally, thyrotoxicosis seems to alter platelet aggregation, partially by inhibition of myosin light‐chain kinase, and that also improves with restoration of euthyroidism.10

The coexistence of severe hyperthyroidism and thrombocytopenia can mimic severe sepsis in critically ill patients, and the hyperthyroid state in itself can worsen the thrombocytopenia of ITP. We suspect this patient's severe sepsis may actually have been an unrecognized severe thyrotoxicosis, with bone marrow dysfunction secondary to the hyperthyroidism, which might partially explain her lack of response to standard therapy.

CONCLUSIONS

This case underscores the importance of screening for and treating hyperthyroidism in patients with ITP, especially those resistant to steroid therapy, because the literature seems to indicate that treatment of the hyperthyroid state improves platelet count. This might help to prevent devastating clinical complications. Further research is necessary to define this empirical finding.

References
  1. Sugimoto K,Sasaki M,Isobe Y,Tamayose K,Hieda M,Oshimi K.Improvement of idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura by antithyroid therapy.Eur J Haematol.74:7374.
  2. Hofbauer LC,Spitzweg C,Schmauss S,Heufelder AE.Graves disease associated with autoimmune thrombocytopenic purpura.Arch Intern Med.1997;157:10331036.
  3. Liechty RD.The thyrotoxicosis/thrombocytopenia connection.Surgery.1983;94:966968.
  4. Valenta LJ,Treadwell T,Berry R,Elias AN.Idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura and Graves disease.Am J Hematol.1982;12:6972.
  5. Aggarwal A,Doolittle G.Autoimmune thrombocytopenic purpura associated with hyperthyroidism in a single individual.South Med J.1997;90:933936.
  6. Bizzaro N.Familial association of autoimmune thrombocytopenia and hyperthyroidism.Am J Hematol.1992;39:294298.
  7. Hymes K,Blum M,Lackner H, et al.Easy bruising, thrombocytopenia, and elevated platelet immunoglobulin G in Graves' disease and Hashimoto's thyroiditis.Ann Intern Med.1981;94:2730.
  8. Panzer S,Haubenstock A,Minar E.Platelets in hyperthyroidism: studies on platelet counts, mean platelet volume.111‐indium‐labeled platelet kinetics, and platelet associated immunoglobulins G and M.J Clin Endocrinol Metab.1990;70:491496.
  9. Hofbauer LC,Heufelder AE.Coagulation disorders in thyroid diseases.Eur J Endocrinol.1997;136:1.
  10. Masunaga R,Nagasaka A,Nakai A.Alteration of platelet aggregation in patients with thyroid disorders.Metabolism.1997;46:1128.
Article PDF
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Page Number
431-433
Legacy Keywords
thrombocytopenia, autoimmune, ITP, hyperthyroidism, Grave's
Sections
Article PDF
Article PDF

The connection between idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura (ITP) and Grave's disease is not well known in the Western hemisphere. The immunologic relationship between these 2 conditions is well reported15 but poorly defined in the literature. New‐onset hyperthyroidism in the setting of preexisting ITP can be overlooked and, if untreated, lead to worsening of the ITP, rendering it refractory to standard therapy. Early recognition and treatment of the hyperthyroid state with antithyroid medications can lead to significant improvement in the platelet count.1, 8 We report this rare but critical clinical relationship.

CASE REPORT

A 35‐year‐old Asian woman with a known history of stable ITP for 12 years (baseline platelet count of 40,000/mL) presented to her outpatient provider with a diffuse petechial rash, easy bruisability, and heavy menorrhagia for 2 weeks. Her new platelet count was 7000/mL. She was immediately started on prednisone at a dose of 1 mg/kg without any improvement in her platelet count. At the end of 4 weeks on prednisone, she developed fever, intractable nausea and vomiting, severe headache, hypotension, and tachycardia. She was subsequently hospitalized with the presumptive diagnosis of meningitis and sepsis syndrome. Her clinical syndrome was consistent with systemic inflammatory response syndrome. She was treated aggressively with intravenous fluids and a broad‐spectrum empirical antimicrobial regimen consisting of ceftriaxone, vancomycin, and acyclovir. Lumbar puncture was deferred because of her low platelet count. The sepsis workup, which included viral, fungal, and bacterial blood cultures, remained negative. Her peripheral smear did not show evidence of microangiopathic hemolytic anemia, therefore ruling out thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura and disseminated intravascular coagulation. HIV and tuberculosis were also ruled out. After the initial sepsis workup turned out negative, she was started on solumedrol 125 mg IV every 6 hours. Over the next 2 weeks, she received an average of 4‐6 units of platelets per day and multiple blood transfusions to maintain her hemoglobin and platelet counts. The latter remained in the 1000‐5000 platelets/mL range throughout her hospitalization without any significant improvement. Her clinical course was further complicated by multiple small intracranial hemorrhages without major focal neurological deficits. A bone marrow biopsy was eventually done. It showed early dysplastic cells but no definite features of myelodysplasia and few large megakaryocytes. She received 1 dose of vincristine without response in the bone marrow after 2 weeks, and consideration was given to treatment with rituximab for refractory ITP. At that point, she informed her hematologist that 10 years ago, she had been treated for hyperthyroidism with antithyroid medications for 6 months, without further follow‐up. A thyroid panel was then ordered, and she was found to be hyperthyroid, with thyroid‐stimulating hormone (TSH) < 0.01 mU/mL and free T4 of 3.1 ng/dL. She was subsequently started on propylthiouracil at 300 mg per day. Her platelet count dramatically improved and went up to the 50,000/mm3 range without further intervention over the next few months. After her discharge, an outpatient thyroid scan showed diffuse, homogeneous uptake of iodine, thereby confirming the diagnosis of Grave's disease. Retrospectively, her initial clinical syndrome of fever, hypotension, and tachycardia may have been the result of thyrotoxicosis or worsened by it.

DISCUSSION

The association between ITP and Grave's disease is poorly understood. Many hypotheses from observational data have been given in the literature. The leading theory to explain the coexistence of these 2 disorders is the presence of a common autoimmune pathway with production of 2 kinds of antibodies against platelets and TSH receptors. Indeed, autoimmune disorders tend to occur concurrently in individuals or families. Bizzaro et al. reported the coexistence of ITP and Grave's in 4 members of the same family.6 Hymes et al. found elevated levels of platelet‐bound IgG in 44% of 25 study patients with Grave's thyrotoxicosis.7 Most of these patients had easy bruising and/or bleeding, and 12% were thrombocytopenic. Panzer et al. reported the presence of antiplatelet IgG in patients with Grave's as well as improved platelet counts and increased mean platelet volume after successful antithyroid therapy.8

In addition to the coexistence of thyroid‐stimulatingimmunoglobulins (TSIs) and antiplatelet antibodies as a potential mechanism for Grave's‐associated thrombocytopenia, some have postulated that in Grave's patients, TSIs and other thyroid antibodies might actually bind to the platelets themselves. The postulated site for binding would be a truncated actin‐binding protein on the platelets that would link the high‐affinity Fc receptor of immunoglobulin G to the platelets' cytoskeleton, thereby accelerating their destruction.9

Another plausible mechanism is activation of the reticuloendothelial system by thyroid hormones, with increased clearance of platelets by the spleen in thyrotoxic states. This may explain the restoration of the platelet count when euthyroidism is reached.

Finally, thyrotoxicosis seems to alter platelet aggregation, partially by inhibition of myosin light‐chain kinase, and that also improves with restoration of euthyroidism.10

The coexistence of severe hyperthyroidism and thrombocytopenia can mimic severe sepsis in critically ill patients, and the hyperthyroid state in itself can worsen the thrombocytopenia of ITP. We suspect this patient's severe sepsis may actually have been an unrecognized severe thyrotoxicosis, with bone marrow dysfunction secondary to the hyperthyroidism, which might partially explain her lack of response to standard therapy.

CONCLUSIONS

This case underscores the importance of screening for and treating hyperthyroidism in patients with ITP, especially those resistant to steroid therapy, because the literature seems to indicate that treatment of the hyperthyroid state improves platelet count. This might help to prevent devastating clinical complications. Further research is necessary to define this empirical finding.

The connection between idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura (ITP) and Grave's disease is not well known in the Western hemisphere. The immunologic relationship between these 2 conditions is well reported15 but poorly defined in the literature. New‐onset hyperthyroidism in the setting of preexisting ITP can be overlooked and, if untreated, lead to worsening of the ITP, rendering it refractory to standard therapy. Early recognition and treatment of the hyperthyroid state with antithyroid medications can lead to significant improvement in the platelet count.1, 8 We report this rare but critical clinical relationship.

CASE REPORT

A 35‐year‐old Asian woman with a known history of stable ITP for 12 years (baseline platelet count of 40,000/mL) presented to her outpatient provider with a diffuse petechial rash, easy bruisability, and heavy menorrhagia for 2 weeks. Her new platelet count was 7000/mL. She was immediately started on prednisone at a dose of 1 mg/kg without any improvement in her platelet count. At the end of 4 weeks on prednisone, she developed fever, intractable nausea and vomiting, severe headache, hypotension, and tachycardia. She was subsequently hospitalized with the presumptive diagnosis of meningitis and sepsis syndrome. Her clinical syndrome was consistent with systemic inflammatory response syndrome. She was treated aggressively with intravenous fluids and a broad‐spectrum empirical antimicrobial regimen consisting of ceftriaxone, vancomycin, and acyclovir. Lumbar puncture was deferred because of her low platelet count. The sepsis workup, which included viral, fungal, and bacterial blood cultures, remained negative. Her peripheral smear did not show evidence of microangiopathic hemolytic anemia, therefore ruling out thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura and disseminated intravascular coagulation. HIV and tuberculosis were also ruled out. After the initial sepsis workup turned out negative, she was started on solumedrol 125 mg IV every 6 hours. Over the next 2 weeks, she received an average of 4‐6 units of platelets per day and multiple blood transfusions to maintain her hemoglobin and platelet counts. The latter remained in the 1000‐5000 platelets/mL range throughout her hospitalization without any significant improvement. Her clinical course was further complicated by multiple small intracranial hemorrhages without major focal neurological deficits. A bone marrow biopsy was eventually done. It showed early dysplastic cells but no definite features of myelodysplasia and few large megakaryocytes. She received 1 dose of vincristine without response in the bone marrow after 2 weeks, and consideration was given to treatment with rituximab for refractory ITP. At that point, she informed her hematologist that 10 years ago, she had been treated for hyperthyroidism with antithyroid medications for 6 months, without further follow‐up. A thyroid panel was then ordered, and she was found to be hyperthyroid, with thyroid‐stimulating hormone (TSH) < 0.01 mU/mL and free T4 of 3.1 ng/dL. She was subsequently started on propylthiouracil at 300 mg per day. Her platelet count dramatically improved and went up to the 50,000/mm3 range without further intervention over the next few months. After her discharge, an outpatient thyroid scan showed diffuse, homogeneous uptake of iodine, thereby confirming the diagnosis of Grave's disease. Retrospectively, her initial clinical syndrome of fever, hypotension, and tachycardia may have been the result of thyrotoxicosis or worsened by it.

DISCUSSION

The association between ITP and Grave's disease is poorly understood. Many hypotheses from observational data have been given in the literature. The leading theory to explain the coexistence of these 2 disorders is the presence of a common autoimmune pathway with production of 2 kinds of antibodies against platelets and TSH receptors. Indeed, autoimmune disorders tend to occur concurrently in individuals or families. Bizzaro et al. reported the coexistence of ITP and Grave's in 4 members of the same family.6 Hymes et al. found elevated levels of platelet‐bound IgG in 44% of 25 study patients with Grave's thyrotoxicosis.7 Most of these patients had easy bruising and/or bleeding, and 12% were thrombocytopenic. Panzer et al. reported the presence of antiplatelet IgG in patients with Grave's as well as improved platelet counts and increased mean platelet volume after successful antithyroid therapy.8

In addition to the coexistence of thyroid‐stimulatingimmunoglobulins (TSIs) and antiplatelet antibodies as a potential mechanism for Grave's‐associated thrombocytopenia, some have postulated that in Grave's patients, TSIs and other thyroid antibodies might actually bind to the platelets themselves. The postulated site for binding would be a truncated actin‐binding protein on the platelets that would link the high‐affinity Fc receptor of immunoglobulin G to the platelets' cytoskeleton, thereby accelerating their destruction.9

Another plausible mechanism is activation of the reticuloendothelial system by thyroid hormones, with increased clearance of platelets by the spleen in thyrotoxic states. This may explain the restoration of the platelet count when euthyroidism is reached.

Finally, thyrotoxicosis seems to alter platelet aggregation, partially by inhibition of myosin light‐chain kinase, and that also improves with restoration of euthyroidism.10

The coexistence of severe hyperthyroidism and thrombocytopenia can mimic severe sepsis in critically ill patients, and the hyperthyroid state in itself can worsen the thrombocytopenia of ITP. We suspect this patient's severe sepsis may actually have been an unrecognized severe thyrotoxicosis, with bone marrow dysfunction secondary to the hyperthyroidism, which might partially explain her lack of response to standard therapy.

CONCLUSIONS

This case underscores the importance of screening for and treating hyperthyroidism in patients with ITP, especially those resistant to steroid therapy, because the literature seems to indicate that treatment of the hyperthyroid state improves platelet count. This might help to prevent devastating clinical complications. Further research is necessary to define this empirical finding.

References
  1. Sugimoto K,Sasaki M,Isobe Y,Tamayose K,Hieda M,Oshimi K.Improvement of idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura by antithyroid therapy.Eur J Haematol.74:7374.
  2. Hofbauer LC,Spitzweg C,Schmauss S,Heufelder AE.Graves disease associated with autoimmune thrombocytopenic purpura.Arch Intern Med.1997;157:10331036.
  3. Liechty RD.The thyrotoxicosis/thrombocytopenia connection.Surgery.1983;94:966968.
  4. Valenta LJ,Treadwell T,Berry R,Elias AN.Idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura and Graves disease.Am J Hematol.1982;12:6972.
  5. Aggarwal A,Doolittle G.Autoimmune thrombocytopenic purpura associated with hyperthyroidism in a single individual.South Med J.1997;90:933936.
  6. Bizzaro N.Familial association of autoimmune thrombocytopenia and hyperthyroidism.Am J Hematol.1992;39:294298.
  7. Hymes K,Blum M,Lackner H, et al.Easy bruising, thrombocytopenia, and elevated platelet immunoglobulin G in Graves' disease and Hashimoto's thyroiditis.Ann Intern Med.1981;94:2730.
  8. Panzer S,Haubenstock A,Minar E.Platelets in hyperthyroidism: studies on platelet counts, mean platelet volume.111‐indium‐labeled platelet kinetics, and platelet associated immunoglobulins G and M.J Clin Endocrinol Metab.1990;70:491496.
  9. Hofbauer LC,Heufelder AE.Coagulation disorders in thyroid diseases.Eur J Endocrinol.1997;136:1.
  10. Masunaga R,Nagasaka A,Nakai A.Alteration of platelet aggregation in patients with thyroid disorders.Metabolism.1997;46:1128.
References
  1. Sugimoto K,Sasaki M,Isobe Y,Tamayose K,Hieda M,Oshimi K.Improvement of idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura by antithyroid therapy.Eur J Haematol.74:7374.
  2. Hofbauer LC,Spitzweg C,Schmauss S,Heufelder AE.Graves disease associated with autoimmune thrombocytopenic purpura.Arch Intern Med.1997;157:10331036.
  3. Liechty RD.The thyrotoxicosis/thrombocytopenia connection.Surgery.1983;94:966968.
  4. Valenta LJ,Treadwell T,Berry R,Elias AN.Idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura and Graves disease.Am J Hematol.1982;12:6972.
  5. Aggarwal A,Doolittle G.Autoimmune thrombocytopenic purpura associated with hyperthyroidism in a single individual.South Med J.1997;90:933936.
  6. Bizzaro N.Familial association of autoimmune thrombocytopenia and hyperthyroidism.Am J Hematol.1992;39:294298.
  7. Hymes K,Blum M,Lackner H, et al.Easy bruising, thrombocytopenia, and elevated platelet immunoglobulin G in Graves' disease and Hashimoto's thyroiditis.Ann Intern Med.1981;94:2730.
  8. Panzer S,Haubenstock A,Minar E.Platelets in hyperthyroidism: studies on platelet counts, mean platelet volume.111‐indium‐labeled platelet kinetics, and platelet associated immunoglobulins G and M.J Clin Endocrinol Metab.1990;70:491496.
  9. Hofbauer LC,Heufelder AE.Coagulation disorders in thyroid diseases.Eur J Endocrinol.1997;136:1.
  10. Masunaga R,Nagasaka A,Nakai A.Alteration of platelet aggregation in patients with thyroid disorders.Metabolism.1997;46:1128.
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 3(5)
Page Number
431-433
Page Number
431-433
Article Type
Display Headline
Idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura (ITP) and hyperthyroidism: An unusual but critical association for clinicians
Display Headline
Idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura (ITP) and hyperthyroidism: An unusual but critical association for clinicians
Legacy Keywords
thrombocytopenia, autoimmune, ITP, hyperthyroidism, Grave's
Legacy Keywords
thrombocytopenia, autoimmune, ITP, hyperthyroidism, Grave's
Sections
Article Source
Copyright © 2008 Society of Hospital Medicine
Disallow All Ads
Correspondence Location
Division of Endocrinology, Diabetes and Metabolism, University of Oklahoma Health Sciences Center, University of Oklahoma, 920 Stanton L Young Boulevard, WP‐1345, Oklahoma City, OK 731041
Content Gating
Gated (full article locked unless allowed per User)
Gating Strategy
First Peek Free
Article PDF Media